FDT 90 VNPWVH

Manual No.
'19・PAC-DB-333
DATA BOOK
STANDARD INVERTER PACKAGED

AIR-CONDITIONERS
(Split system, air to air heat pump type)
CEILINING CASSETTE-4 WAY TYPE DUCT CONNECTED-HIGH STATIC
FDT90VNPWVH PRESSURE TYPE
100VNPWVH FDU90VNPWVH
100VNPWVH
DUCT CONNECTED-LOW/MIDDLE CEILING SUSPENDED TYPE
STATIC PRESSURE TYPE FDE90VNPWVH
FDUM90VNPWVH 100VNPWVH
100VNPWVH
WALL MOUNTED TYPE

SRK100VNPWZR
'19 '19 • PAC-DB-333
• PAC-DB-311D
CONTENTS
1. SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................................................. 3
(1) Ceiling cassette-4 way type (FDT) ............................................................ 3
(2) Duct connected-High static pressure type (FDU) .....................................
(3) Duct connected-Low / Middle static pressure type (FDUM)...................... 7
(4) Ceiling suspended type (FDE) .................................................................. 9
(5) Wall mounted type (SRK) ......................................................................... 11
2.EXTERIOR DIMENSIONS .................................................................................. 12
(1)　Indoor units .............................................................................................. 12
(2)　Outdoor units .......................................................................................... 17
3. STANDARD
(3)　RemoteINVERTER control (OptionPACKAGED AIR-CONDITIONERS
parts) ................................................................. 18
CONTENTS
3.ELECTRICAL WIRING ....................................................................................... 21
(1)　Indoor units .............................................................................................. 21
3.1 SPECIFICATIONS ....................................................................................... 525
(2)　Outdoor
3.2 EXTERIOR DIMENSIONS ........................................................................... 537
units ........................................................................................... 26
(1) Indoor
4.NOISE LEVEL units....................................................................................................
.............................................................................................. 537 7
　Indoorunits
(2)(1)Outdoor ........................................................................................... 537
units .............................................................................................. 7
　Outdoor units ........................................................................................... 9
(3)(2)Remote control (Option parts) ................................................................. 539
3.3 ELECTRICAL
5.CHARACTERISTICS WIRING OF FAN ................................................................................
........................................................................... 540 30
　Ductunits
(1)(1)Indoor ..............................................................................................
connected-High static pressure type (FDU) .................................... 540 30
　Duct connected-Low
(2)(2)Outdoor units ...........................................................................................
/ Middle static pressure type (FDUM) .................... 540 31
3.4 NOISE LEVEL AND
6.TEMPERATURE .............................................................................................
VELOCITY DISTRIBUTION .......................................... 544 32
(1) 　 Ceiling cassette-4
3.5 CHARACTERISTIC OFway FANtype (FDT) .......................................
....................................................................... 32
545
(2)　Ceiling suspended
3.6 TEMPERATURE AND VELOCITYtype (FDE)DISTRIBUTION
..................................................................
.................................... 54533
3.7 PIPINGSYSTEM
7.PIPING SYSTEM................................................................................................
......................................................................................... 545 34
8.RANGE
3.8 RANGEOF OFUSAGE
USAGE& & LIMITATIONS
LIMITATIONS ......................................................... 547
................................................................ 36
9.SELECTION
3.9 SELECTIONCHART CHART ...........................................................................................
................................................................................... 550 39
9.1 Capacity
3.9.1 Capacity tables tables ...........................................................................................
..................................................................................... 550 39
9.2 Correction
3.9.2 of cooling
Correction of coolingandand
heating capacity
heating in relation
capacity to air flow
in relation rateflow
to air control
rate (Fan speed)
control (Fan...................
speed) ..... 559 46
9.3 Correction
3.9.3 Correctionofofcooling
coolingandand
heating capacity
heating in relation
capacity to one
in relation to way
one length of refrigerant
way length pipingpiping
of refrigerant ............... 46
.... 559
9.4 Height
3.9.4 Heightdifference
differencebetween betweenthe theindoor
indoorunit unitand and outdoor
outdoor unit
unit ................. 46
.......... 559
10.
12.APPLICATION
TECHNICAL INFORMATION DATA ....................................................................................
.............................................................................147 47
(1)　Ceiling
10.1 Installation of indoor
cassette-4 type ....................................................................
way unit (FDT) .............................................................. 147 47
　　Duct
10.2
(2) Electric wiring work installation
connected-High static pressure ......................................................
.....type (F 74
..................... 148
(3)　Duct
10.3 Installation of wired remotestatic
connected-Low/Middle control (Option
pressure typeparts)
(FDUM) ........................... 78
......................... 149
(4)　Ceiling
10.4 Installation of outdoor
suspended unit .......................................................................
type (FDE) ............................................................... 150 90
(5)　Safety precautions
10.5 typein handling
( air-conditioners with flammable refrigerants ..........151
) ............................................................................ 97
(2) Models FDC90VNP, 90VNP1 ................................................................... 567
(3) Model FDC100VNP ................................................................................. 574
3.11 TECHNICAL INFORMATION ...................................................................... 581
Example: FDE 90 VNP1 VH
Series code
Applicable
- power
1- source...See the specification
Product capacity
-1-
Model name
FDU : Duct connected-High static pressure type
FDUM : Duct connected-Low/Middle static pressure type
FDE : Ceiling suspended type
FDC : Outdoor unit
10.2(3)Electric
　Remote wiring
controlwork installation
(Option ................................................................ 88
parts) .................................................................
(1) FDT series ................................................................................................
3.ELECTRICAL 88
WIRING .......................................................................................
(2)　Indoor
(1) FDU seriesunits................................................................................................ 92
..............................................................................................
(3) FDUM, FDE series ................................................................................... 96
(2)　Outdoor units ........................................................................................... 2
(4) FDF series ................................................................................................100
4.NOISE LEVEL .................................................................................................... 3
'19 • PAC-DB-333
10.3 Installation of wired remote control (Option parts) .................................104
(1)　Indoor units .............................................................................................. 3
10.4 Installation of outdoor unit ........................................................................116
(2)　Outdoor units ........................................................................................... 5
11. OPTION PARTS .................................................................................................100
5.CHARACTERISTICS OF FAN ...........................................................................
11.1 Wireless kit ..................................................................................................100
(1)　Duct connected-High static pressure type (FDU) .................................... 6
(1) FDT series (RCN-T-5AW-E2)......................................................................100
(2)　Duct connected-Low / Middle static pressure type (FDUM) .................... 7
(2) FDU, FDUM series (RCN-KIT4-E2) ..........................................................108
6.TEMPERATURE AND VELOCITY DISTRIBUTION .......................................... 8
(3) FDE series (RCN-E-E3) ............................................................................116
(1) 　Ceiling cassette-4 way type (FDT) .......................................
11.2 Motion sensor kit ........................................................................................124
(2)　Ceiling suspended type (FDE) ..................................................................
(1) FDT series (LB-T-5W-E) ........................................................................124
7.PIPING SYSTEM
(2) FDU, FDUM................................................................................................
series (LB-KIT) ......................................................................128 30
8.RANGE
(3) FDEOFseries
USAGE & LIMITATIONS
(LB-E) ................................................................ 32
.....................................................................................134
9.SELECTION manual ...........................................................................................
(4) User’s CHART ...........................................................................................138 35
9.1 Capacity
11.3 Simple wired tables ...........................................................................................
remote control (RCH-E3) .....................................................140 35
9.2 Correction
11.4 Filter kitof (FDUM
cooling andseries)
heating capacity in relation to air flow rate control (Fan speed) ................... 39
...............................................................................146
9.3 Correction
11.5 Interfaceof cooling and heating capacity
kit (SC-BIKN2-E) in relation to one way length of refrigerant piping ............... 39
..........................................................................148
9.4 Height
11.6 Superlinkdifference
E boardbetween the indoor unit and outdoor unit ................. 39
(SC-ADNA-E)................................................................152
12.TECHNICAL INFORMATION .............................................................................154
12. (1) 　Ceiling cassette-4
TECHNICAL INFORMATION way type .............................................................................
(FDT) .............................................................. 187 154
(2) 　　Duct
(1)
(2)Duct connected-High
Ceiling cassette-4 way
connected-High static
typepressure
static (FDT)
pressure type (FDU)(F .........................................189
................................................................187
type ..................... 156
(3)(3)Duct
(2) Ductconnected-Low/Middle
　Duct connected-High
connected-Low/Middle static
staticpressure
static pressure type (FDU)
pressure type
type(FDUM)(FDUM)...........................191
.........................................189
......................... 158
(4)(4)Ceiling
(3) 　Ceiling
Duct suspended
suspended type
connected-Low/Middle type (FDE)
(FDE) ......................................................................193
static pressure type (FDUM) ...........................191
.................................................................... 160
(5)(5)Floor
(4) standing
　Ceiling suspendedtype
type (FDF)
type .............................................................................195
( (FDE) ......................................................................193
'19 • PAC-DB-311D
) ............................................................................ 162
(5) Floor standing type (FDF) .............................................................................195
■ How to read the model name

■ How to read the model name
Example: FDT 90 VNP V
Example: FDT 90 VNP1 VG
- 1-
Series code
Applicable power source...See the specification
Series code
Product capacity
Applicable power source...See the specification
Model namecapacity
Product FDT : Ceiling cassette-4 way type
Model nameFDUFDT: Duct connected-High
: Ceiling cassette-4 static pressure type
way type
FDUMFDU: Duct connected-Low/Middle
: Duct connected-High staticstatic pressure
pressure typetype
FDEFDUM : Ceiling
: Ductsuspended type
connected-Low/Middle static pressure type
SRKFDE: Wall mounted
: Ceiling type
suspended type
FDCFDF: Outdoor
: Floorunit
standing type
FDC : Outdoor unit
-2-
'19 • PAC-DB-333
1. SPECIFICATIONS
(1) Ceiling cassette-4 way type (FDT)
Model FDT90VNPWVH
Item Indoor unit FDT100VH Outdoor unit FDC90VNP-W
Power source 1 Phase 220-240V 50Hz / 220V 60Hz
Nominal cooling capacity (range) kW 9.0 [ 2.1(Min.) - 9.5(Max.)]
Nominal heating capacity (range) kW 9.0 [ 1.7(Min.) - 9.5(Max.)]
Cooling 2.48
Power consumption
Heating kW 1.90
Max power consumption 4.46
Cooling 11.0/11.5
Running current
Heating A 8.4/8.8
Inrush current, max current 5, 19
Operation Cooling 98/98
Power factor %
data Heating 98/98
EER Cooling 3.63
COP Heating 4.74
Cooling 67
Sound power level 62
Heating 66
Cooling P-Hi: 47 Hi: 39 Me: 36 Lo: 30 55
Sound pressure level dB(A)
Heating P-Hi: 47 Hi: 39 Me: 36 Lo: 29 53
Silent mode Cooling 52
—
sound pressure level Heating 50
Unit 298 × 840 × 840
Exterior dimensions (Height x Width x Depth) mm 750 × 880(+88) × 340
Panel 35 × 950 × 950
Exterior appearance Plaster white Stucco white
(Munsell color) (6.8Y8.9/0.2) near equivalent (4.2Y7.5/1.1) near equivalent
(RAL color) (RAL 9003) near equivalent (RAL 7044) near equivalent
Net weight kg Unit 25 Panel 5 57
Compressor type & Q'ty — RMT5118SWP1 ( Twin rotary type )×1
Compressor motor (Starting method) kW — Direct line start
Refrigerant oil (Amount, type) L — 0.675 ( DIAMOND FREEZE MB75 )
Refrigerant (Type, amount, pre-charge length) kg R32 1.7 in outdoor unit (Incl. the amount for the piping of 15m)
Heat exchanger Louver fin & inner grooved tubing M shape fin & inner grooved tubing
Refrigerant control Electronic expansion valve
Fan type & Q'ty Turbo fan ×1 Propeller fan ×1
Fan motor (Starting method) W 140 < Direct line start > 86 < Direct line start >
Cooling 3 59
Air flow m /min P-Hi: 37 Hi: 26 Me: 23 Lo: 17
Heating 55
Available external static pressure Pa 0 —
Outside air intake Possible —
Air filter, Quality / Quantity Pocket plastic net ×1 (Washable) —
Shock & vibration absorber Rubber sleeve (for fan motor) Rubber sleeve (for fan motor & compressor)
Electric heater W — —
Remote control (Option) Wired : RC-EX3A , RC-E5 , RCH-E3 Wireless : RCN-T-5AW-E2
Operation
Room temperature control Thermostat by electronics
control
Operation display —
Compressor overheat protection, Overcurrent protection
Safety equipments Frost protection, Serial signal error protection, Indoor fan motor error protection
Heating overload protection( High pressure control ), Cooling overload protection
I/U φ9.52 (3/8") Pipe φ6.35(1/4")x0.8 O/U φ6.35 (1/4")
Refrigerant piping size (O.D) mm
φ15.88 (5/8") φ15.88(5/8")x1.0 φ15.88 (5/8")
Connecting method Flare piping Flare piping
Installation Attached length of piping m — —
data Insulation for piping Necessary (both Liquid & Gas lines)
Refrigerant line (one way) length m Max.30m
Vertical height diff. between O/U and I/U m Max.20 (Outdoor unit is higher) / Max.20 (Outdoor unit is lower)
Drain hose Hose connectable with VP25(O.D.32) Hole size φ20 x 4 pcs
Drain pump, max lift height mm Built-in drain pump , 850 —
Recommended breaker size A —
L.R.A. (Locked rotor ampere) A 5.0
1.5mm ｘ 4 cores（Including earth cable）/ Termainal block（Screw fixing type）
2
Interconnecting wires Size x Core number
IP number IPX0 IPX4
Standard accessories Mounting kit, Drain hose Drain elbow, Drain hole grommet
Option parts Motion sensor : LB-T-5W-E
Notes (1) The data are measured at the following conditions. The pipe length is 7.5m.
Item Indoor air temperature Outdoor air temperature
Standards
Operation DB WB DB WB
Cooling 27˚C 19˚C 35˚C 24˚C ISO5151-T1
Heating 20˚C — 7˚C 6˚C ISO5151-H1
(2) This air-conditioner is manufactured and tested in conformity with the ISO.
(3) Sound level indicates the value in an anechoic chamber. During operation these values are somewhat higher due to ambient conditions.
(4) Select the breaker size according to the own national standard.
(5) The operation data indicate when the air-conditioner is operated at 230V 50Hz or 220V 60Hz.
PJF000Z589 H
-3-
'19 • PAC-DB-333
Model FDT100VNPWVH
Item Indoor unit FDT100VH Outdoor unit FDC100VNP-W
Cooling 2.84
Power consumption
Heating kW 2.33
Cooling 12.1/12.7
Running current
Heating A 9.9/10.4
Power factor %
data Heating 98/98
EER Cooling 3.52
COP Heating 4.29
Cooling 68
Heating 67
Cooling P-Hi: 47 Hi: 39 Me: 36 Lo: 30 56
Heating P-Hi: 47 Hi: 39 Me: 36 Lo: 29 54
—
Unit 298 × 840 × 840
Exterior dimensions (Height x Width x Depth) mm 750 × 880(+88) × 340
Panel 35 × 950 × 950
Net weight kg Unit 25 Panel 5 57
Fan type & Q'ty Turbo fan ×1 Propeller fan ×1
Cooling 3 63
Heating 55
Air filter, Quality / Quantity Pocket plastic net ×1 (Washable) —
Remote control (Option) Wired : RC-EX3A , RC-E5 , RCH-E3 Wireless : RCN-T-5AW-E2
Operation
control
I/U φ9.52 (3/8") Pipe φ6.35(1/4")x0.8 O/U φ6.35 (1/4")
φ15.88 (5/8") φ15.88(5/8")x1.0 φ15.88 (5/8")
L.R.A. (Locked rotor ampere) A 5.0
2
IP number IPX0 IPX4
Option parts Motion sensor : LB-T-5W-E
Standards
PJF000Z589 H
-4-
'19 • PAC-DB-333
(2) Duct connected - High static pressure type (FDU)
Model FDU90VNPWVH
Item Indoor unit FDU100VH Outdoor unit FDC90VNP-W
Cooling 2.62
Power consumption
Heating kW 1.98
Cooling 11.6/12.2
Running current
Heating A 8.8/9.2
Power factor %
data Heating 98/98
EER Cooling 3.44
COP Heating 4.55
Cooling 67
Heating 66
Cooling 55
Sound pressure level dB(A) P-Hi: 44 Hi: 38 Me: 36 Lo: 30
Heating 53
—
Exterior dimensions (Height x Width x Depth) mm 280 × 1,370 × 740 750 × 880(+88) × 340
Exterior appearance Stucco white
(Munsell color) — (4.2Y7.5/1.1) near equivalent
(RAL color) (RAL 7044) near equivalent
Net weight kg 54 57
Fan type & Q'ty Centrifugal fan ×3 Propeller fan ×1
Fan motor (Starting method) W 100 + 130 < Direct line start > 86 < Direct line start >
Cooling 3 59
Heating 55
Available external static pressure Pa Standard : 60 Max : 200 —
Air filter, Quality / Quantity Procure locally —
Remote control (Option) Wired : RC-EX3A,RC-E5,RCH-E3 Wireless : RCN-KIT4-E2
Operation
control
Liquid line I/U φ9.52 (3/8") Pipe φ6.35(1/4")x0.8 O/U φ6.35 (1/4")
Gas line φ15.88 (5/8") Pipe φ15.88(5/8")x1.0 φ15.88 (5/8")
Drain hose Hose connectable VP25(I.D.25, O.D.32) Hole size φ20 x 4 pcs
L.R.A. (Locked rotor ampere) A 5
2
IP number IPX0 IPX4
Option parts Motion sensor : LB-KIT
Item Indoor air temperature Outdoor air temperature External static pressure
Standards
Operation DB WB DB WB of indoor unit
60Pa
(5) When wireless remote control is used, fan is 3 speed setting (Hi-Me-Lo) only.
(7) The factory E.S.P. setting is set within the range of 80 - 150 Pa.If SW8-4 is turned to "ON",
E.S.P. setting range can be changed to 10 - 200 Pa.(For RC-EX3A and RC-E5 only)
-5- PJG000Z625 H
'19 • PAC-DB-333
Model FDU100VNPWVH
Item Indoor unit FDU100VH Outdoor unit FDC100VNP-W
Cooling 3.08
Power consumption
Heating kW 2.45
Cooling 13.1/13.7
Running current
Heating A 10.4/10.9
Power factor %
data Heating 98/98
EER Cooling 3.25
COP Heating 4.08
Cooling 68
Heating 67
Cooling 56
Heating 54
—
Net weight kg 54 57
Cooling 3 63
Heating 55
Operation
control
2
IP number IPX0 IPX4
Option parts Motion sensor : LB-KIT
Standards
60Pa
(5) When wireless remote control is used, fan is 3 speed setting (Hi-Me-Lo) only.
(7) The factory E.S.P. setting is set within the range of 80 - 150 Pa.If SW8-4 is turned to "ON",
E.S.P. setting range can be changed to 10 - 200 Pa.(For RC-EX3A and RC-E5 only)
-6- PJG000Z625 H
'19 • PAC-DB-333
(3) Duct connected - Low / Middle static pressure type (FDUM)
Model FDUM90VNPWVH
Item Indoor unit FDUM100VH Outdoor unit FDC90VNP-W
Cooling 2.62
Power consumption
Heating kW 1.98
Cooling 11.6/12.2
Running current
Heating A 8.8/9.2
Power factor %
data Heating 98/98
EER Cooling 3.44
COP Heating 4.55
Cooling 67
Heating 66
Cooling 55
Heating 53
—
Net weight kg 54 57
Cooling 3 59
Heating 55
Operation
control
Vertical height diff. between O/U and I/U m Max.20m (Outdoor unit is higher) / Max.20m (Outdoor unit is lower)
2
IP number IPX0 IPX4
Option parts Filter set : UM-FL3EF , Motion sensor : LB-KIT
Standards
60Pa
(6) Static pressure of option air filter "UM-FL2EF" is 5Pa initially.
(7) The external static pressure setting can be changed to 10-100Pa. (For RC-EX3A and RC-E5 only)
PJG000Z491 J
-7-
'19 • PAC-DB-333
Model FDUM100VNPWVH
Item Indoor unit FDUM100VH Outdoor unit FDC100VNP-W
Cooling 3.08
Power consumption
Heating kW 2.45
Cooling 13.1/13.7
Running current
Heating A 10.4/10.9
Power factor %
data Heating 98/98
EER Cooling 3.25
COP Heating 4.08
Cooling 68
Heating 67
Cooling 56
Heating 54
—
Net weight kg 54 57
Cooling 3 63
Heating 55
Operation
control
2
IP number IPX0 IPX4
Option parts Filter set : UM-FL3EF , Motion sensor : LB-KIT
Standards
60Pa
(5) The operation data indicate when the air-conditioner is operated at 230V 50Hz or 220 V60Hz.
(6) Static pressure of option air filter "UM-FL2EF" is 5Pa initially.
(7) The external static pressure setting can be changed to 10-100Pa. (For RC-EX3A and RC-E5 only)
PJG000Z491 J
-8-
'19 • PAC-DB-333
(4) Ceiling suspended type (FDE)
Model FDE90VNPWVH
Item Indoor unit FDE100VH Outdoor unit FDC90VNP-W
Cooling 2.38
Power consumption
Heating kW 1.99
Cooling 10.6/11.0
Running current
Heating A 8.8/9.2
Power factor %
data Heating 98/98
EER Cooling 3.78
COP Heating 4.52
Cooling 67
Heating 66
Cooling 55
Heating 53
—
Net weight kg 43 57
Cooling 3 55
Air flow m /min P-Hi: 32 Hi: 26 Me: 21 Lo: 16.5
Heating 55
Outside air intake Not possible —
Air filter, Quality / Quantity Pocket plastic net ×2(Washable) —
Remote control (Option) Wired : RC-EX3A,RC-E5,RCH-E3 Wireless : RCN-E-E3
Operation
control
Drain pump, max lift height mm — —
2
IP number IPX0 IPX4
Option parts Motion sensor : LB-E
Standards
PFA004Z088 H
-9-
'19 • PAC-DB-333
Model FDE100VNPWVH
Item Indoor unit FDE100VH Outdoor unit FDC100VNP-W
Cooling 3.00
Power consumption
Heating kW 2.36
Cooling 12.8/13.4
Running current
Heating A 10.1/10.5
Power factor %
data Heating 98/98
EER Cooling 3.33
COP Heating 4.24
Cooling 68
Heating 67
Cooling 56
Heating 54
—
Net weight kg 43 57
Cooling 3 63
Air flow m /min P-Hi: 32 Hi: 26 Me: 21 Lo: 16.5
Heating 55
Air filter, Quality / Quantity Pocket plastic net ×2(Washable) —
Remote control (Option) Wired : RC-EX3A,RC-E5,RCH-E3 Wireless : RCN-E-E3
Operation
control
2
IP number IPX0 IPX4
Option parts Motion sensor : LB-E
Standards
PFA004Z088 H
- 10 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
(5) Wall mounted type (SRK)
Model SRK100VNPWZR
Item Indoor unit SRK100ZR-W Outdoor unit FDC100VNP-W
Cooling 3.10
Power consumption
Heating kW 2.80
Cooling 13.2/13.8
Running current
Heating A 11.9/12.5
Power factor %
data Heating 98/98
EER Cooling 3.10
COP Heating 3.57
Cooling 68
Heating 67
Cooling Hi: 48 Me: 45 Lo: 40 ULo: 27 56
Heating Hi: 48 Me: 43 Lo: 38 ULo: 30 54
—
Exterior dimensions (Height x Width x Depth) mm 305 × 920 × 220 750 × 880(+88) × 340
Exterior appearance Fine snow Stucco white
(Munsell color) (8.0Y 9.3/0.1) near equivalent (4.2Y7.5/1.1) near equivalent
Net weight kg 16.5 57
Refrigerant control Capillary tubes + Electronic expansion valve
Fan type & Q'ty Tangential fan x 1 Propeller fan ×1
Fan motor (Starting method) W 56 x 1 < Direct line start > 86 < Direct line start >
Cooling 3 Hi: 24.5 Me: 21.3 Lo: 17.6 ULo: 10.4 63
Air flow m /min
Heating Hi: 27.5 Me: 23.2 Lo: 19.1 ULo: 13.6 55
Air filter, Quality / Quantity Polypropylene net ( Washable ) x 2 —
Remote control (Option) Wired : RC-EX3A, RC-E5 , RCH-E3 Interface kit : SC-BIKN2-E
Operation
control
Operation display RUN: Green , TIMER: Yellow , HI POWER: Green , 3D AUTO: Orange
Gas line φ15.88 (5/8") φ15.88(5/8")x1.0 φ15.88 (5/8")
Drain hose Hose connectable with VP16 Hole size φ20 x 4 pcs
2
IP number IPX0 IPX4
Option parts —
Standards
PCA001Z857 G
- 11 -
Decorative panel Symbol Content
Decorative panel Symbol Content
860ー910
860-910 （Ceiling
（Ceiling hole hole
size）size） □950
□950
AA Gas piping
Gaspiping φ15.88
φ15.88 5／8"）
（（5／8"） Flare）
（（Flare）
Suspension bolts
Suspension pitch：P1
bolts pitch：P1
（778）
（778） □630
□630 BB Liquid piping
Liquidpiping φ9.52
φ9.52 3／8"）
（（3／8"） Flare）
（（Flare）
H1,2
H1,2 CC Drain piping
Drainpiping VP25
VP25 O.D.32）
（（O.D.32）
(1) Indoor units
GG DD Hole
Holefor wiring
forwiring
FF Suspension bolts
Suspensionbolts M8）
（M10ororM8）
（M10
Outside
Outside air opening
air opening
Model FDT100VH
GG for
forducting
ducting （Knock out）
（Knockout）
Control
Control
box
box H1
H1 Air
Air outlet opening
outlet opening φ125
φ125 out）
Knockout）
（（Knock
H2
H2 for
for ducting
ducting φ200
φ200
（（Knock out）
Knockout）
H1,2
725）
（725）
H1,2
（
Space
Space for installation
forinstallation and service
and service
pitch：P2
(a) Ceiling cassette - 4 way type (FDT)
more
1000
420
420
or more
or
Suspension bolts pitch：P2

1000
2. EXTERIOR DIMENSIONS
more
568
or
or more
Obstacle
Make
Makea aspace
spaceofof 5000
5000 orormore between
morebetween
thetheunits
unitswhen
when installing
installing more than
morethan one.
one.
Air return
Air return
grillegrille Air
Airsupply
supply
Drain hose piece H1,2 245 5-φ4 5-φ4

（Accessory）
（Accessory） 50 Holes for
Holes
38 for
- 12 -
333 303 50 38 tapping screws
（Installed on site）
（Installed on site） tapping screws
99
99
129
167
□840
□840
129
167
112
137
FF CC B A
40
137
40
Hanger
Hangerplate
plateforfor 76 112
suspension
suspensionbolt
bolt
76
215ー245
215-245
Hole
Hole 65
65
13
298
44 1344
188
173
140
131
140 140 G Hole G 240 240
850 or less
60 60 130 130
850 or less
35
（Max. drain lift）
（Max. Drain lift）
box
more
Control
Control box
140
140
140
Draft prevention
Anti draft functionfunction
（※1）（※1）
D
5050oror more
140
100
140
100
140
100
140
100 140
Notes(1) The model name label is attached toPitch the areaSuspension bolt pitch
table of suspension bolt range
model name
Notes（1）Thecontrol label is attached to the
box lid. Symbol
control box lid. Symbol
Pattern P1
　 (2) Suspension bolt pitch P1,P2 is adjustable Pattern P1 P2 P2 6-φ4 6-φ4Hole Hole mm ：mm
Unit：Unit
　（2）Suspension bolt pitch P1,P2 is adjustable 1 770 725ー770 Hole 100 100 6-φ4 6-φ4
by a pattern of the right
by a pattern of the right table. table. 1 770 725-770 Holes forHoles for 200 200 Holes Holes for
for
　　 (3) function (※1) is provided 2 2 770ー800 tapping screws
tapping screws tapping screws
　　　　（3）Section
Draft1（prevention
※1）is provided on the panel 770-800 725 725
on the panel
T-PSAE-5AW-E only. T-PSAE-5AW-E only. H1 H1 H2 H2 tapping screws
PJF000Z553
'19 • PAC-DB-333
'19 • PAC-DB-333
(b) Duct connected-High static pressure type(FDU)

Model FDU100VH
235（Duct dimension）
Symbol Content
64 1280（Duct dimension） 64 A Gas piping φ15.88（5／8"）（Flare）
B Liquid piping φ9.52（3／8"）（Flare）
23.5
C1 Drain piping VP25（O.D.32）

Drain hose piece Drain piping
C2 VP20
（Accessory）（Gravity drainage）
（Installed on site） D Hole for wiring
E Suspension bolts M10
Outside air opening
F （Knock out）
21.5
Return air duct for ducting

Air outlet opening
G （Knock out）
for ducting
H Inspection hole （450×450）
1404 （Suspension bolts pitch）

18 1368 18
Hanger plate for 284 4－φ4
suspension bolt 4－φ4
86 Holes for
tapping screws Holes for
152 285
28
tapping screws
Control box φ124
（Suspension bolts pitch）
139
B
530
113
G A φ170
71 φ170
C1 Hole □90
F G
180
View M
59
69
600 or less （Max. drain lift）
30 738 30
170 （Duct dimension）
635
E 295�325 468
Air supply duct
405
184.5
134.5
15
43
M
250
280
50
92
D
C2 467
104 1200（Duct dimension） 104
Unit:mm
Space for installation and service
Select either of two cases to keep space for installation and services.
（Case 1） From side of unit （Case 2） From bottom of unit
Note（b）
or more
or more
or more
100
100
20
Slab
1720
Inspection
1000 or more
or more
or more
H Ceiling
20
hole
600
150─
200
370
725
Note（a） Note（c）
100―200 Fan unit
Notes（a）There must not be obstacle to draw

out 2 fan units. For fan units maintenance, Note（1）The model name label
refer to page 54. 　　 is attached on the lid
（b）Install refrigerant pipes, 　　 of the control box.
drain pipe, and wiring so as
not to cross marked area. Note（a）
（c）The case that pipes are installed to upper（bottom）of fan unit,
keep space of 60mm or more to upper（bottom）of unit.
PJG000Z579
- 13 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
(c) Duct connected-Low / Middle static pressure type (FDUM)

Model FDUM100VH
Symbol Content
235㸦Duct dimension㸧
A Gas piping ȭ15.88(5㸭8")(Flare)

B Liquid piping ȭ9.52(3㸭8")(Flare)
C1 Drain piping VP25O.D.32
64 1280㸦Duct dimension㸧 64 Drain piping
100 4280=1120 100 C2
(Gravity drainage)
VP20
280 D
23.5
Hole for wiring

24.5
Drain hose piece E Suspension bolts (M10)

(Accessory) Outside air opening
F (ȭ150)(Knock out)
(Installed on site) for ducting
205
Air outlet opening

G (ȭ125)( Knock out)
for ducting
14㸫ȭ4 H
24.5
Inspection opening
21.5
Return air duct 450×450

Holes for
tapping screw
1404㸦Suspension bolts pitch㸧

18 1368 18
4㸫ȭ4
Hanger plate for
suspension bolt
284 Holes for
4㸫ȭ4
86 tapping screws 152 285 Holes for
tapping screws
28
ȭ124
Control box
㸦Suspension bolts pitch㸧
139
B
113
530
A ȭ170
G ȭ170
71 Hole ‫ڧ‬90
C1 G
F
180
View M
59
69
600 or less 㸦Max. drain lift㸧
30 738 30
170㸦Duct dimension㸧
635
E 295̿325 468
Air supply duct
405
184.5
134.5
43
15
M
250
280
45
D
92
C2 467
104 1200㸦Duct dimension㸧 104
Unit:mm

Select either of two cases to keep space for installation and services.
(Case 1) From side of unit (Case 2) From bottom of unit
Note (b)
or more
or more
or more
100
100
20
Slab
1720
Inspection
1000 or more
H
or more
or more
Ceiling
20
opening
600
150̿
370
200
725
Note (a) Note c
100̿200 Fan unit
Notes a) There must not be obstacle to draw

out 2 fan units. For fan units maintenance, Note(1) The model name label
refer to page 60. ࠉࠉis attached on the lid
b Install refrigerant pipes, ࠉࠉ of the control box.
drain pipe,and wiring so as
not to cross marked area. Note (a)
c The case that pipes are installed to upper bottom of fan unit,
keep space of 60mm or more to upper bottomof unit.
PJG000Z487
- 14 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
(d) Ceiling suspended type (FDE)

Model FDE100VH
C1,C2
C1,C2
A
B
D
G
E
B
F
A C1
C2
PFA004Z086
- 15 -
Symbol Content
19 64 64 43.5 A Gas piping φ15.88（5／8"）（Flare）
G G
B Liquid piping φ9.52（3／8"）（Flare）
C Hole on wall for right rear piping （φ65）
55
55
D Hole on wall for left rear piping （φ65）
E Drain hose VP16
F Outlet for wiring（on both side）
G Outlet for piping（on both side）
Model SRK100ZR-W
1197
262 3
(e) Wall mounted type (SRK)
Wireless remote control
339
167
Terminal block G
60
60 24
11
55
Outlet for downward piping
（Refer to the top view） F
Installation board Unit Space for service 150 Wired remote control
- 16 -
Space for Service 50 157 883 157 （Option）
214.5 768 214.5
363.5 470 363.5
568.5 60 568.5
Space for service
100
10
□120 19
48
43
Notes（1）The model name label is attached

240
240
322.4
　　　on the underside of the indoor unit.

（2）To connect the wired remote control,
　　　the interface kit（SC-BIKN2-E）is required.
47
47
Unit:mm
6.7
53 77
D B E A C
715
759
780
15 Space for service
Space for installation and service when viewing from the front
RLD000Z005 A
'19 • PAC-DB-333
Symbol Content Note
A Service valve connection（gas side） φ15.88（5／8"）
（Flare）
（1）It must not be surrounded by walls on four sides.
B Service valve connection（liquid side） φ6.35（1／4"）
（Flare）
（2）The unit must be fixed with anchor bolts. An anchor bolt
(2) Outdoor units
C Pipe／cable draw-out hole

D Drain discharge hole φ20 x 4 places
must not protrude more than 15mm.
Center of gravity （3）Where the unit is subjected to strong winds, lay it in such a
E Anchor bolt hole M10 x 4 places
direction that the blower outlet faces perpendicularly to the
223 310 1 60 dominant wind direction.
2-R7
.5 E 15 （4）Leave 1m or more space above the unit.
47.5
（5）A wall in front of the blower outlet must not exceed the
unit's height.
（6）The model name label is attached on the lower right corner
of the front panel.
106.5
Model FDC90VNP-W, 100VNP-W
340
380
418
150
20
L3
61
Intake
L4
L2
（Service space）
19
555 D Intake
61 27
150 580 150 30 Outlet L1
Terminal block
880 88
- 17 -
Minimum installation space
Service panel
Examples of
installation
Ｉ Ⅱ Ⅲ
Dimensions
L1 Open Open 500
L2 300 250 Open
L3 100 150 100
L4 250 250 250
165.5 25
750
C
B
30°
Unit:mm
48.5
30°
300
24
103.5
A
Center of gravity
PCA001Z875
'19 • PAC-DB-333
'19 • PAC-DB-333
(3) Remote control (Option parts)

(a) Wired remote control
Model RC-EX3A
Dimensions (Viewed from front) Installation space
18.3
18.3
配線 30mm
30mm
Wiring
30mm
30mm 30mm
30mm
83.5
120
83.5
Fixing固定穴
120
holes
37
37 23
23 23
23 19
19 R/C temperature sensor
120
120
Secure minimum spaces for disassembling the case.
120mm
120mm
Upper left and Upper right sides
……30mm or more
Bottom side…120mm or more
If using L-shaped screwdriver, 50mm or more is
available.
● Do not install the remote control at following places.

1) It could cause break-down or deformation of remote control.
・Where it is exposed to direct sunlight R/C cable:0.3mm x2 cores
2
・Where the ambient temperature becomes 0 °C or below, or 40 °C or above When the cable length is longer than 100 m,
・Where the surface is not flat the max size for wires used in the R/C case
・Where the strength of installation area is insufficient is 0.5 mm2 . Connect them to wires of larger
size near the outside of R/C. When wires are
2) Moisture may be attached to internal parts of the remote control, resulting in a display failure.
connected, take measures to prevent water,
・Place with high humidity where condensation occurs on the remote control etc. from entering inside.
・Where the remote control gets wet
3) Accurate room temperature may not be detected using the temperature sensor of the remote control. ≦ 200 m 0.5 mm2 x 2 cores
・Where the average room temperature cannot be detected ≦ 300m 0.75 mm2 x 2 cores
・Place near the equipment to generate heat ≦ 400m 1.25 mm2 x 2 cores
・Place affected by outside air in opening/closing the door
≦ 600m 2.0 mm2 x 2 cores
・Place exposed to direct sunlight or wind from air-conditioner
・Where the difference between wall and room temperature is large
4) When you are using the automatic grille up and down panel in the IU, you may not be able
to confirm the up and down motion.
・Where the IU cannot be visually confirmed
● When installing the unit at a hospital, telecommunication facility, etc., take measures to
suppress electric noises.
It could cause malfunction or break-down due to hazardous effects on the inverter, private power generator,
high frequency medical equipment, radio communication equipment, etc.
The influences transmitted from the remote control to medical or communication equipment could disrupt medical
activities, video broadcasting or cause noise interference.
Adapted RoHS directive
PJZ000Z333
- 18 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
Model RC-E5 Wiring outlet

Cut off the upper thin part of remote control lower case with a nipper or knife,
Exposed mounting and grind burrs with a file etc.
In case of pulling out In case of pulling out

from upper left from center
0.3mm2×2 cores 48
In case of pulling out Upper part
In case of pulling out
from upper left from center
Lower case
LCD
Lower part
TEMP ON/OFF
Upper Sheath Upper Sheath
Upper cace Upper cace
Board Board
X Y X Y
Lower Wiring Lower Wiring

X, Y terminal block In case of pulling out from center
In case of pulling out from
Attach M3 screw upper left
with washer
‫ڧ‬120 The peeling-off length of sheath
Pulling out from upper left Pulling out from center
X wiring : 215mm X wiring : 170mm
Exterior appearance Pearl white Y wiring : 195mm Y wiring : 190mm The peeling-off length
of sheath
(Munsell color) (N8.5) near equivalent
Embedded mounting Remote control installation dimensions
Wall surface 120

Remote Tighten the screws after
control 46
cutting off the thin part of
outline 23 screw mounting part.
Wiring
83.5
120
44
42
45
11.5 11
Wiring oulet
Electrical box 12×7 slot hole
䠄Not included䠅 Installation hole
9.5×5 slot hole 䠄4 places䠅
1䠅 Installation screw for remote control

19 M4 screw (2 pieces)
Unit:mm
Wiring specifications
1) If the prolongation is over 100m, change to the size below.
But, wiring in the remote control case should be under 0.5mm 2. Change the wire size outside of
the case according to wire connecting. Waterproof treatment is necessary at the wire connecting
section. Be careful about contact failure.
Length Wiring thickness

100 to 200m 0.5mm2×2 cores
Under 300m 0.75mm2×2 cores
Under 600m 2.0mm2×2 cores PJZ000Z295
- 19 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
(b) Wireless remote control

RCN-E2(Option parts) (Except SRK series) Unit: mm
167
(3) Remote control
60 24
SRK series only Unit::mm

Unit mm
167
60 24
- 20 -
Meaning of marks
Item Description
(1) Indoor units
Remote operation input AM1-4 Draft prevention function motor

The line between ThＩ-A
FMi DM （volt-free contact） Connector
YE／GN CNB-Z
indoor unit and outdoor unit M M Prepare on site
TB1 t° DM Drain pump motor
Model FDT100VH
1
Power source line 1 2 F1,2 Fuse
2 RD WH RD BL BR OR WH BK BK
Signal line 3 YE／GNWH RD Fan motor
3 FMi
CNWO 5 3 1 1 4 5 6 7 2 1 +12 2 1 2 1 +12 Option
Earth WH CNM1 E1 CNR CNH CNTA BK FS Float switch
3
[ ] F1 F2 WH WH BK BL CNL 2 BK
BK PIS
WH （3.15A）（2.0A） 1 HS Humidity sensor
1 BK
YE／GN BL
3 L Reactor
CNW3 SW2
Power circuit 2 BK Indication lamp（Green-Nomal operation）
WH CNC HS
LED・2
WH 1 BK
SW5 LED・3 Indication lamp（Red-Inspection）
3. ELECTRICAL WIRING
(a) Ceiling cassette-4 way type (FDT)
LM1-4 Louver motor

Indoor unit PCB Motion sensor
SW7 SW6 6 BK PIS
BK Thi-R3 SW2 Remote control communication address
5
LED・2 LED・3 YE t° Plural units Master／Slave setting
4 SW5
CNN Thi-R2
3 YE Model capacity setting
YE SW6
RD t°
2 SW7-1 Operation check,drain pump motor test run
RD Thi-R1
1 TB1 Terminal block（Power source）（□ mark）
t°
FS TB2 Terminal block（Signal line）（□ mark）
Remote control CNI 2 RD
Temperature sensor（Remote control）
- 21 -
TB2 BL ThＣ
WH 1 RD
X X 1 CNB Thi-A Temperature sensor（Return air）
ThＣ t° BK 2 BK
Y Y
+12 Prepare on site Thi-R1,2,3 Temperature sensor（Heat exchanger）
1
2 XR1 （Operation）
CNT 3 XR2 （Heating）
BL 4 XR3 （Compressor ON）
5 XR4 （Inspection）
6
XR5 Remote operation input
CNJ2 CNJ1 （volt-free contact）
GY WH
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
WHWHWHWHWHWHWHWHWHWHBL BL BL BL BL BL BL BL BL BL BK BK BK BK BK BK BK BK BK BK RD RD RD RD RD RD RD RD RD RD
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
M M M M M M M M Color marks
AM2 AM3 AM4 LM1 LM2 LM3 LM4 Mark Color Mark Color
※1 AM1 BK Black WH White
Notes 1. indicates wiring on site. BL Blue YE Yellow
　　 2. See the wiring diagram of outside unit about the line between BR Brown GY Gray
indoor unit and outdoor unit. OR Orange YE／GN Yellow／Green
　　 3. Use twin core cord（0.3mm2）at remote control line. RD Red
　　 See spec sheet of remote control in case that the total length is more than 100m.
　　 4. Do not put remote control line alongside power source line.
　　 5. Section 1（※1）is provided on the panel T-PSAE-5AW-E only.
PJF000Z554
'19 • PAC-DB-333
Meaning of marks
Item Description
CNB-Z Connector
DM Drain pump motor
F1,3,4 Fuse
FMi1,2 Fan motor
Control PCB RD FS Float switch
1
RD t° Thi-R1 L Reactor
Remote control 2
Model FDU100VH
TB2 YE LED・2 Indication lamp（Green-Normal operation）

Thc WH 3
X X 1 CNB CNN LED・3 Indication lamp（Red-Inspection）
BK YE t° Thi-R2
Y Y 3 WH YE 4
t° LED・2 LED・3 BK PIS Motion sensor
5
BK t° Thi-R3 SW2 Remote control communication address
6
SW5 Plural units Master／Slave setting
BK SW6 Model capacity setting
The line between Power PCB SW2 1
YE／GN 1 CNW0
CNH t° Thi-A SW7-1 Operation check,drain pump motor test run
indoor unit and outdoor unit WH BK 2 BK
F1（6.3A） 1 WH 1
RD 3 TB1 Terminal block（Power source）（□mark）
1 2 WH 2
Power source line 1 2 WH 5 Power circuit 3 WH 3 FS
2 4 WH 4 SW5 RD TB2 Terminal block（Signal line）
（□mark）
1
Signal line 3 5 WH 5 CNI Thc Temperature sensor（Remote control）
3 WH WH 6 RD
1 CNW2 BL
Earth CNW3 CNW1 76 WH 7 SW6 2
BL 3 WH WH 8 WH 8 WH
Thi-A Temperature sensor（Return air）
9 WH 9 +12
TB1 YE／GN SW7 RD
Thi-R1,2,3 Temperature sensor（Heat exchanger）
10 WH 10 1
11 WH 11 CNR M ■mark Closed-end connector
12 WH 12 WH DM
WH 2
F3 F4
（2A）（2A） +12 Prepare on site Color Marks
(b) Duct connected-High static pressure type (FDU)
1 （Remote operation
CNWR CNTA Mark Color
For HA BL 2 　input:volt-free contact）
1 WH 3 1 4 5 6 7 1 4 5 6 7 BK Black
- 22 -
RD BK WH YE BL RD BK WH YE BL CNZ WH Prepare on site BL Blue
CNM1 CNM2 +12 1
L WH BK 2 RD Red
XR1 （Operation）
CNC RD XR2 （Heating）
CNT 3 WH White
FMi1 M FMi2 M 5 XR4 （Inspection） YE Yellow
6 YE／GN Yellow／Green
XR5（Remote operation
input:volt-free contact）
Notes 1. indicates wiring on site.
2. See the wiring diagram of outdoor unit about the line between WH WH
1 1
CNG RD
indoor unit and outdoor unit. 2 PIS
BL BK BK
3. Use twin core cord（0.3mm 2 ）at remote control line. 4 3
See spec sheet of remote control in case that the total length is more CNV2 RD
than 100m. BK 3
Option ※1
4. Do not put remote control line alongside power source line.
5. Section 1（※1）shows electric circuit of motion sensor（Option）.
PJG000Z580
'19 • PAC-DB-333
Meaning of marks
Item Description
CNB-Z Connector
DM Drain pump motor
F1,3,4 Fuse
Control PCB FMi1,2 Fan motor
RD
1 FS Float switch
RD t° Thi-R1 L Reactor
Remote control 2
TB2 YE
Thc WH 3 LED・2 Indication lamp（Green-Normal operation）
X X 1 CNB CNN t°
Model FDUM100VH
BK YE Thi-R2 LED・3 Indication lamp（Red-Inspection）

Y Y 3 WH YE 4
t° LED・2 LED・3 BK
5 PIS Motion sensor
BK t° Thi-R3 SW2 Remote control communication address
6
SW5 Plural units Master／Slave setting
BK
The line between Power PCB SW2 1 SW6 Model capacity setting
YE／GN 1 CNW0
CNH t° Thi-A
indoor unit and outdoor unit WH BK 2 BK SW7-1 Operation check,drain pump motor test run
F1（5A） 1 WH 1
RD 3
1 2 WH 2 TB1 Terminal block（Power source）（□mark）
Power source line 1 2 WH 5 Power circuit 3 WH 3 FS
2 4 WH 4 SW5 RD
1 TB2 Terminal block（Signal line）
（□mark）
Signal line 3 5 WH 5 CNI
3 WH WH 6 RD
1 CNW2 BL Thc Temperature sensor（Remote control）
Earth CNW3 CNW1 76 WH 7 SW6 2
BL 3 WH WH 8 WH 8 WH
YE／GN
Thi-A Temperature sensor（Return air）
TB1 9 WH 9 +12
10 WH 10 SW7 1 RD Thi-R1,2,3 Temperature sensor（Heat exchanger）
11 WH 11 CNR M
12 WH 12 WH DM ■mark Closed-end connector
WH 2
F3 F4
（2A）（2A） +12 Prepare on site Color Marks
1 （Remote operation
CNWR CNTA Mark Color
For HA BL 2 　input:volt-free contact）
1 WH 3 1 4 5 6 7 1 4 5 6 7
BK Black
RD BL BR OR WH RD BL BR OR WH CNZ WH Prepare on site
- 23 -
or or or or CNM1 or or or or CNM2 +12 1
BL Blue
L BK WH YE BL WH BK WH YE BL BK 2 XR1 （Operation） BR Brown
CNC RD XR2 （Heating）
CNT 3 OR Orange
(c) Duct connected-Low / Middle static pressure type (FDUM)

FMi1 M FMi2 M 5 XR4 （Inspection） RD Red
6 WH White
XR5（Remote operation
Notes 1. indicates wiring on site. input:volt-free contact） YE Yellow
2. See the wiring diagram of outdoor unit about the line between YE／GN Yellow／Green
WH WH
indoor unit and outdoor unit. 1 1
CNG RD
2 PIS
3. Use twin core cord（0.3mm 2 ）at remote control line. BL BK BK
4 3
See spec sheet of remote control in case that the total length is more
than 100m. CNV2 RD
BK 3
4. Do not put remote control line alongside power source line. Option ※1
5. Section 1（※1）shows electric circuit of motion sensor（Option）.
PJG000Z490
'19 • PAC-DB-333
Control PCB RD
Remote control TB2 1
Thc WH RD t° Thi-R1
X X 1 CNB 2
BK YE
Y Y 3 WH 3
t° CNN YE t° Thi-R2
YE 4
LED・2 LED・3 BK
5
The line between CNW0 Power PCB 1 WH 1 BK t° Thi-R3
indoor unit and outdoor unit YE／GN 1 WH 2 WH 2 6
F1（3.15A） 3 WH 3
RD RD 3 4 WH 4
Model FDE100VH
Power source line 1 2 1 5 WH 5 BK

WH 5 Power circuit SW2 1
2 WH 6 CNH
Signal line 3 CNW1 76 WH 7
CNW2 BK t° Thi-A
3 F2（3.15A） BK 2
WH 8 WH 8 WH
WH 9 WH 9
Earth 1 10 WH
CNW3 10
BL 11 WH SW5
TB1 3 WH 11 1
YE／GN
F3 12 WH 12 CNI
（2.0A） BL WH
SW6 2
1 4 5 6 7
+12 Prepare on site
(d) Ceiling suspended type (FDE)
R B W Y B 1 BL 1
D K H E L CNM1 LM SW7 1
2 PK 2 CNTA （Remote operation
WH
M 3 BR 3 BL 　input:volt-free contact）
4 OR 2
1 4 5 6 7 4 SW8
5 RD 5 Prepare on site
R B W Y B CNF1 +12 1
D K H E L 6
WH 7 2 XR1 （Operation）
8 CNT 3 XR2 （Heating）
9 For HA
FMi M BL 4 XR3 （Compressor ON）
10 CNJ CNZ WH 5 XR4 （Inspection）
11 WH
12 6
13 XR5（Remote operation
14 CNC RD input:volt-free contact）
15
16 WH WH WH WH
17 1 1
CNG RD RD RD
18 2 PIS
BL BK BK BK BK
- 24 -
19 4 3
20
Meaning of marks CNV2 RD

CNL1 CNL2
BK 3 WH WH
Item Description Option ※1
CNB-Z Connector
F1-3 Fuse
FMi Fan motor
L Reactor
LED・2 Indication lamp（Green-Normal operation）
LED・3 Indication lamp（Red-Inspection）
LM Louver motor
PIS Motion sensor Color marks
SW2 Remote control communication address Mark Color
SW5 Plural units Master／Slave setting BK Black
Notes 1. indicates wiring on site. BL Blue
2. See the wiring diagram of outdoor unit about the line between SW6 Model capacity setting BR Brown
indoor unit and outdoor unit. SW7-1 Operation check,drain pump motor test run OR Orange
3. Use twin core cord（0.3mm 2 ）at remote control line. SW8-1 Anti-freeze control PK Pink
See spec sheet of remote control in case that the total length is more TB1 Terminal block（Power source）（□mark） RD Red
WH White
than 100m. TB2 Terminal block（Signal line）（□mark） YE Yellow
4. Do not put remote control line alongside power source line. Thc Temperature sensor（Remote control） YE／GN Yellow／Green
5. Section 1（※1）shows electric circuit of motion sensor（Option）. Thi-A Temperature sensor（Return air）
Thi-R1,2,3 Temperature sensor（Heat exchanger）
PFA004Z087
'19 • PAC-DB-333
Item Description
DISPLAY 5
CNE Connector
8 CNX M LM1
WIRELESS RECEIVER CNE CNF
BACK-UP SW PRINTED CNG
CIRCUIT 5
CNY M LM2 CNM
o
BOARD
Th1 t CNS
5
Model SRK100ZR-W
DS CNM M SM1 CNU

o CNG CNX
Th21 t
(e) Wall mounted type (SRK)
CNY
FMi Fan motor
Th22 to SM1 Flap motor
LM1,2 Louver motor
Th1 Room temperature sensor
2 Th21,2 Heat exchanger temperature sensor
Th3 CNF
Th3 Humidity sensor
5 CNS DS Diode stack
INTERFACE KIT
F Fuse
- 25 -
TB Terminal block
Y/G G Va Varistor
U Va RD
WH S/N 1 Color Marks
F 3
BK
RD J WH Mark Color
HEAT F 3.15A CNU 4 M
EXCHANGER L 250V 5
Y BK Black
6
BL
BK L FMi BL Blue
RD Red
POWER SOURCE WH White
TB 1 Phase 220-240V 50Hz Y Yellow
1 220V 60Hz
Y／G Yellow／Green
2/N
TO OUTDOOR UNIT
3
Y/G 2/N
POWER CABLE 1
SIGNAL WIRE 3
HEAT
EXCHANGER
EARTH WIRE
RWA000Z417 A
'19 • PAC-DB-333
Power source
1 Phase 220／230／240V 50Hz
L
(2) Outdoor units
（YE）
（OR）
TERMINAL PCB ASSY （SUB） PCB ASSY （MAIN）
BLOCK
T1
POWER
T2
TB1 FUSE TRANSISTOR
（BK）（BK） R IN F8 F2
L RO P U
U （RD）
250V 20A （BK） R ～＋ 250V 20A
（WH） S IN 250V 20A ACTIVE
+ + + V （WH）
F10
N FILTER V M
（WH） SO （WH） S 3～
250V 10A
（BR）～－ UNIT W （BK）
（YG） N W CM
R OUT S-1 （WH） S-2
G1
F1
TERMINAL （YG）（BK）
BLOCK CNMAIN CNSUB
250V 3.15A
Models FDC90VNP-W, 100VNP-W
CN20S G3
TB2 F3 250V 1A
1 （RD）（YG）～＋ SWITCHING
TO INDOOR UNIT 2 POWER
CIRCUIT M
N ～－
POWER CABLE 1 2 （RD） C-2 CNFAN
N FMo
3
[ SIGNAL WIRE 3 ] （YG）
2 CNTH CNEEV
2 2 2
2 t゜ t゜ t゜ M
20S TH1 TH2 TH3 EEV
- 26 -
Power cable, indoor-outdoor connecting wires Meaning of marks Color marks
Model MAX running current Power cable size Power cable length Indoor-outdoor Earth wire size Item Description Mark Color
（A）（mm 2 ）（m） wire size x number （mm 2 ） CM Compressor motor BK Black
CN20S Connector BR Brown
CNTH OR Orange
90,100 19 2.5 14 1.5mm 2 x 4 1.5
CNEEV
RD Red
CNFAN
WH White
EEV Electric expansion valve（coil）
The specifications shown in the above table are for units without heaters. For units with heaters, refer YE Yellow
FMo Fan motor
to the installation instructions or the construction instructions of the indoor unit. YG Yellow Green
Switchgear of circuit breaker capacity which is calculated from MAX. over current should be chosen L Reactor
along the regulations in each country. TB1,2 Terminal block
The cable specifications are based on the assumption that a metal or plastic conduit is used with no TH1 Heat exchanger temperature sensor（outdoor unit）
more than three cables contained in a conduit and a voltage drop is 2%. For an installation falling
outside of these conditions, please follow the internal cabling regulations. Adapt it to the regulation TH2 Outdoor air temperature sensor
in effect in each country. TH3 Discharge pipe temperature sensor
20S Solenoid coil for 4-way valve
PCA001Z876
'19 • PAC-DB-333
Mike (in front & below unit)
Model FDT60VH
Model FDT50VH Model FDT60VH Model FDT71VH
Noise level 44 dB(A) at P-Hi Noise level 44 dB(A) at P-Hi
Noise level Cooling : 55 dB (A) Noise level Cooling : 58 dB (A) Noise level Cooling : 59 dB (A)
34 dB(A):at
Heating 56HidB (A) 34 dB(A) :at59HidB (A)
Heating Heating : 60 dB (A)
30 dB(A) at Me
Cooling Heating 30 dB(A) at Me
Cooling Heating Cooling Heating
80 80 80 80 80 80
27 dB(A) at Lo 20 dB(A) at Lo '19 • PAC-DB-333
level (dB)
level (dB)
Sound power level (dB)

Cooling Heating
4. NOISE LEVEL 70
60
70
60
70
60
70
60
70 70
level (dB)
level (dB)
N60 N60
(Standard 2×10-5Pa)
60 60 60 60 60 60
Notes(1) The data are50
based on the following conditions. 50 50 50
pressurepower
pressurepower
Ambient air temperature: Indoor unit 27℃WB. Outdoor N50unit 35℃DB. N50
50
(2) The data in 40
the chart are measured in an anechoic room. 40 50 50 50 Unit 50 50
40 40
(3) The noise levels measured in the field are usually higher
N40than the data because of reflection. N40
Sound Sound 40 1.5m
Sound Sound
40 40 40 40 40
30 30 30 30
N30 Measured based on JIS B 8616 N30
(1) Indoor units
30
20 63 125 250 500 1000 2000
30
20
4000 8000
30
Mike position
20 63 125 as
250 right
500
30
20
1000 2000 4000 8000
30
63 125 250 500
30
1000 2000 4000 8000
(a) Ceiling cassette-4 wayFrequency
Mid Octave Band type (FDT)
(Hz)
N20
Mid Octave Band Frequency (Hz)Mike
N20 (in front & below unit)
Mid Octave Band Frequency (Hz)
10 10 10 10
ModelFDT71VG
Model FDT100VH
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 63
Model 125 250 500
FDT100VG 1000 2000 4000 8000
MidNotes(1)
OctaveTheBand Frequency
data are (Hz)
based on the following conditions. Mid Octave Band Frequency (Hz)
Noise level 46
( i ) Sound power dB (A)
Ambient
at
levelP-HIGH Noise
air temperature: Indoor unit 27℃WB. Outdoor unit 35℃DB.
level 48 dB (A) at P-HIGH
Model 35 dB (A) at HIGH 39 dB (A) at HIGH Unit
Model FDT100VH Models
(2) The data in the chart are measured in an anechoic room.FDT125VH,140VH
FDT71VH
Noise 34 dB
level
(3) The(A) at levels
Cooling
noise MEDIUM
: measured
62 dB (A) in the field are usuallyNoise level
higher than Cooling
the data 37 dB
because of: 63
(A)dBat (A)
MEDIUM
reflection.
1.5m
Noise29 level
dB (A)46 dB (A): 62
at LOW
Heating at P-Hi
dB (A) Noise level 46 Heating
dB31(A)
dB: at
64 dB
at (A)
P-Hi
(A) LOW
60 34 dB (A)Nat
Cooling Hi
60
Heating 60 34 Measured
dB (A) at based
Cooling Hi
Heating
on JIS B608616
Souud pressure level (dB)

80 N60
31 Mike position
at Me as right
80 6 0 80 80
31 dB (A) at Me dB (A)
level (dB)
level (dB)
50 50 50 50 Mike (in front & below unit)
70 26 dB (A)Nat
50 Lo 70 70 26 dB (A) at Lo 70 N50
40 CoolingModel FDT71VG40 Heating
40 Model FDT100VG 40
60
60 N40 60
60 60
60 60
60 N40
Noise level 46 N60dB (A) at P-HIGH Noise
N60 level 48 dB (A) at P-HIGH
(dB)
(dB)
power
power
30 30 30 30
50
50 N30 35 dB50
50
(A) at HIGH
50
50 50
50 N30
39 dB (A) at HIGH
Soundlevel
Soundlevel
N50 N50
20 34 dB (A) at MEDIUM 20
20 37 dB (A) at MEDIUM
20
N20 N20
40
40 29 dB40
40 (A) at LOW40
40 40
40 31 dB (A) at LOW
Sound pressure
Sound pressure
N N
10 60 10 40 60 10 60 40 10 60

63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 N60 63 125 250 500
1000 2000 4000 8000 N60
30 30 30 30
Mid63octave
125 band
250 frequency
500
50
1000 (Hz)
2000 4000N308000 63
50
125 Mid
250 octave
500 band
1000 frequency
2000 4000 8000(Hz)
50 N30 50
20 Mid octave band frequency (Hz)20 N50
20 Mid Octave Band Frequency (Hz) 20 N50
N20 N20
40 40 40 40
10 10 N40
10 10 N40
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
30 30 30 30
Mid Octave Band Frequency (Hz) N30 Mid Octave Band Frequency (Hz) N30
( ii ) Sound
Model pressure level
FDT50VH N20
20
N20
20 20 20
Model FDT100VH
Noise level 4110 dB(A) at P-Hi Noise
10 level 42 dB(A) at P-Hi
10 10
Noise level 47 dB63 (A)
125 at P-Hi
250 500 1000 2000 4000 Noise
8000 level 47 dB (A) at P-Hi63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
33 dB(A)
Mid
at Hi 33 dB(A) at Hi
39 dB (A)octave
at Hi band frequency (Hz) 39 dB (A) at Hi Mid octave band frequency (Hz)
30 dB(A) at Me 28 dB(A) at 1m
Me
36 dB (A) at Me 36 dB (A) at Me 2m
26 dB(A) at Lo 20 dB(A) at Lo
Cooling 30 dB (A) at Lo Heating 29 dB (A) at Lo
Air Unit
60 Cooling 60 Measured 60 Heating
based on JIS B 8616 60
Return duct
(dB)
(dB)
60 N60 60 60 N60 60 Supply duct

Mike position as right
level(dB)
level(dB)
Pa)
Pa)
N60 N60
Pa)
Pa)
50 50 50 1.5m 50
Mike (at center & below unit)
-5-5
-5-5
50 N50 50 50 N50 50
2×10
2×10
pressurelevel
pressurelevel
N50 N50
(Standard2×10
(Standard2×10
40 40 40 40
Model FDU71VF1
40
N40
40 Model FDU100VF2
40
N40
40
Soundpressure
Soundpressure
N40 N40
Noise30 level 38 dB (A) at P-HIGH 30 30 Noise level 44 dB (A) at P-Hi 30
(Standard
(Standard
30 30 30 30
33 dB (A) at HIGH N30
N30 38 dB (A) at HiN30
N30
1m 2m
20 20 20 20
20 29 dB (A) at MEDIUMN20 20 20 36 dB (A) at Me 20
N20 Air Unit
Sound
Sound
10
25 dB (A) at LOW N20
10 10 Measured30 dB (A)on
based at JIS
Lo
N20
B108616
60 10 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000
60 800010 10 63 125
60 250 500 1000 2000 4000 800010 60 Return duct Supply duct
250Mike
500 position as right
63 125 250 500 1000 2000

N60 4000 8000 63 125 1000 2000 4000 8000 N60
Mid Octave Band Frequency (Hz) Mid Octave Band Frequency (Hz)
Mid octave band frequency (Hz) Mid 50octave band frequency (Hz) 1.5m
Souud pressure level

(Standard 2×10-5 Pa)
50 50 50
N50 N50
40 Model FDU71VF1
Models FDT125VH,140VH 40 40 Model FDU100VF2 40
N40
N40
Noise
Noise level 49 level at
dB (A) 38 dB (A) at P-HIGH
Noise Noise level 4430 dB (A) at P-Hi
30 level 48 dB (A) at P-Hi
30 30 P-Hi
33Hi
dB (A) at HIGH N30 38 dB (A) at Hi
41[42] dBN(A)
30 at 41 dB (A) at Hi
20
39 dB (A)N 20at29Me
dB (A) at MEDIUM 20 38 dB (A) at Me 3620 dB (A) at Me
N20
20 25 dB
31[32] dB (A) at Lo (A) at LOW 10
N10
31 dB (A) at Lo 3010 dB (A) at Lo
10 60 10 60 60 60
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
Cooling Heating
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 N60 N60

Mid
60 Octave Band Frequency (Hz) 60 60 Mid octave band frequency (Hz)
60
Souud pressure level

Sound pressure level (dB)
50 50 50 50
N60 N60
N50 N50
50 50 50 50 40
40 40 40
N50 N50 N40
N40
40 40 40 30 40 30
30 30
N40 N40 N30
N30
30 20 30 30 20 20 30 20
N30 N30 N10 N20
N20
20 20 20 10 20 10
10 10 63N20 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
63 125 250 N 20
500 1000 2000 4000 8000
10 Mid Octave Band 10Frequency (Hz)
10 Mid10octave band frequency (Hz)
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
Note (1) Values in [ ] are for the FDT140VH
- 27 -
20 Mid Octave
MidBand
Octave
Frequency
Band Frequency
(Hz) 20(Hz) 20 Mid Octave
MidBand
Octave
Frequency
Band Frequency
(Hz) 20(Hz)
So
So
(
(
N10 N20 N10 N20
10 10 10 10
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
1m 1m'19 •2m
PAC-DB-333
2m
Air Air Unit Unit

(b) Duct connected-High static pressure type (FDU) MeasuredMeasured
based onbased
JIS Bon
8616
JIS B 8616
Return duct
Return duct
Supply duct
Supply duct
Mike position
Mike position
as right as right 1m 2m
1.5m 1.5m
Mike (at center
Mike (at
& below
center unit)
& below unit)
Air Unit
Measured based on JIS B 8616
Model Model
FDU100VH FDU100VH Model Model
FDU125VH FDU125VH ReturnModel
Model duct
FDU140VH FDU140VH
Supply duct
1m 1m 2m 2m
Noise levelNoise44leveldB(A)44atdB(A) P-Hi at P-Hi Noise level
Noise45level
dB(A)45atdB(A)
P-Hi at P-Hi Noise
1.5mlevelNoise 47level
Mike dB(A) 47atdB(A)
(at center P-Hi
& below at P-Hi
unit)
Air Air
Unit Unit 1m 1m 2m 2m
38 dB(A)
Return duct ReturnSupply
38 atdB(A)
Hi at Hi
duct duct Supply duct
40 dB(A)40atdB(A)
Hi at Hi 40 dB(A)40atdB(A) Hi at Hi
Air Air
Measured Measured
based on JIS
based
B 8616
on JIS Model
B 8616 FDU100VH 1.5m 36 dB(A) 1.5m36atdB(A)
Me at Me Model FDU125VH 34 dB(A)34atdB(A)
Me at Me Model FDU140VH
Unit
35 dB(A)
Unit
35atdB(A)
Me at Me
Return duct Return duct
Supply
Mike position
Mikeasposition
right as right Measured Measured
based onbased
JISatBLo on
8616
JIS B 8616 1m 2m duct Supply duct
30 dB(A)
Mike
Noise level 44 dB(A) at P-Hi 30 at
(at centerdB(A)
Lo
Mike
& below at Lo
(at center
unit) & below unit) 29 dB(A)
Noise level 45 dB(A) at P-Hi29atdB(A)
Lo Noise level 30 dB(A)
1.5m 30at
1.5m 47 dB(A) at dB(A)
Lo
P-Hi at Lo
60 60 60 60 60 60 Mike position
Mike position
as right as 60 right 60 60 Air60 Unit Mike (at center
Mike& below
(at center
unit)
60 & below unit)
60
38 dB(A) at Hi N60 N60 40 dB(A) at Hi N60 N60 Return duct 40 dB(A) at Hi N60
Supply duct N60
M60VH
del FDUM60VH Model FDUM71VH
Model FDUM71VH Measured based on JIS B 8616
2×10-5Pa)2×10-5Pa)
2×10-5Pa)2×10-5Pa)
(Standard 2×10-5Pa)(Standard 2×10-5Pa)
2×10-5Pa)2×10-5Pa)
(Standard 2×10-5Pa)(Standard 2×10-5Pa)

pressure level
Sound pressure level Sound pressure level
pressure level
Sound pressure level Sound pressure level
pressure level
Sound Pressure LevelSound pressure level

50 50 36 dB(A) at Me 50 50 50 50 34 dB(A) at Me 50 50 50 50 1.5m 35 dB(A) at Me 50 50
evel
Noise level at
36 dB(A) dB(A) at P-Hi Model
36P-Hi FDUM50VH
Model
Noise level FDUM50VH
Noise 38 level
30 dB(A)
dB(A) at 38
at P-Hi
dB(A)
Lo N50 at P-Hi N50 Model FDUM60VH
Model FDUM60VH
29 dB(A) at LoN50 N50 Model FDUM71VH
Model FDUM71VH
30Mike (at center & below
dB(A) at LoN50 unit) N50
31 dB(A) at
31Hi
dB(A) at Hi 60 Noise
40 40level
Noise33 37level
dB(A)37at 33dB(A)
P-Hi
dB(A)at40
Hi atP-Hi
60 Hi 40 40 60 Noise 40level
Noise36level
dB(A)36atdB(A)
P-Hi at40 60 P-Hi 40 60 Noise
40 40level
Noise38leveldB(A)38atdB(A) P-Hi at40 60 P-Hi 40
28 dB(A) at dB(A) at Me Model FDUM50VH
28Me 32 dB(A)32at
29 29dB(A)
Hi
Me N460 atat
dB(A) HiMe
N40 Model FDUM60VH 31 dB(A)31atdB(A)
Hi N460 at Hi N40 Model FDUM71VH 33 dB(A)33atdB(A) Hi N460 at Hi N40
Soundlevel
Soundlevel
Soundlevel
Pa)(Standard
Pa) -5Pa)(Standard
Pa) -5Pa)(Standard
25 dB(A) at
25Lo
dB(A) at Lo 30
50
Noise30level 25 29
37 dB(A)29at 25dB(A)
Me
Lo
dB(A)
P-Hi at30
atMe
50 Lo 30 30
50
Noise30level 36 28 dB(A)28atdB(A)
Me at30
P-Hi 50 Me 30 30
50
Noise30level 38 29 dB(A)29atdB(A) Me at30
P-Hi 50 Me 30
N350 N30 N350 N30 N350 N30
60 60 60 60 26
32 dB(A) 26at dB(A)
Lo
HiN60 20 at
60 Lo 60 25
31 dB(A) 25atdB(A)
Lo
Hi at Lo 25
33 dB(A) 25atdB(A)
Lo
Hi at Lo
pressure
pressure
pressure
N60 N60 20
40 20 40 N60 20 20
40 20 20
40 20 20
40 20 20
40 20
Level
Sound Pressure Level

-5 -5Pa)
50
60
50 50
60
50
29 dB(A) at MeNNN642000 50 60 N20 60 60
N60 50
60
28 dB(A) at MeNNN642000 60 NN6200 60 60 60
29 dB(A) at MeNNN642000 60 NN6200 60
SoundLevel
26 dB(A) at Lo 25 dB(A) at Lo 25 dB(A) at Lo

(Standard
(Standard
(Standard
Soundlevel
N50 N50 10
30 10 N50 10 30 N50 10 10
30 10 10
30 10 10
30 10 10
30 Soundlevel
10
Pa)2×10
50 63 12550 63250 125

500 2501000 5002000 1000
4000 20008000
50 4000 8000 50 50 63 12550 63
250 125
500 250
1000 500
2000 1000
4000 20008000
50 4000 8000
50 50 63 12550 63250 125500 250
1000 500
2000 1000
4000 20008000
50 4000 800050
Pressure
60 NN5300 40
60 N50 40 60 Mid Octave NN5300 60 N50 60 NN5300 60 N50
Mid octave
40Mid band
octave
frequency
band frequency
(Hz) (Hz) Mid Band
OctaveFrequency
Band Frequency
(Hz) (Hz) Mid OctaveMid Band
OctaveFrequency
Band Frequency
(Hz) (Hz)
2×10-52×10
2×10-52×10
2×10-52×10
40 40 40
20 N 60 20 20 N 60 20 20 N 60 20
Pressure
pressure
pressure
Level
N40 N40 N40 N40
level
level
40 40 N20 40 40 40 40 N20 40 40 40 40 N20 40 40

(Standard
30 50
30 30 30 N40 30 50 N40 30 50 N4 50 N40 50 N4 50 N40
N N500 10 N500 10
N30 N30 10 N3500 10 N30 10 10
(Standard
(Standard
(Standard
30 63 12530 250 30 30 30 63 12530 250 30 30 30 63 12530 250 30 30
Pressure
500 1000 2000 4000 8000 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
Sound
pressure
pressure
20 40
20 20 20 N30 20 40 20 40 N30 40 40 N30 40
Mid octave band frequency (Hz) N30 Mid Octave Band Frequency (Hz) N30 Mid Octave Band Frequency (Hz) N30
Sound Sound
Sound Sound
Sound Sound
N20 N20 N20
N 40 N20 20 N40 N40
20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
(Standard
(Standard
(Standard
10 30
10 10 10 N20 10 30 N20 10 30 N20 30 N20 30 N20 30 N20
50
63 500
125 1000
250 2000
500 4000
1000 8000
2000 4000 8000 63 125 250
63 500
125 1000
250 2000
500 4000
1000
N308000
2000 4000 8000 N30 N30
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
ve
Mid
Band
Octave
Frequency
Band Frequency
(Hz) (Hz) 20 Mid
63 20 63 125 63Octave
250 125Mid
Band
Octave
500 250
1000Frequency
Band Frequency
125 63 (Hz)
250 125 (Hz)
500 250
1000 500
2000 1000
4000 2000 20
8000 4000 8000 500
2000 1000
4000 2000 20 4000 8000
8000 20 63 125 250 63
250
1000 500 125
500
2000 1000
4000 2000 20 4000 8000
8000
(c) Duct connected-Low/Middle static pressure type (FDUM)
Mid Octave
MidBand
Octave
Frequency
Band Frequency
(Hz) (Hz) N20 Mid Octave
MidBand
Octave
Frequency
Band Frequency
(Hz)
N 20 (Hz) Mid Octave
MidBand
Octave
Frequency
Band Frequency
1m (Hz)
N 20 (Hz)
2m
10 10 10 10 10 10
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 63 Air
125 250 Unit
500 1000 2000 4000 8000
M125VH
del FDUM125VH ModelMidFDUM140VH
ModelBand
Octave FDUM140VH
Frequency (Hz) Mid OctaveMeasured
Band Frequency (Hz) Mid Return
Octave ductBand Frequency
Supply duct (Hz)
based on JIS B 8616
evel
Noise level at
45 dB(A) 45P-Hi
dB(A) at P-Hi Model FDUM100VH
Model
Noise levelFDUM100VH
Noise level at
47 dB(A) dB(A) at P-Hi Model FDUM125VH
47P-Hi Model FDUM125VH
Model FDUM140VH
Model1.5m FDUM140VH
40 dB(A) at
40Hi
dB(A) at Hi Noise level
Noise40
44level
dB(A)4440
atdB(A)
P-Hi
dB(A)atatP-Hi
Hi Hi Noise level
Noise45level
dB(A)45atdB(A)
P-Hi at P-Hi Noise level
Noise47level
dB(A)47atdB(A) P-Hi at P-Hi
34 dB(A) at
34Me
dB(A) at Me Model FDUM100VH 38
35 dB(A) 38
at
35dB(A)
Hi
Me
dB(A) atatHi
Me Model FDUM125VH 40 dB(A) 40
atdB(A)
Hi at Hi Model FDUM140VH 40 dB(A) 40atdB(A)
Hi at Hi
Model FDUM50VH Model FDUM60VH Model FDUM71VH
29 dB(A) at
29Lo
dB(A) at Lo Noise level 36
30
44 dB(A)36at
30dB(A)
Me
dB(A)atatMe
Lo
P-Hi Lo Noise level 34 dB(A)34atdB(A)
45 Me at Me
P-Hi Noise level 35 dB(A)35atdB(A)
47 Me at Me
P-Hi
Noise 60level 37 dB(A) at P-Hi 60 Noise level 36 dB(A) at P-Hi Noise level 38 dB(A) at P-Hi
60 6060 30 dB(A)30atdB(A)
38 LoN at Lo N 60
Hi 29 dB(A)29atdB(A)
40 Lo at Lo
40 Lo at Lo
Hi
N60 N60 32 dB(A) at Hi 60 60 31 dB(A) at Hi 33 dB(A) at Hi
(dB)
Pa) (dB)
60 60
36 dB(A) at Me 60 60 60 60
34 dB(A) at Me 60 60 60 60
35 dB(A) at MeN60 60 N60 60
Pa)Pa)
29 dB(A) at Me 60 50 60 28 dB(A) at MeN60 29 dB(A) at Me

(dB)
N N N60
level (dB)
50 5050 50 50
level (dB)

×10-5Pa)
(Standard 2 ×10-5Pa)
30 dB(A)
dB(A) at
at Lo
Lo 50 50 29 dB(A)
dB(A) at
at Lo
Lo 30 dB(A)
dB(A) at at Lo
Lo Pa) -5Pa)
N50 N50 N N
-5 -5
level
2×10level
50
50 50 26 50 50 50 25 50 50 50 50 25 50 50
2×10
level
60 N50 60 N50 60 N50 60 N50 60 N50 60 N50

-5
40 4040
60 40 40
60 4060 60 60 60
level(dB)
2×10
2×10-52×10
N60 N6 N6
(dB)
N600 N600
(dB)
N40 N40 N460 N40 40

pressure
pressure
Pa)
Pa)
40 40 40 40 40 40
Level
40 40 40 40 40
2×10-5-5Pa)
2 ×10-5-52Pa)
level
Soundpressure
(Standard
50 N40 50 N40 50 50 50 50
pressure
30 3030 30 30 3050 N4 N40 N4 N40

pressure
N50 N50
level
50 50 50 50 50
level
level
N50
N500 N500
(Standard
(Standard
N30 N30 N350 N30 30

(Standard
(Standard
2×10
2×10
2×10
30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30
Pressure
pressure
pressure
40 N30 40 N30 40 40 40 40
20 2020
40 20 20
40 2040 N30 40 N30 40 N30 40 N30
pressure
Sound
N
pressure
N40 N40 N40

pressure
N20 N20 N20

20 20 20 20 N20
40 20 20 N40 20 20 20 20 N40 20 20
(Standard
SoundSound
SoundSound
(Standard
(Standard
Sound
30 30
1030 N20 N20 N20 30 N20 30 N20 30 N20
(Standard
(Standard
(Standard
10 1010 10 N1 N1 10
50
63 500
125 1000
250 2000
500 4000
1000 8000
2000 4000 8000 30 63 125 250
63 8000 30
125 0 1000
500 250 500 0 4000
2000 1000 30
N308000
2000 4000 N30
30 30
N30
30
10 10 10 10 N30 10 10 N30 10 10 10 10 N30 10 10
ve
Mid
Band
Octave
Frequency
Band Frequency
(Hz) (Hz) 20 63Mid125
Octave250Mid
Band
500Octave
Frequency
Band Frequency
(Hz)800020 4000 (Hz)
Sound
63 125 250
1000 500
2000 1000
4000 2000 8000
20 63 125 63
250 125
500 250
1000 500
2000 1000
4000 2000
8000204000 8000 20 63 125 63
250 125
500 250
1000 500
2000 1000
4000 2000
8000204000 8000
Sound
Sound
20 20 20 20 20 20
Sound
Mid octave
Midband
octave
frequency
band frequency
(Hz)
N20 (Hz) N10 N20
Mid Octave
MidBand
Octave
Frequency
Band Frequency
(Hz) (Hz) N20
N20 Mid Octave
MidBand
Octave
Frequency
Band Frequency
(Hz) (Hz) N20
N20
10 10 10 10 10 10
10 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 800010 10 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 10 10 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 10
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
Mid
Mid octave
Octaveband
Bandfrequency
Frequency(Hz)
(Hz) Mid Octave
Mid Octave Band
Band Frequency
Frequency (Hz)
(Hz) Mid Octave
Mid Octave Band
Band Frequency
Frequency (Hz)
(Hz)
Unit
Model Unit
FDUM100VH Model FDUM125VH Model FDUM140VH
Unit Unit
Noise level 44 dB(A) at P-Hi Noise level 45 dB(A) at P-Hi Noise level 47 dB(A) at P-Hi
1m
1m
(d)BCeiling 1m
suspended 1mtype (FDE)
Measured Measured
based on JIS
based
B 8616
on JIS 8616 38 dB(A) at Hi 40 dB(A) at Hi 40 1m
dB(A) at Hi
1m
1m
1m
Mike position
Mikeasposition
right as right 36 dB(A) at Me Measured
Measured
based
34 dB(A) onbased
at Me JIS B on JIS B 8616 Unit
8616 35 dB(A) at Me
Mike (in front
Mike&
30(in
below
frontunit)
dB(A) &
at below
Lo unit) Mike
29position
Mikeat
dB(A) as
position
right as right
Lo 30 dB(A) at Lo
1m
1m
60 Mike (in Mike
front &
(inbelow
front &
unit)
below unit)
E60VH,
dels FDE60VH,
71VH 71VH Model FDE100VH
Model FDE100VH N60
60 60 60 Measured based onNJIS B 60 8616 60
(dB) pressure level (dB)
N60
(dB) pressure level (dB)
60

(Standard 2 ×10-5Pa)
dB(A) at P-Hi Model FDE50VH

Model FDE50VH ModelsModels
FDE60VH,FDE60VH,
71VH 71VH Model FDE100VH
Model FDE100VH
Pa) -5Pa)(Standard 2×10 Pa)
evel
Noise level at
47 dB(A) 47P-Hi 50Noise Noise
level level at
48 dB(A) 48P-Hi
dB(A) at50 P-Hi 50 50 50 50
N50 Mike (in front & below unit)
Noise level
Noise level
4346dB(A)
dB(A)at
46
43atHi
dB(A)
P-Hi
N50
at P-Hi Noise level
Noise47level
dB(A)47atdB(A)
P-Hi at P-Hi Noise level
Noise48level P-HiN50at P-Hi
dB(A)48atdB(A)
-5
41 dB(A) at
41Hi
dB(A) at Hi Hi
37 dB(A) at dB(A) at Me Model FDE50VH
37Me 40
3838dB(A)
dB(A)at
38atMe
dB(A)
HiN40 at40 Hi
Me Models FDE60VH,
40
41 dB(A)
71VH41atdB(A)
Hi N at40Hi Model FDE100VH
40
43 dB(A)43atdB(A)
Hi N at Hi40
40 40
32 dB(A) at
32Lo
dB(A) at Lo 3436dB(A)
30 Noise level 46
dB(A)at
36
34atLo
dB(A)
Me
P-Hi at30 MeLo 37 dB(A)37atdB(A)
30 Noise level 47
Me at30Me
P-Hi 38
30Noise level 48
dB(A)38atdB(A)
Me
P-Hi at Me
30
60 60 60 31 dB(A)31atdB(A)
38 Lo
Hi at
N30 60 Lo 60 32 dB(A)32atdB(A)
41 LoN30 at Lo
43 Lo N30at Lo
Hi
(dB)
N60 N60 N60 N60

2×10-5Pa)
-5Pa)
60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
20
36 dB(A) at MeNN60 5020 N60 20 37 dB(A) at MeN60 20 N60 20 38 dB(A) at MeN60 20 N60
levelSound
(dB)
level (dB)

Sound
50 50 50 50
-5Pa)
Pa) -5Pa)
Pa) -5Pa)
N10 20 N20 N20

level
N50 N50 31 dB(A) at Lo N50 N50 32 dB(A) at Lo 34 dB(A) at Lo

2×10
50
10 50 50
10 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
10 10 6010 63 6010 N50
level
level
4060 63 125 40 250 500 1000 2000 4060

4000 N508000 N50 40 60 63 125 4000N50800060 N50
250 500 1000
125 2000
250 500 1000 2000 4000N50 8000
2×10-52×10
2×10
2×10-52×10
2×10-52×10
40
level (dB)
level (dB)
level (dB)
N N60 N60
N40 60
pressure
N40 N40
40 40 Mid octave
40 40 band frequency (Hz) N40
40 Mid Octave
40 Band Frequency (Hz) 40 40 40 Mid Octave
40 Band Frequency (Hz) 40 40
(Standard
(Standard
N4 3050
3050 50 50 50 50
pressure
pressure
pressure
pressure
30 N40 30 30 N4 N40 N4 N40

N500 N500 N500
N30 N30 N30 N30
(Standard
(Standard
(Standard
(Standard
30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30
20 2040 20 N30 2040 N30 20 40 N30 40 N30 40 N30 40 N30
Sound
pressure
pressure
pressure
N20 N20 N20N40 N20 N40 N40

20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
(Standard
(Standard
(Standard
Sound Sound
Sound
Sound Sound
Sound Sound
10 1030 10 N20 1030 N20 10 30 N20 30 N20 30 N20 30 N20

50
63 500
125 1000
250 2000
500 4000
1000 8000
2000 4000 8000 63 125 250
63 500
125 1000
250 2000
500 4000
1000 N8000
32000
0
4000 8000 N30 N30
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
ave
Mid
Band
Octave
Frequency
Band Frequency
(Hz) (Hz) 20 63 125 63250 125
500 250
1000 500
2000 1000
4000 2000 Mid octaveMid
8000204000 8000 band
octave
frequency
band frequency
(Hz) (Hz) 20 63 125 63250 125
500 250
1000 500
2000 1000
4000 2000
8000204000 8000 20 63 125 63250 125
500 250
1000 500
2000 1000
4000 2000
8000204000 8000
N20
Mid Octave
MidBand
Octave
Frequency
Band Frequency
(Hz) (Hz) Mid Octave
MidBand
Octave
Frequency
N20
Band Frequency
(Hz) (Hz) Unit N20
Mid octave
Midband
octave
frequency
band frequency
(Hz) (Hz)
10 10 10 10 10 10
1m
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
1m
Mid Octave Band Frequency (Hz) Measured
Mid Octave based on(Hz)
Band Frequency JIS B 8616 Mid octave band frequency (Hz)
- 28 - Mike (in front & below unit)
Model FDE50VH Models FDE60VH, 71VH Model FDE100VH
Noise level 46 dB(A) at P-Hi Noise level 47 dB(A) at P-Hi Noise level 48 dB(A) at P-Hi
38 dB(A) at Hi 41 dB(A) at Hi 43 dB(A) at Hi
36 dB(A) at Me 37 dB(A) at Me 38 dB(A) at Me
31 dB(A) at Lo 32 dB(A) at Lo 34 dB(A) at Lo
Hi : 46Hi
N3:0 (A) Hi : 46Hi
N3:0 (A) Hi : 46Hi
dB: (A)
30 30 30 30
Heating
Heating
noise noise
level level dB 46 dB (A) Heating
Heating
noise noise
level level dB 46 dB (A) Heating
Heating
noise noise
level level 46 dB (A)
(dB) pre
(dB) pre
(standard 2×10-5Pa) (Stand
(standard 2×10-5Pa) (Stand

20 Cooling Cooling Heating 20
Heating 20 Cooling Cooling Heating 20
Heating Cooling Cooling Heating Heating
Sound pressure level Sound
Sound pressure level Sound

60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
N20 N20

N60 N60 N60 N60 N60 N60
(standard 2×10-5Pa)
10 10 10 10
50 63 50
125 250 500 1000 2000 50
4000 8000 50 50 63 50
125 250 500 1000 2000 50
4000 8000 50 50 50 50 50
N50 N50 N50 N50 N50 N50
40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40
N40 N40 N40 N40 N40 N40
30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30
N30 N30 N30 N30 '19 • PAC-DB-333
N30 N30
20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
N20 N20 N20 N20 N20 N20
( e ) 10Wall
63
mounted
10 type500(SRK)
125 63 250125 500250 1000 2000
10004000
10
20008000
4000
10
8000
10
63
10
125 63 250125 500250 1000
500 2000
10004000
10
20008000
4000
10
8000
10
63
10
125 63 250125 500250 1000
500 2000
10004000
10
20008000
4000
10
8000
Mid Octave
Mid Octave
Band Frequency
Band Frequency
Mid Octave
Band Frequency
Band Frequency
Mid Octave
Band Frequency
Band Frequency
(Hz) (Hz)
1m
0.8m
Measured based on JIS C 9612
Mike position as right Mike position
ModelModel SRK100ZR-W
SRK100ZR-W (Center & low points)
Cooling
Cooling noise noise
level level dB: (A)
Hi : 48Hi 48 dB (A)
Model Heating
Heating noise noise
level level
SRK50ZSX-W dB: (A)
Hi : 48Hi 48 dB (A) Model SRK60ZSX-W Model SRK71ZR-W
Cooling noise Cooling Hi : 44Heating
level Cooling dB (A) Heating Cooling noise level Hi : 46 dB (A) Cooling noise level Hi : 44 dB (A)
Heating noise level Hi : 46 dB Heating noise level Hi : 46 dB (A) Heating noise level Hi : 46 dB (A)
60 60 60 60
N60 (A) N60
level (dB)
Cooling Heating Cooling Heating Cooling Heating

-5Pa) Pa)
50 50 50 50
60 60 60 60 60 60
level (dB)

N50 N50
N60 N60 N60
-5
2×102×10
40 40 40 40
50 50 50 50 50 50
pressure
N
N450 N40 N50 N50
0
3.4 NOISE LEVEL

(Standard
30 30 30 30
40 40 40 40 40 40
pressure
N30 N30
N40 N40 N40
20 20 20 20
(standard
SoundSound
30 30 30 30 30 30
Notes(1) The data are based on the following conditions. N20
N30
N20
N30 N30
Ambient
10
20
air
10 temperature: Indoor unit 27℃WB. 10 Outdoor 10 unit 20
35℃DB.
63 20
125 63 250 125 500 250 1000500 200010004000200080004000 8000 20 20 20
(2) The data in the chart are measured in an anechoic N20 room. N20 N20
(3) The Midlevels
noise octave
Mid octave
band frequency
measured inband frequency
the field (Hz)
are usually(Hz)higher than10the data because of reflection.
10 10 10 10 10
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
(1) IndoorMid
units ....................................................................................
Octave Band Frequency (Hz) Mid Octave Band Frequency (Hz) SeeOctave
Mid pageBand
84. Frequency (Hz)
(2)Outdoor
(2) Outdoor units
units
Model SRK100ZR-W
Measurednoise
Cooling based level Hi : 48JIS
on ISO-T1, dBB(A)
8616
Heating noiseatlevel
Mike position: highest : 48 dB
Hi noise (A) in position as mentined below
level
Distance
60
from front side 1m Heating 60
Cooling
Height 1m N60
50 50
( iModel
) SoundFDC71VNP
power level N50
Model
40 Cooling noise level 54 dB
FDC90VNP-W 40 (A) ModelHeating noise level 54 dB (A)
FDC100VNP-W
70 N40 70 70 70
Cooling noise level 67 dB (A) Cooling noise level 68 dB (A)
(dB)level (dB)
(dB)level (dB)
N70 N70
30 30
Heating
60
noise level 66 NdB
30
(A) 60
Heating
60
noise level 67 dB (A) 60
20 Cooling Heating
20 N60 Cooling Heating
N60
80.0 N20
80.0
50 50 50 50
pressure
pressure
10 10 N50 N50
63 70.0125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 70.0
power level
power level
40 40 40 40
Mid octave band frequency (Hz) N40 N40
60.0 60.0
30 30 30 30
Sound Souud
Sound Souud
N20 N30 N20 N30

50.0 50.0
20 20 20 20
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
40.0 Mid octave band frequency (Hz) 40.0 Mid octave band frequency (Hz)
30.0 30.0
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
Mid octave band frequency (Hz) Mid octave band frequency (Hz)
Models FDC90VNP, 90VNP1
Cooling
(ii) Sound noiselevel
pressure level 57 dB (A) Heating noise level 55 dB (A)
70 70 70 70
level (dB)
(dB) level (dB)
Model FDC90VNP-W N70 Model FDC100VNP-W N70

-5Pa) 2×10-5Pa)
Cooling
60 noise level 55 dB (A) 60 Cooling
60 noise level 56 dB (A) 60
Heating noise level 53 dB (A) N60 Heating noise level 54 dB (A)
N60
50 Cooling Heating 50 50 Cooling Heating 50

2×10-5pressure
levelpressure
70 N5070 70 N50 70
N70 N70
(Standard
40 40 40 40
Pa)
60 N4060 60 N40 60
N60 N60
(standard 2×10
30 30 30 30
(standardSouud
Souud
50 N20 N3050 50 N20 N30 50

Sound pressure
N50 N50
20 20 20 20
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
40 40 40 40
Mid octave band frequency N(Hz)
40 Mid octave band frequency (Hz) N40
30 30 30 30
N20 N30 N20 N30
20 20 20 20
Model
63 FDC100VNP
125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
Mid octavenoise
Cooling band frequency
level 57 (Hz)
dB (A) Mid octave
Heating band level
noise frequency (Hz)
61 dB (A)
80 80 80 80
N80 N80
70 70 70 70
N70 N70
60 60 60 60
N60 N60
50 50 50 50
N50 N50
40 40 40 40
N30 N40 N30 N40
30 30 30 30
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
Mid octave band frequency (Hz) - 29 -

Mid octave band frequency (Hz)
'19 • PAC-DB-333
5. CHARACTERISTICS OF FAN
(1) Duct connected-High static pressure type (FDU)
・Characteristic FAN (1) shows air flow vs. External Static Pressure (E.S.P.) range where settings of E.S.P. are maximum E.S.P. (SW8-4 OFF
・Characteristic FAN (1) FAN
・Characteristic shows(1)airshows
flow vs.airExternal
flow vs. Static
External
Pressure
Static (E.S.P.)
Pressurerange
(E.S.P.)
where
range
settings
whereofsettings
E.S.P.ofareE.S.P.
maximum are maximum
E.S.P. (SW8-4
E.S.P.OFF
(SW8-4 OFF
: 150Pa, SW8-4 ON : 200Pa), rated E.S.P., and minimum E.S.P. (SW8-4 OFF : 80Pa, SW8-4 ON : 10Pa)
: 150Pa, SW8-4
: 150Pa,ON
SW8-4
: 200Pa)
ON ,:rated
200Pa) E.S.P.,
, rated
andE.S.P.,
minimum
and minimum
E.S.P. (SW8-4
E.S.P.OFF(SW8-4: 80Pa,
OFF SW8-4
: 80Pa,ON SW8-4
: 10Pa)
ON : 10Pa)
・Characteristic FAN (2) shows air flow vs E.S.P. curve when set fan tap is set P-Hi with each setting of E.S.P. by remote control.
・Characteristic FAN (2) shows
・Characteristic FAN (2)airshows
flow vsairE.S.P.
flow vscurve
E.S.P.
whencurve
set fan
when tapset
is fan
set P-Hi
tap iswith
set P-Hi
eachwith
setting
each
of setting
E.S.P.ofby E.S.P.
remoteby control.
remote control.
・External Static Pressure (E.S.P.) can be set by wired remote control.
・External Static Pressure
・External Static (E.S.P.)
Pressurecan
(E.S.P.)
be setcan
by wired
be set remote
by wiredcontrol.
remote control.
can setcan
・You・You required
・You E.S.P.
set required
can by wired
setE.S.P.
required remoteremote
by E.S.P.
wired bycontrol
wired whichwhich
control
remote calculate
control it withit
calculate
which the
withset
calculatetheair flow
itset
with ratesetand
airthe
flow air pressure
rate flow rateloss
and pressure of
andloss the
ofduct
pressure connected.
theloss
duct
ofconnected.
the duct connected.
Model FDU71VH
Model FDU100VH
Model FDU100VH
■SW8-4
■SW8-4:■SW8-4
OFF
: OFF(Range
(Rangeofof
: OFF use
uselimitation
(Range : Setting
limitation : Setting80Pa-150Pa)
of use limitation :80Pa-150Pa)
Setting 80Pa-150Pa)
Characteristic
CharacteristicFAN (1)
Characteristic
FAN (1)FAN (1) Characteristic
Characteristic FAN
Characteristic
FAN (2) (2)
(2)FAN
Range
Range of approvable
ofRange
approvable air flow
of approvable
air flow air flow
In In
case actual
case E.S.P.
actual
In case correspond
E.S.P.
actual
correspondsetting
settingofofE.S.P.
E.S.P. correspond setting
E.S.P.of E.S.P.
220220 220 220 220 220
200200 200 200 200 200
180180 180 180 180 180
160160 160 160 160 160

External static pressure (Pa)

Setting 150Pa150Pa
Setting Setting 150Pa

P-Hi
P-Hi P-Hi
150Pa 150Pa
140140 140 140 140 140 140Pa150 140Pa
Pa
Setting 120Pa 140
120120 120 P-Hi
P-Hi P-Hi 120 120 120 Pa
Setting 120Pa
Setting 120Pa 120Pa 120Pa
120
Pa
100100 100 100 100 100 100P1a00 100Pa
Hi
Hi Hi Pa
P-Hi
P-Hi P-Hi 80Pa80Pa80Pa
80 80 80 Hi Hi 80 80 80
Me Hi Me
Me
60 60 60
Me Me 60 60 60
Setting 80Pa
Setting Setting 80Pa
Lo Me Lo HiHi Hi
40 40 40
Me Me
40 40 40
Lo Lo Lo
Me
Lo Lo 20 20 20
20 20 20
Lo Lo
0 0 0 0 0 0
5 10 15
1010 2015
15 2520 20
3025 3530
25 4035 304540 45 32 2133 32 34
2233 35 23
34 36 3524
37 36 38
2537 39 38
26 40 39 27 40
36
24 36
AirAir flow
(m(m
Air/min)
flow (m3/min) Air flow Air3/min)
Air (m flow (m3/min)
3
flow 3/min) flow (m3/min)
■SW8-4 : ON
■SW8-4
■SW8-4 (Range
: ON : ONof
(Range(Range
useuse
of limitation
of use limitation
: Setting
limitation :10Pa-200Pa)
: SettingSetting 10Pa-200Pa)
10Pa-200Pa)
Characteristic
Characteristic
FAN (1)
Characteristic FAN (1) FAN (1) Characteristic
Characteristic
FAN (2)
Characteristic FAN(2)
FAN (2)
Range ofRange
Range approvable
of approvable
air flow
of approvable air flow
air flow
In case
In case actual
In case
actual E.S.P.
actual
E.S.P. correspond
E.S.P. correspond
correspond setting
setting ofofsetting
E.S.P.of E.S.P.
E.S.P.
220
220 220 220 220 220
P-Hi P-Hi P-Hi

200200 200 200 200 200 200Pa 200Pa
Setting 200Pa
Setting 200Pa
2
180
180
180 180
180
180 180Pa 00P18
a 0Pa
Setting 200Pa
160 160 160 160 18
160 160 160Pa 0P16
a 0Pa

140 140 Setting 120Pa 140 140 16

140 Setting 120Pa
Setting 120Pa 140 140Pa 0P1a40Pa
Hi
Hi Hi P-Hi
P-Hi P-Hi
120 120 120 120 1
120 120 120Pa 40P1a20Pa
100 100 100 100 1

100 Me Me 100 100Pa 20P1a00Pa
80 80 Hi Hi 80 80 10
80 Me Setting 60Pa
Setting 60Pa 80 80Pa 0Pa80Pa
Hi Setting 60Pa
Me Me P-Hi P-Hi
60 60 Lo Lo P-Hi 60 60 80P
60 60 60Pa a60
Pa
Me Hi Hi
40 40 Hi 40 40 60P
40 Lo Lo MeLo Me 40 40Pa a40
Setting 10Pa
Setting 10Pa Pa
20 20 Lo Lo
Me Setting 10PaP-Hi 20 20 10Pa 10P2a0Pa 20Pa
20 Hi Hi P-Hi 20 10P 20P 40P
Lo Me Me P-Hi a a a
Lo Lo Hi
0 Lo 0 Me 0 0
0 10 15Lo
10 2015 2520 3025 3530 4035 4540 45 32 0 33 32 34 33 35 34 36 35 37 36 38 37 39 38 40 39 40
5 10 15 20 36
25 3630 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
Air flow (m
Air3/min) 243/min)
flow (m Air flow (mAir/min)
3 flow (m /min)
3
Air flow (m /min)

3 Air flow (m3/min)
- 30 -
Pa Pa
External static pr
External static pr
Up r
per
g 0
0
External static p
External static p
pe
ttin 10
10
30 30
Me Me
50 50 Pa Pa
Up
Se g
50 50
f E .P.
.
.P
ttin
it o .S
.S
Se
im f E
2 2
40 40 0Pa0Pa
r l it o
40 40 P-Hi
P-Hi
we im
Setting
Setting
40Pa
40Pa 10 10
Lo r l
Pa Pa
we
30 30 Hi Hi 30 30 (M (M
Lo
Lo Lo in. in. '19 • PAC-DB-333
) )
20 20 Me Me 20 20
Setting
Setting
10Pa
10Pa
Lo Lo P-Hi
P-Hi
(2) Duct
10 10 connected-Low / Middle
Hi Hi static pressure type (FDUM)10 10
OFF Lo,Me
Lo,Me
・Characteristic FAN (1) shows air flow vs. External Static Pressure (E.S.P.) range where settings of E.S.P. are maximum E.S.P. (100Pa) ,
0 0
　rated E.S.P.,
0 0
10 10and minimum
14 14 E.S.P.18 18(10Pa) 22 22 26 26 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27
・Characteristic FAN (2) shows air flow vs E.S.P. curve when set fan tap is set P-Hi with each setting of E.S.P by remote control.
Air Air
flow
flow
(m (m
3
/min)
3
/min)
・External Static Pressure (E.S.P.) can be set by wired remote control. AirAir
flowflow
(m3(m
/min)
3
/min)
・You can set required E.S.P. by wired remote control which calculate it with the set air flow rate and pressure loss of the duct connected.
Models FDUM40VH, 50VH
Characteristic FAN(1) Characteristic FAN(2)
Model
Model
FDUM100VH
FDUM100VH
In case actual E.S.P. correspond to setting of E.S.P. Range of approvable air flow rate
Characteristic
CharacteristicFAN(1)
FAN(1) Characteristic
Characteristic
FAN(2)
FAN(2)
110 110 Range
Range
of approvable
of approvable
air air
flowflow
raterate
In case actual
In case E.S.P.
actual correspond
E.S.P. to setting
correspond of E.S.P.
to setting of E.S.P.
110110
100 100 110
10110
0P
a (M
P-Hi P-Hi
P-Hi ax
100100 100100 .) 100100
90 90 90 Pa Pa
Hi Pa (Ma(Ma
x.) x.)
90 90 90 90
g 1 Pa
Pa
S.P.
70P
ng. .S.P.
80
ttin 100
00
80 80 a Pa 90P90P
(Pa)

a a
of E.
80 80 80 80
(Pa)
60P
E
er li f E P.
tt.iP

a
Low it o E.S.
it e.oSf
70 70 80P80P
pressure
e
Up pper limit
mS
S
70 70 50P a a
m a
staticpressure
70 70
r 1li 00Pof
E. P.
P.
Me Hi Hi a
of .
S.
ipneg it
it E.S
SeUtpt r lim
60 60 70P70P
60 60
im f
60 60 a a
rl to
P-Hi
P-Hi 40P
U
pe
a 60 60
i
we lim
Me Me Pa Pa
(ra (ra
Externalstatic
Lo r
5050 50
we
50 50 50
30P ted ted
) )
Lo
a
a a 50 50
External
40
4040 Lo Hi Hi 60P60P 40 40 40
20P Pa Pa
g g P-Hi
a
Me Me e ttinettin 40 40
30 S S
3030 Lo Lo Hi 30 30 30
10 Pa(
Pa Pa
Me Setting 40Pa M i n.1) 0P10P 30 30
20 20 P-Hi
P-Hi 20 20 a(Ma(M 2 2 Pa Pa
20 Lo Lo
Lo 20 in.) in.) 0Pa0Pa
Setting
Setting10Pa 10PaP-Hi
10 10 Setting
MeHi Hi 10Pa 10 10
10 Lo LoMe 10
Hi
0 0 Lo,Me
0 0
016 16 20 20 24 24 28 28 32 32 36 36 40 40 44 44 0 32 3233 3334 3435 3536 3637 3738 3839 3940 40
6 8 AirAir10
flow (m312
flow (m /min)14
/min)
3 16 10.5 11 12AirAir
flow 13
flow
(m3(m
/min)
3 14 14.5
/min)
Air flow (m3/min) Air flow (m3/min)
Model FDUM60VH
Characteristic FAN(1) Characteristic FAN(2)
In case actual E.S.P. correspond to setting of E.S.P. Range of approvable air flow rate
110 110
100 100 100P

P-Hi a (M
ax .)
90 90 80Pa 90Pa
P.
70Pa
80 80
.S.
fE
a
0P
it o
60Pa
.
70
.P
70
10
Hi
r lim
.S
ing
fE
50Pa
pe
tt
to
60 60
Se
Up
limi
40Pa
er
50 50
w
Me
Lo
30Pa
40 40
P-Hi
Lo 20Pa
30 Hi Setting 40Pa 30
10P
a(M
i n.)
20 Me 20
P-Hi
Lo Setting 10Pa
10 Hi 10
Lo,Me
0 0
10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 18 19 20 21 22
Air flow (m3/min) Air flow (m3/min)
- 31 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
6. TEMPERATURE AND VELOCITY DISTRIBUTION
Indoor temperature
Cooling 27°CDB / 19°CWB
Heating 20°CDB
Note: These figures represent the typical main range of temperature and velocity distribution at the center of air outlet
within the published conditions.
In the actual installation, they may differ from the typical figures under the influence of air temperature conditions,
ceiling height, operation conditions and obstacles.
Model FDT100VH
Cooling Air flow: P-Hi Temperature distribution (℃)
Louver position 5m 5m
15 15
18 18
4m 4m
21 21
3m 3m
20° 24 24
2m 2m
1m 1m
0m 0m
5m 4m 3m 2m 1m 0m 1m 2m 3m 4m 5m
Velocity distribution
(m/sec)
5m 5m
4m 4m
0.6 0.6
0.3 0.3
3m 3m
2m 2m
1m 1m
0m 0m
5m 4m 3m 2m 1m 0m 1m 2m 3m 4m 5m
Heating Air flow: P-Hi Temperature distribution

Louver position 5m
(℃)
5m
4m 35 4m
35
32 32 3m
60° 3m
23 23
29 29
26 26
2m 2m
1m 1m
0m 0m
5m 4m 3m 2m 1m 0m 1m 2m 3m 4m 5m
(m/sec)
5m 5m
4m 4m
3m 3m
0.9 0.9
2m 2m
0.6 0.6
1m 1m
0.3 0.3
0m 0m
5m 4m 3m 2m 1m 0m 1m 2m 3m 4m 5m
- 32 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333

Model FDE100VH
Cooling Air flow：　P-Hi
Louver position Temperature distribution
（℃）
3m 3m
15
5° 18
21
2m
24 2m
1m 1m
0m 0m
0m 1m 2m 3m 4m 5m 6m 7m 8m
（m/sec）
3m 3m
2.0
1.5
1.0
2m 0.5 2m
1m 1m
0m 0m
0m 1m 2m 3m 4m 5m 6m 7m 8m
Heating Air flow：　P-Hi

Temperature distribution
Louver position （℃）
3m 3m
45° 2m 2m
35
1m 32 1m
23
29 26
0m 0m
0m 1m 2m 3m 4m 5m 6m 7m 8m
（m/sec）
3m 3m
2m 2m
1m 2.0 1m
0.5
1.5 1.0
0m 0m
0m 1m 2m 3m 4m 5m 6m 7m 8m
- 33 -
exchanger) Receiver (TH1)
(Thi-R1) Service valve Capillary tube
(Flaare connecting) Electronic
Temperature sensor expansion valve
(Heat Liquid pipe (EEV)
exchanger) (φ6.35) Capillary tube
(Thi-R2)
Strainer Strainer
Reducer
(Accessory)
'19 • PAC-DB-333
7. PIPING SYSTEM
Indoor unit Outdoor unit
Cooling cycle Heating cycle
Model 90, 100
Service valve Outdoor air
(1) FDT,FDU,FDUM,FDE series Gas pipe (Flare connecting) temperature sensor
(φ15.88) Muffler (TH2)
Indoor unit Outdoor unit Cooling cycle Heating cycle
Temperature sensor Service valve Outdoor air
(Heat Gas pipe (Flare connecting) temperature sensor
exchanger)
(φ15.88) Discharge pipe (TH2)
(Thi-R3) Check joint temperature sensor
Accumulator
Temperature sensor Discharge pipe (TH3)
Temperature sensor
(Heat (Return air) temperature sensor Accumlator
exchanger) (Thi-A) (TH3) Heat
Check joint exchanger
(Thi-R3) 4-way valve Muffler
Temperature sensor Heat
(Return air) Heat 4-way valve Muffler exchanger
(Thi-A) exchanger Capillary
Accumulator
tube Heat
Temperature sensor Compressor exchanger
Heat (Heat temperature sensor
exchanger exchanger) (TH1)
Compressor
Service valve
(Thi-R1) Capillary tube
(Flare connecting) Electronic
Temperature sensor Temperature sensor Accumulator Heat
expansion valve
(Heat Liquid pipe exchanger
(Heat (EEV) temperature sensor
exchanger) exchanger) (φ9.52)
Service valve Capillary tube (TH1)
(Thi-R1) (Thi-R2)
Strainer Strainer
(Thi-R2)
Strainer Strainer
Reducer
(Accessory)
Preset point of the protective devices
Parts name Mark Equipped unit FDT,FDU,FDUM,FDE series
Temperature sensor (for protection overloading in heating) OFF 63℃ , ON 56℃

Thi-R1 or
Indoor unit
Thi-R2
Temperature sensor (for frost prevention) OFF 1.0℃ , ON 10℃
Temperature sensor (for protection high pressure in cooling) TH1 OFF 63℃ , ON 50℃
Outdoor unit
Temperature sensor (for detecting discharge pipe temperature) TH3 OFF 115℃ , ON 95℃
- 34 -
exchanger) Receiver (TH1)
(Thi-R1) Service valve Capillary tube
(Flaare connecting) Electronic
(Thi-R2)
Strainer Strainer
Reducer
(Accessory)
'19 • PAC-DB-333
Indoor unit Outdoor unit

(2) SRK90,
series Cooling cycle Heating cycle
Model 100
Service valve Outdoor air
Gas pipe (Flare connecting) temperature sensor
(φ15.88) Muffler (TH2)
Indoor unit Outdoor unit Cooling cycle Heating cycle
Temperature sensor Service valve Outdoor air
(Heat Gas pipe (Flare connecting) temperature sensor
exchanger) Discharge pipe (TH2)
(φ15.88) Check joint temperature sensor
(Thi-R3) Accumulator
Temperature sensor (TH3)
Discharge pipe
Humidity (Return air) temperature sensor Accumlator
sensor (Thi-A) (TH3) Heat
Check joint exchanger
(Th3) 4-way valve Muffler
Heat exchanger Heat
temperature sensor Heat 4-way valve Muffler exchanger
(Th22) exchanger Capillary
Accumulator
tube Heat
Temperature sensor Compressor exchanger
(Heat temperature sensor
Heat
exchanger exchanger) (TH1)
Compressor
Service valve
(Thi-R1) Capillary tube
Room Temperature sensor Accumulator Heat
expansion valve
(Heat Liquid pipe exchanger
temperature (EEV) temperature sensor
sensor exchanger) (φ9.52)
Service valve Capillary tube (TH1)
(Th1) (Thi-R2)
Heat expansion valve
Strainer Strainer
exchanger Liquid pipe (EEV)
temperature sensor (φ6.35) Capillary tube
(Th21)
Strainer Strainer
Reducer
(Accessory)
Preset point of the protective devices
Parts name Mark Equipped unit SRK series
Temperature sensor (for protection overloading in heating) OFF 51.5-58℃ , ON 48.5℃

Th21 or
Indoor unit
Th22
Temperature sensor (for frost prevention) OFF 2.5℃ , ON 8℃
Temperature sensor (for protection high pressure in cooling) TH1 OFF 63℃ , ON 50℃
Outdoor unit
Temperature sensor (for detecting discharge pipe temperature) TH3 OFF 115℃ , ON 95℃
- 35 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
8. RANGE
8. RANGE OFOF USAGE
USAGE & LIMITATIONS
& LIMITATIONS
Seepage.
See next next page.
Operating
Operating temperature
temperature range range
When When used below
used below -5˚C, install
-5˚C, install a snow a snow hood (prepared
hood (prepared on site).
on site).
Considering
Considering to get to get sufficient
sufficient heating
heating capacity,
capacity, thewhere
the area area where the averaged
the averaged lowestlowest ambient
ambient
Recommendable
Recommendable area toarea to install
install
air temperature
air temperature in dayintime
dayduring
time during
winterwinter is above
is above 0˚C,it and
0˚C, and has itnohas no accumulation
accumulation of snow.
of snow.
The limitations
The limitations of installation
of installation spacespace are shown
are shown in the in the for
page page for exterior
exterior dimensions.
dimensions.
Installation
Installation site site
InstallInstall the indoor
the indoor unit atunit at2.5m
least least higher
2.5m higher than
than the thesurface.
floor floor surface.
Temperature
Temperature and humidity
and humidity conditions
conditions surrounding the theModelModel
surrounding FDE,: SRK
FDE, SRK Dew: point
Dewtemperature
point temperature
: 23˚C :or23˚C
less,orrelative
less, relative hummdity
hummdity : 80% :or
80%
lessor less
indoorindoor unit (Note
unit (Note 2) 2) Other Other
modelsmodels
: Dew :point
Dewtemperature
point temperature
: 28˚C :or28˚C
less,orrelative
less, relative hummdity
hummdity : 80% :or
80%
lessor less
Limitations
Limitations on unitonand
unitpiping
and piping installation
installation See page page 38.
See 38.
Compressor Cycle Cycle

Time Time 13 minutes
13 minutes or (from
or more more OFF
(fromtoOFF to or
OFF) OFF) or ON
(from (from
toON
ON)to ON)
Compressor
ON-OFF
ON-OFF cycling
cycling Stop Time
Stop Time 3 minutes
3 minutes or more
or more
Voltage
Voltage range range RatingRating
±10%±10%
PowerPower
sourcesource Voltage
Voltage drop
drop at at start-up
start-up Min.85%
Min.85% of rating
of rating
Phase-to-phase
Phase-to-phase imbalance
imbalance 3% or3%
lessor less
Note
Note 1. Do1. notDo not install
install the unit theinunit in places
places whichwhich
: :
1) Flammable
1) Flammable gas may gasleak.
may leak.
2) Carbon
2) Carbon fiber, metal
fiber, metal particles,
particles, powder, powder,
etc. areetc. are floating.
floating.
3) Cosmetic
3) Cosmetic or special
or special sprayssprays
are usedare frequently.
used frequently.
4) Exposed
4) Exposed to oil splashes
to oil splashes or steam
or steam (e.g. kitchen
(e.g. kitchen and machine
and machine plant).plant).
5) Exposed
5) Exposed to seato sea breeze
breeze (e.g. coastal
(e.g. coastal area) orarea) or calcium
calcium chloridechloride (e.g. snow
(e.g. snow melting
melting agent).agent).
6) Exposed
6) Exposed to ammonia
to ammonia substance
substance (e.g. organic
(e.g. organic fertilizer).
fertilizer).
7) Matters
7) Matters affectingaffecting
devices,devices,
such assuch as sulfuric
sulfuric gas, chlorine
gas, chlorine gas, alkali,
gas, acid, acid, alkali, etc.generate
etc. may may generate or accumulate.
or accumulate.
8) Chimney
8) Chimney smokesmoke is hanging.
is hanging.
9) Sucking
9) Sucking the exhaust
the exhaust gas fromgasheat
fromexchanger.
heat exchanger.
10) Adjacent
10) Adjacent to equipment
to equipment generating
generating electromagnetic
electromagnetic waveswaves
or highorfrequency
high frequency
waves.waves.
11) There
11) There is lightisbeams
light beams that affect
that affect the receiving
the receiving devicedevice of indoor
of indoor unit inunit
case inof
case
the of the wireless
wireless specification.
specification.
12) Snow
12) Snow falls heavily.
falls heavily.
13) At13) At an elevation
an elevation of 1000 of meters
1000 meters or higher.
or higher.
14) On14) On mobile
mobile machine machine (e.g. vehicle,
(e.g. vehicle, ship, etc.)
ship, etc.)
15) Splashed
15) Splashed with water
with water to indoor
to indoor unitlaundry
unit (e.g. (e.g. laundry
room).room).
Note
Note 2. 2. If ambient
If ambient temperature
temperature and humidity
and humidity exceed exceed the above
the above conditions,
conditions, add polyurethane
add polyurethane foam insulation
foam insulation on theon the plate
outer outer (10mm
plate (10mm or thicker)
or thicker) of of
indoorindoor
unit. unit.
Note
Note 3. Both3. gas
Bothandgasliquid
and liquid
pipes pipes
need toneed to be coverd
be coverd with 20mm
with 20mm or thicker
or thicker heat insulation
heat insulation materials
materials at the at the place
place wherewhere humidity
humidity exceedsexceeds
70%. 70%.
RCA001Z871
- 36 -
'19
'19• PAC-DB-311D
• PAC-DB-311D
'19 • PAC-DB-333
Operating
Operatingtemperature
temperaturerange
range
■■Cooling
Cooling
Outdoor air temperature (℃DB)
5050
46℃DB
46℃DB
4040
3030 Usage
Usagerange
rangeinincooling
cooling
2020
1010
00
-10
-10
-15℃DB
-15℃DB
-20
-20
1010 1212 1414 1616 1818 2020 2222 2424 2626
Indoor
Indoorair
airtemperature
temperature(℃WB)
(℃WB)
■■Heating
Heating
Indoor air temperature (℃DB)
3030
2525
2020 Usage
Usagerange
rangeininheating
heating
1515
1010
55
-20
-20 -15
-15 -10
-10 -5-5 00 55 1010 1515 2020 2525
Outdoor
Outdoorair
airtemperature
temperature(℃WB)
(℃WB)
Decline
Decline
inin
cooling
cooling
and
andheating
heatingcapacity
capacity
oror
operation
operationstop
stop
may
mayoccur
occur when
when the
the
outdoor
outdoor
unit
unit
isis
installed
installed
inin
places
places
where
wherenatural
natural
wind
wind
cancan
increase
increase
oror
decrease
decreaseitsits
design
design
airair
flow
flow
rate.
rate.
PJF000Z871
PJF000Z871
PCA001Z871
“CAUTION”
“CAUTION” Cooling
Cooling operation
operation under
under lowlowoutdoor
outdoor airair
temperature
temperature conditions
conditions
PACPAC models
models cancanbebeoperated
operated in in
cooling
cooling mode
mode at at
lowlowoutdoor
outdoor airair
temperature
temperature condition
condition within
within above
above temperature
temperature range.
range.
However
However in in
case
case
ofof severely
severely lowlow temperature
conditions if if
thethefollowing
following precaution
precaution is is
notnot
observed,
observed, it it
may may notnot
bebeoperated
operated in in
spite
spite
ofofoperable
operable
temperature
temperature range
range mentioned
mentioned above
above andand cooling
cooling capacity
capacity maymay notnot
bebe established
established under
under certain
certain conditions.
conditions.
[Precaution]
[Precaution]
InIncase
caseofofseverely
severely lowlow
temperature
temperature condition
condition
1)1)Install
Install
thetheoutdoor
outdoor unit
unitat at
thetheplace
place where
where strong
strong wind
wind cannot
cannot blowblow directly
directly
into
intothethe
outdoor
outdoor unit.
unit.
2)2)If If
there
thereis is
nonoinstallation
installation place
place where
where can
can prevent
prevent strong
strong wind
wind from
from directly
directly
blowing
blowing into
intothetheoutdoor
outdoor unit,
unit,
mount
mount thethe
flex
flex
flow
flow
adapter
adapter (prepared
(prepared asasoptional
optional part)
part)oror
like
likesuchsuchdevices
devices onto
onto thetheoutdoor
outdoor unit
unitin in
order
orderto todivert
divertthethe
strong
strong wind.
wind.
[Reason]
[Reason]
Under
Under thethe
lowlowoutdoor
outdoor airair
temperature
conditions ofof
-5℃-5℃oror lower,
lower, thethe
outdoor
outdoor fanfan
is is
controlled
controlled at at
lower
lower oror
lowest
lowest speed
speedbybyoutdoor
outdoor
fanfan
control,
control, butbutif if
strong
strongwind
wind directly
directly blow
blowintointothethe
outdoor
outdoor unit,
unit,thetheoutdoor
outdoor heat
heatexchanger
exchanger temperature
temperature will
will
drop
dropmore.
more.
This
This
makes
makes high
high andandlow
lowpressures
pressures to to
drop
dropasaswell.
well. This
Thislowlowpressure
pressure drop
dropmakes
makes thetheindoor
indoor heat
heatexchanger
exchanger temperature
temperature to to
drop
dropandand
will
will
activate
activate anti-frost
anti-frost control
control at at
indoor
indoor heat
heatexchanger
exchanger at at
frequent
frequent intervals,
intervals,that
that
cooling
cooling operation
operation maymaynotnotbebeestablished
established forfor
any
any
given
giventime.
time.
--32
32--
- 37 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
Limitation on unit and piping installation
FDC90,100VNP-W
PJF000Z317
PCA001Z871
PCA001Z871
- 38 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
9. SELECTION CHART
Correct the cooling and heating capacity in accordance with the operating conditions. The net cooling and heating capacity can be
obtained in the following way.
Net capacity = Capacity shown in the capacity tables (9.1) × Correction factors shown in the table (9.2) (9.3) (9.4).
Caution: In case that the cooling operation during low outdoor air temperature below -5°C is expected, install the outdoor unit
where it is not influenced by natural wind. Otherwise protection control by low pressure will be activated much more
frequently and it will cause insufficient capacity or breakdown of the compressor in worst case.
9.1 Capacity tables

Model FDT90VNPWVH Indoor unit FDT100VH Outdoor unit FDC90VNP-W
Cooling mode (kW) Heating mode : HC (kW)
Indoor air temperature Outdoor Indoor air temperature
Outdoor
18 ℃DB 21 ℃DB 23 ℃DB 26 ℃DB 27 ℃DB 28 ℃DB 31 ℃DB 33 ℃DB air temp.
air temp.
12 ℃WB 14 ℃WB 16 ℃WB 18 ℃WB 19 ℃WB 20 ℃WB 22 ℃WB 24 ℃WB 16 18 20 22 24
-14.5 -15 4.92 4.85 4.78 4.72 4.65
11 -13.5 -14 5.11 5.04 4.97 4.90 4.84
13 -11.5 -12 5.48 5.41 5.35 5.28 5.21
15 -9.5 -10 5.86 5.79 5.72 5.65 5.58
17 -7.5 -8 6.23 6.16 6.09 6.02 5.94
19 -5.5 -6 6.64 6.57 6.49 6.41 6.33
21 -3.0 -4 7.05 6.97 6.89 6.80 6.72
23 -1.0 -2 7.45 7.37 7.29 7.20 7.10
25 1.0 0 7.86 7.77 7.68 7.59 7.49
27 2.0 1 8.06 7.97 7.88 7.78 7.68
29 3.0 2 8.26 8.18 8.11 8.01 7.91
31 5.0 4 8.64 8.60 8.55 8.46 8.37
33 7.0 6 9.03 9.02 9.00 8.91 8.82
35 9.0 8 9.50 9.46 9.41 9.37 9.32
37 11.5 10 9.97 9.90 9.82 9.82 9.82
39 13.5 12 10.39 10.38 10.36 10.35 10.35
41 15.5 14 10.82 10.86 10.89 10.88 10.87
43 16.5 16 11.24 11.34 11.43 11.41 11.39
46
PJF000Z588 D
Model FDT100VNPWVH Indoor unit FDT100VH Outdoor unit FDC100VNP-W

Outdoor
air temp.
-14.5 -15 5.46 5.40 5.33 5.26 5.18
11 -13.5 -14 5.68 5.61 5.54 5.47 5.39
13 -11.5 -12 6.10 6.03 5.96 5.88 5.81
15 -9.5 -10 6.52 6.45 6.38 6.30 6.22
17 -7.5 -8 6.95 6.87 6.79 6.71 6.63
19 -5.5 -6 7.39 7.32 7.25 7.16 7.07
21 -3.0 -4 7.84 7.77 7.70 7.61 7.51
23 -1.0 -2 8.29 8.22 8.15 8.05 7.95
25 1.0 0 8.74 8.67 8.60 8.50 8.39
27 2.0 1 8.96 8.90 8.83 8.72 8.61
29 3.0 2 9.18 9.12 9.06 8.96 8.86
31 5.0 4 9.60 9.57 9.53 9.44 9.35
33 7.0 6 10.03 10.01 10.00 9.92 9.85
35 9.0 8 10.51 10.51 10.51 10.46 10.41
37 11.5 10 10.99 11.00 11.02 10.99 10.97
39 13.5 12 11.24 11.28 11.31 11.29 11.27
41 15.5 14 11.50 11.55 11.60 11.58 11.56
43 16.5 16 11.75 11.82 11.89 11.87 11.85
46
Notes(1) These data show average statuses.
Note(1) Depending on the system control, there may be ranges where the operation is not conducted continuously.
Note(1) These data show the case where the operation frequency of a compressor is fixed.(Cooling only)
(2) Capacities are based on the following conditions.
(2) Corresponding refrigerant piping length :7.5m PJF000Z588 D
(2) Level difference of Zero.
(3) Symbols are as follows.
TC : Total cooling capacity (kW)
SHC : Sensible heat capacity (kW)
HC : Heating capacity (kW)
- 39 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
(2) Duct connected-High static pressure type (FDU)

Model FDU90VNPWVH Indoor unit FDU100VH Outdoor unit FDC90VNP-W
Outdoor
air temp.
-14.5 -15 4.92 4.85 4.78 4.72 4.65
11 -13.5 -14 5.11 5.04 4.97 4.90 4.84
13 -11.5 -12 5.48 5.41 5.35 5.28 5.21
15 -9.5 -10 5.86 5.79 5.72 5.65 5.58
17 -7.5 -8 6.23 6.16 6.09 6.02 5.94
19 -5.5 -6 6.64 6.57 6.49 6.41 6.33
21 -3.0 -4 7.05 6.97 6.89 6.80 6.72
23 -1.0 -2 7.45 7.37 7.29 7.20 7.10
25 1.0 0 7.86 7.77 7.68 7.59 7.49
27 2.0 1 8.06 7.97 7.88 7.78 7.68
29 3.0 2 8.26 8.18 8.11 8.01 7.91
31 5.0 4 8.64 8.60 8.55 8.46 8.37
33 7.0 6 9.03 9.02 9.00 8.91 8.82
35 9.0 8 9.50 9.46 9.41 9.37 9.32
37 11.5 10 9.97 9.90 9.82 9.82 9.82
39 13.5 12 10.39 10.38 10.36 10.35 10.35
41 15.5 14 10.82 10.86 10.89 10.88 10.87
43 16.5 16 11.24 11.34 11.43 11.41 11.39
46
PJG000Z649 C
Model FDU100VNPWVH Indoor unit FDU100VH Outdoor unit FDC100VNP-W

Outdoor
air temp.
-14.5 -15 5.46 5.40 5.33 5.26 5.18
11 -13.5 -14 5.68 5.61 5.54 5.47 5.39
13 -11.5 -12 6.10 6.03 5.96 5.88 5.81
15 -9.5 -10 6.52 6.45 6.38 6.30 6.22
17 -7.5 -8 6.95 6.87 6.79 6.71 6.63
19 -5.5 -6 7.39 7.32 7.25 7.16 7.07
21 -3.0 -4 7.84 7.77 7.70 7.61 7.51
23 -1.0 -2 8.29 8.22 8.15 8.05 7.95
25 1.0 0 8.74 8.67 8.60 8.50 8.39
27 2.0 1 8.96 8.90 8.83 8.72 8.61
29 3.0 2 9.18 9.12 9.06 8.96 8.86
31 5.0 4 9.60 9.57 9.53 9.44 9.35
33 7.0 6 10.03 10.01 10.00 9.92 9.85
35 9.0 8 10.51 10.51 10.51 10.46 10.41
37 11.5 10 10.99 11.00 11.02 10.99 10.97
39 13.5 12 11.24 11.28 11.31 11.29 11.27
41 15.5 14 11.50 11.55 11.60 11.58 11.56
43 16.5 16 11.75 11.82 11.89 11.87 11.85
46

Note(1) Depending on the system control, there may be ranges where the operation is not conducted continuously. PJG000Z649 C
Note(1) These data show the case where the operation frequency of a compressor is same as nominal condition frequency
or follows the protection controls.
(2) Corresponding refrigerant piping length :7.5m
(2) Level difference : 0m
(2) Indoor fan speed : PHi
TC : Total cooling capacity (kW), SHC : Sensible heat capacity (kW), HC : Heating capacity (kW)
- 40 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
(3) Duct connected-Low/Middle static pressure type (FDUM)

Model FDUM90VNPWVH Indoor unit FDUM100VH Outdoor unit FDC90VNP-W
Cooling ｍode (kW) Heating ｍode : HC (kW)
Outdoor
air temp.
-14.5 -15 4.92 4.85 4.78 4.72 4.65
11 -13.5 -14 5.11 5.04 4.97 4.90 4.84
13 -11.5 -12 5.48 5.41 5.35 5.28 5.21
15 -9.5 -10 5.86 5.79 5.72 5.65 5.58
17 -7.5 -8 6.23 6.16 6.09 6.02 5.94
19 -5.5 -6 6.64 6.57 6.49 6.41 6.33
21 -3.0 -4 7.05 6.97 6.89 6.80 6.72
23 -1.0 -2 7.45 7.37 7.29 7.20 7.10
25 1.0 0 7.86 7.77 7.68 7.59 7.49
27 2.0 1 8.06 7.97 7.88 7.78 7.68
29 3.0 2 8.26 8.18 8.11 8.01 7.91
31 5.0 4 8.64 8.60 8.55 8.46 8.37
33 7.0 6 9.03 9.02 9.00 8.91 8.82
35 9.0 8 9.50 9.46 9.41 9.37 9.32
37 11.5 10 9.97 9.90 9.82 9.82 9.82
39 13.5 12 10.39 10.38 10.36 10.35 10.35
41 15.5 14 10.82 10.86 10.89 10.88 10.87
43 16.5 16 11.24 11.34 11.43 11.41 11.39
46
PJG000Z623 D
Model FDUM100VNPWVH Indoor unit FDUM100VH Outdoor unit FDC100VNP-W

Outdoor
air temp.
-14.5 -15 5.46 5.40 5.33 5.26 5.18
11 -13.5 -14 5.68 5.61 5.54 5.47 5.39
13 -11.5 -12 6.10 6.03 5.96 5.88 5.81
15 -9.5 -10 6.52 6.45 6.38 6.30 6.22
17 -7.5 -8 6.95 6.87 6.79 6.71 6.63
19 -5.5 -6 7.39 7.32 7.25 7.16 7.07
21 -3.0 -4 7.84 7.77 7.70 7.61 7.51
23 -1.0 -2 8.29 8.22 8.15 8.05 7.95
25 1.0 0 8.74 8.67 8.60 8.50 8.39
27 2.0 1 8.96 8.90 8.83 8.72 8.61
29 3.0 2 9.18 9.12 9.06 8.96 8.86
31 5.0 4 9.60 9.57 9.53 9.44 9.35
33 7.0 6 10.03 10.01 10.00 9.92 9.85
35 9.0 8 10.51 10.51 10.51 10.46 10.41
37 11.5 10 10.99 11.00 11.02 10.99 10.97
39 13.5 12 11.24 11.28 11.31 11.29 11.27
41 15.5 14 11.50 11.55 11.60 11.58 11.56
43 16.5 16 11.75 11.82 11.89 11.87 11.85
46
Note(1) Depending on the system control, there may be ranges where the operation is not conducted continuously. PJG000Z623 D
Note(1) These data show the case where the operation frequency of a compressor is same as nominal condition frequency
Note(1) or follows the protection controls.
Note(1) Corresponding refrigerant piping length :7.5m
Note(1) Level difference : 0m
Note(1) Indoor fan speed : PHi
TC : Total cooling capacity (kW), SHC : Sensible heat capacity (kW), HC : Heating capacity (kW)
- 41 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333

Model FDE90VNPWVH Indoor unit FDE100VH Outdoor unit FDC90VNP-W
Outdoor
air temp.
-14.5 -15 4.92 4.85 4.78 4.72 4.65
11 -13.5 -14 5.11 5.04 4.97 4.90 4.84
13 -11.5 -12 5.48 5.41 5.35 5.28 5.21
15 -9.5 -10 5.86 5.79 5.72 5.65 5.58
17 -7.5 -8 6.23 6.16 6.09 6.02 5.94
19 -5.5 -6 6.64 6.57 6.49 6.41 6.33
21 -3.0 -4 7.05 6.97 6.89 6.80 6.72
23 -1.0 -2 7.45 7.37 7.29 7.20 7.10
25 1.0 0 7.86 7.77 7.68 7.59 7.49
27 2.0 1 8.06 7.97 7.88 7.78 7.68
29 3.0 2 8.26 8.18 8.11 8.01 7.91
31 5.0 4 8.64 8.60 8.55 8.46 8.37
33 7.0 6 9.03 9.02 9.00 8.91 8.82
35 9.0 8 9.50 9.46 9.41 9.37 9.32
37 11.5 10 9.97 9.90 9.82 9.82 9.82
39 13.5 12 10.39 10.38 10.36 10.35 10.35
41 15.5 14 10.82 10.86 10.89 10.88 10.87
43 16.5 16 11.24 11.34 11.43 11.41 11.39
46
PFA004Z110 D
Model FDE100VNPWVH Indoor unit FDE100VH Outdoor unit FDC100VNP-W

Outdoor
air temp.
-14.5 -15 5.46 5.40 5.33 5.26 5.18
11 -13.5 -14 5.68 5.61 5.54 5.47 5.39
13 -11.5 -12 6.10 6.03 5.96 5.88 5.81
15 -9.5 -10 6.52 6.45 6.38 6.30 6.22
17 -7.5 -8 6.95 6.87 6.79 6.71 6.63
19 -5.5 -6 7.39 7.32 7.25 7.16 7.07
21 -3.0 -4 7.84 7.77 7.70 7.61 7.51
23 -1.0 -2 8.29 8.22 8.15 8.05 7.95
25 1.0 0 8.74 8.67 8.60 8.50 8.39
27 2.0 1 8.96 8.90 8.83 8.72 8.61
29 3.0 2 9.18 9.12 9.06 8.96 8.86
31 5.0 4 9.60 9.57 9.53 9.44 9.35
33 7.0 6 10.03 10.01 10.00 9.92 9.85
35 9.0 8 10.51 10.51 10.51 10.46 10.41
37 11.5 10 10.99 11.00 11.02 10.99 10.97
39 13.5 12 11.24 11.28 11.31 11.29 11.27
41 15.5 14 11.50 11.55 11.60 11.58 11.56
43 16.5 16 11.75 11.82 11.89 11.87 11.85
46
Note(1) Depending on the system control, there may be ranges where the operation is not conducted continuously. PFA004Z110 D
Note(1) These data show the case where the operation frequency of a compressor is fixed.
(2) Corresponding refrigerant piping length :7.5m
(2) Level difference of Zero.
- 42 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
Model SRK100VSAZR Indoor unit SRK100ZR-S Outdoor unit FDC100VSA
Cooling mode (kW) Heating mode:HC (kW)
Indoor air temperature Indoor air temperature
Outdoor
Outdoor
18 ℃DB 21 ℃DB 23 ℃DB 26 ℃DB 27 ℃DB 28 ℃DB 31 ℃DB 33 ℃DB air temp. ℃DB
air temp.
Model SRK100VNPWZR
12 ℃WB 14 ℃WB Indoor unit
16 ℃WB SRK100ZR-W
18 ℃WB Outdoor
19 ℃WB 20 unit
℃WB FDC100VNP-W
22 ℃WB 24 ℃WB ℃DB ℃WB 16 18 20 22 24
Cooling
℃DB mode
TC SHC TC SHC TC SHC TC SHC TC SHC TC SHC TC SHC TC SHC
(kW)-19.8
Heating
-20 mode:HC
6.82 6.79 6.77 6.75 6.72
(kW)
11
Outdoor 8.12 6.51 8.59 Indoor
7.00air temperature
8.82 6.94 9.07 6.89 9.56 7.24 10.06 7.11 -17.7 Outdoor
-18 7.16 7.14Indoor air temperature
7.10 7.08 7.04
air 13
temp. 8.50 6.67 9.00 7.16 9.26 7.11 9.52 7.06 10.06 7.42 10.60 7.28 -15.7 -16 7.50 7.46 7.44 7.40 7.37
15 8.88 6.84 9.42 7.33 9.69 7.28 9.98 7.23 10.56 7.59 11.14 7.46 -13.5 -14 7.86 7.83 7.79 7.76 7.72
-14.5 -15 5.46 5.40 5.33 5.26 5.18
17 9.26 7.01 9.84 7.51 10.12 7.46 10.43 7.41 11.05 7.77 11.67 7.63 -11.5 -12 8.23 8.19 8.15 8.12 8.08
11 -13.5 -14 5.68 5.61 5.54 5.47 5.39
19
13 9.46 7.10 10.05 7.60 10.34 7.54 10.65 7.49 11.29 7.85 11.92 7.71 -9.5-11.5-10 -12 8.586.108.556.038.505.968.475.888.42 5.81
15
21 9.65 7.19 10.25 7.68 10.56 7.63 10.88 7.58 11.52 7.94 12.16 7.79 -7.5-9.5 -8 -10 8.936.528.896.458.856.388.806.30 8.75 6.22
17
23 9.65 7.19 10.28 7.70 10.59 7.65 10.91 7.59 11.56 7.95 12.21 7.81 -5.5-7.5 -6 -8 9.056.959.006.878.976.798.916.71 8.86 6.63
19 -5.5 -6 7.39 7.32 7.25 7.16 7.07
25 8.93 7.28 9.64 7.19 10.31 7.71 10.62 7.66 10.95 7.61 11.61 7.97 12.27 7.83 -3.0 -4 9.17 9.12 9.07 9.03 8.97
21 -3.0 -4 7.84 7.77 7.70 7.61 7.51
27 8.86 7.25 9.64 7.19 10.34 7.72 10.65 7.67 10.96 7.61 11.57 7.95 -1.0 -2 9.29 9.23 9.19 9.13 9.07
23 -1.0 -2 8.29 8.22 8.15 8.05 7.95
29
25 8.80 7.22 9.50 7.12 10.17 7.65 10.49 7.61 10.81 7.56 11.45 7.91 1.0 1.0 0 0 9.408.749.348.679.298.609.238.50 9.18 8.39
27
31 8.73 7.18 9.35 7.05 9.99 7.57 10.32 7.54 10.66 7.50 11.32 7.86 2.0 2.0 1 1 9.458.969.398.909.348.839.288.72 9.22 8.61
29
33 8.22 6.75 8.58 7.11 9.21 6.99 9.82 7.50 10.16 7.47 10.51 7.44 11.19 7.82 3.0 3.0 2 2 9.829.189.779.129.719.069.678.96 9.63 8.86
31
35 5.0
5.0 4 4 10.219.60 9.57 9.53 9.44 9.35
10.15 10.09 10.08 10.07
8.05 6.66 8.44 7.04 9.06 6.92 9.64 7.43 10.00 7.41 10.36 7.38 11.07 7.77
33 7.0 6 10.03 10.01 10.00 9.92 9.85
37 7.92 6.59 8.30 6.98 8.91 6.86 9.46 7.35 9.79 7.32 10.13 7.29 10.80 7.68 7.0 6 11.33 11.27 11.20 11.22 11.23
35 9.0 8 10.51 10.51 10.51 10.46 10.41
39 7.78 6.52 8.16 6.91 8.75 6.79 9.28 7.28 9.59 7.24 9.90 7.20 10.53 7.58 9.0 8 11.78 11.71 11.64 11.62 11.59
37 11.5 10 10.99 11.00 11.02 10.99 10.97
41
39 7.64 6.45 8.02 6.84 8.60 6.72 9.09 7.20 9.38 7.16 9.68 7.12 10.26 7.49 11.513.5 10 1212.23 12.16
11.24 12.09
11.28 12.02
11.31 11.9411.27
11.29
41
43 7.50 6.38 7.88 6.78 8.45 6.65 8.91 7.12 9.18 7.08 9.45 7.03 9.99 7.39 13.515.5 12 1412.91 11.50 11.55
12.83 12.7511.60
12.6511.58
12.6011.56
43
46 7.33 6.30 7.67 6.68 8.22 6.55 8.58 6.99 8.83 6.94 9.07 6.89 9.57 7.25 15.516.5 14 1613.59 11.75 11.82
13.50 13.4211.89
13.2911.87
13.2611.85
46
50 7.09 6.18 7.39 6.55 7.91 6.42 8.19 6.83 8.35 6.76 8.51 6.68 8.83 7.00 16.5 16 13.93 13.84 13.75 13.61 13.59
Notes ( 1 ) These data show average status.
Depending on the system control, there may be ranges where the operation is not conducted continuously. PCA001Z877 C
These data show the case where the operation frequency of a compressor is fixed. (Cooling only)
In the heating mode in which the outside air temperature is 0℃DB or less, the compressor operates at maximum frequency.
( 2 ) Capacities are based on the following conditions.
Corresponding refrigerant piping length : 7.5m
Level difference of Zero.
( 3 ) Symbols are as follows
- 43 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
［References data］
　 Capacity variation against outdoor and indoor temperature at the maximum compressor speed capacity compensation
coefficient shows the ratio to nominal capacity.
［References data］
　 Capacity variation against outdoor and indoor temperature at the maximum compressor speed capacity compensation
(I) Model
coefficient FDC90VNP-W
shows the ratio to nominal capacity.
① Cooling
(I) Model1.5FDC90VNP-W
① Cooling
1.5 1.5
coeffcient
Indoor air
coefficient
Indoor air
temperature 24℃WB
temperature 24℃WB
Indoor
Indoor air
coeffcient
air Indoor air

1.5 1.0 temperature 19℃WB temperature 24℃WB
temperature 19℃WB
coefficient
Indoor air
compensation
1.0 temperature 24℃WB

compensation
Indoor air
Indoor air
1.0
temperature 19℃WB
temperature 19℃WB Indoor air
compensation
temperature 15℃WB
1.0 Indoor air
compensation
Indoor air
Indoor air
temperature 17℃WB temperature 15℃WB
0.5 Indoor Indoor
air air
0.5 temperature 17℃WB temperature 15℃WB
Capacity
temperature 12℃WB
Indoor air Indoor air
Capacity
Indoor air
0.5 Indoor air temperature
Indoor air 15℃WB
Capacity
0.5 temperature 17℃WB temperature 12℃WB

Indoor air
Capacity
0 temperature 12℃WB
-20 0 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50
-20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50
0 0 Outdoor air temperature (℃DB)
-20 -20 -10 -10 0 0 10
10 20
20 3030 40 40 50 50
1.5
② Heating Outdoor
Outdoor air
air temperature
temperature
Outdoor air
((℃DB)
℃DB)
coefficient
Outdoor air
Outdoor air
② Heating
1.5
1.5
Outdoor air temperature 6℃WB
coefficient
Outdoorair
Outdoor air Outdoor air
temperature10℃WB
coeffcient
compensation
1.5 Outdoor
Outdoor air air
Outdoor air Outdoor air temperature 6℃WB
temperature 18℃WB
coeffcient
1.0
compensation
1.0 Outdoor air

compensation
temperature 18℃WB
0.5
Outdoor air
temperature -10℃WB Outdoor air
Capacity
1.0
compensation
temperature 1℃WB
Outdoor air Outdoor
Outdoor air air Outdoor air
0.5 temperatureOutdoor
-10℃WBair temperature -15℃WB
temperature -15℃WB temperature 1℃WB
0.5 temperature -10℃WB Outdoor air
Capacity
0 Outdoor air temperature 1℃WB

Capacity
5 temperature10-10℃WB 15 20
Outdoor air 25 30 35
temperature -15℃WB temperature 1℃WB
temperature -15℃WB
0.5 Indoor air temperature (℃DB)
0
Capacity
5 10 15 20 25 30 35
0
5 10
Indoor
15
air temperature
20
(℃DB)
25 30 35
0 Indoor air temperature (℃DB)

5 10 15 20 25 30 35
- 44 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
(II) Model FDC100VNP-W

① Cooling
(II) Model FDC100VNP-W
1.5
① Cooling
Indoor air
temperature 24℃WB
1.5 1.5 Indoor air
coeffcient
coefficient
temperature 19℃WB Indoor air Indoor air

temperaturetemperature
24℃WB 24℃WB
Indoor air
coeffcient
1.5 Indoor air

temperature 19℃WB
coefficient
1.0 temperature 19℃WB Indoor air

compensation

compensation
1.0 Indoor air Indoor air

Indoor air
temperature 19℃WB
compensation

1.0
compensation
Indoor air Indoor air Indoor air

Indoor airtemperature 17℃WB temperatureIndoor
15℃WB
temperature
air 15℃WB
0.5 0.5 temperature 12℃WB
temperature 17℃WB
Capacity
Capacity
airIndoor
Indoor
Indoor air air
Indoor air temperature
temperature 15℃WB
12℃WB
Capacity
0.5
temperature 17℃WB
Capacity
0 Indoor air
-20 0 -10 0 10 20 temperature
30 12℃WB
40 50
-20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50
0 0 Outdoor air temperature (℃DB)
-20 -20 -10 -10 0 0 10
10 20
20 3030 40 40 50 50
1.5 Outdoor
Outdoor air
air temperature
temperature ((℃DB)
℃DB)
coefficient
② Heating Outdoor air

temperature 18℃WB
② Heating
1.5
1.5
coefficient
Outdoor air air

Outdoor
temperature 7℃WB Outdoor airtemperature 6℃WB
compensation
temperature 10℃WB
coeffcient

Outdoor air
temperature 7℃WB Outdoor air
coeffcient

compensation
1.0
compensation
0.5 Outdoor air

temperature -10℃WB Outdoor air Outdoor air
Capacity
1.0 temperature -15℃WB temperature 1℃WB

compensation

0.5 temperature
Outdoor 10℃WB
air temperature 1℃WB
temperature -10℃WB Outdoor air Outdoor air
Capacity
0 Outdoor air Outdoor air

0.5 temperature -15℃WBOutdoorOutdoor
air air temperature 1℃WB
5 temperaturetemperature
10℃WB
10 15 20 25 -15℃WB
temperature
temperature 30
1℃WB 35
Capacity
-10℃WB
0.5 Outdoor air Indoor air temperature (℃DB)
Outdoor air
0 temperature -15℃WB
Capacity
temperature -10℃WB
5 10 15 20 25 30 35

5 10 15 20 25 30 35

5 10 15 20 25 30 35
- 45 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
9.2 Correction of cooling and heating capacity in relation to air flow rate control
(Fan speed)
Fan speed P-Hi Hi Me Lo
Cooling 1.00 0.95 0.93 0.90
Coefficient
Heating 1.00 0.97 0.96 0.94
9.3 Correction of cooling and heating capacity in relation to one way length of
refrigerant piping
It is necessary to correct the cooling and heating capacity in relation to the one way equivalent piping length between the indoor
and outdoor units.
Equivalent piping length (m) 7.5 10 15 20 25 30
Cooling 1 0.99 0.97 0.96 0.94 0.92
Heating 1 1 1 1 1 1
9.4 Height difference between the indoor unit and outdoor unit
When the outdoor unit is located below indoor units in cooling mode, or when the outdoor unit is located above indoor units in
heating mode, the correction coefficient mentioned in the below table should be subtracted from the value in the above table.
Height difference between the indoor unit and

5m 10m 15m 20m
outdoor unit in the vertical height difference
Adjustment coefficient 0.99 098 0.97 0.96
Piping length limitations

Model
All models
Item
Max. one way piping length 30m
Max. vertical height difference Outdoor unit is higher 20m

Outdoor unit is lower 20m
Note (1) Values in the table indicate the one way piping length between the indoor and outdoor units.
How to obtain the cooling and heating capacity
Example : The net cooling capacity of the model FDT90VNPWVH with the air flow “P-Hi”, the piping length of 15m, the outdoor
unit located 5m lower than the indoor unit, indoor wet-bulb temperature at 19.0℃ and outdoor dry-bulb temperature 35℃ is
Net cooling capacity = 9.0 × 1.00 × 0.97 × 0.99 8.6 kW
Net cooling total capacity Air flow : P-Hi Height difference : 5m

of FDT90VNPWVH shown in table 9.2 (Outdoor unit : below)
(Outdoor temp. : 35℃DB shown in table 9.4
Indoor temp. : 19℃WB) Piping length : 15m
shown in table 9.1 (Gas pipe size is φ15.88)
shown in table 9.3
- 46 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
10. APPLICATION DATA

10.1 Installation of indoor unit PJF012D051 A
(1) Ceiling cassette-4 way type(FDT) ①Before insta
This manual is for the installation of the indoor unit. ●Install correctly acc
For electrical wiring work (Indoor unit), refer to page 74. For remote control installation, refer to page CAUTION ●Confirm the followi
78. For wireless kit installation, refer to page 100. For electrical wiring work (Outdoor unit) and refriger- 　○Unit type/Power
ant pipe work installation for outdoor unit, refer to page 90. For motion sensor kit installation, refer to ● Perform earth wiring surely.
　○Pipes/Wires/Sm
page 124. This unit must always be used with the panel. Do not connect the earth wiring to the gas pipe, water pipe, lightning rod and telephone earth wiring. Improper earth could
cause unit failure and electric shock due to a short-circuit. Accessory item
● Earth leakage breaker must be installed.
For unit hanging
If the earth leakage breaker is not installed, it can cause electric shocks.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ● Use the circuit breaker of correct capacity. Circuit breaker should be the one that disconnect all
Flat washer (M10) Level gauge
poles under over current.

● Read the “SAFETY PRECAUTIONS” carefully first of all and then strictly follow it during the installation work
Using the incorrect one could cause the system failure and fire.
in order to protect yourself.
● The precautionary items mentioned below are distinguished into two levels, and CAUTION . ● Do not use any materials other than a fuse of correct capacity where a fuse should be used. 8 1
: Wrong installation would cause serious consequences such as injuries or death. Connecting the circuit by wire or copper wire could cause unit failure and fire. For unit hanging For unit hight position adjustment
and hanging suport
CAUTION : Wrong installation might cause serious consequences depending on circumstances. ● Do not install the indoor unit near the location where there is possibility of flammable gas leakages.
Both mentions the important items to protect your health and safety so strictly follow them by any means. If the gas leaks and gathers around the unit, it could cause fire.
●The meanings of “Marks” used here are as shown on the right: ● Do not install and use the unit where corrosive gas (such as sulfurous acid gas etc.) or flammable gas (such
Never do it under any circumstances. Always do it according to the instruction. as thinner, petroleum etc.) may be generated or accumulated, or volatile flammable substances are handled. ②Selection of
●After completing the installation, do commissioning to confirm there are no abnormalities, and explain to the It could cause the corrosion of heat exchanger, breakage of plastic parts etc. And inflammable gas could cause fire.
customers about “SAFETY PRECAUTIONS”, correct operation method and maintenance method (air filter ● Secure a space for installation, inspection and maintenance specified in the manual. ① Select the suitabl
cleaning, operation method and temperature setting method) with user’s manual of this unit. Insufficient space can result in accident such as personal injury due to falling from the installation place. 　・Areas where the
Ask your customers to keep this installation manual together with the user’s manual. Also, ask them to hand ● Do not use the indoor unit at the place where water splashes such as laundry. to use a circulat
over the user’s manual to the new user when the owner is changed. Indoor unit is not waterproof. It could cause electric shock and fire. the ceiling.
● Do not use the indoor unit for a special purpose such as food storage, cooling for precision ・In case of the p
WARNING instrument, preservation of animals, plants, and a work of art. than 4 m. It cou
It could cause the damage of the items. ・Areas where the
●Installation should be performed by the specialist. ● Do not install nor use the system near equipments which generate electromagnetic wave or high harmonics. ・Areas where it c
If you install the unit by yourself, it may lead to serious trouble such as water leakage, electric shock, fire, and injury due to overturn Equipments like inverter equipment, private power generator, high-frequency medical equipment, or telecommunication taken.
of the unit. equipment might influence the air-conditioner and cause a malfunction and breakdown. Or the air conditioner might ・Areas where the
●Install the system correctly according to these installation manuals. influence medical equipments or telecommunication equipments, and obstruct their medical activity or cause jamming. ・Areas where fire
● Do not install the remote control at the direct sunlight. ・Areas where the
Improper installation may cause explosion, injury, water leakage, electric shock, and fire.
It could cause breakdown or deformation of the remote control. ・Areas where it i
●Check the density refered by the foumula (accordance with ISO5149). ・Areas not expos
● Do not install the indoor unit at the place listed below.
If the density exceeds the limit density, please consult the dealer and installate the ventilation system. ・Areas where dew
· Places where flammable gas could leak. · Places where cosmetics or special sprays are
●Use the genuine accessories and the specified parts for installation. · Places where carbon fiber, metal powder or any powder is floated. frequently used. This indoor unit
If parts unspecified by our company are used it could cause water leakage, electric shock, fire, and injury due to overturn of the unit. · Place where the substances which affect the air conditioner are generated · Highly salted area such as beach. ity condition and
such as sulfide gas, chloride gas, acid, alkali or ammonic atmospheres. · Heavy snow area tion drop if the
●Ventilate the working area well in case the refrigerant leaks during installation. · Places exposed to oil mist or steam directly. · Places where the system is affected by
smoke from a chimney.
above.
If the refrigerant contacts the fire, toxic gas is produced. · On vehicles and ships
· Places where machinery which generates high harmonics is used. · Altitude over 1000m If there is a poss
In case of R32, the refrigerant could be ignited because of its flammability. 20mm thick for
● Do not install the indoor unit in the locations listed below (Be sure to install the indoor unit
●Install the unit in a location that can hold heavy weight. according to the installation manual for each model because each indoor unit has each limitation) ・Areas where TV
Improper installation may cause the unit to fall leading to accidents. · Locations with any obstacles which can prevent inlet and Do not install the motion sensor mounting panel at following places. ・Areas where any
outlet air of the unit It could cause detection error, incapacity of detection, or table wares, serv
●Install the unit properly in order to be able to withstand strong winds such as typhoons, and earthquakes. · Locations where vibration can be amplified due to characteristic degradation. ・Areas where the
Improper installation may cause the unit to fall leading to accidents. insufficient strength of structure. ・Place where vibration is applied to it for a long period of time. ・Areas where not
●Do not mix air in to the cooling cycle on installation or removal of the air-conditioner. · Locations where the infrared receiver is exposed to the ・Place where static electricity or electromagnetic wave generates.
direct sunlight or the strong light beam. (in case of the ・Place where it is exposed to high temperature or humidity for a ・Areas where ligh
If air is mixed in, the pressure in the cooling cycle will rise abnormally and may cause explosion and injuries. infrared specification unit) long period of time. operation.
●Be sure to have the electrical wiring work done by qualified electrical installer, and use exclusive circuit. · Locations where an equipment affected by high harmonics is ・Dusty place or where the lens face could be fouled or damaged. (A beam from ligh
placed. (TV set or radio receiver is placed within 5m) control and the a
Power source with insufficient capacity and improper work can cause electric shock and fire. · Locations where drainage cannot run off safely.
It can affect performance or function and etc.. ②Check if the place
●Use specified wire for electrical wiring, fasten the wiring to the terminal securely, and hold the cable securely in
order not to apply unexpected stress on the terminal. ● Do not put any valuables which will break down by getting wet under the air-conditioner. not able to hold, rei
Loose connections or hold could result in abnormal heat generation or fire. Condensation could drop when the relative humidity is higher than 80% or drain pipe is clogged, and it damages user’s belongings. strength is not eno
●Arrange the electrical wires in the control box properly to prevent them from rising. Fit the lid of the services ● Do not use the base frame for the outdoor unit which is corroded or damaged after a long period of use. ③If there are 2 units o
panel property. It could cause the unit falling down and injury. to cross communica
Improper fitting may cause abnormal heat and fire. ● Pay attention not to damage the drain pan by weld sputter when brazing work is done near the unit. ④When plural indoor
●Check for refrigerant gas leakage after installation is completed. If sputter entered into the unit during brazing work, it could cause damage (pinhole) of drain pan and leakage of water.
To avoid damaging, keep the indoor unit packed or cover the indoor unit. Space for installation
If the refrigerant gas leaks into the house and comes in contact with a fan heater, a stove, or an oven, toxic gas is produced.
● Install the drain pipe to drain the water surely according to the installation manual. ●When it is not poss
●Use the specified pipe, flare nut, and tools for R32 or R410A. Improper connection of the drain pipe may cause dropping water into room and damaging user’s belongings.
Using existing parts (R22) could cause the unit failure and serious accident due to explosion of the cooling cycle. units, close the air
● Be sure to perform air tightness test by pressurizing with nitrogen gas after completed refrigerant piping work.
●Tighten the flare nut according to the specified method by with torque wrench. short-circuit of air fl
If the density of refrigerant exceeds the limit in the event of refrigerant leakage in the small room, lack of oxygen can
If the flare nut were tightened with excess torque, it could cause burst and refrigerant leakage after a long period. occur, which can cause serious accidents. ●Install the indoor u
●Do not put the drainage pipe directly into drainage channels where poisonous gases such as sulfide gas can ● For drain pipe installation, be sure to make descending slope of greater than 1/100, not to make traps,
occur. and not to make air-bleeding.
Check if the drainage is correctly done during commissioning and ensure the space for inspection and maintenance.
Poisonous gases will flow into the room through drainage pipe and seriously affect the user's health and safety. This can also
cause the corrosion of the indoor unit and a resultant unit failure or refrigerant leak. ● Ensure the insulation on the pipes for refrigeration circuit so as not to condense water.
Incomplete insulation could cause condensation and it would wet ceiling, floor, and any other valuables.
●Connect the pipes for refrigeration circuit securely in installation work before compressor is operated.
● Do not install the outdoor unit where is likely to be a nest for insects and small animals. Ceiling
If the compressor is operated when the service valve is open without connecting the pipe, it could cause explosion and injuries due
to abnormal high pressure in the system. Insects and small animals could come into the electronic components and cause breakdown and fire. Instruct the user to Wall surface
keep the surroundings clean.
●Stop the compressor before removing the pipe after shutting the service valve on pump down work. Decorative panel
● Pay extra attention, carrying the unit by hand.
If the pipe is removed when the compressor is in operation with the service valve open, air would be mixed in the refrigeration circuit Carry the unit with 2 people if it is heavier than 20kg. Do not use the plastic straps but the grabbing place, moving the unit 1000mm or more
and it could cause explosion and injuries due to abnormal high pressure in the cooling cycle. by hand. Use protective gloves in order to avoid injury by the aluminum fin.
●Only use prescribed option parts. The installation must be carried out by the qualified installer. ● Make sure to dispose of the packaging material.
If you install the system by yourself, it can cause serious trouble such as water leaks, electric shocks, fire. Leaving the materials may cause injury as metals like nail and woods are used in the package.
●Do not repair by yourself. And consult with the dealer about repair. ● Do not operate the system without the air filter.
Improper repair may cause water leakage, electric shock or fire. It may cause the breakdown of the system due to clogging of the heat exchanger.
● Do not touch any button with wet hands. Set blow-out pattern
●Consult the dealer or a specialist about removal of the air-conditioner.
It could cause electric shock. ●Select the most pro
Improper installation may cause water leakage, electric shock or fire.
● Do not touch the refrigerant piping with bare hands when in operation. according to the sh
●Turn off the power source during servicing or inspection work. The pipe during operation would become very hot or cold according to the operating condition, and it could cause a burn or frostbite. ●If it is necessary t
If the power is supplied during servicing or inspection work, it could cause electric shock and injury by the operating fan.
● Do not clean up the air-conditioner with water. (sold as accessory
●Do not run the unit when the panel or protection guard are taken off. It could cause electric shock. ●Instruct the user n
Touching the rotating equipment, hot surface, or high voltage section could cause an injury to be caught in the machine, to get ● Do not turn off the power source immediately after stopping the operation. ●Do not use 2 wa
burned, or electric shock. Be sure to wait for more than 5 minutes. Otherwise it could cause water leakage or breakdown. (Otherwise it could
●Shut off the power before electrical wiring work. ● Do not control the operation with the circuit breaker. ●It is possible to set
It could cause electric shock, unit failure and improper running. It could cause fire or water leakage. In addition, the fan may start operation unexpectedly and it may cause injury. for details.
- 47 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
PJF012D051 A
①Before installation ③Preparation before installation
●Install correctly according to the installation manual. When moving the indoor unit, hold only ●If suspension bolt becomes longer, do reinforcement of earthquake resistant.
●Confirm the following points: the hanging hardware (4 places) only, 　○For grid ceiling
　○Unit type/Power source specification with care not to apply forces to any other 　　When suspension bolt length is over 500mm, or the gap between the ceiling and roof is
　○Pipes/Wires/Small parts ○Accessory items parts of the unit (particularly the refriger- over 700mm, apply earthquake resistant brace to the bolt.
g. Improper earth could ant pipe, drain pipe, and resin parts). ○In case the unit is hanged directly from the slab and is installed on the ceiling plane which
Accessory item
has enough strength.
For unit hanging For refrigerant pipe For drain pipe
　　When suspension bolt length is over 1000mm, apply the earthquake resistant brace to the bolt.
Flat washer (M10) Level gauge Pipe cover(big) Pipe cover (small) Strap Pipe cover(big) Pipe cover(small) Drain hose Hose clamp
disconnect all ●Prepare four (4) sets of suspension bolt, nut and spring washer (M10 or M8) on site.
Ceiling opening, Suspension bolts pitch, Pipe position
(mm)
ld be used. 8 1 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 ※It is possible the suspension bolts pitch to Series Type a d f g h
For unit hanging For unit hight position adjustment For heat insulation For heat insulation For pipe cover fixing For heat insulation For heat insulation For drain pipe For drain hose
adjust accoding to the this table.
and hanging suport of gas pipe of liquid tube of drain socket of drain socket connecting mounting Single Split (PAC) 40 to 71 type 236 37 105 88 67
mable gas leakages. series 100 to 140 type 298 99 167 140 129
Mark
P1 P2 28 to 71 type 236 37 105 88 67
Type VRF (KX)
flammable gas (such series 90 to 160 type 298 99 167 140 129
stances are handled. ②Selection of installation location for the indoor unit 1 770 725-770
Symbol
as could cause fire. 2 770-800 725
A Gas piping
ual. ① Select the suitable areas to install the unit under approval of the user. B Liquid piping
Ceiling hole size (860 - 910)
n place. 　・Areas where the indoor unit can deliver hot and cold wind sufficiently. Suggest to the user Suspension bolts pitch P1 (778) C Drain piping
to use a circulator if the ceiling height is over 3m to avoid warm air being accumulated on D Hole for wiring
H1, H2
G F Suspension bolts
the ceiling. G Outside air opening for ducting
precision ・In case of the panel having the motion sensor, the installation height must be no higher H1
Suspension bolts pitch P2(725)

Control box Air outlet opening for ducting
than 4 m. It could reduce the sensitivity of motion sensor, disabling the detection. H2
・Areas where there is enough space to install and service. H1, H2
H1, H2
e or high harmonics. ・Areas where it can be drained properly. Areas where drain pipe descending slope can be
, or telecommunication taken.
ir conditioner might ・Areas where there is no obstruction of air flow on both air return grille and air supply port. 50 38
568
420
420
vity or cause jamming. ・Areas where fire alarm will not be accidentally activated by the air-conditioner.
f
・Areas where the supply air does not short-circuit.
h
137
112
・Areas where it is not influenced by draft air.
40
76
・Areas not exposed to direct sunlight. Drain hose
H1, H2
(Accessory) 245 65
cs or special sprays are ・Areas where dew point is lower than around 28°C and relative humidity is lower than 80%. 333 303 44 13
(Installed on site)
This indoor unit is tested under the condition of JIS (Japan Industrial Standard) high humid-
G
h as beach. ity condition and confirmed there is no problem. However, there is some risk of condensa-
F C B A
tion drop if the air conditioner is operated under the severer condition than mentioned Hanger plate 140 240
em is affected by for suspention bolt
y.
above. 60 130
If there is a possibility to use it under such a condition, attach additional insulation of 10 to
g
g
20mm thick for entire surface of indoor unit, refrigeration pipe and drain pipe.
140
188
100
a
100
140
173
140
ndoor unit
131
hole
hole
s each limitation) ・Areas where TV and radio stays away more than 1m. (It could cause jamming and noise.)
50 or more
ting panel at following places. ・Areas where any items which will be damaged by getting wet are not placed such as food, Control box 35 100 200
ity of detection, or table wares, server, or medical equipment under the unit. D
H1 H2
・Areas where there is no influence by the heat which cookware generates.
t for a long period of time. ・Areas where not exposed to oil mist, powder and/or steam directly such as above fryer.
tromagnetic wave generates.
・Areas where lighting device such as fluorescent light or incandescent light doesn’t affect the
mperature or humidity for a
operation. ④Installation of indoor unit
could be fouled or damaged. (A beam from lighting device sometimes affects the infrared receiver for the wireless remote
control and the air-conditioner might not work properly.) Work procedure
②Check if the place where the air-conditioner is installed can hold the weight of the unit. If it is 1. Set the suspension bolt length to about 50 mm from the ceiling.
not able to hold, reinforce the structure with boards and beams strong enough to hold it. If the 2. Temporarily locate the lower nuts of the suspension bolts (4 places) at a position approxi-
ditioner.
mages user’s belongings. strength is not enough, it could cause injury due to unit falling. mately 150 mm from the ceiling.
③If there are 2 units of wireless type, keep them away for more than 6m to avoid malfunction due 3. Temporarily locate the upper nuts of the suspension bolts (4 places) at positions sufficiently
a long period of use.
distance from the lower nuts so that they do not interfere with the suspension of the indoor
to cross communication.
unit and with its height adjustment.
done near the unit. ④When plural indoor units are installed nearby, keep them away for more than 4 to 5m. 4. Set the upper nuts of the suspension bolts and upper washers (4 places) at positions sufficiently
and leakage of water.
Space for installation and service distance from the lower nuts. Then, push and insert the temporary fixing carton of washers (*1)
onto suspension bolts. Make sure that the upper washers do not slide down.
al. ●When it is not possible to keep enough space between indoor unit and wall or between indoor 5. Suspend the indoor unit.
belongings.
units, close the air supply port where it is not possible to keep space and confirm there is no 6. After suspending the indoor unit, mount the level gauge (*2) to the air outlet of the indoor
frigerant piping work.
short-circuit of air flow. unit, and adjust the suspension height of the indoor unit. Loosen the upper nuts (4 places),
m, lack of oxygen can
●Install the indoor unit at a height of more than 2.5m above the floor. and adjust the suspension height using the lower nuts (4 places). Confirm there is no slack
between the lower nuts and flat washers of the indoor unit hanger plate (4 places).
, not to make traps, 4000 to 5000mm or more
7. Remove the temporary fixing carton of washers (from all 4 places).
n and maintenance. Indoor unit Indoor unit 8. Make sure that the indoor unit is installed horizontally. Confirm the levelness of the indoor
unit using a level gauge or transparent hose filled with water.
water.
(Keep the height difference at both ends of the indoor unit within 3 mm.)
uables.
9. Tighten the upper nuts of the suspension bolts (4 places).
nimals. Ceiling Suspension bolt
fire. Instruct the user to Wall surface
1000mm or more Nut (upper)
Decorative panel 2500mm or more
Flat washer
g place, moving the unit 1000mm or more Spring wasler

Obstacle
Lower nuts (double)
150mm
50mm
Floor
Ceiling surface
Where there are pipe joints on
the way of embedded piping, Remove the temporary fixing carton of
provide adequate openings for washers (*1) and level gauge (*2). Temporary fixing carton of washers (*1)
Set blow-out pattern inspection of the joints. Temporary fixing carton of washers (*1)
●Select the most proper number of blow-out air supply port direction from 4 way, 3 way or 2 way
according to the shape of the room and installation position. (1 way is not available.) Keep the distance between 10-14 mm.
cause a burn or frostbite. ●If it is necessary to change the number of air supply port, prepare the covering materials. Exceeding the range of distance may
cause failure etc.
(sold as accessory)
There is no slack between the
●Instruct the user not to use low fan speed when 2 way or 3 way air supply is used. 10 +4
0 mm
Level gauge (*2) lower nuts and flat washers.
●Do not use 2 way air supply port under high temperature and humidity environment. Ceiling opening dimensions
(Otherwise it could cause condensation and leakage of water.) Level gauge (*2) indoor unit
(Mount to the indoor unit.)
●It is possible to set the air flow direction port by port independently. Refer to the user’s manual hose
may cause injury. for details.
- 48 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
④Installation of indoor unit (continued) ⑤Refrigerant pipe (continued) ⑥Drain pipe (c

Protection of the indoor unit Caution: ●When sharing a d
Refrigerating machine oil should not be applied to the threads of union or external surface of flare. It unit, lay the main
● If it is not possible to install the panel for a while or if attaching the ceiling board after
is because, even if the same tightening torque is applied, the oil is likely to decrease the slide friction drain outlet of th
installing the indoor unit, protect the indoor unit by using upper carton. force on the threads and increase, in turn, the axial component force so that it could crack the flare VP30 or bigger si
by the stress corrosion.
Refrigerating machine oil may be applied to the internal surface of flare only.
Fix the upper carton by using
panel fixing bolts. The upper
<The case of using thicness of insulation is 10mm> <The case of using reinfoced insulation> 6. Insulate the drain
Reinforcing carton carton has "+" shape slits at ● Be sure to insula
the same position as the Pipe cover (Accessory) Pipe cover (Prepare on site)
of the inside upper
carton panel fixing pitch. dew condensatio
※ After drainage t
the pipe cover (
Caution and wrap it wit
Unit Unit
● Do not adjust the unit height by adjusting the upper nuts. Doing so will cause unexpected Drain up
stress on the indoor unit and cause the unit to become deformed, prevent the panel from Band (Accessory) Band (Accessory)
Band (Prepare on site)
● The position for drain
being installed, and be generated fan interference noise. The thckness of insulation is 10mm 850mm above the ce
Insulation (Prepare on site)
● Make sure that the indoor unit is installed horizontally and set the appropriate gap between tion to avoid obstacles
the underside of the unit and the ceiling plane. Improper installation may cause air leakage, tal drain pipe is too
dew condensation, water leakage and noise. backflow of water w
● Even after the panel has been installed, the unit height can still be finely adjusted. Refer to stopped, and it may c
the panel installation manual for details.
⑥Drain pipe the drain pan on the
overflow, keep the ho
● Make sure there is no gap between the panel and the ceiling surface, and between the of the pipe within th
panel and the indoor unit. Any gap may cause air and/or water to leak, or condensation to Caution below.
form. ● Install the drain pipe according to the installation manual in order to drain properly.
Imperfection in draining may cause flood indoors and wetting the household goods,etc. Drain test
● Do not put the drain pipe directly into the ditch where toxic gas such as sulfur, the other harmful and ● After installing the d
inflammable gas is generated. Toxic gas would flow into the room and it would cause serious damage to from the joint and dr
user’s health and safety (some poisoning or deficiency of oxygen). In addition, it may cause corrosion of ● Conduct a drain te
⑤Refrigerant pipe heat exchanger and bad smell. ● In the case of new
● Connect the pipe securely to avoid water leakage from the joint. 1. Pour about 1,000
● Insulate the pipe properly to avoid condensation drop. allow electrical eq
Caution ● Check if the water can flow out properly from both the drain outlet on the indoor unit and the end of the while filling water.
drain pipe after installation. Pour test water thr
●Be sure to use new pipes for the refrigerant pipes. Use the flare nut attached to the product. ● Make sure to make descending slope of greater than 1/100 and do not make up-down bend and/or trap in the device, or through
Regarding whether existing pipes can be reused or not, and the washing method, refer to the instruction manual of the outdoor midway. In addition, do not put air vent on the drain pipe. Check if water is drained out properly from the pipe ●In case of pouring wate
unit, catalogue or technical data. during commissioning. Also, keep sufficient space for inspection and maintenance.
1) In case of reuse: Do not use old flare nut, but use the nut attached to the unit.
2) In case of reuse: Flare the end of pipe replaced partially for R32 or R410A. Work procedure
: When flared joints are reused indoors, the flare part shall be re-fabricated. (only for R32)
1. Make sure that the drain hose (the soft PVC side) is inserted into the end of the step part of the
Protruding dimension for flare, mm drain socket.
Protruding D
dimension Pipe dia. Min. pipe Rigid (Clutch type) Flare O.D. Flare nut
tightening torque
Fix the hose clamp so that its bolt is located on the outside of the indoor unit, and the bolt are
wall thickness
d
mm mm For R32
D
mm N·m
fastened in a vertical orientation.
Conventional tool
For R410A 　●Do not apply adhesives on this end.
Flare die 6.35 0.8 8.9 - 9.1 14 - 18 2. Position the hose clamp so that it touches the insulation of the drain hose, and then tighten the bolt.
9.52 0.8 12.8 - 13.2 34 - 42 3. Turn the bolt several times until it is securely tightened, but do not tighten it excessively.
12.7 0.8 0 - 0.5 0.7 - 1.3 16.2 - 16.6 49 - 61
The step part Joint for VP25
15.88 1 19.3 - 19.7 68 - 82 Drain hose (Prepare on site)
19.05 1.2 23.6 - 24.0 100 - 120 Pipe cover (big)[For
insulation] (Accessory)
2. Make sure that w
●Use phosphorus deoxidized copper alloy seamless pipe (C1220T) for refrigeration pipe installation. drain pipe during
　In addition, make sure there is no damage both inside and outside of the pipe, and no harmful Unit Joint for VP25 Joint for VP25 Test to confirm that t
(Prepare on site) (Prepare on site)
At the drain socket (t
substances such as sulfur, oxide, dust or a contaminant stuck on the pipes. Drain hose Pipe cover
(Accessory) (For insulation) 3. Unplug the rubber
●Do not use any refrigerant other than the designated refrigerant. Drain socket Drain socket Hose clamp (Prepare on site) pan after the drain
　Using other refrigerant except the designated refrigerant, may degrade inside refrigeration oil. And air (Accessory, no adhesive allowed.)
After checking the
Pipe cover (small)
getting into refrigeration circuit may cause over-pressure and resultant it may result in bursting, etc. (For insulation) pipe must be perf
(Accessory)
●Store the copper pipes indoors and seal the both end of them until they are brazed in order to avoid any If the pipe lid has
Target extent of bolt Drain socket Drain hose
dust, dirt or water getting into pipe. Otherwise it will cause degradation of refrigeration oil and tightening should be 17 Drain pump operation
compressor breakdown, etc. to 20 mm (Reference:
●Use special tools for R32 or R410A refrigerant. 1.2 to 1.5N・m). ●In case electrical w
　Drain pump can be o
17-20 mm 　For the operation me
Position the hose clamp so that it touches the insulation of
Work procedure (1.2-1.5N·m) the drain hose, and securely tighten the bolt. ●In case electrical w
Hose clamp
1. Remove the flare nut and blind flanges on the pipe of the indoor unit. Do not connect the parts using adhesives. 　Drain pump will run con
※ Make sure to loosen the flare nut with holding the nut on pipe side with a spanner and giving torque to the 4. Prepare a joint for connecting VP25 pipe, adhere and connect the joint to the drain hose (the CnB is disconnected, a
nut with another spanner in order to avoid unexpected stress to the copper pipe, and then remove them. rigid PVC side), and adhere and connect VP25 pipe (prepare on site). 　Make sure to turn OFF
(Gas may come out at this time, but it is not abnormal.) ※As for drain pipe, apply VP25 made of rigid PVC which is on the market.
● Pay attention whether the flare nut pops out. (as the indoor unit is sometimes pressured.) ● Make sure that the adhesive will not get into the supplied drain hose.
2. Make a flare on liquid pipe and gas pipe, and connect the refrigeration pipes on the indoor unit. It may cause the flexible part broken after the adhesive is dried up and gets rigid. ⑦Wiring-out p
● The flexible drain hose is intended to absorb a
※Bend radius of pipe must be 4D or larger. Once a pipe is bent, do not readjust the bending. small difference at installation of the unit or ● Electrical installatio
Do not twist a pipe or collapse to 2/3D or smaller. drain pipes. Intentional bending, expanding 20mm or more electrical installatio
● Make sure to use flare nuts assembled on the unions. may cause the flexible hose broken and water executed according
Usage of other flare nuts could cause refrigerant leakage. installation in the co
leakage. Indoor unit
●As for drain pipe, apply VP25 (OD32). Be sure to use an e
※Do a flare connection as follows: Spanner If apply PVC25 (OD25), connect the expanded connector to the drain hose, with adhesive. ● Use specified cord,
●Make sure to hold the nut on indoor unit pipe side (Multi unit only) not to apply unexpe
using double spanner method as indicated when Flare nut PVC25 (Prepare on site) ● Do not put both pow
fastening / loosening flare nuts in order to prevent cation and malfunct
unintentional twisting of the copper pipe. Union Indoor side Drain hose ● Be sure to do D typ
● When fastening the flare nut, align the refrigeration Torque
● For the details of elec
pipe with the center of flare nut, screw the nut for 3-4 wrench
1. Loosen the 2 screw
times by hand and then tighten it by spanner with the shown in the figure.
Elbow (Accessory)
specified torque mentioned in the table above. 215- 245mm (Multi only) 2. Unhook the lid from
3. Cover the flare connection part of the indoor unit with attached insulation material after a gas and remove the lid.
leakage inspection, and tighten both ends with attached straps. 5. Make sure to make descending slope of greater than 1/100 and do not make up-down bend 3. Remove the 2 screws
● Make sure to insulate both gas pipes and liquid pipes completely. and/or trap in the midway. cover, and remove th
※ Incomplete insulation may cause dew condensation or water dropping. ●Pay attention not to give stress on the pipe on the indoor unit side, and support and fix the pipe 4. Hold each wire inside the
● Use heat-resistant (120 °C or more) insulations on the gas side pipes. as close place to the unit as possible when connecting the drain pipe. fasten them to the termin
● In case of using at high humidity condition, reinforce insulation of refrigerant pipes. ●Do nt set up air vent. 5. Fix the wiring using
Surface of insulation may cause dew condition or water dropping, if insulations are not 6. Install the wiring cover
1.5m - 2m Supporting metal Trapped air will
reinfoced. No bump
generate noises.
the control box.
4. Refrigerant is charged in the outdoor unit. Air vent No trap Main fuse specificatio
As for the additional refrigerant charge for the indoor unit and piping, refer to the installation Not touching the water
manual attached to the outdoor unit. Insulation material
Specification
Descending slope greater than 1/100 T3.15A L250V SSA
- 49 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
⑥Drain pipe (continued) ⑦Wiring-out position and wiring connection (continued)

As wide as possible Wiring between indoor Indoor power
●When sharing a drain pipe for more than 1 (about100mm)
Single Split (PAC) series VRF (KX) series source line
Band and outdoor units Band
nal surface of flare. It unit, lay the main pipe 100mm below the Super link line
ease the slide friction drain outlet of the unit. In addition, select Earth Earth
Remote Remote
could crack the flare VP30 or bigger size for main drain pipe. control line control line
VP30 or bigger
Band Band
Descending slope greater than 1/100
Power source Power source
sulation > 6. Insulate the drain pipe. side terminal side terminal
block block
cover (Prepare on site) ● Be sure to insulate the drain socket and rigid PVC pipe installed indoors otherwise it may cause
dew condensation and water leakage. Signal side Signal side
※ After drainage test implementation, cover the drain socket part with pipe cover (small size), then use terminal block terminal block
the pipe cover (big size) to cover the pipe cover (small size), clamps and part of the drain hose, and fix Main fuse Main fuse
and wrap it with tapes to wrap and make joint part gapless.
Unit
Drain up
Band (Accessory)
● The position for drain pipe outlet can be raised up to 215 to 245mm 100 or less
⑧Panel installation
d (Prepare on site)
850mm above the ceiling. Use elbows for installa-
te) ●Install the panel on the indoor unit after electrical wiring work.
tion to avoid obstacles inside ceiling. If the horizon- Drain hose
850mm or less
tal drain pipe is too long before vertical pipe, the ●Refer to the attached manual for panel installation for details.
backflow of water will increase when the unit is
stopped, and it may cause overflow of water from
the drain pan on the indoor unit. In order to avoid
overflow, keep the horizontal pipe length and offset ⑨Check list after installation
of the pipe within the limit shown in the figure Joint for VP25
below. (Prepare on site) ●Check the following items after all installation work completed.
properly. Check if; Expected trouble Check
ehold goods,etc. Drain test The indoor and outdoor units are fixed securely? Falling, vibration, noise
e other harmful and ● After installing the drain pipe, make sure that drain system works correctly and that no water leaks Inspection for leakage is done? Insufficient capacity
d cause serious damage to from the joint and drain pan. Check whether the motor sound of the drain pump is normal. Insulation work is properly done? Water leakage
, it may cause corrosion of ● Conduct a drain test when installing, even during the heating season.
Water is drained properly? Water leakage
● In the case of new buildings, be sure to complete the test before fixing the ceiling.
1. Pour about 1,000 cc of test water into the drain pan of the indoor unit. Exercise care not to Power source voltage is same as mentioned in the model name plate? PCB burnt out, not working at all
allow electrical equipment such as the drain pump and other components to become wet There is mis-wiring or mis-connection of piping? PCB burnt out, not working at all
oor unit and the end of the while filling water. Earth wiring is connected properly? Electric shock
Pour test water through the pouring port of the pipe lid using a feed water pump or a similar Cable size comply with specified size? PCB burnt out, not working at all
own bend and/or trap in the device, or through the refrigerant pipe joint. Any obstacle blocks airflow on air inlet and outlet? Insufficient capacity
d out properly from the pipe ●In case of pouring water from the air outlet ●In case of pouring water from the pouring port of the pipe lid
Pipe lid
⑩How to check the dirt of drain pan and cleanimg the inlet of the drain pump. (Maintenance)
nd of the step part of the
The method of checking the dirt of drain pan
oor unit, and the bolt are
●It is possible to check dirt on the drain pan and drain pump inlet without removing the panel.
1. Open the inlet grille and remove the corner lid on the drain pan side.
2. Remove the drain cap cover (1 screw) from the panel corner.
en tighten the bolt.
3. Check the dirt on the drain pan from the drain cap, and check the drain pump inlet. If the
n it excessively. drain pan is very dirty, remove the drain pan and clean it.
Pouring port
Grommet
4. After checking, refix the drain cap cover securely.
If the cover is not refixed correctly, it may cause condensation to form and/or water to leak.
2. Make sure that water drains out completely and that no water leaks from any joints of the Corner Drain
drain pipe during the test. lid Drain Drain
cap cap pump
Joint for VP25 Joint for VP25 Test to confirm that the water drains out correctly while listening to the drain pump motor operating sound. cover inlet
(Prepare on site) (Prepare on site)
Pipe cover
At the drain socket (transparent), it is possible to check whether the water drains out correctly.
(For insulation) 3. Unplug the rubber plug on the indoor unit so that the remaining water drains from the drain
(Prepare on site) pan after the draining test.
allowed.)
After checking the water drainage, fix the rubber plug correctly. Installation work for the drain
pipe must be performed for the entire drain pipe up to the indoor unit. Cleaning of drain pump inlet
If the pipe lid has been removed in order to pour water, mount the pipe lid again. ●It is possible to clean the drain pump inlet and surrounding area by removing the drain cap only; it
Drain pump operation is not necessary to remove the panel and drain pan.
●Before removing the drain cap, remove the rubber plug and drain water from the drain pan.
●In case electrical wiring work completed 1. Remove the drain cap cover as described above.
　Drain pump can be operated by the wired remote control. 2. Insert the nose of the pliers into the concave portions (2 places) of the drain cap, and rotate the pliers
　For the operation method, refer to Operation for drain pump in the installation manual for wiring work. about 1 turn in the CCW direction. The drain cap is removed.
insulation of 3. When cleaning the drain pump inlet, use a soft plastic tool. If a metallic tool is used, the
●In case electrical wiring work not completed
　Drain pump will run continuously when the dip switch“SW7-1” on the indoor unit PCB is turned ON, the connector drain cap mounting portion may be scratched and water may leak.
o the drain hose (the CnB is disconnected, and then the power source (230VAC on the terminal block ① and ②) is turned ON. 4. Before mounting the drain cap, rinse it and remove any foreign material from the inside of the
cap. If the drain cap is installed with foreign material inside it, it may cause water to leak.
　Make sure to turn OFF “SW7-1” and reconnect the connector CnB after the test. 5. Insert the nose of the pliers into the concave portions of the drain cap and rotate the pliers to install the
drain cap. Rotate the drain cap about 1 turn in the CW direction until it stops rotating. If the drain cap is
ose. not rotated for 1 or more turns, the cap will not have been installed correctly.
gid. ⑦Wiring-out position and wiring connection Remove the drain cap, and then install it again correctly.
6. After tightening the drain cap, make sure the triangle () mark of the drain cap comes close to the triangle mark
● Electrical installation work must be performed according to the installation manual by an on the panel. If these triangle marks are not close to each other, tighten the drain cap further.
20mm or more electrical installation service provider qualified by a power provider of the country, and be 7. Refix the drain cap cover and rubber plug securely. If the cover is not refixed correctly, it
executed according to the technical standards and other regulations applicable to electrical may cause condensation to form and/or water to leak.
Triangle () mark of
installation in the country. Rubber plug
Insert the nose of the pliers into the concave
Drain pan the drain cap
Be sure to use an exclusive circuit. portions, and rotate the drain cap. Drain pump
hose, with adhesive. ● Use specified cord, fasten the wiring to the terminal securely, and hold the cord securely in order
not to apply unexpected stress on the terminal.
epare on site) ● Do not put both power source line and signal line on the same route. It may cause miscommuni-
cation and malfunction.
● Be sure to do D type earth work.
● For the details of electrical wiring work, see attached instruction manual for electrical wiring work. Exercise care not to scratch the end, inside, or Drain pump inlet Triangle () mark of the panel
Drain cap cover Drain cap threads of the drain cap seal.
Tighten the drain cap so that the 2 triangle
1. Loosen the 2 screws of the lid of the control box, and slide the lid in the direction of the arrow marks come close to each other.
shown in the figure. It will then be possible to open the lid. Notes for removing the drain pan
ccessory)
ulti only) 2. Unhook the lid from the control box, When opening the lid of the control box When closing the lid of the control box
●Before removing the drain pan, drain water from the drain pan. Remove the rubber plug and drain water.
and remove the lid. Hook the
●The drain pan is installed by the temporary installation plate. Remove the 2 drain pan fixing screws, and
make up-down bend 3. Remove the 2 screws from the wiring Wiring cover claws to the loosen the 2 screws of the temporary installation plate.
cover, and remove the wiring cover. control box. Slide the temporary installation plate to the outside of the drain pan. And then,it is possible to remove the drain pan.
upport and fix the pipe 4. Hold each wire inside the unit, and securely ●When reinstalling the drain pan, slide the temporary installation plate to the inside and temporarily fix the drain pan. Then, tighten the 2
fasten them to the terminal block. drain pan fixing screws and the 2 screws of the temporary installation plate. Also, refix the rubber plug securely.
Screws
5. Fix the wiring using clamps. Screws Slide the lid Temporary
6. Install the wiring cover and the lid of Hook of the lid
Trapped air will Loosen the 2
and hook the jinstallation
generate noises.
the control box. hole onto the plate of the
screws, and screw head.
Main fuse specification slide the lid to drain pan
e water open it.
Specification Part No. Lid of the
Hook of the lid
Remove the
control box screws. Loosen the Slide the plate
T3.15A L250V SSA564A149AF screws. to the outside.
- 50 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
PJF012D037 B
• Panel installation
Read this manual together with the indoor unit’s installation manual.
⑤ Orientation of the panel installation ⑦ Electrical wirin
Take note that there is an orientation to install the panel. The wiring work varies depend
WARNING • Install the panel with the orientation shown on the right. The connection positions of th
• Fasten the wiring to the terminal securely and hold the cable securely so as not to apply
unexpected stress on the terminal.
• Align the “PIPE SIDE” mark (on the panel) with the
refrigerant pipes on the indoor unit.

Loose connection or hold will cause abnormal heat generation or fire. • Align the “DRAIN” mark (on the panel) with the drain
•
pipe on the indoor unit. Control box
Make sure the power source is turned off when electric wiring work.
Otherwise, electric shock, malfunction and improper running may occur.
CAUTION
Function In case the orientation of the panel is

not correct, it will lead to air leakage
and also it is not possible to connect
The Anti draft panel has the anti draft mechanism. If the Anti draft panel is installed and the anti draft function is the flap motor wiring.
set, the anti draft function will be oprerated and reduce the draft feeling. (Refer to ⑩ Panel setting for details.)
・Standard panel : without the anti draft mechanism
・Anti draft panel : with the anti draft mechanism
① Before installation
Drain pipe
DRAIN
PIPE SIDE Refrigerant pipes
• Follow installation manual carefully, and install the panel properly. Refrigerant pipes
• Check the following items. It is pos
the scre
Accessories
<For the Standard pan
Accessories 1. Loosen 2 screws on the
Bolt 4 pieces For panel installation ⑥ Installing the panel 2. Pass the flap motor wiri
3. Fix the control box lid o
Strap 4 pieces For avoiding the corner panel from falling
1. Temporary hanging
Screw 4 pieces For fixing the corner panel • Lift up the hanger (2 places) on the panel for temporary support.
• Hang the panel on the hook on the indoor unit.

Note: Accessories are laid in the position removing the corner lid.
Accessories holding position Unit’s hook
Hook of the contr

② Checking the indoor unit installation position Hook
• Read this manual together with the air-conditioner installation manual carefully.
• Check if the opening size for the indoor unit is correct with the level gauge supplied in the indoor unit.
• Check if the gap between the plane and the indoor unit is correct by inserting the level gauge into the air outlet
port of the indoor unit. (See below drawing)
• Adjust the installation elevation if necessary.
<For the Anti draft panel>
• Remove the level gauge before installing the panel. 1. Loosen 2 screws on the con
Keep the distance between 10-14mm. 2. Pass the flap motor cable (2
Exceeding the range of the distance 3. Pass the anti draft motor ca
may cause failure etc.
Caution hanger 4. Fix the control box lid of the
Indoor Unit
If there is a height difference beyond the design limit
between the installation level of the indoor unit and the 10 40
+
panel, the panel may be subject to excessive stress Panel’s fixing hanger
during installation and it may cause distortion and
damage. Ceiling surface Ceiling opening
dimensions
Level gauge
• The installation level of the indoor unit can be adjusted finely (Accessary of the indoor unit)
from the opening provided on the corner, even after panel is Installed. (inserted into the unit)
(Refer to ⑥ Installing the panel for details.)
The Anti draft panel moves the parts of the anti draft
Hook of the contro
mechanism (shaded area,4 places).Note that they
may break if they are moved forcibly by hand.
Although the parts (shaded area) of the Standard
panel are separate parts from the body, they do not
move.
③ Removing the inlet grille
<Removal>
1. Hold the stoppers on the inlet grille (2 places) toward Caution Pass-through hole of
OPEN direction, open the inlet grille. • The parts (shaded area), of the anti draft mechanism around the air outlet, are separate parts.
2. Remove the hooks of the inlet grille from the panel while it Handle the panel with care.
is in the open position. Especialy, the shaded area of the Anti draft panel move. Note that they may break if they are
moved forcibly by hand.
Stopper
2. Fix the panel on the indoor unit ⑧ Installing a cor
• Fasten the panel on the indoor unit with the 4 bolts supplied with the panel.
1. To avoid unexpected falling o
Caution 2. Then hang the strap of a co
3. First insert the part “a” of a
• Improperly tightened fixing bolts cause the • If there is a gap between the ceiling and the 4. Fix with screw.
problems listed below, so make sure that bolts panel even after the fixing bolts are
④ Removing the corner lid are securely tightened. tightened, adjust the installation level of the
indoor unit again.
• Pull the corner lid toward the direction indicated by the arrow and remove it. (Same way for all 4 corner lids) Air leakage
Air leakage along
Pull up around this part as shown in the picture.
the ceiling
Fouling
Dew condensation or dripping Make sure no gap is left here.
Coner lid
• It is possible to adjust the installation height of the indoor unit with the panel installed as long
as there is no influence on the drain pipe inclination and/or the indoor unit levelness.
To adjust finely, please turn a nut fastening

the indoor unit using a spanner or similar tool
from the opening on the corner.
Bolt for installing the panel
Caution
Do not give any stress on the panel when adjusting the height of the indoor unit to
avoid unexpected distortion. It may cause the distortion of panel or failing to close the
inlet grille, and the parts of the anti draft mechanism.
- 51 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
PJF012D037 B
⑦ Electrical wiring ⑨ Installing the inlet grille

The wiring work varies depending on the panel type. Select the wiring work appropriate for the panel type. To attach the inlet grille, follow the procedure described in ③ Removing the inlet grille in the reverse order.
The connection positions of the indoor unit are as shown below irrespective of the panel type. 1. Hang the hooks of the inlet grille in the hole of the panel. (The hooks of the grille can be hanged in 4 side of the
panel as following.)
Signal line connection section
2. After the grille is hanged, close the grille while the stoppers(2 places) on the grille are kept pressed to “OPEN”
direction. When the grille comes to the original position, release the stoppers to hold the grille. Make sure to hear
the sound of “CLICK” in both stoppers.
<Installation>
Closing direction
Position for hanging hinges
Drain pipe
DRAIN Power line connection section

erant pipes
Refrigerant pipes Drain pipe
It is possible to open the lid of the control box by loosening
the screws of the lid and sliding it as shown below.
Caution
<For the Standard panel>
1. Loosen 2 screws on the control box lid of the indoor unit, and remove the lid by sliding it. • Installing the inlet grille from the hinge side.
2. Pass the flap motor wiring (20-wire) through the hook of the control box, and connect to CnJ1 (20P, white). • Be careful in the inlet grille Installing, unstable installing may cause grille falling.
3. Fix the control box lid of the indoor unit, and tighten 2 screws.
• Repair or replace the distorted, broken stopper at once, or the grille falling may occur.
For the Standard panel

Signal line connection section
⑩ Panel setting
Hook of the control box <Flap swing range setting (Individual flap cotrol setting)>
Hook
It is possible to change the swing range of the flap by the wired remote control. Once the upper and lower limit
positions are set, the flap will swing within the set range.It is also possible to set the different range to each flap.
<Anti draft setting>

The anti draft function will not be operated if the anti draft panel is installed and its wirings are only connected.
To operate the anti draft function, enable the anti draft setting by using the wired or wireless remote control.
Flap motor connector (CnJ1, 20P, white)
Note: It is not possible to set by the following remote control models or older.
<For the Anti draft panel> Wired:RC-EX1A, RC-E5, RCH-E3
1. Loosen 2 screws on the control box lid of the indoor unit, and remove the lid by sliding it. Wireless: RCN-E1R
2. Pass the flap motor cable (20-wire) through the hook of the control box, and connect to CnJ1 (20P, white).
3. Pass the anti draft motor cable (20-wire) through the hook of the control box, and connect to CnJ2 (20P, white). Once you have enabled the settings in this mode, the anti draft function is operated when the air-conditioner is
hanger 4. Fix the control box lid of the indoor unit, and tighten the 2 screws. started, and the parts of the anti draft mechanism are always open when the air-conditioner is operating. When the
air-conditioner is stopped, they are closed. It is possible to enabled or disabled the anti draft function for each air
outlet.
For the Anti draft panel
Signal line connection section For the setting details, refer to the user’s manual supplied with the remote control.
he parts of the anti draft

Hook of the control box
laces).Note that they
forcibly by hand.
rea) of the Standard
m the body, they do not
Flap motor connector (CnJ1, 20P, white)

Pass-through hole of the control box
are separate parts. Anti draft motor connector (CnJ2, 20P, white)
y break if they are
⑧ Installing a corner lid

1. To avoid unexpected falling of the corner lid, put the strap onto the corner lid's pin with turning the strap up.
2. Then hang the strap of a corner lid onto the panel’s pin.
3. First insert the part “a” of a corner lid into the part “A” of the panel, and then engage 2 hooks.
ween the ceiling and the 4. Fix with screw.
e fixing bolts are
installation level of the Pin Screw
e no gap is left here.

a
stalled as long
ness.
ease turn a nut fastening

ng a spanner or similar tool
n the corner.
he panel
t to
ose the
- 52 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
(2) Duct connected-High static pressure type (FDU) PJG012D022

(a) Indoor unit ○This model is high static
blow type air-conditionin
・This munual is for instaration of an indoor unit and an outdoor air processing unit (FDU-F).
・This manual is for the installation of an indoor unit.
For electrical wiring work (Indoor), refer to page 74. For remote control installation, refer to page CAUTION ①Before insta
78. For wireless kit installation, refer to page 108 . For electrical wiring work (Outdoor) and
refrigerant pipe work installation for outdoor unit, refer to page 90. ● Perform earth wiring surely. ●Install correctly acc
Do not connect the earth wiring to the gas pipe, water pipe, lightning rod and telephone earth wiring. Improper earth could
cause unit failure and electric shock or fire due to a short circuit. ●Confirm the followi
● Earth leakage breaker must be installed. ○Unit type/Power
The case of FDU-F
•The total connection capacity of the other air conditioning units and the outdoor air processing units If the earth leakage breaker is not installed, it could cause electric shocks or fire. Accessory item
must be from 50% to 100% (the total includes the outdoor air processing unit). ● Use the circuit breaker of correct capacity. Circuit breaker should be the one that disconnect all
The connection capacity of the outdoor air processing unit must not exceed 30% of the capacity of poles under over current. For hanging For refrigera
Flat washer Pipe cover Pipe cov
the outdoor unit. Using the incorrect one could cause the system failure and fire. (M10) (big) (small
•Single outdoor air processing unit can be used alone. The connection capacity of the outdoor air ● Do not use any materials other than a fuse of correct capacity where a fuse should be used.
processing unit must be from 50% to 100% of the total capacity of the outdoor unit. Connecting the circuit by wire or copper wire could cause unit failure and fire.
Maximum number of outdoor air processing units that can be connected to the outdoor unit is
2units. ● Do not install the indoor unit near the location where there is possibility of flammable gas leakages.
8 1 1
•Capacities of the suction air processing units can be calculated with the forllowing formulas. If the gas leaks and gathers around the unit, it could cause fire. For unit For heat insulation For heat insu
FDU650FKXZE1 = 90, FDU1100FKXZE1 = 140 ● Do not install and use the unit where corrosive gas (such as sulfurous acid gas etc.) or flammable gas (such hanging of gas pipe of liquid tube
as thinner, petroleum etc.) may be generated or accumulated, or volatile flammable substances are handled.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS It could cause the corrosion of heat exchanger, breakage of plastic parts etc. And inflammable gas could cause fire.
● Secure a space for installation, inspection and maintenance specified in the manual.
in order to protect yourself. Insufficient space can result in accident such as personal injury due to falling from the installation place.
②Selection of
● The precautionary items mentioned below are distinguished into two levels, and CAUTION . ● Do not use the indoor unit at the place where water splashes such as laundry. ① Select the suitable
: Wrong installation would cause serious consequences such as injuries or death. Indoor unit is not waterproof. It could cause electric shock and fire. ・Areas where the in
CAUTION : Wrong installation might cause serious consequences depending on circumstances.
● Do not use the indoor unit for a special purpose such as food storage, cooling for precision a circulator if the c
Both mentions the important items to protect your health and safety so strictly follow them by any means. instrument, preservation of animals, plants, and a work of art.
● The meanings of “Marks” used here are as shown on the right: ・Areas where ther
Never do it under any circumstances. Always do it according to the instruction.
It could cause the damage of the items. ・Areas where it can
● After completing the installation, do commissioning to confirm there are no abnormalities, and explain to the ● Do not install nor use the system near equipments which generate electromagnetic wave or high harmonics. ・Areas where ther
customers about “SAFETY PRECAUTIONS”, correct operation method and maintenance method (air filter
Equipments like inverter equipment, private power generator, high-frequency medical equipment, or telecommunication ・Areas where fire
equipment might influence the air-conditioner and cause a malfunction and breakdown. Or the air-conditioner might ・Areas where the s
cleaning, operation method and temperature setting method) with user’s manual of this unit. influence medical equipments or telecommunication equipments, and obstruct their medical activity or cause jamming.
Ask your customers to keep this installation manual together with the user’s manual. Also, ask them to hand ・Areas where it is
over the user’s manual to the new user when the owner is changed. ● Do not install the remote control at the direct sunlight. ・Areas not expose
It could cause breakdown or deformation of the remote control. ・Areas where dew
WARNING ● Do not install the indoor unit at the place listed below. This indoor unit is
· Places where flammable gas could leak. · Places where cosmetics or special sprays are condition and co
· Places where carbon fiber, metal powder or any powder is floated. frequently used. drop if the air-co
● Installation should be performed by the specialist.
· Place where the substances which affect the air-onditioner are generated · Highly salted area such as beach. If there is a poss
If you install the unit by yourself, it may lead to serious trouble such as water leakage, electric shock, fire, and injury due to overturn such as sulfide gas, chloride gas, acid, alkali or ammonic atmospheres. · Heavy snow area
of the unit. · Places exposed to oil mist or steam directly. · Places where the system is affected by 20mm thick for e
● Install the system correctly according to these installation manuals. · On vehicles and ships smoke from a chimney. ・Areas where TV a
Improper installation may cause explosion, injury, water leakage, electric shock, and fire.
· Places where machinery which generates high harmonics is used. · Altitude over 1000m ・Areas where any
● Do not install the indoor unit in the locations listed below (Be sure to install the indoor unit table wares, serv
● Check the density refered by the foumula (accordance with ISO5149). according to the installation manual for each model because each indoor unit has each limitation) ・Areas where ther
If the density exceeds the limit density, please consult the dealer and installate the ventilation system. · Locations with any obstacles which can prevent inlet and outlet Do not install the motion sensor at following ・Areas where not e
● Use the genuine accessories and the specified parts for installation. air of the unit places. It could cause detection error, incapacity ・Areas where light
· Locations where vibration can be amplified due to insufficient of detection, or characteristic degradation.
If parts unspecified by our company are used it could cause water leakage, electric shock, fire, and injury due to overturn of the unit.
strength of structure. · Place where vibration is applied to it for a operation.
● Ventilate the working area well in case the refrigerant leaks during installation. · Locations where the infrared receiver is exposed to the direct long period of time. (A beam from ligh
If the refrigerant contacts the fire, toxic gas is produced. In case of R32, the refrigerant could be ignited because of its flammability. sunlight or the strong light beam. (in case of the infrared · Place where static electricity or electromag- control and the air
● Install the unit in a location that can hold heavy weight.
specification unit) netic wave generates. ・When operating t
· Locations where an equipment affected by high harmonics is · Place where it is exposed to high temperature processing mode
Improper installation may cause the unit to fall leading to accidents. placed. (TV set or radio receiver is placed within 5m) or humidity for a long period of time.
· Locations where drainage cannot run off safely. · Dusty place or where the lens face could be Blowout tempera
● Install the unit properly in order to be able to withstand strong winds such as typhoons, and earthquakes.
It can affect performance or function and etc.. fouled or damaged. processing mode
Improper installation may cause the unit to fall leading to accidents.
● Do not put any valuables which will break down by getting wet under the air-conditioner. Since the temper
● Do not mix air in to the cooling cycle on installation or removal of the air-conditioner. the direction of bl
Condensation could drop when the relative humidity is higher than 80% or drain pipe is clogged, and it damages user’s belongings.
If air is mixed in, the pressure in the cooling cycle will rise abnormally and may cause explosion and injuries. Avoid directing th
● Do not use the base frame for the outdoor unit which is corroded or damaged after a long period of use.
● Be sure to have the electrical wiring work done by qualified electrical installer, and use exclusive circuit. ② Check if the place
It could cause the unit falling down and injury.
Power source with insufficient capacity and improper work can cause electric shock and fire. not able to hold, re
● Pay attention not to damage the drain pan by weld sputter when brazing work is done near the unit. strength is not en
● Use specified wire for electrical wiring, fasten the wiring to the terminal securely, and hold the cable securely If sputter entered into the unit during brazing work, it could cause damage (pinhole) of drain pan and leakage of water.
in order not to apply unexpected stress on the terminal. To avoid damaging, keep the indoor unit packed or cover the indoor unit.
Loose connections or hold could result in abnormal heat generation or fire.
● Install the drain pipe to drain the water surely according to the installation manual. Space for installation
● Arrange the electrical wires in the control box properly to prevent them from rising. Fit the lid of the Improper connection of the drain pipe may cause dropping water into room and damaging user’s belongings. ●Make installation a
services panel property.
Improper fitting may cause abnormal heat and fire.
● Do not share the drain pipe for indoor unit and GHP (Gas Heat Pump system) outdoor unit. (Indoor Unit)
Toxic exhaust gas would flow into room and it might cause serious damage (some poisoning or deficiency of oxygen) to Select either of two ca
● Check for refrigerant gas leakage after installation is completed. user’s health and safety. (Case 1)
● Be sure to perform air tightness test by pressurizing with nitrogen gas after completed refrigerant piping work.
● Use the specified pipe, flare nut, and tools for R32 or R410A. If the density of refrigerant exceeds the limit in the event of refrigerant leakage in the small room, lack of oxygen can
Using existing parts (R22) could cause the unit failure and serious accident due to explosion of the cooling cycle. occur, which can cause serious accidents.
● Tighten the flare nut according to the specified method by with torque wrench. ● For drain pipe installation, be sure to make descending slope of greater than 1/100, not to make traps,
If the flare nut were tightened with excess torque, it could cause burst and refrigerant leakage after a long period. and not to make air-bleeding. Inspectio
Check if the drainage is correctly done during commissioning and ensure the space for inspection and maintenance. hole
● Do not put the drainage pipe directly into drainage channels where poisonous gases such as sulfide gas (450x45
can occur. ● Ensure the insulation on the pipes for refrigeration circuit so as not to condense water.
Poisonous gases will flow into the room through drainage pipe and seriously affect the user's health and safety. This can also Incomplete insulation could cause condensation and it would wet ceiling, floor, and any other valuables.
Note (a
cause the corrosion of the indoor unit and a resultant unit failure or refrigerant leak. ● Do not install the outdoor unit where is likely to be a nest for insects and small animals.
● Connect the pipes for refrigeration circuit securely in installation work before compressor is operated. Insects and small animals could come into the electronic components and cause breakdown and fire. Instruct the user to
If the compressor is operated when the service valve is open without connecting the pipe, it could cause explosion and injuries due keep the surroundings clean.
to abnormal high pressure in the system. ● Pay extra attention, carrying the unit by hand. Notes (a) There must
● Stop the compressor before removing the pipe after shutting the service valve on pump down work. Carry the unit with 2 people if it is heavier than 20kg. Do not use the plastic straps but the grabbing place, moving the unit (b) Install refrig
If the pipe is removed when the compressor is in operation with the service valve open, air would be mixed in the refrigeration circuit
by hand. Use protective gloves in order to avoid injury by the aluminum fin.
and it could cause explosion and injuries due to abnormal high pressure in the cooling cycle. ● Make sure to dispose of the packaging material. (Case 2)
● Only use prescribed option parts. The installation must be carried out by the qualified installer. Leaving the materials may cause injury as metals like nail and woods are used in the package.
If you install the system by yourself, it can cause serious trouble such as water leaks, electric shocks, fire. ● Do not operate the system without the air filter.
● Do not repair by yourself. And consult with the dealer about repair. It may cause the breakdown of the system due to clogging of the heat exchanger.
Improper repair may cause water leakage, electric shock or fire. ● Do not touch any button with wet hands.
● Consult the dealer or a specialist about removal of the air-conditioner. It could cause electric shock.
In
Improper installation may cause water leakage, electric shock or fire. ● Do not touch the refrigerant piping with bare hands when in operation. h
The pipe during operation would become very hot or cold according to the operating condition, and it could cause a burn or frostbite.
● Turn off the power source during servicing or inspection work.
If the power is supplied during servicing or inspection work, it could cause electric shock and injury by the operating fan. ● Do not clean up the air-conditioner with water.
It could cause electric shock.
● Do not run the unit when the panel or protection guard are taken off.
Touching the rotating equipment, hot surface, or high voltage section could cause an injury to be caught in the machine, to get ● Do not turn off the power source immediately after stopping the operation.
burned, or electric shock. Be sure to wait for more than 5 minutes. Otherwise it could cause water leakage or breakdown.
● Shut off the power before electrical wiring work. ● Do not control the operation with the circuit breaker.
It could cause electric shock, unit failure and improper running. It could cause fire or water leakage. In addition, the fan may start operation unexpectedly and it may cause injury.
- 53 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
PJG012D022
○This model is high static ducted type air-conditioning unit. Therefore, do not use this model for direct
blow type air-conditioning unit. ③Cautions for the handling and installation place of outdoor air processing unit
①This unit monitors the outdoor air temperature at the position of sensor A in the figure, and controls the start and
①Before installation stop with the thermostat based on the value of sensor A and the setting temperature by the remote control.
●Install correctly according to the installation manual.

ng. Improper earth could
●Confirm the following points:
Unit body
○Unit type/Power source specification ○Pipes/Wires/Small parts ○Accessory items Outdoor air Duct Duct
Accessory item Air filter

t disconnect all
For hanging For refrigerant pipe For drain pipe Outdoor air blind SensorA
Flat washer Pipe cover Pipe cover Pipe cover Pipe cover Elbow
(M10) (big) (small) Strap (big) (small) Drain hose Hose clamp (Multi only)
uld be used.
mable gas leakages. Remote control’s setting temperature indicates the outdoor air temperature that controls the start and stop of operation
8 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 by the thermostat.
For unit For heat insulation For heat insulation For pipe For heat insulation For heat insulation For drain pipe For drain hose For drain pipe Accessory parts are stored When the thermostat is turned off, the operation is changed to the fan mode so that the outdoor air is blown out
flammable gas (such hanging of gas pipe of liquid tube cover fixing of drain socket of drain socket connecting mounting connecting inside this suction side.
directly into the room. For example if the remote control is set to 22°C in cooling operation, and if the outdoor air
bstances are handled.
temperature is 22°C or lower at that time, the unit will go into fan operation.
as could cause fire.
②When there is a difference between the air-conditioning temperature in the room during cooling operation and the tempera-
nual.
on place.
②Selection of installation location for the indoor unit ture of air blown out from the outdoor air processing unit, dewing water may drip from the unit. To prevent the dewing, provide
a sufficient heat insulation means at the air blow outlet.
① Select the suitable areas to install the unit under approval of the user. ③Since the air blow outlet on the outdoor air processing unit may blow out the outdoor air directly, orient the outlet in such a
・Areas where the indoor unit can deliver hot and cold wind sufficiently. Suggest to the user to use way that it will not blow air directly to persons in the room.
r precision a circulator if the ceiling height is over 3m to avoid warm air being accumulated on the ceiling. ④Since the unit controls the thermostat start and stop by monitoring the outdoor air temperature, it is prohibited to monitor the room
・Areas where there is enough space to install and service. 　temperature by means of the room temperature monitoring by changing the thermostat setting at the remote control side and the option
・Areas where it can be drained properly. Areas where drain pipe descending slope can be taken. remote temperature sensor. Otherwise, dewing water may drip from the unit at lower outdoor air temperatures during cooling operation.
ve or high harmonics. ・Areas where there is no obstruction of air flow on both air return grille and air supply port. ⑤Install the remote control of the outdoor air processing unit at a place closer to the administrator to avoid the end user from
nt, or telecommunication ・Areas where fire alarm will not be accidentally activated by the air-conditioner. using the remote control.
air-conditioner might ・Areas where the supply air does not short-circuit. When handing over the unit to the end user, make sure to explain sufficiently about the foregoing cautions, the
ivity or cause jamming.
・Areas where it is not influenced by draft air. installation place of the remote control for the outdoor air processing unit and the position of air blow outlet.
・Areas not exposed to direct sunlight.
・Areas where dew point is lower than around 28°C and relative humidity is lower than 80%.
This indoor unit is tested under the condition of JIS (Japan Industrial Standard) high humidity
ics or special sprays are condition and confirmed there is no problem. However, there is some risk of condensation ④Preparation before installation
drop if the air-conditioner is operated under the severer condition than mentioned above.
ch as beach. If there is a possibility to use it under such a condition, attach additional insulation of 10 to ●If suspension bolt becomes longer, do reinforcement of earthquake resistant.
tem is affected by 20mm thick for entire surface of indoor unit, refrigeration pipe and drain pipe. ○For grid ceiling
ey. ・Areas where TV and radio stays away more than 1m. (It could cause jamming and noise.)
・Areas where any items which will be damaged by getting wet are not placed such as food, When the suspension bolt length is over 500mm, or the gap between the ceiling and roof is
ndoor unit table wares, server, or medical equipment under the unit. over 700mm, apply earthquake resistant brace to the bolt.
as each limitation) ・Areas where there is no influence by the heat which cookware generates. ○In case the unit is hanged directly from the slab and is installed on the ceiling plane which
n sensor at following ・Areas where not exposed to oil mist, powder and/or steam directly such as above fryer. has enough strength.
etection error, incapacity ・Areas where lighting device such as fluorescent light or incandescent light doesn’t affect the
eristic degradation. When suspension bolt length is over 1000mm, apply the earthquake resistant brace to the bolt.
is applied to it for a operation.
(A beam from lighting device sometimes affects the infrared receiver for the wireless remote ●Prepare four (4) sets of suspension bolt, nut and spring washer (M10) on site.
ectricity or electromag- control and the air-conditioner might not work properly.)
. ・When operating the suction air processing unit independently, it operates in the outdoor air Suspension Bolt Location
sed to high temperature processing mode. A
period of time. Return duct Suspension
the lens face could be Blowout temperatures are not same at the standard unit operation and the outdoor air bolt (M10)
28
processing mode operations.

nditioner. Since the temperatures become higher during cooling or lower during heating, take care of ○ Adhere to the
measurements given
B
the direction of blowout outlet. Unit

mages user’s belongings. below for the length of
50 mm
Avoid directing the blowout outlet to the space where people are present.
Under
the suspension bolts.

② Check if the place where the air-conditioner is installed can hold the weight of the unit. If it is
C
not able to hold, reinforce the structure with boards and beams strong enough to hold it. If the Air supply duct
done near the unit. strength is not enough, it could cause injury due to unit falling. UNIT: mm
and leakage of water. Single type - 71 100-140
Multi type 45, 56 71, 90 112-160
ual. Space for installation and service FDU-F - 650 1100
s belongings. ●Make installation altitude over 2.5m. A 786 986 1720
door unit. (Indoor Unit) B 472 472 725
C 135 135 180
deficiency of oxygen) to Select either of two cases to keep space for installation and services.
(Case 1) From side of unit UNIT: mm
frigerant piping work. Pipe locations UNIT: mm
m, lack of oxygen can
or more
Single type 71
100
or more
Note (b)
0, not to make traps, Multi type 45-90
Inspection
20
FDU-F 650
on and maintenance. hole Slab 510
1000 or more
471
(450x450) 413
water.
150-
200
luables.
20
or more
Note (a) Ceiling

animals. 370
Drain pipe connection
203
fire. Instruct the user to

174
100-200 (PVC pipe) (Drain hose VP25)

104
467
Notes (a) There must not be obstacle to draw out fan motor. ( marked area)
29
g place, moving the unit Refrigerant gas pipe

(b) Install refrigerant pipe, drain pipe, and wiring so as not to cross marked area. (For natural drainage)
Refrigerant liquid pipe Drain pipe connection VP20 (PVC pipe)
(Case 2) From bottom of unit UNIT: mm
Single type 100-140
or more
Multi type 112-160

100
FDU-F 1100
635
468
A
405
Inspection
or more
hole
600
d cause a burn or frostbite. Drain pipe connection

B
187
145
(PVC pipe) (Drain hose VP25)

95
467
29
(Size of inspection hole) UNIT: mm

Single type - 71 100-140 Refrigerant gas pipe
(For natural drainage)
Multi type 45, 56 71, 90 112-160 Refrigerant liquid pipe Drain pipe connection VP20 (PVC pipe)
FDU-F - 650 1100
may cause injury. A 1100 1300 1720
B 620 725
- 54 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
⑤Installation of indoor unit ⑥Duct Work (continued) ⑦Refrigerant

Work procedure ⑥Make sure to insulate ducts, in order to prevent dewing on them. Caution
⑦Connect the duct with care not to touch the blower (fan motor) with fingers. Or, when inhaling
1. Prepare a hole of specified size on the ceiling. air directly from the suction side, install an air filter at the air suction inlet. ●Be sure to use new
2. Install suspension bolts at specified positions. Regarding whether exis
3. Make sure to use four suspension bolts. outdoor unit, catalogue
4. Adjust the indoor unit position in order to fit with it. FDU Air-conditioner unit 1) In case of reuse: Do
5. Make sure to install the indoor unit horizontally. Confirm the levelness of the indoor unit with 2) In case of reuse: Flar
a level gauge or transparent hose filled with water. Keep the height difference at both ends : When flared
of the indoor unit within 3mm.
Ceiling surface
6. Tighten four upper nuts and fix the unit after height and levelness adjustment.
Blow outlet Suction duct Suction hole
Protruding
Installation (marketed item) (marketed item) dimension
Blowout duct (with air filter)
(Option or marketed item) Inspection hole
[Hanging]
Flare die
Hang the unit up. Suspension bolt
If the measurements between FDU-F
M10 nut Washer for M10 the unit and the ceiling hole do Air-conditioner unit
not match upon installation, it A

Detailed view of part A
Unit
Spring washer for M10
may be adjusted with the long (hanger, vibration proof)
holed installation tool. Outdoor air
6Deep hood
●Use phosphorus de
3
4Blow outlet Suction duct (Prepare on site) In addition, make s
Adjustment for horizontality (marketed item)
2Blowout duct
5Inspection hole 7Wind capacity substances such a
(Option or marketed item)
●Do not use any ref
control damper
○Either use a level vial, or adjust the level according to the method below.
Using other refrigera
●Adjust so the bottom side of the unit will be leveled with the water surface as getting into refrigera
Bad example of duct work
illustrated below. ●Store the copper pipes
Pipe side
①If a duct is not provided at the suction side but it is substituted with the space over the ceiling, water getting into pipe
Pour water
humidity in the space will increase by the influence of capacity of ventilation fan, strength of ●Use special tools f
Water
surface wind blowing against the out door air louver, weather (rainy day) and others.
0-5mm a)Moisture in air is likely to condense over the external plates of the unit and to drip on the
Vinyl hose Piping work
ceiling. Unit should be operated under the conditions as listed in the above table and within
Refrigerant pipe
Let the pipe side be slightly sloped. the limitation of wind volume. When the building is a concrete structure, especially immedi-
ately after the construction, humidity tends to rise even if the space over the ceiling is not
○If the unit is not leveled, it may cause malfunctions or inoperation of the float switch. substituted in place of a duct. In such occasion, it is necessary to insulate the entire unit with 250
(Se
glass wool (25mm). (Use a wire net or equivalent to hold the glass wool in place.) in a
b)It may run out the allowable limit of unit operation（Example, the case of FDU: When outdoor
air temperature is 35°CDB, suction air temperature is 27°CWB) and it could result in such
⑥Duct Work troubles as compressor overload, etc..
c)There is a possibility that the blow air volume may exceed the allowable range of operation
① A corrugated board (for preventing sputtering) is attached to the main body of the air-conditioner due to the capacity of ventilation fan or strength of wind blowing against external air louver Work procedure
(on the outlet port). Do not remove it until connecting the duct. so that drainage from be heat exchanger may fall to reach the drain pan but leak outside 1. Remove the flare
●An air filter can be provided on the main body of the air-conditioner (on the inlet port). Remove (Example: drip on to the ceiling) with consequential water leakage in the room. ※ Make sure to loo
it when connecting the duct on the inlet port. ②If vibration damping is not conducted between the unit and the duct, and between the unit and nut with another
(Gas may come
② Blowout duct the slab, vibration will be transmitted to the duct and vibration noise may occur. Also, vibration
● Pay attention w
●Use rectangular duct to connect with unit. may be transmitted from the unit to the slab. Vibration damping must be performed. 2. Make a flare on liq
●Duct size for each unit is as shown below. ※Bend radius of
UNIT: mm
Do not twist a
Single type - 71 100-140 Bad example of duct work
Multi type 45, 56 71, 90 112-160
● Make sure to
FDU-F - 650 1100 Louver to
cause refriger
A 682 882 1202 outdoor air ※Do a flare conn
B 172 172 172 ● Make sure to h
A
double spanne
For ventilation loosening flar
twisting of the
B ● When fastenin
with the cente
by hand and th
torque mentio
●Duct should be at their minimum length. 3. Cover the flare co
●We recommend to use sound and heat insulated duct to prevent it from condensation. Connecting the air intake/vent ducts the case of FDU leakage inspectio
●Connect duct to unit before ceiling attachment. ①Fresh Air Intake ● Make sure to i
③Inlet port ※ Incomplete
[for air intake duct only] Side fresh air intake hole ● Use heat-resis
●When connecting the duct to the inlet port, remove the air filter if it is fitted to the inlet port.
(Pipe side)
○Use the side fresh air intake hole, or supply ● In case of usin
●Inlet port size for each unit is as shown below. through a part of the suction duct. Surface of ins
UNIT: mm
reinfoced.
Single type - 71 100-140 4. Refrigerant is cha
Multi Type 45, 56 71, 90 112-160 Fresh air intake through the As for the additio
suction duct
FDU-F - 650 1100 manual attached
A 582 742 1282
B 202 202 237 [for simultaneous air intake/vent]
(Pipe side)
○Intake air through the suction duct. Air vent hole

Caution:
(the side cannot be used) Refrigerating mach
A
is because, even if
force on the threa
by the stress corro
Fresh air intake through the Refrigerating mach
B
suction duct
<The case of using th

(Pipe side)
●Make sure to insulate the duct to prevent dewing on it. Secure with a band, etc. ②Air Vent Air vent hole
④Install the specific blowout duct in a location where the air will ○Use the side air vent hole.
circulate to the entire room. (always use together with the air intake)
●Conduct the installation of the specific blowout hole and the Blowout
duct Fresh air intake through the
connection of the duct before attaching them to the ceiling. suction duct
●Insulate the area where the duct is secured by a band for dew
condensation prevention. ○Insulate the duct to protect it from dew condensation.
⑤Make sure provide an inspection hole on the ceiling. It is indispensable to service electric The thckn
equipment, motor, functional components and cleaning of heat exchanger.
- 55 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
⑦Refrigerant pipe ⑧Drain pipe
Caution Caution
gers. Or, when inhaling
let. ●Be sure to use new pipes for the refrigerant pipes. Use the flare nut attached to the product. ● Install the drain pipe according to the installation manual in order to drain properly.
Regarding whether existing pipes can be reused or not, and the washing method, refer to the instruction manual of the Imperfection in draining may cause flood indoors and wetting the household goods, etc.
outdoor unit, catalogue or technical data.
1) In case of reuse: Do not use old flare nut, but use the one attached to the unit. ● Do not put the drain pipe directly into the ditch where toxic gas such as sulfur, the other harmful
2) In case of reuse: Flare the end of pipe replaced partially for R32 or R410A. and inflammable gas is generated. Toxic gas would flow into the room and it would cause
: When flared joints are reused indoors, the flare part shall be re-fabricated. (only for R32) serious damage to user’s health and safety (some poisoning or deficiency of oxygen).
In addition, it may cause corrosion of heat exchanger and bad smell.
Protruding dimension for flare, mm
D Pipe dia. Min. pipe Flare O.D. Flare nut ● Connect the pipe securely to avoid water leakage from the joint.
Protruding Rigid (Clutch type) tightening torque
dimension d
mm
wall thickness
mm For R32
D
mm N·m ● Insulate the pipe properly to avoid condensation drop.
Conventional tool
For R410A
● Check if the water can flow out properly from both the drain outlet on the indoor unit and the end
6.35 0.8 8.9 - 9.1 14 - 18
Flare die of the drain pipe after installation.
9.52 0.8 12.8 - 13.2 34 - 42
12.7 0.8 0 - 0.5 0.7 - 1.3 16.2 - 16.6 49 - 61
● Make sure to make descending slope of greater than 1/100 and do not make up-down bend
15.88 1 19.3 - 19.7 68 - 82 and/or trap in the midway. In addition, do not put air vent on the drain pipe. Check if water is
Detailed view of part A
19.05 1.2 23.6 - 24.0 100 - 120 drained out properly from the pipe during commissioning. Also, keep sufficient space for
(hanger, vibration proof)
inspection and maintenance.
●Use phosphorus deoxidized copper alloy seamless pipe (C1220T) for refrigeration pipe installation.
e) In addition, make sure there is no damage both inside and outside of the pipe, and no harmful Work procedure
substances such as sulfur, oxide, dust or a contaminant stuck on the pipes.
r
●Do not use any refrigerant other than R32 or R410A. 1. Make sure to insert the drain hose (the end mode of soft PVC) to the end of the step part
of drain socket.
Using other refrigerant except R32 or R410A (R22 etc.) may degrade inside refrigeration oil. And air
Attach the hose clamp to the drain hose around 10mm from the end, and fasten the
getting into refrigeration circuit may cause over-pressure and resultant it may result in bursting, etc.
screw about 5mm left to the nut.
●Store the copper pipes indoors and seal the both end of them until they are brazed in order to avoid any dust, dirt or ●Do not apply adhesives on this end.
space over the ceiling, water getting into pipe. Otherwise it will cause degradation of refrigeration oil and compressor breakdown, etc. ●Do not use acetone-based adhesives to connect to the drain socket.
tilation fan, strength of ●Use special tools for R32 or R410A refrigerant. Pipe cover (big) (For insulation)
hers. Stage difflernce part (Accessory)
Drain socket VP25 joint (Prepare on site)
unit and to drip on the Unit
Piping work
above table and within Drain hose
Refrigerant pipe Drain hose Adhesion VP25
ure, especially immedi- (Accessory) (Prepare on site)
When conducting piping work, make sure to allow the pipes Drain socket
over the ceiling is not Clamp (Accessory) Pipe cover (small)
to be aligned in a straight line for at least 250 mm, as shown Pipe cover (small) (For insulation)
ate the entire unit with 250mm Fasten the screw about (For insulation) (Accessory) (Prepare on site)
(Section where attached in the left illustration. (This is necessary for the drain pump 5 mm left to the nut.
ol in place.) in a straight line) Hose clamp Drain hose
to function) Drain socket
of FDU: When outdoor
it could result in such
ble range of operation Metal plate 10mm

inst external air louver Work procedure
n pan but leak outside 1. Remove the flare nut and blind flanges on the pipe of the indoor unit. Prepare a joint for connecting VP25 pipe, adhere and connect the joint to the drain hose (the
the room. ※ Make sure to loosen the flare nut with holding the nut on pipe side with a spanner and giving torque to the end made of rigid PVC), and adhere and connect VP25 pipe (prepare on site).
d between the unit and nut with another spanner in order to avoid unexpected stress to the copper pipe, and then remove them. ※As for drain pipe, apply VP25 made of rigid PVC which is on the market.
ay occur. Also, vibration (Gas may come out at this time, but it is not abnormal.) ● Make sure that the adhesive will not get into the supplied drain hose.
● Pay attention whether the flare nut pops out. (as the indoor unit is sometimes pressured.) It may cause the flexible part broken after the adhesive is dried up and gets rigid.
performed. 2. Make a flare on liquid pipe and gas pipe, and connect the refrigeration pipes on the indoor unit.
● The flexible drain hose is intended to absorb a small difference at installation of the unit or
※Bend radius of pipe must be 4D or larger. Once a pipe is bent, do not readjust the bending. drain pipes. Intentional bending, expanding may cause the flexible hose broken and water
Do not twist a pipe or collapse to 2/3D or smaller.
leakage.
● Make sure to use flare nuts assembled on the unions. Usage of other flare nuts could
cause refrigerant leakage.
Indoor unit
※Do a flare connection as follows:
● Make sure to hold the nut on indoor unit pipe side using Spanner
double spanner method as indicated when fastening /
loosening flare nuts in order to prevent unintentional Flare nut
twisting of the copper pipe. ●As for drain pipe, apply VP25 (OD32).
● When fastening the flare nut, align the refrigeration pipe Union
If apply PVC25 (OD25), connect the expanded connector to the drain hose, with adhesive.
with the center of flare nut, screw the nut for 3-4 times Torque
(Multi unit only)
wrench
by hand and then tighten it by spanner with the specified
torque mentioned in the table above. PVC25 (Prepare on site)
3. Cover the flare connection part of the indoor unit with attached insulation material after a gas
leakage inspection, and tighten both ends with attached straps. Indoor side Drain hose
● Make sure to insulate both gas pipes and liquid pipes completely.
※ Incomplete insulation may cause dew condensation or water dropping.
Side fresh air intake hole ● Use heat-resistant (120 °C or more) insulations on the gas side pipes.
● In case of using at high humidity condition, reinforce insulation of refrigerant pipes. Elbow (Accessory)
Surface of insulation may cause dew condition or water dropping, if insulations are not (Multi only)
reinfoced. 295-325mm
4. Refrigerant is charged in the outdoor unit.
Fresh air intake through the As for the additional refrigerant charge for the indoor unit and piping, refer to the installation
suction duct
manual attached to the outdoor unit.
3. Make sure to make descending slope of greater than 1/100 and do not make up-down bend
and/or trap in the midway.
Caution: ●Pay attention not to give stress on the pipe on the indoor unit side, and support and fix the
Air vent hole
Refrigerating machine oil should not be applied to the threads of union or external surface of flare. It pipe as close place to the unit as possible when connecting the drain pipe.
is because, even if the same tightening torque is applied, the oil is likely to decrease the slide friction ●Do not set up air vent.
force on the threads and increase, in turn, the axial component force so that it could crack the flare
by the stress corrosion. 1m-2m* Supporting metal Trapped air will
No bump
Fresh air intake through the generate noises.
suction duct
Refrigerating machine oil may be applied to the internal surface of flare only.
Air vent No trap
Insulation material Not touching the water
<The case of using thicness of insulation is 10mm> <The case of using reinfoced insulation> Descending slope greater than 1/100
Air vent hole Pipe cover (Accessory) Pipe cover (Prepare on site) * Please confirm that the pipe doesn’t bend.
●When sharing a drain pipe for more As wide as possible

(about100mm)
than one unit, lay the main pipe 100mm
Fresh air intake through the
suction duct
below the drain outlet of the unit. In
Unit Unit
addition, select VP30 or bigger size for
Band (Accessory) Band (Accessory) main drain pipe. VP30 or bigger
Band (Prepare on site) Descending slope greater than 1/100
The thckness of insulation is 10mm
Insulation (Prepare on site)
- 56 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
⑧Drain pipe (continued) ⑨Wiring-out position and wiring connection (continued)

Main fuse
4. Insulate the drain pipe.
● Be sure to insulate the drain socket and rigid PVC pipe installed indoors otherwise it may
cause dew condensation and water leakage.
※ After drainage test implementation, cover the drain socket part with pipe cover (small size),
then use the pipe cover (big size) to cover the pipe cover (small size), clamps and part of
the drain hose, and fix and wrap it with tapes to wrap and make joint part gapless.
Drain up
● The position for drain pipe outlet can be raised up to 600mm above the ceiling. Use elbows Signal line
Power source line * Earth
Remote control line
for installation to avoid obstacles inside ceiling. If the horizontal drain pipe is too long before
Multi unit wiring connection
vertical pipe, the backflow of water will increase when the unit is stopped, and it may cause
* Please fix the wiring in the band not to move even if it pulls.
overflow of water from the drain pan on the indoor unit. In order to avoid overflow, keep the Main fuse specification
horizontal pipe length and offset of the pipe within the limit shown in the figure below. Model
Specification Part No.
FDU FDU-F
295-325 100 or less
45-90 650 T 5A L 250V SSA564A149AH
112-160 1100 T 6.3A L 250V SSA564A149AJ
⑩External static pressure setting

600 max
You can set External Static Pressure (E.S.P.) by method of MANUAL SETTING on remote control.
Indoor unit will control fan-speed to keep rated air flow volume at each fan speed setting (Lo-P-Hi)
Otherwise, the construction point makes it same as drain pipe construction. You can set required E.S.P. by wired remote control that calculated with the set air flow rate and
pressure loss of the duct connected.
Drain test ● How to set E.S.P. by wired remote control

① Push "◆" marked button(E.S.P. button).
1. Conduct a drain test after completion of the electrical work. ② Select indoor unit No. by using button.
2. During the trail, make sure that drain flows properly through the piping and that no water ③ Select setting No. by using button and
leaks from connections. set E.S.P. by button.
3. In case of a new building, conduct the test before it is furnished with the ceiling. See detailed procedure in technical manual.
4. Be sure to conduct this test even when the unit is installed in the heating season.
Notice
Procedures You can not set E.S.P. by wireless remote control. E.S.P. button
1. Supply about 2000 cc of water to the unit through the air outlet by using a feed water pump. With E.S.P. setting, confirm that actual E.S.P. agrees with E.S.P. setting.
2. Check the drain while cooling operation. When E.S.P. setting is higher than actual E.S.P., the air flow rate becomes excessively higher.
Attached drain hose clamp
This will cause water leakage if water splashes.
Insert water supply hose When E.S.P. setting is lower than actual E.S.P ., the air flow rate becomes excessively lower and
for 20mm - 30mm to Pour water into a convex joint the cooling or heating may become ineffective.
supply water. Drain
(Insert hose facing
Main piping In order to reduce the risk above the factory E.S.P. setting is set within the range of 80 – 150 Pa
unit (E.S.P. setting No. 8 – 15). Be sure to use within the range of 80 – 150 Pa in actual operations. If
toward bottom.)
Drain situation can be checked with transparent socket. actual E.S.P. is lower than 80 Pa, it may cause water leakage.
If the electrical work has not been completed, connect a convex
Remove grommet joint in the drain pipe connection to provide a water inlet. Setting No. 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Make sure to Install Then, check if water leaks from the piping system and that E.S.P (Pa) 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
it back after test. drain flows through the drain pipe normally.
※ If 1 – 7 is selected for the setting No. on the remote control, the setting No. shows No. 8.
Outline of bottom drain piping work If 16 – 20 is selected for the setting No. on the remote control, the setting No. shows No. 15.
Factory default is No. 8.
● If the bottom drain piping can be done with a Connecting port of top drain pipe
descending gradient (1/50-1/100), it is possible to The Case of FDU-F
connect the pipes as shown in the drawing below. Setting No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Standard hard polyvinyl E.S.P. (Pa) 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
chloride pipes
Connecting port of bottom drain pipes
Transparent soft tube ※ If 13-20 is selected for the setting No. on the remote control, the setting No. shows No. 12.
(Outside diameter:20mm)
(Prepare on site) ※ Factory default is No. 8.
Rubber stopper (to be removed)
Insulating material SW8-4
Uncoupling the drain motor connector
ON
● Uncouple the connector CnR for the drain motor as P.C. board
illustrated in the drawing on the right. SW8-4:OFF (E.S.P. setting No. 8-15)
( Note: If the unit is run with the connector coupled,

drain water will be discharged from the upper )
ON
drain pipe joint, causing a water leak.
SW8-4:ON (E.S.P. setting No. 1-19)
⑨Wiring-out position and wiring connection If SW8-4 is turned to “ON”, E.S.P. setting range can be changed to 10 – 200 Pa (E.S.P. setting No.
1 – 19). This should not be used when actual E.S.P. cannot be confirmed, because the risk above
● Electrical installation work must be performed according to the installation manual by an becomes higher.
electrical installation service provider qualified by a power provider of the country, and be
executed according to the technical standards and other regulations applicable to electrical Setting No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
installation in the country. E.S.P. (Pa) 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 200
Be sure to use an exclusive circuit. ※ If 20 is selected for the setting No. on the remote control, the setting No. shows No. 19.
● Use specified cord, fasten the wiring to the terminal securely, and hold the cord securely in
order not to apply unexpected stress on the terminal.
● Do not put both power source line and signal line on the same route. It may cause miscom-
munication and malfunction. ⑪Check list after installation
● For the details of electrical wiring work, see attached instruction manual for electrical wiring work. ●Check the following items after all installation work completed.
1. Remove a lid of the control box (2 screws). Check if Expected trouble Check
2. Hold each wiring inside the unit and fasten them to terminal block securely.
3. Fix the wiring with clamps. The indoor and outdoor units are fixed securely? Falling, vibration, noise
4. Install the removed parts back to original place. Main fuse Inspection for leakage is done? Insufficient capacity
Insulation work is properly done? Water leakage
Power source voltage is same as mentioned in the model name plate? PCB burnt out, not working at all
No mis-wiring or mis-connection of piping? PCB burnt out, not working at all
Earth wiring is connected properly? Electric shock
Cable size comply with specified size? PCB burnt out, not working at all
Any obstacle blocks air flow on air inlet and outlet? Insufficient capacity
Remote control line * Earth
Indoor - Outdoor connecting line Is setting of E.S.P finished? Excessive air flow, water drop blow out
Single unit wiring connection
- 57 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
(b)(c)Replacement
Replacement procedure
procedureof the fan unit fan unit
of the
(c) Notes(1)
Replacement
The unit is procedure
a heavy item. Itof
mustthe be fan unitsecurely and handled with care not to drop when it is necessary to replace.
supported
(2)The
Notes(1) Forunit
the is
maintenance space,
a heavy item. referbetosupported
It must page 54. securely and handled with care not to drop when it is necessary to replace.
Model FDU100VH
(2) For the maintenance space, refer to page 54.
(i) Remove the control box and the side panel, and remove (iii) Remove the screws marked in the circles (2 places) from
the screws
(i) Remove themarked
controlin theand
box circles (2 places)
the side panel,from the unit
and remove the fan unit
(iii) Remove locatedmarked
the screws at the far
in side.
the circles (2 places) from
located
the at the
screws near in
marked side.
the circles (2 places) from the unit the fan unit located at the far side.
located at the near side.
Control box
Control box
Side panel Screw
Side panel Screw
Screw
Screw
(iv) Take out the fan unit in the arrow direction.

(ii) Take out the fan unit located at the near side in the arrow
direction.
(ii) Take out the fan unit located at the near side in the arrow
direction.
- 58 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
(3) Duct connected-Low/Middle static pressure type (FDUM) PJG012D021

(a) Indoor unit ○This model is middle sta
blow type air conditionin
This manual is for the installation of an indoor unit.
For electrical wiring work (Indoor), refer to page 74. For remote control installation,
refer to page 78. For wireless kit installation, refer to page 108. For electrical wiring
CAUTION ①Before insta
work (Outdoor) and refrigerant pipe work installation for outdoor unit, refer to page 90. ● Perform earth wiring surely.
Do not connect the earth wiring to the gas pipe, water pipe, lightning rod and telephone earth wiring. Improper earth could
●Install correctly acc
cause unit failure and electric shock or fire due to a short circuit. ●Confirm the followin
● Earth leakage breaker must be installed. 　○Unit type/Power
If the earth leakage breaker is not installed, it could cause electric shocks or fire.
Accessory item
● Use the circuit breaker of correct capacity. Circuit breaker should be the one that disconnect all
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS poles under over current. For hanging For refri
Using the incorrect one could cause the system failure and fire. Flat washer (M10) Pipe cover (big) Pipe co
● Do not use any materials other than a fuse of correct capacity where a fuse should be used.
in order to protect yourself.
Connecting the circuit by wire or copper wire could cause unit failure and fire.
● The precautionary items mentioned below are distinguished into two levels, and CAUTION .
● Do not install the indoor unit near the location where there is possibility of flammable gas leakages.
: Wrong installation would cause serious consequences such as injuries or death. 8 1
If the gas leaks and gathers around the unit, it could cause fire.
CAUTION : Wrong installation might cause serious consequences depending on circumstances. For unit For heat insulation For hea
Both mentions the important items to protect your health and safety so strictly follow them by any means. ● Do not install and use the unit where corrosive gas (such as sulfurous acid gas etc.) or flammable gas (such hanging of gas pipe of liquid
as thinner, petroleum etc.) may be generated or accumulated, or volatile flammable substances are handled.
●The meanings of “Marks” used here are as shown on the right:
It could cause the corrosion of heat exchanger, breakage of plastic parts etc. And inflammable gas could cause fire.
● Secure a space for installation, inspection and maintenance specified in the manual.
●After completing the installation, do commissioning to confirm there are no abnormalities, and explain to the
customers about “SAFETY PRECAUTIONS”, correct operation method and maintenance method (air filter Insufficient space can result in accident such as personal injury due to falling from the installation place. ②Selection of
cleaning, operation method and temperature setting method) with user’s manual of this unit. ● Do not use the indoor unit at the place where water splashes such as laundry.
Ask your customers to keep this installation manual together with the user’s manual. Also, ask them to hand Indoor unit is not waterproof. It could cause electric shock and fire. ① Select the suitable
over the user’s manual to the new user when the owner is changed. ● Do not use the indoor unit for a special purpose such as food storage, cooling for precision 　・Areas where the
instrument, preservation of animals, plants, and a work of art. a circulator if the
It could cause the damage of the items. ・Areas where the
WARNING ● Do not install nor use the system near equipments which generate electromagnetic wave or high harmonics. ・Areas where it c
Equipments like inverter equipment, private power generator, high-frequency medical equipment, or telecommunication taken.
●Installation should be performed by the specialist. equipment might influence the air-conditioner and cause a malfunction and breakdown. Or the air-conditioner might ・Areas where the
If you install the unit by yourself, it may lead to serious trouble such as water leakage, electric shock, fire, and injury due to overturn of the unit. influence medical equipments or telecommunication equipments, and obstruct their medical activity or cause jamming.
・Areas where fire
●Install the system correctly according to these installation manuals. ● Do not install the remote control at the direct sunlight. ・Areas where the
It could cause breakdown or deformation of the remote control.
Improper installation may cause explosion, injury, water leakage, electric shock, and fire. ・Areas where it is
● Do not install the indoor unit at the place listed below. ・Areas not expose
●Check the density refered by the foumula (accordance with ISO5149). · Places where flammable gas could leak. · Places where cosmetics or special sprays are
If the density exceeds the limit density, please consult the dealer and installate the ventilation system. · Places where carbon fiber, metal powder or any powder is floated. frequently used. ・Areas where dew
· Place where the substances which affect the air-conditioner are generated · Highly salted area such as beach. This indoor unit is
●Use the genuine accessories and the specified parts for installation. such as sulfide gas, chloride gas, acid, alkali or ammonic atmospheres. · Heavy snow area condition and co
If parts unspecified by our company are used it could cause water leakage, electric shock, fire, and injury due to overturn of the unit. · Places exposed to oil mist or steam directly. · Places where the system is affected by drop if the air-co
· On vehicles and ships smoke from a chimney.
●Ventilate the working area well in case the refrigerant leaks during installation. · Places where machinery which generates high harmonics is used. · Altitude over 1000m If there is a poss
If the refrigerant contacts the fire, toxic gas is produced. 20mm thick for e
● Do not install the indoor unit in the locations listed below (Be sure to install the indoor unit
In case of R32, the refrigerant could be ignited because of its flammability. according to the installation manual for each model because each indoor unit has each limitation) ・Areas where TV
●Install the unit in a location that can hold heavy weight. · Locations with any obstacles which can prevent inlet and outlet Do not install the motion sensor at following ・Areas where any
air of the unit places. It could cause detection error, incapacity table wares, serv
Improper installation may cause the unit to fall leading to accidents. · Locations where vibration can be amplified due to insufficient of detection, or characteristic degradation.
strength of structure. · Place where vibration is applied to it for a long ・Areas where the
●Install the unit properly in order to be able to withstand strong winds such as typhoons, and earthquakes.
· Locations where the infrared receiver is exposed to the direct period of time. ・Areas where not
Improper installation may cause the unit to fall leading to accidents. sunlight or the strong light beam. (in case of the infrared · Place where static electricity or electromag- ・Areas where ligh
●Do not mix air in to the cooling cycle on installation or removal of the air-conditioner. specification unit) netic wave generates.
· Locations where an equipment affected by high harmonics is · Place where it is exposed to high temperature the operation.
If air is mixed in, the pressure in the cooling cycle will rise abnormally and may cause explosion and injuries. placed. (TV set or radio receiver is placed within 5m) or humidity for a long period of time. (A beam from lig
●Be sure to have the electrical wiring work done by qualified electrical installer, and use exclusive circuit. · Locations where drainage cannot run off safely. · Dusty place or where the lens face could be control and the a
It can affect performance or function and etc.. fouled or damaged.
Power source with insufficient capacity and improper work can cause electric shock and fire. ② Check if the place
● Do not put any valuables which will break down by getting wet under the air-conditioner. not able to hold, re
●Use specified wire for electrical wiring, fasten the wiring to the terminal securely, and hold the cable securely in Condensation could drop when the relative humidity is higher than 80% or drain pipe is clogged, and it damages user’s belongings.
order not to apply unexpected stress on the terminal. strength is not en
Loose connections or hold could result in abnormal heat generation or fire. It could cause the unit falling down and injury.
Space for installation a
●Arrange the electrical wires in the control box properly to prevent them from rising. Fit the lid of the services ● Pay attention not to damage the drain pan by weld sputter when brazing work is done near the unit.
panel property. If sputter entered into the unit during brazing work, it could cause damage (pinhole) of drain pan and leakage of water. ●Make installation al
Improper fitting may cause abnormal heat and fire. To avoid damaging, keep the indoor unit packed or cover the indoor unit.
(Indoor Unit)
●Check for refrigerant gas leakage after installation is completed. ● Install the drain pipe to drain the water surely according to the installation manual. Select either of two ca
Improper connection of the drain pipe may cause dropping water into room and damaging user’s belongings.
● Do not share the drain pipe for indoor unit and GHP (Gas Heat Pump system) outdoor unit. (Case 1)
●Use the specified pipe, flare nut, and tools for R32 or R410A. Toxic exhaust gas would flow into room and it might cause serious damage (some poisoning or deficiency of oxygen) to
Using existing parts (R22) could cause the unit failure and serious accident due to explosion of the cooling cycle. user’s health and safety.
●Tighten the flare nut according to the specified method by with torque wrench. ● Be sure to perform air tightness test by pressurizing with nitrogen gas after completed refrigerant piping work.
If the flare nut were tightened with excess torque, it could cause burst and refrigerant leakage after a long period. If the density of refrigerant exceeds the limit in the event of refrigerant leakage in the small room, lack of oxygen can Inspectio
occur, which can cause serious accidents. hole
●Do not put the drainage pipe directly into drainage channels where poisonous gases such as sulfide gas can ● For drain pipe installation, be sure to make descending slope of greater than 1/100, not to make traps, (450x45
occur. and not to make air-bleeding.
Poisonous gases will flow into the room through drainage pipe and seriously affect the user's health and safety. This can also Check if the drainage is correctly done during commissioning and ensure the space for inspection and maintenance. Note (a
cause the corrosion of the indoor unit and a resultant unit failure or refrigerant leak.
● Ensure the insulation on the pipes for refrigeration circuit so as not to condense water.
●Connect the pipes for refrigeration circuit securely in installation work before compressor is operated. Incomplete insulation could cause condensation and it would wet ceiling, floor, and any other valuables.
If the compressor is operated when the service valve is open without connecting the pipe, it could cause explosion and injuries due ● Do not install the outdoor unit where is likely to be a nest for insects and small animals.
to abnormal high pressure in the system. Insects and small animals could come into the electronic components and cause breakdown and fire. Instruct the user to Notes (a) There must
●Stop the compressor before removing the pipe after shutting the service valve on pump down work. keep the surroundings clean. (b) Install refrig
If the pipe is removed when the compressor is in operation with the service valve open, air would be mixed in the refrigeration circuit ● Pay extra attention, carrying the unit by hand.
Carry the unit with 2 people if it is heavier than 20kg. Do not use the plastic straps but the grabbing place, moving the unit (Case 2)
and it could cause explosion and injuries due to abnormal high pressure in the cooling cycle.
by hand. Use protective gloves in order to avoid injury by the aluminum fin.
●Only use prescribed option parts. The installation must be carried out by the qualified installer. ● Make sure to dispose of the packaging material.
If you install the system by yourself, it can cause serious trouble such as water leaks, electric shocks, fire. Leaving the materials may cause injury as metals like nail and woods are used in the package.
●Do not repair by yourself. And consult with the dealer about repair. ● Do not operate the system without the air filter.
● Do not touch any button with wet hands. In
●Consult the dealer or a specialist about removal of the air-conditioner. h
Improper installation may cause water leakage, electric shock or fire. It could cause electric shock.
● Do not touch the refrigerant piping with bare hands when in operation.
●Turn off the power source during servicing or inspection work.
The pipe during operation would become very hot or cold according to the operating condition, and it could cause a burn or frostbite.
● Do not clean up the air-conditioner with water.
●Do not run the unit when the panel or protection guard are taken off. It could cause electric shock.
●Shut off the power before electrical wiring work. ● Do not control the operation with the circuit breaker.
It could cause electric shock, unit failure and improper running. It could cause fire or water leakage. In addition, the fan may start operation unexpectedly and it may cause injury.
- 59 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
PJG012D021
○This model is middle static ducted type air conditioning unit. Therefore, do not use this model for direct
blow type air conditioning unit. ③Preparation before installation
●If suspension bolt becomes longer, do reinforcement of earthquake resistant.
①Before installation 　○For grid ceiling
　　When the suspension bolt length is over 500mm, or the gap between the ceiling and roof is
ng. Improper earth could
●Install correctly according to the installation manual.
over 700mm, apply earthquake resistant brace to the bolt.
●Confirm the following points:
　○In case the unit is hanged directly from the slab and is installed on the ceiling plane which
　○Unit type/Power source specification ○Pipes/Wires/Small parts ○Accessory items
has enough strength.
Accessory item 　　When suspension bolt length is over 1000mm, apply the earthquake resistant brace to the bolt.
t disconnect all
For hanging For refrigerant pipe For drain pipe ●Prepare four (4) sets of suspension bolt, nut and spring washer (M10) on site.
Flat washer (M10) Pipe cover (big) Pipe cover (small) Strap Pipe cover (big) Pipe cover (small) Drain hose Hose clamp
uld be used. Suspension Bolt Location
A
Return duct Suspension
mable gas leakages. bolt (M10)
28
8 1 1 4 1 1 1 1
For unit For heat insulation For heat insulation For pipe For heat insulation For heat insulation For drain pipe For drain hose Accessory parts are stored
○ Adhere to the
flammable gas (such hanging of gas pipe of liquid tube cover fixing of drain socket of drain socket connecting mounting inside this suction side.
measurements given
B
bstances are handled. Unit
below for the length of
60 mm
Under
as could cause fire. the suspension bolts.
C
nual. Air supply duct
on place. ②Selection of installation location for the indoor unit
UNIT: mm
Multi type 22-56 71, 90 112-160
① Select the suitable areas to install the unit under approval of the user. Single type 40-50 60, 71 100-140
r precision 　・Areas where the indoor unit can deliver hot and cold wind sufficiently. Suggest to the user to use A 786 986 1404
a circulator if the ceiling height is over 3m to avoid warm air being accumulated on the ceiling. B 472 472 530
・Areas where there is enough space to install and service. C 135 135 180
e or high harmonics. ・Areas where it can be drained properly. Areas where drain pipe descending slope can be
t, or telecommunication taken.
air-conditioner might ・Areas where there is no obstruction of air flow on both air return grille and air supply port. Pipe locations UNIT: mm
ivity or cause jamming.
・Areas where fire alarm will not be accidentally activated by the air-conditioner.
・Areas where the supply air does not short-circuit. Multi type 22-90
・Areas where it is not influenced by draft air. Single type 40-71
・Areas not exposed to direct sunlight. 510

ics or special sprays are 471
・Areas where dew point is lower than around 28°C and relative humidity is lower than 80%. 413
ch as beach. This indoor unit is tested under the condition of JIS (Japan Industrial Standard) high humidity
condition and confirmed there is no problem. However, there is some risk of condensation
tem is affected by drop if the air-conditioner is operated under the severer condition than mentioned above. drain pipe connection
203
174
ey. (PVC pipe) (Drain hose VP25)
If there is a possibility to use it under such a condition, attach additional insulation of 10 to
104
ndoor unit 20mm thick for entire surface of indoor unit, refrigeration pipe and drain pipe. 29
467
as each limitation) ・Areas where TV and radio stays away more than 1m. (It could cause jamming and noise.) Refrigerant gas pipe
n sensor at following ・Areas where any items which will be damaged by getting wet are not placed such as food, Refrigerant liquid pipe drain pipe connection VP20 (PVC pipe)
etection error, incapacity table wares, server, or medical equipment under the unit.
eristic degradation.
is applied to it for a long ・Areas where there is no influence by the heat which cookware generates. Multi type 112-160
・Areas where not exposed to oil mist, powder and/or steam directly such as above fryer. Single type 100-140
ctricity or electromag- ・Areas where lighting device such as fluorescent light or incandescent light doesn’t affect 635
sed to high temperature the operation. 468

405
period of time. (A beam from lighting device sometimes affects the infrared receiver for the wireless remote
the lens face could be control and the air conditioner might not work properly.)
② Check if the place where the air-conditioner is installed can hold the weight of the unit. If it is drain pipe connection
nditioner.
187
not able to hold, reinforce the structure with boards and beams strong enough to hold it. If the
145
(PVC pipe) (Drain hose VP25)

95
mages user’s belongings.

strength is not enough, it could cause injury due to unit falling. 467
29

Refrigerant gas pipe
Space for installation and service Refrigerant liquid pipe drain pipe connection VP20 (PVC pipe)
done near the unit.
and leakage of water. ●Make installation altitude over 2.5m.
(Indoor Unit)
ual. Select either of two cases to keep space for installation and services.
s belongings.
door unit. (Case 1) From side of unit UNIT: mm
deficiency of oxygen) to
④Installation of indoor unit
or more
Installation
100
frigerant piping work.

or more
Note (b)
m, lack of oxygen can Inspection
20
[Hanging]
hole Slab
Hang the unit up.
1000 or more
0, not to make traps, (450x450) Suspension bolt

If the measurements between
150-
200
M10 nut Washer for M10 the unit and the ceiling hole do
on and maintenance.
20
or more
Note (a) Ceiling

370 not match upon installation, it
water.
100-200
Unit may be adjusted with the long
luables. Spring washer for M10
holed installation tool.
animals.
fire. Instruct the user to Notes (a) There must not be obstacle to draw out fan motor. ( marked area)
(b) Install refrigerant pipe, drain pipe, and wiring so as not to cross marked area.
Adjustment for horizontality
g place, moving the unit (Case 2) From bottom of unit UNIT: mm
○Either use a level vial, or adjust the level according to the method below.
or more
100
●Adjust so the bottom side of the unit will be leveled with the water surface as
illustrated below.
A
Pipe side
Inspection
or more
hole Pour water

600
Water
B surface
d cause a burn or frostbite. 0~5mm

Vinyl hose
(Size of inspection hole) UNIT: mm
Single type 40-50 60, 71 100-140 Let the pipe side be slightly sloped.
Multi type 22-56 71, 90 112-160
A 1100 1300 1720
B 620 725 ○If the unit is not leveled, it may cause malfunctions or inoperation of the float switch.
may cause injury.
- 60 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
⑤Duct Work ⑤Duct Work (continued) ⑥Refrigerant

① A corrugated board (for preventing sputtering) is attached to the main body of the air-conditioner Connecting the air intake/vent ducts 4. Refrigerant is cha
(on the outlet port). Do not remove it until connecting the duct. As for the additio
●An air filter can be provided on the main body of the air-conditioner (on the inlet port). Remove ①Fresh Air Intake manual attached
it when connecting the duct on the inlet port. [for air intake duct only] Side fresh air intake hole
Caution:
(Pipe side)
②Blowout duct ○Use the side fresh air intake hole, or supply Refrigerating mach
●Use rectangular duct to connect with unit. through a part of the suction duct. is because, even if
force on the thread
Duct size for each unit is as shown below. by the stress corro
UNIT: mm Refrigerating mach
Single type 40-50 60, 71 100-140 suction duct
Multi type 22-56 71, 90 112-140 <The case of using th
A 682 882 1202
B 172 172 172 [for simultaneous air intake/vent]
(Pipe side)
A
○Intake air through the suction duct. Air vent hole
(the side cannot be used)
B

suction duct
●Duct should be at their minimum length. The thckn

●We recommend to use sound and heat insulated duct to prevent it from condensation.
(Pipe side)
●Connect duct to unit before ceiling attachment. ②Air Vent Air vent hole
③Inlet port ○Use the side air vent hole.
(always use together with the air intake)
●When shipped the inlet port lies on the back. ⑦Drain pipe
●When connecting the duct to the inlet port, remove the air filter if it is fitted to the inlet port. Fresh air intake through the
●When placing the inlet port to carry out suction from the bottom side, use the following suction duct
Caution
procedure to replace the suction duct joint and the bottom plate.
○Insulate the duct to protect it from dew condensation. ● Install the drain p
Imperfection in dr
● Do not put the dra
and inflammable
⑥Refrigerant pipe serious damage t
●Remove the screws which fasten the ●Replace the removed bottom plate In addition, it may
bottom plate and the duct joint on the and duct joint. Caution ● Connect the pipe
inlet port side of the unit. ●Be sure to use new pipes for the refrigerant pipes. Use the flare nut attached to the product. ● Insulate the pipe
Regarding whether existing pipes can be reused or not, and the washing method, refer to the instruction manual of the ● Check if the water
outdoor unit, catalogue or technical data.
of the drain pipe a
1) In case of reuse: Do not use old flare nut, but use the one attached to the unit.
2) In case of reuse: Flare the end of pipe replaced partially for R32 or R410A. ● Make sure to ma
: When flared joints are reused indoors, the flare part shall be re-fabricated. (only for R32) and/or trap in the
●Fit the duct join with a screw; fit the bottom plate.
Protruding dimension for flare, mm drained out prop
●Make sure to insulate the duct to prevent dewing on it. Secure with a band, etc. Protruding D Pipe dia. Min. pipe Flare O.D. Flare nut
dimension d wall thickness
Rigid (Clutch type)
D tightening torque inspection and ma
④Install the specific blowout duct in a location where the air will mm mm For R32
Conventional tool
mm N·m
circulate to the entire room.

For R410A Work procedure
6.35 0.8 8.9 - 9.1 14 - 18
●Conduct the installation of the specific blowout hole and the Blowout Flare die 9.52 0.8 12.8 - 13.2 34 - 42 1. Make sure to ins
connection of the duct before attaching them to the ceiling. duct 12.7 0.8 0 - 0.5 0.7 - 1.3 16.2 - 16.6 49 - 61 of drain socket.
●Insulate the area where the duct is secured by a band for dew 15.88 1 19.3 - 19.7 68 - 82
Attach the hose
19.05 1.2 23.6 - 24.0 100 - 120
condensation prevention. screw about 5m
⑤Make sure provide an inspection hole on the ceiling. It is indispensable to service electric ●Use phosphorus deoxidized copper alloy seamless pipe (C1220T) for refrigeration pipe installation.
　In addition, make sure there is no damage both inside and outside of the pipe, and no harmful ●Do not apply a
equipment, motor, functional components and cleaning of heat exchanger.
Air-conditioner main unit
substances such as sulfur, oxide, dust or a contaminant stuck on the pipes. ●Do not use ac
●Do not use any refrigerant other than R32 or R410A.
　Using other refrigerant except R32 or R410A (R22 etc.) may degrade inside refrigeration oil. And air S
Drain socket
getting into refrigeration circuit may cause over-pressure and resultant it may result in bursting, etc.
Ceiling suriace ●Store the copper pipes indoors and seal the both end of them until they are brazed in order to avoid any dust, dirt or
water getting into pipe. Otherwise it will cause degradation of refrigeration oil and compressor breakdown, etc.
Blow outlet Suction duct
(marketed item) Suction hole ●Use special tools for R32 or R410A refrigerant.
Blowout duct (marketed item)
(with air filter)
(option or marketed item) Inspection hole Piping work
Refrigerant pipe Fasten the screw ab
5 mm left to the nut
When conducting piping work, make sure to allow the pipes Drain socket
Suction grille
(Locality) to be aligned in a straight line for at least 250 mm, as shown
Bad example of duct work 250mm
in the left illustration. (This is necessary for the drain pump
(Section where attached
in a straight line) to function)
①If a duct is not provided at the suction side but it is substituted with the space over the ceiling,
Metal plate 10
humidity in the space will increase by the influence of capacity of ventilation fan, strength of Work procedure
wind blowing against the out door air louver, weather (rainy day) and others. 2. Prepare a joint fo
1. Remove the flare nut and blind flanges on the pipe of the indoor unit.
a)Moisture in air is likely to condense over the external plates of the unit and to drip on the ※ Make sure to loosen the flare nut with holding the nut on pipe side with a spanner and giving torque to the end made of rigid
ceiling. Unit should be operated under the conditions as listed in the above table and within nut with another spanner in order to avoid unexpected stress to the copper pipe, and then remove them. ※As for drain pip
the limitation of wind volume. When the building is a concrete structure, especially immedi- (Gas may come out at this time, but it is not abnormal.) ● Make sure tha
● Pay attention whether the flare nut pops out. (as the indoor unit is sometimes pressured.)
ately after the construction, humidity tends to rise even if the space over the ceiling is not It may cause t
2. Make a flare on liquid pipe and gas pipe, and connect the refrigeration pipes on the indoor unit.
substituted in place of a duct. In such occasion, it is necessary to insulate the entire unit with ※Bend radius of pipe must be 4D or larger. Once a pipe is bent, do not readjust the bending. ● The flexible dr
glass wool (25mm). (Use a wire net or equivalent to hold the glass wool in place.) Do not twist a pipe or collapse to 2/3D or smaller. Indoor unit drain pipes. In
b)It may run out the allowable limit of unit operation (Example: When outdoor air temperature ● Make sure to use flare nuts assembled on the unions.
Usage of other flare nuts could cause refrigerant Spanner leakage.
is 35°C DB, suction air temperature is 27°C WB) and it could result in such troubles as
leakage.
compressor overload, etc..
※Do a flare connection as follows: Flare nut
c)There is a possibility that the blow air volume may exceed the allowable range of operation ●Make sure to hold the nut on indoor unit pipe side using
due to the capacity of ventilation fan or strength of wind blowing against external air louver double spanner method as indicated when fastening / Union
so that drainage from be heat exchanger may fall to reach the drain pan but leak outside loosening flare nuts in order to prevent unintentional Torque
twisting of the copper pipe. wrench ●As for drain pip
(Example: drip on to the ceiling) with consequential water leakage in the room.
● When fastening the flare nut, align the refrigeration pipe If apply PVC25
②If vibration damping is not conducted between the unit and the duct, and between the unit and with the center of flare nut, screw the nut for 3-4 times by hand and then tighten it by (Multi unit only
the slab, vibration will be transmitted to the duct and vibration noise may occur. Also, vibration spanner with the specified torque mentioned in the table above.
may be transmitted from the unit to the slab. Vibration damping must be performed. 3. Cover the flare connection part of the indoor unit with attached insulation material after a gas
Ind
Bad example of duct work
leakage inspection, and tighten both ends with attached straps.
Louver to
※ Incomplete insulation may cause dew condensation or water dropping.
outdoor air ● Use heat-resistant (120 °C or more) insulations on the gas side pipes.
● In case of using at high humidity condition, reinforce insulation of refrigerant pipes.
Surface of insulation may cause dew condition or water dropping, if insulations are not
For ventilation reinfoced.
- 61 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
⑥Refrigerant pipe (continued) ⑦Drain pipe (continued)
4. Refrigerant is charged in the outdoor unit. 3. Make sure to make descending slope of greater than 1/100 and do not make up-down bend
As for the additional refrigerant charge for the indoor unit and piping, refer to the installation and/or trap in the midway.
manual attached to the outdoor unit.
Side fresh air intake hole
●Pay attention not to give stress on the pipe on the indoor unit side, and support and fix the
Caution:
Refrigerating machine oil should not be applied to the threads of union or external surface of flare. It
pipe as close place to the unit as possible when connecting the drain pipe.
is because, even if the same tightening torque is applied, the oil is likely to decrease the slide friction ●Do not set up air vent.
1m-2m* Supporting metal Trapped air will
by the stress corrosion. No bump
generate noises.
Fresh air intake through the Refrigerating machine oil may be applied to the internal surface of flare only. No trap
Air vent
suction duct
Insulation material
<The case of using thicness of insulation is 10mm> <The case of using reinfoced insulation> Not touching the water
Pipe cover (Accessory) Pipe cover (Prepare on site) Descending slope greater than 1/100
* Please confirm that the pipe doesn’t bend.
Air vent hole
●When sharing a drain pipe for more As wide as possible
(about100mm)
than one unit, lay the main pipe 100mm
Unit Unit below the drain outlet of the unit. In
Fresh air intake through the addition, select VP30 or bigger size for
suction duct Band (Accessory) Band (Accessory)
Band (Prepare on site) main drain pipe. VP30 or bigger
The thckness of insulation is 10mm
Insulation (Prepare on site) Descending slope greater than 1/100
4. Insulate the drain pipe.
Air vent hole ● Be sure to insulate the drain socket and rigid PVC pipe installed indoors otherwise it may
cause dew condensation and water leakage.
⑦Drain pipe ※ After drainage test implementation, cover the drain socket part with pipe cover (small
Fresh air intake through the size), then use the pipe cover (big size) to cover the pipe cover (small size), clamps and
suction duct
Caution part of the drain hose, and fix and wrap it with tapes to wrap and make joint part gapless.
● Install the drain pipe according to the installation manual in order to drain properly.
Imperfection in draining may cause flood indoors and wetting the household goods, etc. Drain up
● Do not put the drain pipe directly into the ditch where toxic gas such as sulfur, the other harmful ● The position for drain pipe outlet can be raised up to 600mm above the ceiling. Use elbows
and inflammable gas is generated. Toxic gas would flow into the room and it would cause for installation to avoid obstacles inside ceiling. If the horizontal drain pipe is too long before
serious damage to user’s health and safety (some poisoning or deficiency of oxygen). vertical pipe, the backflow of water will increase when the unit is stopped, and it may cause
In addition, it may cause corrosion of heat exchanger and bad smell. overflow of water from the drain pan on the indoor unit. In order to avoid overflow, keep the
● Connect the pipe securely to avoid water leakage from the joint. horizontal pipe length and offset of the pipe within the limit shown in the figure below.
tached to the product. ● Insulate the pipe properly to avoid condensation drop. 295-325 100 or less
the instruction manual of the ● Check if the water can flow out properly from both the drain outlet on the indoor unit and the end
of the drain pipe after installation.
● Make sure to make descending slope of greater than 1/100 and do not make up-down bend
600 max
R32) and/or trap in the midway. In addition, do not put air vent on the drain pipe. Check if water is
mm drained out properly from the pipe during commissioning. Also, keep sufficient space for
Flare O.D. Flare nut
D tightening torque inspection and maintenance. [mm]
mm N·m
tool
Work procedure
8.9 ～ 9.1 14 ～ 18 Otherwise, the construction point makes it same as drain pipe construction.
12.8 ～ 13.2 34 ～ 42 1. Make sure to insert the drain hose (the end mode of soft PVC) to the end of the step part
3 16.2 ～ 16.6 49 ～ 61 of drain socket. Drain test
19.3 ～ 19.7 68 ～ 82
23.6 ～ 24.0 100 ～ 120
Attach the hose clamp to the drain hose around 10mm from the end, and fasten the 1. Conduct a drain test after completion of the electrical work.
screw about 5mm left to the nut. 2. During the trail, make sure that drain flows properly through the piping and that no water
eration pipe installation.
he pipe, and no harmful ●Do not apply adhesives on this end. leaks from connections.
pipes. ●Do not use acetone-based adhesives to connect to the drain socket. 3. In case of a new building, conduct the test before it is furnished with the ceiling.
Pipe cover (big) (For insulation) 4. Be sure to conduct this test even when the unit is installed in the heating season.
refrigeration oil. And air Stage difflernce part (Accessory)
Drain socket VP25 joint (Prepare on site)
result in bursting, etc.
Unit
rder to avoid any dust, dirt or Procedures
mpressor breakdown, etc. Drain hose
Drain hose Adhesion VP25 1. Supply about 1000 cc of water to the unit through the air outlet by using a feed water pump.
(Accessory) (Prepare on site)
Drain socket
Clamp (Accessory) Pipe cover (small) 2. Check the drain while cooling operation.
Pipe cover (small) (For insulation)
Fasten the screw about (For insulation) (Accessory) (Prepare on site) Insert water supply hose
5 mm left to the nut. for 20mm - 30mm to Attached drain hose clamp
Hose clamp Drain hose supply water.
e sure to allow the pipes Drain socket Pour water into a convex joint
(Insert hose facing Drain
least 250 mm, as shown toward bottom.) Main piping
ssary for the drain pump unit
Drain situation can be checked with transparent socket.
10mm Remove grommet
Metal plate Make sure to Install If the electrical work has not been completed, connect a convex
it back after test. joint in the drain pipe connection to provide a water inlet.
2. Prepare a joint for connecting VP25 pipe, adhere and connect the joint to the drain hose (the Then, check if water leaks from the piping system and that
drain flows through the drain pipe normally.
ner and giving torque to the end made of rigid PVC), and adhere and connect VP25 pipe (prepare on site).
pe, and then remove them. ※As for drain pipe, apply VP25 made of rigid PVC which is on the market. Outline of bottom drain piping work
● Make sure that the adhesive will not get into the supplied drain hose. ● If the bottom drain piping can be done with a
sometimes pressured.)
pipes on the indoor unit. It may cause the flexible part broken after the adhesive is dried up and gets rigid. descending gradient (1/50-1/100), it is possible to
not readjust the bending. ● The flexible drain hose is intended to absorb a small difference at installation of the unit or connect the pipes as shown in the drawing below. Connecting port of top drain pipe
Indoor unit drain pipes. Intentional bending, expanding may cause the flexible hose broken and water
leakage.
Standard hard polyvinyl
chloride pipes
Connecting port of bottom drain pipes
(Outside diameter:20mm) Transparent soft tube
(Prepare on site)
Union Rubber stopper (to be removed)
Insulating material
Torque
wrench ●As for drain pipe, apply VP25 (OD32). Uncoupling the drain motor connector
If apply PVC25 (OD25), connect the expanded connector to the drain hose, with adhesive. ● Uncouple the connector CnR for the drain motor as
and then tighten it by (Multi unit only) PVC25 (Prepare on site)
P.C. board
illustrated in the drawing on the right.
( )
ion material after a gas Note: If the unit is run with the connector coupled,
Indoor side Drain hose
drain water will be discharged from the upper
ropping. drain pipe joint, causing a water leak.
pes.
Elbow (Accessory)
refrigerant pipes. (Multi only)
g, if insulations are not 295 - 325mm
PJG012D021
- 62 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
⑧Wiring-out position and wiring connection ⑨External static pressure setting (continued)
● Electrical installation work must be performed according to the installation manual by an ● How to start automatic setting
electrical installation service provider qualified by a power provider of the country, and be ①, ② Same setting as MANUAL SETTING.
executed according to the technical standards and other regulations applicable to electrical ③ Select [AUT] by using button and press button .
installation in the country. ② After setting E.S.P. at "AUT", operate unit in FAN mode with certain fan speed (Lo-Uhi).
Be sure to use an exclusive circuit.
● Use specified cord, fasten the wiring to the terminal securely, and hold the cord securely in Indoor unit fan will run automatically and recognize E.S.P. by itself.
order not to apply unexpected stress on the terminal. The operation for automatic E.S.P. recognition will last about 6 minutes, and it will be stopped
● Do not put both power source line and signal line on the same route. It may cause miscom-
after recognition is completed.
munication and malfunction.
Caution
● For the details of electrical wiring work, see attached instruction manual for electrical wiring
· Be sure to execute AUTOMATIC SETTING by remote control AFTER ducting work is completed.
work.
1. Remove a lid of the control box (2 screws). When duct specification is changed after AUTOMATIC SETTING, be sure to execute AUTOMATIC
2. Hold each wiring inside the unit and fasten them to terminal block securely. SETTING again after power resetting and turning on again.
3. Fix the wiring with clamps. · Be sure to execute AUTOMATIC SETTING before trial cooling operation.
4. Install the removed parts back to original place. (See ELECTRICAL WIRING WORK INSTRUCTION about trial cooling operation)
· Before AUTOMATIC SETTING, be sure to check that return air filter in duct is installed and
Single unit wiring connection damper is opened.
Main fuse
Wrong procedure causes excessive air flow or water drop blown out.
Notice
· During operation for automatic recognition (the Auto Operation), fan rotates with certain speeds
regardless of set fan speed by remote control.
· When duct is set with low static pressure (around 10-50Pa), even if indoor unit operate with
higher air flow volume than rated one, but it is not abnormal.
* · When you changed operation mode or stop operation with ON/OFF button during Auto Opera-
Multi unit wiring connection Remote control line Indoor - Outdoor connecting line Earth
tion, the Auto operation will be canceled.
Main fuse
· In such case, be sure to execute AUTOMATIC SETTING again according to above procedure.
⑩Check list after installation

●Check the following items after all installation work completed.
Check if Expected trouble Check

Power source line * The indoor and outdoor units are fixed securely? Falling, vibration, noise
Signal line Remote control line Earth
* Please fix the wiring in the band not to move even if it pulls. Inspection for leakage is done? Insufficient capacity
Main fuse specification Insulation work is properly done? Water leakage
Model Specification Part No. Water is drained properly? Water leakage
22-56 T3.15A L250V SSA564A149AF Power source voltage is same as mentioned in the model name plate? PCB burnt out, not working at all
71-160 T5A L250V SSA564A149AH No mis-wiring or mis-connection of piping? PCB burnt out, not working at all
Earth wiring is connected properly? Electric shock
Cable size comply with specified size? PCB burnt out, not working at all
Any obstacle blocks air flow on air inlet and outlet? Insufficient capacity
⑨External static pressure setting Is setting of E.S.P finished? Excessive air flow, water drop blow out
You can set External Static Pressure (E.S.P.) by either method of MANUAL SETTING or AUTO-
MATIC SETTING by remote control.
Indoor unit will control fan-speed to keep rated air flow volume at each fan speed setting (Lo-Uhi)
1. MANUAL SETTING
You can set required E.S.P. by wired remote control that calculated with the set air flow rate
and pressure loss of the duct connected.
Select No.1-10 (10Pa-100Pa) from following table according to calculation result.
Refer to technical manual for details of air flow characteristic.
Setting No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
External Static Pressure (Pa) 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
※ When you set No.11-19 by remote control, unit will control fan-speed with setting of
No.10 Factory default is at No.5.
● How to set E.S.P by wired remote control

① Push "◆" marked button(E.S.P button).
② Select indoor unit No. by using button.
③ Select setting No. by using button and set E.S.P. by button.
See detailed procedure in technical manual.
Notice
You can not set E.S.P. by wireless remote control. E.S.P. button
Caution
Be sure to set E.S.P. according to actual duct connected.
Wrong settings causes excessive air flow volume or water drop blown out.
2. AUTOMATIC SETTING
Indoor unit will recognize E.S.P. by itself automatically and select appropriate fan speed No.1-10.
PJG012D021
- 63 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
(b) Replacement procedure of the fan unit

Notes(1) The unit is a heavy item. It must be supported securely and handled with care not to drop when it is necessary to replace.
(2) For the maintenance space, refer to page 60.
Model FDUM100VH
(i) R
emove the control box and the side panel, and remove the (iii) Remove the screws marked in the circles (2 places) from the
screws marked in the circles (2 places) from the unit located fan unit located at the far side.
at the near side.
(iii) Remove the screws marked in the circles (2 places)Screw
from the
Control box Control box
Side panel
Control box
fan unit located at the far side. Screw
Side panel
Side panel
Side panel
Side panel
Screw (iii) Remove the screws marked in the circles (2 places)Screw
from the
Screw Control box
fan unit located at the far side. Screw
Screw Screw
Screw Side panel Screw
Control box
Screw
Screw
Side panel
Screw
2) Take out the fan unit in the arrow direction.
2) Take out the fan unit in the arrow direction.
(ii) T ake out the fan unit located at the near side in the arrow (iv) Take
2) Take outfan
out the theunit
fan located
unit in the arrow
at the neardirection.
side in the arrow
direction. direction.
2) Take out the fan unit located at the near side in the arrow
direction.
2) Take out the fan unit located at the near side in the arrow
direction.
- 64 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
(4) Ceiling suspended type (FDE) PFA012D636 B
①Before ins
This manual is for the installation of an indoor unit.
For electrical wiring work (Indoor), refer to page 74. For remote control installation, Install correctly a
refer to page 78. For wireless kit installation, refer to page 116. For electrical wiring CAUTION
work (Outdoor) and refrigerant pipe work installation for outdoor unit, refer to page
90. ● Perform earth wiring surely.
Do not connect the earth wiring to the gas pipe, water pipe, lightning rod and telephone earth wiring. Improper earth could Pipes/Wires/Sma
cause unit failure, electric shock and fire due to a short circuit. Accessory item
● Earth leakage breaker must be installed.
For unit hanging
If the earth leakage breaker is not installed, it can cause fire and electric shocks.
Flat washer (M10) Paper pattern Pipe cove
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ● Use the circuit breaker of correct capacity. Circuit breaker should be the one that disconnect all
poles under over current.
● Read the “SAFETY PRECAUTIONS” carefully first of all and then strictly follow it during the installation work Using the incorrect one could cause the system failure and fire.
in order to protect yourself. ● Do not use any materials other than a fuse of correct capacity where a fuse should be used. 8 1 1
● The precautionary items mentioned below are distinguished into two levels, and CAUTION . Connecting the circuit by wire or copper wire could cause unit failure and fire. For unit hanging For unit hanging For heat in
: Wrong installation would cause serious consequences such as injuries or death. ● Do not install the indoor unit near the location where there is possibility of flammable gas leakages.
and adjustment of gas pip
CAUTION : Wrong installation might cause serious consequences depending on circumstances. If the gas leaks and gathers around the unit, it could cause fire.
Both mentions the important items to protect your health and safety so strictly follow them by any means. ● Do not install and use the unit where corrosive gas (such as sulfurous acid gas etc.) or flammable gas (such
●The meanings of “Marks” used here are as shown as follows:
as thinner, petroleum etc.) may be generated or accumulated, or volatile flammable substances are handled. ②Selection
It could cause the corrosion of heat exchanger, breakage of plastic parts etc. And inflammable gas could cause fire.
●After completing the installation, do commissioning to confirm there are no abnormalities, and explain to the ● Secure a space for installation, inspection and maintenance specified in the manual.
customers about “SAFETY PRECAUTIONS”, correct operation method and maintenance method (air filter ① Select the suit
Insufficient space can result in accident such as personal injury due to falling from the installation place.
cleaning, operation method and temperature setting method) with user’s manual of this unit. ・
● Do not use the indoor unit at the place where water splashes such as laundry. Suggest to th
Ask your customers to keep this installation manual together with the user’s manual. Also, ask them to hand Indoor unit is not waterproof. It could cause electric shock and fire. avoid warm a
over the user’s manual to the new user when the owner is changed. ● Do not use the indoor unit for a special purpose such as food storage, cooling for precision ・In case of havi
instrument, preservation of animals, plants, and a work of art. 4 m. It could re
WARNING It could cause the damage of the items. ・Areas where
● Do not install nor use the system near equipments which generate electromagnetic wave or high harmonics. ・Areas where
●Installation should be performed by the specialist. Equipments like inverter equipment, private power generator, high-frequency medical equipment, or telecommunication ing slope can
equipment might influence the air-conditioner and cause a malfunction and breakdown. Or the air-conditioner might ・
If you install the unit by yourself, it may lead to serious trouble such as water leakage, electric shock, fire, and injury due to overturn of the unit. ・
influence medical equipments or telecommunication equipments, and obstruct their medical activity or cause jamming.
●Install the system correctly according to these installation manuals. ● Do not install the remote control at the direct sunlight. ・Areas where
Improper installation may cause explosion, injury, water leakage, electric shock, and fire. It could cause breakdown or deformation of the remote control. ・
・Areas not ex
●When installing in small rooms, take prevention measures not to exceed the density limit of refrigerant in the ● Do not install the indoor unit at the place listed below. ・Areas where de
event of leakage, referred by the formula (accordance with ISO5149). · Places where flammable gas could leak. · Places where cosmetics or special sprays are
frequently used. This indoor uni
· Places where carbon fiber, metal powder or any powder is floated.
If the density of refrigerant exceeds the limit, please consult the dealer and install the ventilation system, otherwise lack of · Highly salted area such as beach.
· Place where the substances which affect the air-conditioner are generated
oxygen can occur, which can cause serious accidents.
such as sulfide gas, chloride gas, acid, alkali or ammonic atmospheres. · Heavy snow area condensation d
●Use the genuine accessories and the specified parts for installation. · Places exposed to oil mist or steam directly. · Places where the system is affected by mentioned abo
· On vehicles and ships smoke from a chimney. If there is a pos
If parts unspecified by our company are used it could cause water leakage, electric shock, fire, and injury due to overturn of the unit. · Altitude over 1000m
· Places where machinery which generates high harmonics is used. 10 to 20mm th
●Ventilate the working area well in case the refrigerant leaks during installation. ・Areas where TV
● Do not install the indoor unit in the locations listed below (Be sure to install the indoor
If the refrigerant contacts the fire, toxic gas is produced. unit according to the installation manual for each model because each indoor unit has ・Areas where a
In case of R32, the refrigerant could be ignited because of its flammability. each limitation) such as food
· Locations with any obstacles which can prevent inlet and outlet Do not install the motion sensor at following ・
●Install the unit in a location that can hold heavy weight. air of the unit places. It could cause detection error, incapacity ・Areas where no
Improper installation may cause the unit to fall leading to accidents. · Locations where vibration can be amplified due to insufficient of detection, or characteristic degradation. ・
strength of structure. · Place where vibration is applied to it for a long doesn’t affec
●Install the unit properly in order to be able to withstand strong winds such as typhoons, and earthquakes. period of time.
· Locations where the infrared receiver is exposed to the direct (A beam from
Improper installation may cause the unit to fall leading to accidents. · Place where static electricity or electromag-
sunlight or the strong light beam. (in case of the infrared
netic wave generates.
wireless remo
●Do not mix air in to the cooling cycle on installation or removal of the air-conditioner. specification unit)
· Place where it is exposed to high temperature
② Check if the plac
If air is mixed in, the pressure in the cooling cycle will rise abnormally and may cause explosion and injuries. · Locations where an equipment affected by high harmonics is If it is not able to
or humidity for a long period of time.
placed. (TV set or radio receiver is placed within 5m) to hold it. If the s
· Dusty place or where the lens face could be
●Be sure to have the electrical wiring work done by qualified electrical installer, and use exclusive circuit. · Locations where drainage cannot run off safely. fouled or damaged. ③ If there are 2 un
Power source with insufficient capacity and improper work can cause electric shock and fire. It can affect performance or function and etc.. malfunction due
●Use specified wire for electrical wiring, fasten the wiring to the terminal securely, and hold the cable securely in ● Do not put any valuables which will break down by getting wet under the air-conditioner. ④ When plural ind
Condensation could drop when the relative humidity is higher than 80% or drain pipe is clogged, and it damages user’s belongings. other more than
order not to apply unexpected stress on the terminal.
Loose connections or hold could result in abnormal heat generation or fire. Space for installa
It could cause the unit falling down and injury.
●Arrange the electrical wires in the control box properly to prevent them from rising. Fit the lid of the services panel property. ● Pay attention not to damage the drain pan by weld sputter when brazing work is done near the unit. 4000m
Improper fitting may cause abnormal heat and fire. If sputter entered into the unit during brazing work, it could cause damage (pinhole) of drain pan and leakage of water.
●Check for refrigerant gas leakage after installation is completed. To avoid damaging, keep the indoor unit packed or cover the indoor unit.
If the refrigerant gas leaks into the house and comes in contact with a fan heater, a stove, or an oven, toxic gas is produced. ● Install the drain pipe to drain the water surely according to the installation manual.
Improper connection of the drain pipe may cause dropping water into room and damaging user’s belongings.
300mm or more
●Use the specified pipe, flare nut, and tools for R32 or R410A. 100mm
● Do not share the drain pipe for indoor unit and GHP (Gas Heat Pump system) outdoor unit. or more
Using existing parts (R22) could cause the unit failure and serious accident due to explosion of the cooling cycle.
Toxic exhaust gas would flow into room and it might cause serious damage (some poisoning or deficiency of oxygen) to
●Tighten the flare nut according to the specified method by with torque wrench. user’s health and safety.
If the flare nut were tightened with excess torque, it could cause burst and refrigerant leakage after a long period. ● Be sure to perform air tightness test by pressurizing with nitrogen gas after completed refrigerant piping work.
●Do not put the drainage pipe directly into drainage channels where poisonous gases such as sulfide gas can occur. If the density of refrigerant exceeds the limit in the event of refrigerant leakage in the small room, lack of oxygen can
occur, which can cause serious accidents. Obstacl
Poisonous gases will flow into the room through drainage pipe and seriously affect the user's health and safety. This can also
cause the corrosion of the indoor unit and a resultant unit failure or refrigerant leak. ● For drain pipe installation, be sure to make descending slope of greater than 1/100, not to make traps, and not to make air-bleeding.
Check if the drainage is correctly done during commissioning and ensure the space for inspection and maintenance.
●Connect the pipes for refrigeration circuit securely in installation work before compressor is operated.
● Ensure the insulation on the pipes for refrigeration circuit so as not to condense water. ③Preparati
If the compressor is operated when the service valve is open without connecting the pipe, it could cause explosion and injuries due Incomplete insulation could cause condensation and it would wet ceiling, floor, and any other valuables.
to abnormal high pressure in the system. If suspension bo
● Do not install the outdoor unit where is likely to be a nest for insects and small animals.
●Stop the compressor before removing the pipe after shutting the service valve on pump down work. Insects and small animals could come into the electronic components and cause breakdown and fire. Instruct the user to keep the surroundings clean. For grid ceilin
If the pipe is removed when the compressor is in operation with the service valve open, air would be mixed in the refrigeration circuit ● Pay extra attention, carrying the unit by hand. When suspen
and it could cause explosion and injuries due to abnormal high pressure in the cooling cycle. Carry the unit with 2 people if it is heavier than 20kg. Do not use the plastic straps but the grabbing place, moving the unit and roof is ov
●Only use prescribed option parts. The installation must be carried out by the qualified installer. by hand. Use protective gloves in order to avoid injury by the aluminum fin. In case the u
If you install the system by yourself, it can cause serious trouble such as water leaks, electric shocks, fire. ● Make sure to dispose of the packaging material. ceiling plane
Leaving the materials may cause injury as metals like nail and woods are used in the package. When suspension
●Do not repair by yourself. And consult with the dealer about repair.
● Do not operate the system without the air filter. Prepare four (4)
●Consult the dealer or a specialist about removal of the air-conditioner. ● Do not touch any button with wet hands. Pitch of suspension bo
Improper installation may cause water leakage, electric shock or fire. It could cause electric shock.
● Do not touch the refrigerant piping with bare hands when in operation. Pitch of suspen
●Turn off the power source during servicing or inspection work. A
The pipe during operation would become very hot or cold according to the operating condition, and it could cause a burn or frostbite. 24 B
● Do not clean up the air-conditioner with water. Blowout opening
●Do not run the unit when the panel or protection guard are taken off. It could cause electric shock.
690
●Shut off the power before electrical wiring work. ● Do not control the operation with the circuit breaker.
It could cause electric shock, unit failure and improper running. It could cause fire or water leakage. In addition, the fan may start operation unexpectedly and it may cause injury. W
- 65 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
①Before installation ③Preparation before installation (continued)

(mm) ※Pipes can be taken out in 3 directions (rear, right or
Install correctly according to the installation manual. top).
Air return grille Series type A B
Accessories 40 to 50type 1070 1022 ・ Cut out holes using nippers, etc.
are inside. Single split (PAC)
60 to 71type 1320 1272 ・ Cut out holes to take out pipes along the cutoff line
series
100 to 140type 1620 1572 on the rear cover.
g. Improper earth could Pipes/Wires/Small parts Accessory items ・ Cut out the top face cover aligning to the piping
36 to 56type 1070 1022
position.
Accessory item VRF (KX) series 71type 1320 1272 ・ When taking pipe out to right-hand side, cut out a
For unit hanging For refrigerant pipe For drain pipe For air return grille 112 to 140type 1620 1572 hole along the groove at the inside of side panel.
Drain hose Hose clamp ・ After installing pipes and wires, seal clearances
Flat washer (M10) Paper pattern Pipe cover (large) Pipe cover (small) Strap Fixing bracket Screw Heavy insulation Screw
disconnect all
(with clamp) Pipe position (mm) around pipes and wires with putty, etc. to shut off
Gas
dust.
235(Liquid piping)
Refrigerant line 135 piping Drain piping (left)
Liquid 75
Make sure to install the covers at rear and top in order to
195(Gas piping)
piping protect the inside of unit from intrusion of dust or protect
ld be used. 8 1 1 1 4 1 1 1 2 1 4 wires from damages by sharp edges. When taking them
10
out to the right-hand side, remove burrs or sharp edges
109
For unit hanging For unit hanging For heat insulation For heat insulation For drain pipe For drain hose For installing of For drain hose
53
53
and adjustment of gas pipe of liquid pipe cover connection mounting drain hose return grille from the cutout.
able gas leakages. 271 Unit interior
10 mm slope 110 76
Drain piping
(right)
Haulage Grille upside
flammable gas (such
stances are handled. ②Selection of installation location for the indoor unit Move the box as close to the installation area as possible packed.
s could cause fire. If it must be unpacked, wrap the unit with a nylon sling,
ual. ① Select the suitable areas to install the unit under approval of the user. and be careful not to damage the unit.
n place. ※Do not hold fragile plastic parts, such as the side panel, (Indoor unit)
・
Suggest to the user to use a circulator if the ceiling height is over 3m to blow louver, etc.
avoid warm air being accumulated on the ceiling.
precision ・In case of having the motion sensor, the installation height must be no higher than put it with the intake grille facing upward.
4 m. It could reduce the sensitivity of motion sensor, disabling the detection.
・Areas where there is enough space to install and service. Preparation before instalation
or high harmonics. ・Areas where it can be drained properly. Areas where drain pipe descend- 1. Remove the air return grille. 2. Remove the side panel.
, or telecommunication ing slope can be taken. Slide stoppers (4 places) of the catches, Remove the screw and detach the
r-conditioner might ・ then pull out the pins ( 4 or 6 places). side panel by sliding it toward the
vity or cause jamming. ・ -
Filter direction indicated by the arrow mark.
・Areas where the supply air does not short-circuit.
・ Pin Side panel screw
(1 each on the left and right) (M4)
・Areas not exposed to direct sunlight.
cs or special sprays are ・Areas where dew point is lower than around 28°C and relative humidity is lower than 80%.
This indoor unit is tested under the condition of JIS (Japan Industrial Standard) high
h as beach. Side panel
condensation drop if the air-conditioner is operated under the severer condition than 3. Remove the hanging plate.
em is affected by mentioned above. Remove the screw, and then loosen
y. If there is a possibility to use it under such a condition, attach additional insulation of Hanging plate
10 to 20mm thick for entire surface of indoor unit, refrigeration pipe and drain pipe. screw(M4)
・Areas where TV and radio stays away more than 1m. (It could cause jamming and noise.)
all the indoor Unscrew Indoor Hanging
door unit has ・Areas where any items which will be damaged by getting wet are not placed 8-12mm unit
such as food, table wares, server, or medical equipment under the unit. bolts(M8)
Hanging plate Hanging plate
sensor at following ・
tection error, incapacity ・Areas where not exposed to oil mist, powder and/or steam directly such as above fryer.
istic degradation. ・
s applied to it for a long doesn’t affect the operation. ④Installation of indoor unit
(A beam from lighting device sometimes affects the infrared receiver for the
tricity or electromag-
wireless remote control and the air conditioner might not work properly.)
② Check if the place where the air-conditioner is installed can hold the weight of the unit.
ed to high temperature
If it is not able to hold, reinforce the structure with boards and beams strong enough WARNING CAUTION Indoor
side
Outdoor
side
eriod of time. Completely seal the hole in the wall with putty. Completely seal the hole in the wall putty
he lens face could be to hold it. If the strength is not enough, it could cause injury due to unit falling. If not sealed properly, dust, insects, small with putty.
③ If there are 2 units of wireless type, keep them away for more than 6m to avoid animals, and highly humid air may enter the If not sealed properly, furniture and putty
malfunction due to cross communication. room from outside, which could result in fire other fixtures may be damaged by
or other hazards. water leakage or condensation.
ditioner. ④ When plural indoor units are installed nearby, it is recommended to separate each
ages user’s belongings. other more than 4m.
long period of use. Work procedure
4000mm or more (Recommended) 1. Select the suspension bolt locations and the pipe hole location. Paper pattern
done near the unit. (1) Use enclosed paper pattern as a reference, and
and leakage of water. drill the holes for the suspension bolts and pipe.
※Decide the locations based on direct measurements.
al. (2) Once the locations are properly placed, the paper
belongings.
300mm or more
100mm pattern can be removed.

oor unit. or more
150mm or more 2. Install the suspension bolts in place.
25 mm or more
eficiency of oxygen) to
45 mm or less
Ceiling
In case of not installing in the above installation 5mm or more 3. Fix with 4 suspension bolts, which can endure load of 500N.
rigerant piping work. 4. Check the measurements given at the right Hanging plate
, lack of oxygen can inhalation of the blow out wind, it could reduce
Obstacle the capability or cause the thermostat OFF. Suspension bolt
5. Fasten the hanging plate onto the suspension bolts.
not to make air-bleeding. <When installed against a ceiling material,> <No ceiling material to install against,>
Air supply
n and maintenance.
water. ③Preparation before installation Fasten
Suspension bolt Hanging plate
Suspension bolt
Nut
at the
uables. front Washer
If suspension bolt becomes longer, do reinforcement of earthquake resistant. end of Unit Ceiling surface Unit (accessory)
nimals. an Washer
eep the surroundings clean. For grid ceiling elon- (accessory) ※Double nuts
When suspension bolt length is over 500mm, or the gap between the ceiling gated Hanging plate
hole. ※Double nuts
place, moving the unit and roof is over 700mm, apply earthquake resistant brace to the bolt. ※
In case the unit is hanged directly from the slab and is installed on the 6. Install the unit to the hanging plate.
ceiling plane which has enough strength. (1) Slide the unit in from front side to get it Hanging plate
When suspension bolt length is over 1000mm, apply the earthquake resistant brace to the bolt. hanged on the hanging plate with the bolts.
Prepare four (4) sets of suspension bolt, nut and spring washer (M10) on site.
Pitch of suspension bolts and pipe position Location of pipe outlets (mm) (3) Fasten the two screws (M4: 1 each on Screw for
hanging
Pitch of suspension bolts Top cover
Drain line
the left and right sides). plate (M4)
(mm) Drain line (left) Fixing bolts
A (rear left) WARNINIG : Hang a side panel on from the (M8)
cause a burn or frostbite. 24 B 24 120 17
5 panel side to the rear side and
31
Blowout opening Top outlet

19
then fasten it securely onto
0~3mm
0~3mm
Right outlet
108
47
27
60
the indoor unit with screws. (For left-side drain
27
690
215 290
84
98 100 Rear cover ※ connection, give the
60 Rear outlet reverse slope.)
Cutout parts
a descending slope toward the drain outlet.
may cause injury. Wall
CAUTION : Do not give the reversed slope, which may cause water leaks.
- 66 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
⑤Refrigerant pipe ⑥Drain pipe ⑦Wiring-ou

Caution ●The drain pipes may pull out either from back, right or left side. 1. C
FDE (small)
●Be sure to use new pipes for the refrigerant pipes. Use the flare nut attached to the product. Caution
Regarding whether existing pipes can be reused or not, and the washing method, refer to the instruction manual of the Install the drain pipe according to the installation manual in order to drain properly.
outdoor unit, catalogue or technical data. W
1) In case of reuse: Do not use old flare nut, but use the one attached to the unit.
,etc.
2) In case of reuse: Flare the end of pipe replaced partially for R32 or R410A. Do not put the drain pipe directly into the ditch where toxic gas such as sulfur, the Clip
: When flared joints are reused indoors, the flare part shall be re-fabricated. (only for R32) other harmful and FDE (medium)
Protruding dimension for flare, mm

Protruding D Pipe dia. Min. pipe
Rigid (Clutch type)
Flare O.D. Flare nut of oxygen). In addition, it may cause corrosion of heat exchanger and bad smell.
d wall thickness D tightening torque W
dimension
mm mm For R32 Conventional mm N·m Connect the pipe securely to avoid water leakage from the joint.
For R410A tool Insulate the pipe properly to avoid condensation drop. Clip
6.35 0.8 8.9 - 9.1 14 - 18 FDE (large)
Flare die 9.52 0.8 12.8 - 13.2 34 - 42 indoor unit and the end of the drain pipe after installation.
12.7 0.8 0 - 0.5 0.7 - 1.3 16.2 - 16.6 49 - 61 Make sure to make descending slope of greater than 1/100 and do not make up-down bend and/or trap Wirin
15.88 1 19.3 - 19.7 68 - 82 in the midway. In addition, do not put air vent on the drain pipe. Check if water is drained out properly
19.05 1.2 23.6 - 24.0 100 - 120
●Use phosphorus deoxidized copper alloy seamless pipe (C1220T) for refrigeration pipe installation. 3.
Work procedure
　In addition, make sure there is no damage both inside and outside of the pipe, and no harmful
substances such as sulfur, oxide, dust or a contaminant stuck on the pipes. 1. Insert drain hose completely to the base, Heat insulation material
●Do not use any refrigerant other than R32 or R410A. and tighten the drain hose clamp securely. Drain Ⓐ
　Using other refrigerant except R32 or R410A (R22 etc.) may degrade inside refrigeration oil. And air ( adhesive must not be used.) socket
Drain hose (accessory) VP20
getting into refrigeration circuit may cause over-pressure and resultant it may result in bursting, etc. ※ When plumbing on the left side, move the Clamp (accessory) (prepare on site)
Ⓑ
●Store the copper pipes indoors and seal the both end of them until they are brazed in order to avoid any dust, dirt or rubber plug and the cylindrical insulating
water getting into pipe. Otherwise it will cause degradation of refrigeration oil and compressor breakdown, etc. materials by the pipe connecting hole on the Drain hose Bracket
10mm
●Use special tools for R32 or R410A refrigerant. left side of the unit to the right side. Hose clamp
It can be attached
Lowest point from both inside and
outside the unit.
Work procedure occur upon removal of a drain plug. 4.
1. Remove the flare nut and blind flanges on the pipe of the indoor unit. 2. Fix the drain hose at the lowest point with a No bumps
※ Make sure to loosen the flare nut with holding the nut on pipe side with a spanner and giving torque to the hose clamp supplied as an accessory. No traps
nut with another spanner in order to avoid unexpected stress to the copper pipe, and then remove them. ※Give a drain hose a gradient of 10mm as To be a descending
Not to be in water
(Gas may come out at this time, but it is not abnormal.) illustrated in the right drawing by laying angle
● Pay attention whether the flare nut pops out. (as the indoor unit is sometimes pressured.) it without leaving a slack.
2. Make a flare on liquid pipe and gas pipe, and connect the refrigeration pipes on the indoor unit. Take head of electrical cables so that they may not run beneath the drain hose.
●When pulling out pipes backward or upward, install them passing through the attached A drain hose must be clamped down with a hose clamp.
cover together with the electrical cabling.
●Seal the gap with putty, or other, to protect from dust, etc. 3. Connect VP20(prepare on site) to drain hose. (Adhesive must not be used.)
※Bend radius of pipe must be 4D or larger. Once a pipe is bent, do not readjust the bending. ※ Use commercially available rigid PVC general pipe VP20 for drain pipe.
Screw ② Lid o
box
Do not twist a pipe or collapse to 2/3D or smaller. 4. Do not to make the up-down bending and trap in the mid-way while assum-
● Make sure to use flare nuts assembled on the unions. ing that the drain pipes is downhill. (more than 1/100)
Usage of other flare nuts could cause refrigerant leakage. Indoor unit
Never set up air vent.
※Do a flare connection as follows: Spanner
● Make sure to hold the nut on indoor unit pipe side using 5. Insulate the drain pipe. Control box hook
double spanner method as indicated when fastening / Flare nut Insulate the drain hose clamp with the heat insulation supplied as accessories.
loosening flare nuts in order to prevent unintentional When the unit is installed in a humid place, consider precautions against Ⓐ
twisting of the copper pipe. Union

dew condensation such as heat insulation for the drain pipe.
● When fastening the flare nut, align the refrigeration pipe Torque Drain test
Ⓑ S
with the center of flare nut, screw the nut for 3-4 times wrench
by hand and then tighten it by spanner with the specified After installation of drain pipe, make sure that drain system work in good
torque mentioned in the table above. condition and no water leakage from joint and drain pan.
3. Cover the flare connection part of the indoor unit with attached insulation material after a gas Do drain test even if installation of heating season.
leakage inspection, and tighten both ends with attached straps. ⑧Control m
※ Incomplete insulation may cause dew condensation or water dropping. The control content o
● Use heat-resistant (120 °C or more) insulations on the gas side pipes. ⑦Wiring-out position and wiring connection
● In case of using at high humidity condition, reinforce insulation of refrigerant pipes. Switch No.
Surface of insulation may cause dew condition or water dropping, if insulations are not reinfoced. ● Electrical installation work must be performed according to the installation SW8-4 ON
4. Refrigerant is charged in the outdoor unit.
As for the additional refrigerant charge for the indoor unit and piping, refer to the installation OFF
provider of the country, and be executed according to the technical stan-
manual attached to the outdoor unit. dards and other regulations applicable to electrical installation in the country.
Caution: Be sure to use an exclusive circuit.
Refrigerating machine oil should not be applied to the threads of union or external surface of flare. It ●
is because, even if the same tightening torque is applied, the oil is likely to decrease the slide friction cord securely in order not to apply unexpected stress on the terminal. ⑨Attaching
by the stress corrosion. ● Do not put both power source line and signal line on the same route. It may
Refrigerating machine oil may be applied to the internal surface of flare only. cause miscommunication and malfunction. The air return gril
● Be sure to do D type earth work. 1. Fix the chains ti
<The case of using thicness of insulation is 10mm> <The case of using reinfoced insulation> ● For the details of electrical wiring work, see attached instruction manual for
Pipe cover (Accessory) Pipe cover (Prepare on site) grille onto the in
electrical wiring work.
supplied as acc
1. Remove wiring from clips.
2. Remove the control box (Screw ①, 2pcs).
3. Pull out the control box by sliding along the groove on the bracket
(Direction Ⓐ→Ⓑ).
Unit
Unit
4. Remove the lid of control box (Screw ②, 2pcs). Fix with screw
Band (Accessory)
5. Hold each wiring inside the unit and connect to the terminal block surely.
Band (Accessory) Chain
Insulation
Band (Prepare on site) 6. Fix the wiring by clamp.
(Prepare on site)
The thckness of insulation is 10mm 7. Install the lid of control box (Screw ②, 2pcs). Chain
The pipe can be connected from three different directions. (back, reight, top) 8. Return the control box to the original place by sliding along the groove on
When the pipe is routed through the back. the bracket (Direction Ⓑ→Ⓐ).
If the bracket is removed, piping work will become easy. 9. Install the removed parts at their original places.
※1 Wiring for the signal receiving section of wireless kit (Option) and motion
※After piping, reinstall the removed bracket.
sensor kit (Option) are connected at the time of shipping from the factory. It ⑩Check lis
Bracket is not necessary to disconnect these wiring when wired remote control is
connected. When the wired/wireless kits are used together, it becomes Check the follo
necessary to set the slaves and remote control. For the methods of
installing the wireless kit and the motion sensor kit, refer to the attached
installation manuals.
Pipe Band Inspection for lea
NOTICE Wiring from receiver
Insulation work is
When installing the Superlink Water is drained
When the pipe is routed through the top. Power source voltage is
Cut the removed top cover, and install to the wiring from receiver.
There is mis-wirin
the rear panel instead of rear cover. Signal
terminal
Earth wiring is co
block
Cut
X : White
CnL (3P, White) Y : Black Attached wiring
Remove
- 67 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
⑦Wiring-out position and wiring connection (continued)

ide. 1. Clip
2.
FDE (small)
er to drain properly.
Wiring
,etc.
Clip
such as sulfur, the Clip
FDE (medium)
d bad smell.
Wiring
joint.
Clip
Clip Screw ① Screw ①
FDE (large)
-down bend and/or trap Wiring

is drained out properly
Clip
3. Control box Sliding Method
ulation material
ose (accessory) VP20

essory) (prepare on site)
Ⓑ
※Disconnect each wiring from clips before

Drain hose Bracket pulling out the control box.
Hose clamp
It can be attached
point from both inside and
outside the unit.
4. Single split (PAC) Series Wireless and
motion sensor
No bumps CnL connector Earth Signal side receiver line
(3P, white) terminal block (※1)
No traps
Not to be in water
Remote
control
line
Power source
side terminal
the drain hose. block
Wiring between
indoor and
Wiring clamp outdoor unit.
ust not be used.) Lid of control

Screw ② Screw ② VRF (KX) Series
0 for drain pipe. box
Wireless and
CnL connector
way while assum- (3P, white) Signal side motion sensor
Earth terminal block receiver line
Power source (※1)
side terminal
block Signal line
Control box hook (Shielded cord)
ed as accessories. Remote
*
ecautions against Ⓐ * * * * control
L N
＊
L
line
pipe. form of control box.
Indoor power
Ⓑ Screw ② Screw ② source line
Wiring clamp
work in good
⑧Control mode switching

The control content of indoor units can be switched in following way. ( is the default setting)
tion
Switch No. Control Content
the installation SW8-4 ON Indoor unit silent mode
OFF Normal operation
echnical stan-
on in the country.
e terminal. ⑨Attaching the air return grille

me route. It may
The air return grille must be attached when electrical cabling work is completed.
1. Fix the chains tied to the air return 2. Close the air return grille.
ction manual for
grille onto the indoor unit with screws This completes the unit installtion
supplied as accessories (4 pieces). work.
bracket
Fix with screws

block surely. Chain
Chain
Chain
the groove on Fixed section of chain
ion) and motion

om the factory. It ⑩Check list after installation
emote control is
ether, it becomes Check the following items after all installation work completed.
he methods of
er to the attached Check if Expected trouble Check
Falling, vibration, noise
nd Inspection for leakage is done?
Insulation work is properly done? Water leakage
Power source voltage is same as mentioned in the model name plate? PCB burnt out, not working at all
There is mis-wiring or mis-connection of piping? PCB burnt out, not working at all
Signal Earth wiring is connected properly? Electric shock
terminal
block PCB burnt out, not working at all
Attached wiring
- 68 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
RLD012A018 A
(5) Wall mounted type (SRK) RLD012A018 A

Model SRK63,71,80,100ZR
2. SELEC
R32/R410A
Model REFRIGERANT USED
SRK63,71,80,100ZR
2. SELEC
After getting cust
INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR INDOOR UNIT R32/R410A REFRIGERANT USED After getting cust
1. Indoor uni
INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR INDOOR UNIT
• This installation manual deals with an indoor unit installation only. For an outdoor unit installation, refer to page 90.
• Where there is
1.distributed.
•• Where
Indoor uni
A solid there
place is
wh
•• This
This unit is designed
installation for deals
manual R32 orwith
R410A. See aunit
an indoor label on the outdoor
installation unitantooutdoor
only. For check refrigerant information.
unit installation, refer to page 90. •A distributed.
place where t
SAFETY
• This unit is designed for R32 or R410A. See a label on the outdoor unit PRECAUTIONS
to check refrigerant information.
•A
•• A
cansolid
be place
secured
placeitwhere
Where
wh
is easyt
• Before installation, read the “SAFETY PRECAUTIONS” carefully and strictly follow it during the installa- SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
• Be sure to confirm no operation problem on the equipment after completing the installation. If unusual can be secured
• A place where u
tion work in order to protect yourself. noise can be heard during the test run, consult the dealer. •• A Where
placeitwhere
is easyi
•• Before installation,
The precautionary readmentioned
items the “SAFETY
belowPRECAUTIONS” carefully
are distinguished into and strictly
two levels, follow itand
WARNING duringCAUTION
the installa-. •• Be
Be sure
sure to
to explain
confirm the
no operating
operation methods
problem onas the
well equipment after completing
as the maintenance methods theofinstallation. If unusual
this equipment to the •• A A place
place separat
where u
tion work in order to protect yourself. noise can be heard during •A place where i
WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, can result in serious con- user according to the user’sthe test run, consult the dealer.
manual. ages and sound
• The precautionary items mentioned below are distinguished into two levels, WARNING and CAUTION . •• Be sure to explain the operating methods as well as the maintenance methods of this equipment to the •• A A place
place separat
where t
sequences such as death or severe injury. Be sure to keep the installation manual together with user’s manual at a place where it is easily accessi-
user ages and sound
CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, ifif not
WARNING not avoided,
avoided, can
can result
result in
in serious
personalcon-
in- ble toaccording to the
the user any user’s
time. manual.ask the user to hand the manuals to a new user, whenever required.
Moreover, • Avoid installing
sequences
jury suchdamage.
or property as death or severe injury. • Be sure to keep the installation manual together with user’s manual at a place where it is easily accessi- •• AA place
place where
where tt
Both mention theIndicates
CAUTION importantaitems
potentially hazardous
to protect situation
your health which,
and safety. if not avoided,
Therefore, can result
strictly follow them inbypersonal in-
any means. ble to the user any time. Moreover, ask the user to hand the manuals to a new user, whenever required. •• Install
Avoid installing
the indoo
jury or property damage. •A180place
cm.where t
Both mention the important items to protect your health and safety. Therefore, strictly follow them by any means. • Install the indoo
WARNING 180 cm.
2. Remote co
• Be sure to use only for residential purpose. WARNING • During pump down work, be sure to stop the compressor before closing op-
• A place where t
•2.ARemote
place wherecoi
If this unit is installed in inferior environment such as machine shop, vehicle (like ship), warehouse, eration valves and removing connecting pipes. •• A
Doplace wherewh
not place t
• etc.,
Be sure to use
it can malfunction. only for residential purpose. • IDuring
f the connpump ecting pdown ipes arework, removbe ed wsure hen thto e cstopomprethe ssor compressor
is in operation abefore nd operatclosingion valvesop-are • A place where i
• IInstallation
f this unit is insmust talled ibe n infcarried
erior enviout ronmby ent sthe uch qualifi
as mached ineinstaller
shop, vehicompletely
cle (like ship), w inaraccor-
ehouse, open, eration valves
air can be sucked and removing into the refrigerant connecting circuit which pipes. can cause anomalous high pressure result- • Do not place wh
etc., it can malfunction.
dance with the installation manual. I f t h e c o n n e c t i
ing in burst or personal injury. n g p i p e s a r e r e m o v e d w h e n t h e c o m p r e ss o r i s in o p e ra t i o n a n d o p e r a tion valves are
• Installation
Installation by nmust on quabe lifiedcarried
person or out by the
incorrect qualified
installation caninstaller
cause serious completely troubles such in accor-
as water • In open, theairevent can beof sucked
refrigerantinto the refrigerant
leakagecircuit during which can cause anomalous
installation, be surehigh pressure result-
to ventilate the
dance
leak, withshock,
electric the installation
fire and personal manual. injury. ing
working in burst area or personal properly. injury. 3. INSTAL
Instasure
• Be llationtobywear non qprotective
ualified person gogglesor incorrect andinstallation
gloves while can cause performing serious troubles installationsuch as water • In
work. If ththe e refrievent
gerant coof merefrigerant
s into contact witleakage h naked flames, during poisonous installation,
gases will bebe sure to ventilate the
produced.
Ileak,
mproelectricper safeshock,ty meafisurereand s capersonal
n result ininjury. personal injury. • working
Electricalarea work properly.
must be carried out by the qualifi ed electrician, strictly in ac- 3.Installation
• INSTAL boa
•• Use
Be sure the to wear protective
original accessories goggles and the andspecifi gloves edwhile
componentsperforming forinstallation
the installation. work. Icordance
f the refrigeranwith t comenational
s into contacor t wiregional
th naked flames, poisonous regulations.
electricity gases will be produced. • Adjustment of t
IUmspinrgoppearrtssaofethtyermtheaansutrheossecapnrersecsruiblteidn m pearysocnaaulsienjw urayt.er leak, electric shock, fire and personal injury. • Incorrect Electrical work must
installation can cause be electric
carried out fiby
shock, re orthe qualifi
personal ed electrician, strictly in ac-
injury. • Installation boa
temporary tight
•• Use the original accessories and the specifi ed components for the
Do not install the unit near the location where leakage of flammable gases can occur. • Make sure that earth leakage breaker and circuit breaker of appropriate ca- installation. cordance with national or regional electricity regulations. ••Adjustment
With of t
the standa
U
If sleinagkepdargtsaostehseratchcaunmtuhloastee parreosucnrdibethdemuanyit,ciat ucsaenwcaatuesr elefiakre, eresulting lectric shoinckproperty, fire anddamage personaland per- Incorrect
injury. pacitiesinstallation are installed. can cause electric shock, fi re or personal injury. temporary tight
Do not
• sonal install the unit near the location where leakage of flammable gases can occur. • Make • With the standa
injury. Circuit bsure reakerthat shouearth ld be ableakagele to discobreaker nnect all pand oles ucircuit
nder ovebreakerr current. Aofbsappropriate
ence of approprca- iate
If leakedinstalling
• When gases accumthe ulateunit arounind tsmall he unit, rooms, it can caumake se fire resulting
sure that in property
refrigerant damagedensity and per- pacitiesbreakers can are causeinstalled.
electric shock, personal injury or property damage.
sonal injury.
does not exceed the limit (Reference: ISO5149) in the event of leakage. C i r c u i t b r e a k e r s h o u l d b e a b l e t
• Be sure to switch off the power source in the event of installation,o d i s c o n n e c t a l l p o l e s u n d e r o v e r c u r r e n t . A b s ence of apmainte-
propriate
• IWhenf refrigerinstalling
ant density exthe ceedunits the in limismallt, consulrooms, t the dealemake r and inssure tall thethat ation system. density breakers
ventilrefrigerant nance or canservice.
cause electric shock, personal injury or property damage.
does
O therwnot ise laexceed
ck of oxygthe en calimit
n occu(Reference:
r resulting in seISO5149) rious accidein nt. the event of leakage. • IBe f thesure powerto souswitchrce is notoff switthe
chedpower off, theresource is a risk oin f elethe
ctricevent
shock, uof nit installation,
failure or personamainte-l injury.
I f r e f r ig e r a n t d e n s i t y e x c e e ds t he l i m i t , c o ns u l t t h e d e a le r a n d i n s t a ll t h e v e n t i l a t i o
• Install the unit in a location where unit will remain stable, horizontal and free • Be sure to tighten the cables securely in terminal block and relieve the ca- n s ys t e m . nance or service.
O
ofthany erwisvibration
e lack of oxytransmission.
gen can occur resulting in serious accident. If the pproperly
bles ower sourcetoisprevent not switcheoverloading
d off, there is a the risk oterminal
f electric shblocks.
ock, unit failure or personal injury.
• Install
Unsuitablthe e instunit
allatioin n loacalocation
tion can cauwhere se the ununit it to fawill
ll resuremain
lting in mastable, terial damhorizontal
age and persoand nal infree
jury. • Be sure to tighten the cables securely in terminal block and relieve the ca-
Loose connections or cable mountings can cause anomalous heat production or fire.
• of
Doany not vibration
run the unit transmission.
with removed panels or protections. • bles
Do not properly
process, to preventsplice or overloading
modify thethe power terminal cable, blocks.
or share the socket with
U n s u i ta b l e in s ta lla t io n lo c a tio n c an c a u s e th e u n it t o fa
Touching rotating equipments, hot surfaces or high voltage parts can cause personal injury due to other ll r es ultin g in m a te r ial d a m a g e an d p ers o na l in ju ry. Loose cpower onnectionplugs. s or cable mountings can cause anomalous heat production or fire.
• entrapment,
Do not runburn theorunit with
electric shock. removed panels or protections. • Do not process, splice or modify the power cable, ordue share theconnection,
socket with
Touchiunit ng rotis atindesigned
g equipmenspecifi ts, hot sucally rfacesfor or hR32 igh vor oltaR410A.
ge parts can cause personal injury due to other power plugs. I m p ro p e r p o w e r c a b l e o r p o w e r p l u g c a n c a u s e fi re or electric shock to poor insuf-
• This fi cient insulation or over-current.
entrapment, burn or electric shock.
Using any other refrigerant can cause unit failure and personal injury. I m p ro p e r p o w e r c a b l e o r p o w e r p l u g c a n c a u s e fi re or electric shock due to poor connection, insuf-
•• This unit is designed specifi cally for R32 or R410A. • Do not perform any change in protective device or its setup condition yourself.
Do not vent R32 or R410A into atmosphere. fi cient
C hangiinsulation
ng protector iveover-current.
device specifi cations can cause electric shock, fi re or burst.
Using any other refrigerant can cause
R32 is a fluorinated greenhouse gas with a Global Warming Potential(GWP)=675. unit failure and personal injury. • Do not perform any change in protective device or its setup condition yourself.
• Do notis vent R32 or R410A into atmosphere. • Be sure to clamp the cables properly so that they do not touch any internal
R410A a fluorinated greenhouse gas with a Global Warming Potential(GWP)=2088. C hanging protecof
component tivethedevunit.ice specifi cations can cause electric shock, fi re or burst.
• R32
Make is asure fluorinatedthat greenhouse
no air enters gas with thea Global
refrigerant Warmingcircuit Potential(GWP)=675.
when the unit is installed • Be If cabsure les touto ch clamp
any interthe nal cocables
mponentproperly , it can causso e ovthaterheattheying ando d fire.not touch any internal
R410A
and removed. is a fl uorinated greenhouse gas with a Global Warming Potential(GWP)=2088. component of the unit.
• Make surethethat no aircircuit, enters • Be sure to install service cover properly.
If air enters refrigerant the the refrigerant
pressure circuitcircuit
in the refrigerant when willthe become unittoo is high,
installedwhich IIfmcparbolpeesrtionusctahllaantiyoninctearnnacal cuosm e peolencetrnict, sithcoacnk coar ufisree odue verhtoeaintrusion
ting andoffire. dust or water.
andcause removed. • Be sure sure to to use install
can
If airsure
burst and personal injury.
enterstothe refrigerant circuit, the pressure high, which • Be theservice
prescribed cover powerproperly. and connecting cables for electrical work.
• Be use the prescribed pipes, flinare the nuts
refrigerant
andcircuit toolswill forbecome R32 or tooR410A. IUmspinrgopim erpirnosptaelrlactaiobnlecsacnacnacuasueseeleecletrcictrischloecakk oorr fifirere.due to intrusion of dust or water.
can cause burstparts and (for personal
R22 orinjury.
R407C) can cause refrigerant circuit burst resulting in unit failure and •• This Be sure to use the prescribed power to and connecting cables by for means
electrical
Using
• personal
Be sureinjury.
existing
to use the prescribed pipes, fl are nuts and tools for R32 or R410A. appliance must be connected main power source of work.
a cir-
Ucuitsingbreakerimproper cor ablswitch
es can cawith use elaeccontact tric leak orseparation
fi re. of at least 3mm.
Using existing parts (for R22 or R407C)
• Be sure to connect both liquid and gas connecting pipes properly before op- • This can cause refrigerant circuit burst resulting in unit failure and appliance must be connected topersonal
main power source by means of a cir-
personal Improper electrical work can cause unit failure or injury. 4. DRILLI
erating injury. the compressor. cuit breaker or switch with a contact separation to theof at least IEC60884-13mm.
• Be Do sure to connect bothand liquid and gas connecting pipes properly before op- • When plugging this unit, a plug
Improper electrical work can cause unit failure or personal injury.
conforming standard must be
erating
not open
the
the liquid
compressor.
gas operation valves before completing piping
•
used.
When plugging this unit, a plug conforming to the standard IEC60884-1 must be
4. DRILLI
When drilling the
work, and evacuation. Using improper plug can cause electric shock or fi re.
IfDo thenot open the
compressor liquid when
is operated and connectinggas operation pipes are valves
not connected beforeand completing
operation valves piping are • Be used. sure to connect the power source cable with power source properly. When drilling the
work, and evacuation. Using
open, air can be sucked into the refrigerant circuit which can cause anomalous high pressure result- Improper connection can cause intrusion of dust or water resulting in electric shock or fire. improper plug can cause electric shock or fi re.
Ifingthe compressor
in burst or personal injury. when connecting pipes are not connected and operation valves are • Be sure to connect the power source cable with power source properly.
is operated
• Beopen,sure air canto be tightensuckedthe into flthe
are refrigerant
nuts tocircuit specifi which edcan torquecauseusing anomalous the high torque pressure
wrench.result- Improper connection can cause intrusion of dust or water resulting in electric shock or fire.
ing in burst or
Tightening flare nuts with personal injury.
excess torque can cause burst and refrigerant leakage after a long period.
ø65
• Be sure to tighten the fl are nuts to specified torque using the torque wrench.
Tightening flare nuts with excess torque can cause burst and refrigerant leakage after a long period. Indoor ø65
side Out
CAUTION
(1) Drill side
Indoor a holeOut
wi
• Take care when carrying the unit by hand. CAUTION
• Do not install the unit in the locations where: core drill.
If the unit weight is more than 20kg, it must be carried by two or more persons. • There are heat sources nearby. (1) Drill a hole wi
• Take care when carrying the unit by hand. • Do
• Unnot it is dinstall
irectly exthe poseunitd to rainin the or sulocations
nlight. where: core drill.
Do not carry the unit by the plastic straps. Always use the carry handle. • There are heat sources nearby.
If the unit weight is more than 20kg, it must be carried by two or more persons.
• Do not install the outdoor unit in a location where insects and small animals •• TUhneitreis idsiraencytlyobesxtpaocsleedwhtoicrhaicnaonrpsruenvleignht ts. mooth air circulation from inlet and outlet side of the unit.
Do not carry the unit by the plastic straps. Always use the carry handle. • Unit is directly exposed to oil mist and steam such as kitchen.
can inhabit.
• Do not install the outdoor unit in a location where insects and small animals •• TChheerm e is any obstacle which camnopnrieav(eonrtgsam niocoftehrtailiirzecrir)c, uclaaltcioiunmfrocm
hloinrildeet a(nsdnoowutm
letesltiidneg oafgtehnet)unaint.d
Insects and small animals can enter the electrical parts and cause damage resulting in fire or per- • Unit isicdairlescutlbysetaxnpcoessedliktoe oaim l miscan t anharm
d steathe
m sunit,
uch awill s kgenerate
itchen. or accumulate.
can inhabit. acid (sulfurous acid etc.), which
sonal injury. Instruct the user to keep the surroundings clean.
Insects and small animals can enter the electrical parts and cause damage resulting in fire or per- •• D Crhaeinmw icaatl esrucbasntannoctebselidkiescahmarmgoendiapr(oopregralyn.ic fertilizer), calcium chloride (snow melting agent) and 5. ELECT
• If the outdoor unit is installed at height, make sure that there is enough space
sonal injury. Instruct the user to keep the surroundings clean.
for installation, maintenance and service. • acid
TV se(sulfurous
t or radio acid receietc.),
ver iswhichplacedcan withharm
in 1mthe. unit, will generate or accumulate. 5. ELECT
• If the outdoor unit is installed at height, make sure that there is enough space •• H Deraiginhtwaabteorvecasneanolet vbeel disismchoarergtehdanpr1o0p0e0rlmy.. • Before installati
Insufficient space can result in personal injury due to falling from the height. • TcanV scause
et or raperformance
dio receiver degradation,
is placed withcorrosionin 1m. and damage of components, unit malfunction and fire.
• Do not install the unit near the location where neighbours are bothered by It• H
for installation, maintenance and service. fication.
Insufficient space can result in personal injury due to falling from the height. eight above sea level is more than 1000m. •• Carry
Beforeout
installati
electr
noise or air generating from the unit. • ItDispose
can causeof all packing
performance materials
degradation, properly.
corrosion and damage of components, unit malfunction and fire. fication.
• Do not install the unit near the location where neighbours are bothered by P acking materials contain nails and wood which can cause personal injury. • Carry out electr
It can affect surrounding environment and cause a claim. • Dispose of all packing materials properly. 1. Preparing
noise or air generating from the unit.
• Do not install in the locations where unit is directly exposed to corrosive K P eaeckpinthgempaotleyrbiaalgs acw
o natyaifnronmaiclshaildnrdenwotoodavwohidicthhecarniskcaouf sseufpfoecrsaotinoanl. injury. (1) Preparing
Selecting cab
It can affect surrounding environment and cause a claim. • Do 1.
gases (like sulphide gas, chloride gas), sea breeze or salty atmosphere.
• Do not install in the locations where unit is directly exposed to corrosive K eepnot the put
polybanything
ag away from onchthe ildreoutdoor
n to avoid thunit.e risk of suffocation. Select the con
It can cause corrosion of heat exchanger and damage to plastic parts. Object may fall causing property damage or personal injury. (1) 4-core*
Selecting cab
1.5mm
gases (like sulphide gas, chloride gas), sea breeze or salty atmosphere. • Do not put anything on the outdoor unit. Select thewire
* 1 Earth con
• Do not install the unit close to the equipments that generate electromagnetic • Do Object may fall causing property damage or persoutdoor
not touch the aluminum fin of the onal injury. unit.
It can cause corrosion of heat exchanger and damage to plastic parts. Aluminium fin temperature is high during heating operation. Touching fin can cause burn.
4-core* 1.5mm
waves and/or high-harmonic waves. (2) Arrange each
* 1 Earth wire
• Do not install the unit close to the equipments that generate electromagnetic • Do not touch the aluminum fin of the outdoor unit.
Equipment such as inverters, standby generators, medical high frequency equipments and telecom- • A Do not touch any refrigerant
luminium fin temperature is high during heating operation. pipe with your handsTouching when the fin can systemcause is in operation.
burn.
Make sure tha
waves and/or high-harmonic waves. (2) Arrange each
munication equipments can affect the system, and cause malfunctions and breakdowns. During operation the refrigerant pipes become extremely hot or extremely cold depending on the op- <Connec
Equipment such as inverters, standby generators, medical high frequency equipments and telecom- • Do not touch any refrigerant pipe with your hands when the system is in operation. Make sure tha
The system can also affect medical equipment and telecommunication equipment, and obstruct its erating condition. Touching pipes can cause personal injury like burn (hot/cold).
munication equipments can affect the system, and cause malfunctions and breakdowns. • D uring opisolator
eration theor refrdisconnect
igerant pipes beswitch come extron emethe ly hopower t or extrem ely cold dwiring ependinginonaccor- the op- <Connec
30mm or mo
function or cause jamming. Install source
The system can also affect medical equipment and telecommunication equipment, and obstruct its erating condition. Touching
dance with the local codes and regulations. pipes can cause personal injury like burn (hot/cold).
30mm or mo
function or cause jamming. • Install
The isolatisolator
or should bor e lodisconnect
cked in OFF staswitch te in accoron danthe ce witpower h EN6020source 4-1. wiring in accor-
dance with the local codes and regulations.
The isolator should be locked in OFF state in accordance with EN60204-1.
Earth wire
1. ACCESSORIES AND TOOLS Earth wire
1. ACCESSORIES AND
Standard TOOLS
accessories (supplied with indoor unit) Locally procured parts Tools for installation Work
(3) Attach round
Select the siz
(a) Sleeve (1pc) Plus headed driver Hole core drill (65mm in diameter) (3) Attach round
and wire diam
Standard accessories1pc
(supplied with indoor unit) Locally procured parts Tools for installation Work Select the siz
(1) Installation board (6) Batteries [R03 (AAA, Micro) 1.5V] 2pcs (b) Sealing plate (1pc) Knife Wrench key (Hexagon) [4mm]
(a) Sleeve (1pc) Plus headed driver Hole core drill (65mm in diameter) and wire diam
(c) Inclination plate (1pc) Saw Flaring tool set*
(1) Installation board 1pc (6) Batteries [R03 (AAA, Micro) 1.5V] 2pcs (b) Sealing plate (1pc) Knife Wrench key (Hexagon) [4mm] 10mm
(2) Remote control 1pc (7) Air-cleaning filters 2pcs (d) Putty Tape measure Gas leak detector*
(c) Inclination plate (1pc) Saw Flaring tool set*
(2) Remote control 1pc (7) Air-cleaning filters 2pcs (e) Connecting cable Torque wrench 10mm
(3) Remote control holder 1pc (8) Filter holders 2pcs
(d)
(f)
Putty
Drain hose (extension hose)
Tape measure
(14.0-82.0N·m (1.4-8.2kgf·m)) Pipe bender
Gas leak detector*
(e) Connecting cable Torque
Plier wrench Gauge for projection adjustment
(3) Remote control holder 1pc (8) Filter holders 2pcs (g)
(f)
Piping cover
Drain hose (extension hose)piping) (14.0-82.0N·m (1.4-8.2kgf·m)) Pipe bender
(Used when flare is made by us-
(4) Tapping screws 10pcs (9) Insulation (#486 50 X 100 t3) 1pc (for insulation of connection Pipe
Plier cutter Gauge for projection
ing conventional flareadjustment
tool)
(for installation board ø4 X 25mm) Piping
Clamp cover
and screw (for finishing
(g) (Used when flare
(4) Tapping screws
10pcs (9) Insulation (#486 50 X 100 t3) 1pc (h) (for
work)insulation of connection piping) Pipe cutter * Designed specifically forisR32
made by us-
or R410A
Wood
(for screws board ø4 X 25mm)
installation ing conventional flare tool)
(5) (for remote control holder ø3.5 X 16mm)
2pcs Clamp and screw (for finishing
(i)
(h) Electrical tape * Designed specifically for R32 or R410A
Wood screws work)
(5) (for remote control holder ø3.5 X 16mm)
2pcs
(i) Electrical tape
RLD012A018.indd 1
RLD012A018.indd 1 - 69 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
LD012A018 A
100ZR
2. SELECTING INSTALLATION LOCATION
ERANT USED After getting customer’s approval, select installation location according to following guidelines.
10 cm minimum from the ceiling Installation example
5 cm minimu
1. Indoor unit m
from the wall
• Where there is no obstruction to the airflow and where the cooled and heated air can be evenly Installation board
distributed. 15 cm minimum Indoor
• A solid place where the unit or the wall will not vibrate. from the wall unit
• A place where there will be enough space for servicing. (Where space mentioned on the right side
can be secured.)
• Where it is easy to conduct wiring and piping work.
allation. If unusual • A place where unit is not directly exposed to sunlight or street light.
• A place where it can be easily drained.
13 8
s equipment to the • A place separated at least 1m away from the television or the radio. (To prevent interference to im- cm cm
ages and sounds.)
it is easily accessi- • A place where this unit is not affected by the high frequency equipment or electric equipment.
180 cm minimum from the floor

henever required. • Avoid installing this unit in place where there is much oil mist. (a) Sleeve
• A place where there is no electric equipment or household. Be sure that the flap
of outlet should not
• Install the indoor unit on the wall where the height from the floor to the bottom of the unit is more than touch any obstacles.
180 cm.
Remote control
2. Remote control Remote control holder Obstacle such

• A place where the air-conditioner can receive the signal surely during operating the remote control. as curtain
re closing op- • A place where it is not affected by the TV, radio etc. Wood screws
• Do not place where it is exposed to direct sunlight or near heat devices such as a stove.
eration valves are
h pressure result-
o ventilate the
3. INSTALLING INSTALLATION BOARD
strictly in ac- • Installation board should be installed on the wall which can support the weight of the indoor unit. Indoor unit
• Adjustment of the installation board in the horizontal direction is to be conducted with 8 screws in a Space Installation board Space
temporary tightened state. for service 50 157 883 157 150 for service
ppropriate ca- • With the standard hole as a center, adjust the board and level it. 214.5 768 214.5
for service
363.5 470 363.5
43 100 Space
768 568.5 60 568.5
nce of appropriate
470
10
Bolt
ation, mainte-
48.3
(M6X12)
r personal injury.
322.4
240
elieve the ca-
240
In case of fixing the unit on
e. concrete wall, use nut anchor.
47
47
e socket with
6.7
77
connection, insuf-
for service
53.5
15 Space
Piping for Gas 715
Mating mark for level surface Piping hole (ø65) Drain hose 759 (ø16)
dition yourself. For bolt anchor Piping for Liquid 780
and nut anchor
Piping hole (ø65)
h any internal Standard
(Unit : mm)
hole
r. CAUTION
lectrical work. Improper adjustment of the installation board can cause water leakage.
means of a cir-
.
884-1 must be
4. DRILLING HOLE AND FIXTURE OF SLEEVE
When drilling the wall that contains a metal lath, wire lath or metal plate, be sure to use sealing plate, sleeve and inclination plate (Locally procured parts).
properly. (a) Sleeve (c) Inclination plate
(a) Sleeve
or fi re. Top (d) Putty WARNING
5 Turn to Completely seal the hole in the wall with putty.
tighten If not sealed properly, dust, insects, small animals,
ø65
Cut and highly humid air may enter the room from out-
(b) Sealing plate (d) Putty
Indoor side Outdoor side Thickness of the wall + 1.5cm Indoor side Outdoor side Installed state Indoor side Outdoor side side, which could result in fire or other hazards.
(1) Drill a hole with hole (2) Cut sleeve to adjust to wall (3) Fix sealing plate, sleeve (4) After piping work,
core drill. thickness. In case of rear and inclination plate. seal the hole in the wall CAUTION
piping draw out, cut off the with putty. Completely seal the hole in the wall with putty.
lower and the right side If not sealed properly, furniture and other fixtures may
et side of the unit. portions of the sleeve collar. be damaged by water leakage or condensation.
melting agent) and

5. ELECTRICAL WIRING WORK
• Before installation, make sure that the power source complies with the air-conditioner’s power speci- 2. Connecting cable
alfunction and fire. fication. (1) Open the air inlet panel.
• Carry out electrical wiring work according to following guidelines. (2) Remove the lid.
(3) Remove the cable clamp.
1. Preparing cable (4) Connect the connecting wires to the terminal block.
(1) Selecting cable (5) Fix the connecting cable by cable clamp.
Select the connecting cable in accordance with the specifications mentioned below. (6) Fix the lid.
4-core* 1.5mm2 conformed with 60245 IEC57 (7) Close the air inlet panel.
* 1 Earth wire is included (Yellow/Green).
burn. (2) Arrange each wire length as shown below. NOTE
is in operation. Make sure that each wire is stripped 10mm from the end. Take care not to confuse the terminal numbers for indoor and outdoor connections.
ending on the op- <Connecting cable> <Wire end>
The screw of the lid is
30mm or more
ring in accor- Terminal block tightened securely
10mm
40mm or more
Earth wire
(3) Attach round crimp-type terminal to each wire as shown in the below.
k Select the size of round crimp-type terminal after considering the specifications of terminal block
5mm in diameter) and wire diameter.
xagon) [4mm]
Round crimp-type terminal
Cable Lid
10mm clamp
or*
Connecting cable
Sleeve • Earth wire shall be Yellow/Green (Y/G) in color and longer than other AC wires for safety reason.
ction adjustment
e is made by us-
flare tool)
WARNING
or R32 or R410A
Incorrect wiring connection can cause malfunction or fire.
- 70 -
5/31/2018 10:18:43 AM
'19 • PAC-DB-333
6. FORMING PIPING AND DRAIN HOSE 10. HOW

1. Forming piping THE A
Forming of pipings. Taping of the exterior
Piping is possible in the right, rear, downward, left, left rear or left downward direction.
• Hold the bottom of the piping and fix direction • Tape only the portion that goes through the wall. 1. Open
before stretching it and shaping it. • Always tape the wiring with the piping. Pull the air inlet p
NOTE Pipings
and release latch
you feel resistanc
Sufficient care must be taken not to damage (The panel stops
the panels when connecting pipes.
2. Close
Hold the panel at
Drain hose it downward slow
Right
latch works.
2. Drain change procedures 3. Removing
(1) Remove the screw and drain hose.
Open the panel b
(2) Remove the drain cap by hand or pliers.
Rear illustration) and t
Left (3) Insert the drain cap which was removed at procedure (2) securely using a hexagonal wrench etc.
Downward rear Left (4) Install the drain hose and screw securely. 4. Installing
Insert the panel a
Left downward (1) (2) (3) (4) panel from the po
tion, hold the pan
lower it downwar
Left hand side piping Right hand side piping
until the latch wo
cap
Piping in the left rear direction Piping in the right rear direction
Screw
CAUTION
Piping in the left direction Piping in the right direction Incorrect installation of drain hose and cap can cause water leakage.
7. DRAINAGE WORK 12. INSTA

• Arrange the drain hose in a downward angle. • Pour water to the drain pan located under the heat exchanger, and ensure that the water is discharged outdoor. Mount the ba
• Avoid the following drain piping. • When extended drain hose is present inside the room, insulate it securely with heat insulator available in the market. (1) Slide and take
(2) Mount the ba
Since this air-conditioner is designed to collect dew drops on the rear surface to the Gutter
×2 pieces] in
drain pan, do not install the connecting wire above the gutter. (Fit he poles
Odor from
the gutter
(3) Set the cover
Wall
CAUTION
Higher than The drain hose Wavy The gap to the ground The drain hose tip Incorrect drainage work can cause water leakage.
NOTE
specified tip is in water. is 5 cm or less. is in the gutter. • Do not use new
Pipe space
• In case the unit
take out the ba
8. INSTALLING INDOOR UNIT
Installing the indoor unit to installation board (1) Pass the pipe through the hole in (2) Gently push the
the wall, and hook the upper part lower part to fix
Base latch (2 locations)
of the indoor unit to the installation the indoor unit
board. base lower latch to
installation board.
Indoor unit
Removing the indoor unit from installation board
(1) Push up at the marked portion of the indoor unit base latch,
Installation board and slightly pull it toward you (both right and left hand sides).
Wall
(The indoor unit base latch can be removed from the installation
board.)
(2) Push up the indoor unit upward so that it can be removed from
installation board. 14. INSTAL
Indoor unit base latch Installation board Base latch
In case two air-co
operated with on
9. CONNECTING PIPING WORK Setting one r

(1) Slide and take
1. Preparation of connecting pipe 3. Heating and condensation prevention (2) Cut the switch
(1) Dress the connecting pipes (both liquid and gas pipes) with insulation to prevent it from heating and with wire cutt
1.1. Selecting connecting pipe
dew condensation. (3) Set the batter
Select connecting pipe according to the following table.
Use the heat insulating material which can withstand 120°C or higher temperature. Make sure that insu-
Model SRK63 Model SRK71/80 Model SRK100 lation is wrapped tightly around the pipes and no gap is left between them.
Gas pipe ø12.7 ø15.88 ø15.88 (2) Wrap the refrigerant pipings of indoor unit with indoor unit heat insulation using tape.
Liquid pipe ø6.35 ø6.35 ø9.52 (3) Cover the flare-connected joints (indoor side) with the indoor unit heat insulation and wrap it with an in-
• Pipe wall thickness must be greater than or equal to 0.8 mm (ø15.88:1.0mm). sulation pad (standard accessory provided with indoor unit).
• Pipe material must be O-type (Phosphorus deoxidized seamless copper pipe ICS 23.040.15, ICS (4) Wrap the connecting pipes, connecting cable and drain hose with the tape.
77.150.30). (2) (3) (4)
Tape Insulation pad Connecting cable
1.2. Cutting connecting pipe Gas pipe
(1) Cut the connecting pipe to the required length with pipe cutter. Liquid pipe
Tape
(2) Hold the pipe downward and remove the burrs. Make sure that no foreign material enters the pipe.
(3) Cover the connecting pipe ends with the tape.
2. Piping work Insulation

Position it so that the slit area faces upward. Drain hose
2.1. Flaring pipe
(1) Take out flare nuts from the operation valves of indoor unit and engage them onto connecting pipes. NOTE
(2) Flare the pipes according to table and figure shown below.
Flare dimensions for R32 are different from those for conventional refrigerant. Locations where relative humidity exceeds 70%, both liquid and gas pipes need to be dressed with 20mm or
Although it is recommended to use the flaring tools designed specifically for R32 or R410A, conven- thicker heat insulation materials.
tional flaring tools can also be used by adjusting the dimension B with a flare adjustment gauge.
A
CAUTION
Copper pipe Copper pipe B [Rigid (clutch) type]
B
A • Improper insulation can cause condensate(water) formation during cooling operation.

outer diameter outer diameter R32 or R410A Conventional Condensate can leak or drip causing damage to household property.
ø6.35 9.1 ø6.35 • Poor heat insulating capacity can cause pipe outer surface to reach high temperature during heating 16. INSTA
ø9.52 13.2 ø9.52 operation. It can cause cable deterioration and personal injury.
0-0.5 1.0-1.5
ø12.7 16.6 ø12.7
4. Finishing work After finishing the
ø15.88 19.7 ø15.88 At the same time
(1) Make sure that the exterior portion of connecting pipes, connecting cable
and drain hose is wrapped properly with tape. Shape the connecting pipes
2.2 Connecting pipes Before test r
to match with the contours of the pipe assembly route.
(1) Connect pipes on both liquid and gas sides. Before test run, c
(2) Fix the pipe assembly with the wall using clamps and screws. Pipe assem- Pipe
(2) Tighten nuts to specified torque shown in the table below. assembly
bly should be anchored every 1.5m or less to isolate the vibration. Power source v
Operation valve size (mm) Tightening torque (N·m) Liquid side (3) Install the service cover securely. Water may enter the unit if service cover (h)Screw air-conditioner.
Gas side is not installed properly, resulting in unit malfunction and failure. (h)Clamp
ø6.35 (1/4") 14-18 Earth leakage b
ø9.52 (3/8") 34-42 WARNING (only for R32) Power cable an
ø12.7 (1/2") 49-61 (Do not turn)
• To avoid the risk of fire or explosion, the flared connection the terminal blo
Wall hole cover
ø15.88 (5/8") 68-82 must/shall be installed outdoors.
Indoor Seal hole with putty Both liquid and
• Reusable mechanical connectors and flared joints are not
unit
allowed indoors. No gas leaks fro
Flared joint outside Indoor and outd
CAUTION for indoor unit
Wall
• Do not apply refrigerating machine oil to the flared surface. It can cause refrigerant leakage. Hole on the wal
• Do not apply excess torque to the flared nuts. The flared nuts may crack resulting in refrigerant CAUTION Drain hose and
leakage.
Make sure that the connecting pipes do not touch the components within the unit. If pipes touch the Screw of the lid
internal components, it may generate abnormal sounds and/or vibrations.
- 71 -
RLD012A018.indd 2
'19 • PAC-DB-333
RLD012A018
10. HOW TO OPEN, CLOSE, REMOVE AND INSTALL 11. HOW TO REMOVE AND INSTALL FRONT PANEL
THE AIR INLET PANEL
ough the wall. 1. Open 1. Removing Air inlet panel
ping. Pull the air inlet panel at both ends of lower part (1) Remove the air inlet panel and the air filters. Air filter
and release latches, then pull up the panel until (2) Remove the 8 screws.
you feel resistance. (3) Remove the 5 upper latches and then front
(The panel stops at approx. 60° open position) Air inlet panel panel can be removed.
2. Close 2. Installing
Hold the panel at both ends of lower part, lower (1) Cover the unit with the front panel and fix 5
it downward slowly, then push it slightly until the upper latches.
latch works. (2) Secure the front panel with the 8 screws. Front panel
3. Removing (3) Install the air inlet panel and the air filters.
Open the panel by 80° (as shown in the right Screw
illustration) and then pull it forward.
al wrench etc. Latch
4. Installing Approx. 80°
Insert the panel arm into the slot on the front
panel from the position shown in right illustra-
tion, hold the panel at both ends of lower part,
lower it downward slowly, then push it slightly
until the latch works.
Panel arm
12. INSTALLING REMOTE CONTROL 13. TERMINAL CONNECTION FOR AN INTERFACE

ged outdoor. Mount the batteries Installing remote control holder To install wired remote control,
ble in the market. (1) Slide and take out the cover of backside. (1) Select the place where the unit can receive superlink etc., interface kit is
(2) Mount the batteries [R03 (AAA, Micro), signals. needed.
×2 pieces] in the body properly. (2) Fix the holder to pillar or wall with wood Control cover
(Fit he poles with the indication marks + & −) screws. (1) Remove the air inlet panel and
front panel. Indoor unit PCB
(3) Set the cover again.
Wall (2) Remove the control cover.
(Remove the screw.)
NOTE (3) There is a terminal
• Do not use new and old batteries together. (respectively marked with CNS)
• In case the unit is not operated for a long time, for the indoor control board.
take out the batteries While connecting an interface,
connect to the respective
terminal securely with the
Battery connection harness supplied Screw
with an optional “Interface
connection kit SC-BIKN-E and
SC-BIKN2-E” and fasten the
connection harness onto the
Remote control indoor control box with the
CNS terminal
clamp and screw supplied with
the kit.
For more details, refer to the
Wood screws user’s manual of “Interface
ø3.5 X 16 connection kit SC-BIKN-E and
Cover SC-BIKN2-E”.
14. INSTALLING TWO AIR-CONDITIONERS IN THE SAME ROOM 15. PUMP DOWN WORK
e latch
In case two air-conditioners are installed in the same room, apply this setting so that one unit can be For the environmental protection, be sure to pump down when relocating or disposing of the unit. Pump
operated with only one remote control. down is the method of recovering refrigerant from the indoor unit to the outdoor unit before the connect-
ing pipes are removed from the unit. When pump down is carried out, forced cooling operation is needed.
Setting one remote control Setting one indoor unit
(1) Slide and take out the cover and batteries. (1) Turn off the power source and turn it on after
1 minute.
Forced cooling operation
(2) Cut the switching line next to the battery (1) Turn off the power source and turn it on
from heating and with wire cutters. (2) Send the signal by pressing the ACL switch
again after 1 miniute.
(3) Set the batteries and cover again. on the remote control that was set according
(2) Press the ON/OFF button continuously for at
to the procedure described on the left side.
ke sure that insu- least 5 seconds. Then operation will start.
(3) Check that the reception buzzer sound
“peep” is emitted from the indoor unit. Since
For the detail of pump down, refer to the instal-
the signal is sent about 6 seconds after the
wrap it with an in- lation manual of outdoor unit.
ACL switch is pressed, point the remote Unit ON/OFF button
Cut control to the indoor unit for a while.
NOTE
e
Gas pipe If no reception buzzer is emitted, restart the set-
ting from the beginning.
Tape
Reception
peep
Insulation
sed with 20mm or TIM

ES
ETU
PA
CL
ing heating 16. INSTALLATION CHECK AND TEST RUN

After finishing the installation work, check the following points again before turning on the power. Conduct a test run and ensure that the unit operates properly.
At the same time, explain to the customer how to use the unit and how to take care of the unit following the user’s manual.
Before test run Test run

Before test run, check following points. Check following points during test run.
Pipe
assembly
Power source voltage complies with the rated voltage of Indoor unit receives signal of remote control. NOTE
(h)Screw air-conditioner.
amp Air-conditioning operation is normal. During restart or change in operation mode, the unit will not start
Earth leakage breaker and circuit breaker are installed. operating for approximately 3 minutes. This is to protect the unit
There is no abnormal noise. and it is not malfunction.
Power cable and connecting cable are securely fixed to
the terminal block. Water drains out smoothly.
cover
ole with putty Both liquid and gas operation valves are fully open. Display of remote control is normal.
No gas leaks from the joints of the operation valves.

d joint outside Indoor and outdoor side pipe joints have been insulated.
After test run
door unit
Explain the operating and maintenance methods to the
Hole on the wall is completely sealed with putty.
user according to the user’s manual.
Drain hose and cap are installed properly.
Keep this installation manual together with user’s
ouch the Screw of the lid is tightened securely. manual.
- 72 -
5/31/2018 10:18:44 AM
'19 • PAC-DB-333
(6) Effective range of cool/hot wind (Reference)

(a) FDT series
Guideline for ceiling height
Model
Fan Speed Setting
FDT100VH
Hi 3.2m
P-Hi 4.3m
Notes (1) If the ceiling height is over 3m, please consider to add circulators.
This table shows reference values in case of four outlet.
If you shut some outlets, they are different.
Fan speed setting can be changed by using a wired remote control.
(b) FDE series
Model Effective range
FDE100VH 9.0m
[Conditions]　1. Height of unit: 2.4 – 3.0 (m) above floor level

2. Fan speed : Hi
3. Location: Free space without obstacles
4. The effective range means the horizontal distance for wind to reach the floor.
5. Wind speed at the effective range: 0.5 m/s
- 73 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
10.2 Electric wiring work installation PSC012D049

PSC012D117 A
201609
② Remote control,
Electrical wiring work must be performed by an electrician qualified by a local power provider according to Electrical wiring connection ●Do not install it on
the electrical installation technical standards and interior wiring regulations applicable to the installation site. ①Places exposed
● Electrical wiring work must be performed by an electlician an qualified by a local power
Security instructions provider. These wiring specifications are determined on the assumption that the following ②Places near hea
instructions are observed: ③High humidity p
● Read the “SAFETY PRECAUTIONS” carefully first of all and then strictly follow it during the ① Do not use cords other than copper ones.
Do not use any source line lighter than one specified in parentheses for each type below. ④Hot surface or c
installation work in order to protect yourself. -braided cord (code designation 60245 IEC 51), if allowed in the relevant part 2;
● The precautionary items mentioned below are distinguished into two levels, -ordinary tough rubber sheathed cord (code designation 60245 IEC 53); ⑤Places exposed
-flat twin tinsel cord (code designation 60227 IEC 41);
and CAUTION . -ordinary polyvinyl chloride sheathed cord (code designation 60227 IEC 53); ⑥Uneven surface
② Connect the power source to the outdoor unit.
: Wrong installation would cause serious consequences such as injuries or death. ③ Pay extra attention so as not to confuse signal line and power source line connection, because an error in their connection can be
burn all the boards at once.
● Connect ground wires before connecting wires between the indoor and outdoor units and
Both mentions the important items to protect your health and safety so strictly follow between indoor units. The ground wires need to be longer than the wires between the indoor
them by any means. and outdoor units, and protected from undue stress.
● The meanings of “Marks” used here are as shown on the right: ●Do not turn on the power source before completing the work. Round crimp terminal
Electric cable
Installation an
●The ground wires must be connected by the Class D grounding connection.
●Use the round crimp terminals for connections to the terminal block.
● Accord with following items. Otherwise, there will be the risks of electric shock and ● Use dedicated branch circuits, avoiding combination with other devices. Otherwise, it could ①Install remote contr
fire caused by overheating or short-circuit. trip the power source breaker, resulting in secondary accidents.
● Install the overcurrent and earth leakage breakers (sensitivity current: 30 mA) specified to ②Wiring of remote co
respective models. The insulation thickn
WARNING ●Do not connect indoor and outdoor signal cables to extension cables on the way. If the joint is
●Be sure to have the electric wiring work done by qualified electrical installer, wetted with intruding water, it could cause a ground insulation failure or poor connection, ③Maximum prolonga
and use exclusive circuit. resulting in communication errors. (If it is inevitable to connect cables on the way, make sure If the prolongation
Power source with insufficient capacity and improper work can cause electric shock and fire. to prevent the water intrusion completely.)
● When running wires (wires for power source, remote controller, connecting between indoor But, wiring in the re
●Use specified wire for electrical wiring, fasten the wiring to the terminal securely, and outdoor units, or other) behind the ceiling, protect them using copper or other pipes outside of the case
and hold the cable securely in order not to apply unexpected stress on the terminal. against assault by rat, or other.
Loose connections or hold could result in abnormal heat generation or fire. ●It is up to 3.5 mm2 the size of power supply cables connected to indoor units. When using cables wire connecting se
●Arrange the electrical wires in the control box properly to prevent them from of 5.5 mm2 or larger, provide a dedicated pull box for branching connection to indoor units. 100 - 200m .......
●If signal and power source cables are connected mistakenly, it could burn down all PCBs.
rising. Fit the lid of the services panel property. ① Even if the power source of 220/240/380/415 V is connected mistakenly to A-B signal cable, it is protected at initial occasion only. Under 300m .......
Improper fitting may cause abnormal heat and fire. ② If the remote control fails to detect the unit No. (address) at 15 minutes after turning the power on, check and repair all signal
cables for misconnection. Under 400m .......
●Use the genuine option parts. And installation should be performed by a ③ Cut the jumper wire J10SL1 of burnt PCB, and reconnect connectors CnK (yellow) and CnK1 (white) to CnK2 (black).
specialist. ④ If any anomaly is found on wires between the A-B terminal block and the PCB, replace them. Under 600m .......
If you install the unit by yourself, it could cause water leakage, electric shock and fire. ●At the outside of indoor and outdoor units, take care to avoid direct contacts between remote ④Avoid using multi-c
control and power source cables.
●Do not repair by yourself. And consult with the dealer about repair. ●In no event connect the power source of 220/240/380/415 V to the remote control terminal ⑤Keep remote contro
Improper repair may cause water leakage, electric shock or fire. block. It could cause failures. ⑥Make sure to conne
●Consult the dealer or a specialist about removal of the air-conditioner. ●Connections of wiring between units, ground wire and remote control cable
① When connecting wires between units, ground wire or remote control wire, connect them according to the number of terminals unit. (No polarity)
Improper installation may cause water leakage, electric shock or fire. on the power source terminal block or signal terminal block in the control box. Connect the ground wire to the ground terminal on
the power source terminal block.
●Turn off the power source during servicing or inspection work. ② Make sure to install an earth leakage breaker for the power source. Select a breaker for inverter circuit.
If the power is supplied during servicing or inspection work, it could cause electric ③ When the earth leakage breaker is exclusive for the earth leakage protection, it is necessary to connect also an isolating switch
(Switch + Class B fuse) or wiring circuit breaker in series to the earth leakage breaker.
shock and injury by the operating fan. ④ Install the isolating switch close to the unit.
●Shut off the power before electrical wiring work. ●Connect wires securing by tightening screws firmly. Confirm also no connector or wire (from
terminal) is disconnected in the control box.
Control plural
It could cause electric shock, unit failure and improper running.
●When installing an auxiliary electric heater, consult the electric heater manual or technical data.
CAUTION Cable connection for single unit installation ①A remote control ca
●Perform earth wiring surely. In above setting, all
①As for connecting method of power source, select from following connecting patterns. In principle, do
Do not connect the earth wiring to the gas pipe, water pipe, lightning rod and telephone earth not directly connect power souce line to inside unit. ②Connect all indoor u
wiring. Improper earth could cause unit failure and electric shock due to a short-circuit. As for exceptional connecting method of power source, discuss with the power provider of the ③Set unique remote c
●Earth leakage breaker must be installed. country with referring to technical documents, and follow its instruction. rotary switch SW2 o
If the earth leakage breaker is not installed, it can cause electric shocks. ②For cable size and circuit breaker selection, refer to the outdoor unit installation manual.
Single-phase model Three-phase model
● Make sure to install earth leakage breaker on power source line. Power source Doner source Indoor Unit (1)
(countermeasure thing to high harmonics.) Address “0”
Absence of breaker could cause electric shock. r leakage breaker
Earth k Earth leakage breaker
breaker
● Use the circuit breaker of correct capacity. Circuit breaker should be the one Circuit breaker Circuit breaker
Power source line Power source line
that disconnect all poles under over current.
Using the incorrect one could cause the system failure and fire. L N
Earth Earth
Outdoor Unit Outdoor Unit
Remote control
● Do not use any materials other than a fuse of correct capacity where a fuse
should be used. Indoor-Outdoor Connecting line Indoor-Outdoor Connecting line
Connecting the circuit by wire or copper wire could cause unit failure and fire.
Indoor Unit Indoor Unit
●Use power source line of correct capacity.
Using incorrect capacity one could cause electric leak, abnormal heat generation and fire. Remote control line Remote control line
Master/ slave se
●Do not mingle solid cord and stranded cord on power source and signal side Remote control Remote control
terminal block.
In addition, do not mingle difference capacity solid or stranded cord. A maximum of two rem
Inappropriate cord setting could cause loosing screw on terminal block, bad electrical Cable connection for a V multi configuration installation indoor units.)
contact, smoke and fire. ①Connect the same pairs number of terminal block "①,②,and ③"and " X and Y " between The air-conditioner ope
● Do not turn off the power source immediately after stopping the operation. master and slave indoor units.
master/slave setting of
Be sure to wait for more than 5 minutes. Otherwise it could cause water leakage or ②Do the same address setting of all inside units belong to same refrigerant system by rotary
switch SW2 on indoor unit's PCB (Printed circuit board). Acceptable combinatio
breakdown.
③Set slave indoor unit as "slave 1" through "slave 3" by address switch SW5-1, 5-2 on PCB. and one (1) wireless k
● Do not control the operation with the circuit breaker. ④When the AIR CON NO. button on the remote control unit is pressed after turning on the power, an Set one to "Master" an
It could cause fire or water leakage. In addition, the fan may start operation indoor unit's address number will be displayed. Do not fail to confirm that the connected indoor
unexpectedly and it may cause injury. unit's numbers are displayed on the remote control unit by pressing the or button. Note:The setting "Rem
Power source control unit in the
Method of setting Master/Slave of indoor unit
Earth leakage breaker (Factory setting: “Master”)
Control mode switching
Circuit breaker Indoor Unit Master Slave 1 Slave 2 Slave 3
●The control content of indoor units can be switched in following way. ( is the default setting) SW5-1 OFF OFF ON ON
Indoor Unit
PCB
Switch No. Control Content Earth SW SW5-2 OFF ON OFF ON
Outdoor Unit
Twin type Triple type Double twin type
SW2 Indoor unit address (0-Fh)
SW5-1
Master/Slave Switching (plural /Slave unit Setting) Earth Earth Earth Remote
SW5-2 Indoor Unit Master Indoor Unit Slave 1 Indoor Unit Slave 2 Indoor Unit Slave 3 control
“Master”
SW6-1～4 Model capacity setting
ON Operation check, Drain motor test run
SW7 －1 Remote control line (no pola rity)
OFF Normal operation Remote control
- 74 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
PSC012D049
PSC012D117 A
201609
AIR CON NO
② Remote control, wiring and functions ③ Operation and confirmation from remote control
●Do not install it on the following places Operation from the eco touch remote Operation from the standard
AIR CON remote
NO
No. Item
control (RC-EXAIR
series)
CON NO control
AIR
AIR
AIR ( NO
CON
CON
CON RC-E
NONOseries)
①Places exposed to direct sunlight AIR CON NO
alified by a local power 1 Check the number [Menu] ⇒ [ServiceAIR setting] ⇒
AIR CON NO ① Press
NO AIR AIR CON NOthe AIR CON NO button to display
mption that the following ②Places near heat devices AIR CONCON
of units connected [Service & Maintenance] ⇒ AIR CON
NO CONthe
NO NO IU
AIRaddress.
CON NO
⇒ [IU
in the multi remote [Service password]AIR address] AIR CON NOor button and check
② Press the
③High humidity places CON NO AIR AIR
CONCON
NO NO
control system. addresses of connected indoor units one
④Hot surface or cold surface enough to generate condensation by one. AIR CON NO
⑤Places exposed to oil mist or steam directly. 2 Check if each unit is [Menu] ⇒ [Service setting] ⇒ ① Press the AIR CON NO button to display
connected properly [Service & Maintenance] ⇒ AIR CONthe
NO IU
AIRaddress.
CON NO
⑥Uneven surface in the remote [Service password] ⇒ ② Press theAIR CON
or NObutton and select one
control system. AIR CON NO
[IU address] ⇒ [Check run mode] AIR
of IUCON NO
addresses.
an error in their connection can be
③ Press
AIR the
CON NO (MODE) button. The unit
or and outdoor units and AIR CON NO starts to blow air.
wires between the indoor 3 Setting main/sub [Menu] ⇒ [Service setting] ⇒ Set SW1 to “Sub” for the sub remote control
mp terminal
Electric cable
Installation and wiring of remote control remote controls [R/C function settings] ⇒ unit.
[Service password] ⇒
ection. [Main/Sub of R/C]
ices. Otherwise, it could ①Install remote control referring to the attached installation manual. 4 Checking operation [Menu] ⇒ [Service setting] ⇒ Press the CHECK button. ⇒ “ ”
data [Service & Maintenance] ⇒ is displayed. ⇒AIR CON
Press theNO (SET) button.
ent: 30 mA) specified to ②Wiring of remote control should use 0.3mm 2 ×2 core wires or cables. [Service password] ⇒ ⇒ “ ” is displayed. ⇒ Select one
[Operation data] AIR CON NO AIRfor
of addresses CONconnected
NO indoor units
The insulation thickness is 1mm or more. (on-site configuration) by pressing theCHECKor button. ⇒ Press
on the way. If the joint is
lure or poor connection, ③Maximum prolongation of remote control wiring is 600 m. the
CHECK (SET) button. ⇒ AIR
CHECK “ CON NO ” is
displayed. ⇒ SelectAIR
AIR CON NO dataCON
by pressing
NO the
es on the way, make sure If the prolongation is over 100m, change to the size below. or button.
But, wiring in the remote control case should be under 0.5mm 2 . Change the wire size CHECK CHECK
CHECK
TEST
nnecting between indoor 5 Checking inspection [Menu] ⇒ [Service setting] ⇒ AIR CON
Press the CHECK NO ⇒CHECK
button. “ ” is
CHECK CHECK
g copper or other pipes outside of the case according to wire connecting. Waterproof treatment is necessary at the display CHECK⇒
[Service & Maintenance]
CHECK
CHECK ⇒CHECK
displayed. Press
CHECKthe button.
[Service password] ⇒ CHECK ⇒“
CHECK CHECK
CHECK AIR CON NO ⇒ Press
” is displayed.
units. When using cables wire connecting section. Be careful about contact failure. [Error display] CHECK the (SET) button.
TEST ⇒ “ ” is
CHECK
ction to indoor units. displayed.
TEST
CHECK ⇒ Data is displayed.
TEST
100 - 200m ........................ 0.5mm2 × 2 cores
burn down all PCBs.
is protected at initial occasion only. Under 300m ....................... 0.75mm2 × 2 cores 6 Cooling test run [Menu] ⇒ [Service setting] ⇒ ① Start the system by pressing the
er on, check and repair all signal from remote [Installation settings] ⇒ button.
TEST
Under 400m ....................... 1.25mm2 × 2 cores control [Service password] ⇒ [Test run] ⇒ ② Select “CHECK (Cool)” with the
TEST
(MODE)
hite) to CnK2 (black). [Cooling test run] ⇒ [Start]
CHECK button. TESTTEST
TEST
Under 600m ....................... 2.0mm2 × 2 cores TEST
③ Press
TEST TEST
the TESTTEST
button forTEST
3 seconds or
TEST TEST CHECKTEST
contacts between remote TEST TEST
CHECK TheTEST
longer. screen display will switch to
④Avoid using multi-core cables to prevent malfunction. TESTCHECK TEST
“ TEST ”.
emote control terminal ⑤Keep remote control line away from earth (frame or any metal of building). TEST ④ Pressing
TEST the (SET) button, while the
⑥Make sure to connect remote control line to the remote control and terminal block of indoor “ TEST ” is displayed, starts the
cable cooling test run. TEST
The screen display will
rding to the number of terminals unit. (No polarity) CHECK toCHECK
TEST switch TEST
TEST
“ ”.
ound wire to the ground terminal on TEST
TEST
TEST TEST
7 Trial operation of [Menu] ⇒ [Service setting] TEST ⇒ ① Start the TEST CHECK the
system by pressing
r circuit. drain pump from [Installation settings] ⇒ TEST CHECK
TEST TEST button.
TEST The display
TEST will change
to connect also an isolating switch
remote control [Service password]TEST⇒ [Test run]TEST
⇒ AIR to CON NO
“ TEST ”.
⇒ [Run]
[Drain pump test run] TEST
TEST ② Press TEST
the CHECK
TESTTEST button once to display
CHECK
“ ”.
o connector or wire (from Control plural indoor units by a single remote control ③ Pressing the
TEST TEST TEST
(SET) button starts the
drain pump operation. The display will
manual or technical data. show “ ”. TEST
①A remote control can control plural indoor units (Up to 16). The menu configuration may vary depending onTEST TEST
models
TEST
of the remote control. If the CHECK
model of your
In above setting, all plural indoor units will operate under same mode and temperature setting. remote control is different, refer to the installation manual attached toTEST the remote control.
g patterns. In principle, do
②Connect all indoor units with 2 core remote control line. TEST TEST
TEST TEST TEST
e power provider of the ③Set unique remote control communication address from "0" to "F" to each inside unit by the CHECK
TEST
. rotary switch SW2 on the indoor unit's PCB. ④ Function of CNT connector of indoor printed circuit board TEST
TEST
ation manual.
Note (1) 0.3 mm2 × 2 m 0.75mm2 × 0.2 m
e model Indoor PCB Butt-connecting contactor
Remote ON-OFF/monitor kit (Applicable range: 0.75 – 1.25 mm2)
TEST
Indoor Unit (1) Indoor Unit (2) Indoor Unit (16) +12 1 1
Red White TEST Common
Address “0” Address“1” Address“F” Black XR1 Black
2 2 XR1 Output 1
CNT Yellow XR2 Yellow
3 3 XR2 Output 2
(Blue/6P) Blue XR3 Blue TEST
4 4 XR3 Output 3
rce line Brown XR4 Brown TEST
5 5 XR4 CHECK Output 4
Orange Orange
Remote control line (no polarity) 6 6 XR5
Earth XR5 Orange Input 1 AC100V
DC12V
Remote control
Remote ON/OFF switch DC24V
Note (1) 0.3 mm2 × 2 m or timer TEST
contactor
utdoor Connecting line +12 1 1 XR6
CNTA Input 2 AC100V/200V
2 2 DC12V
(Blue/2P) XR6
DC24V
Note (1) To be no longer than 2 m. TEST
TEST
ol line ●XR1-4 are DC 12 V relays. (Equivalent to Omron’s LY2F)
Master/ slave setting when more than one remote control unit are used
●XR5 is a DC 12 V, 24 V or 100 V, 200 V relay. (Equivalent to Omron’s MY2F)
●Maker and model of CnT connector (Site side)
A maximum of two remote control units can be connected to one indoor unit (or one group of Connector : Molex 5264-06
nstallation indoor units.)
Terminal : Molex 5263T TEST
nd " X and Y " between ●CnTA connector is used on FDT, or other. <Check with the specifications.> (Site side) Maker
The air-conditioner operation follows the last operation of the remote control regardless of the and model
master/slave setting of it. Connector : J.S.T. Mfg. XAP02V-1-E
rant system by rotary
Acceptable combination is "two (2) wired remote controls", "one (1) wired remote control Terminal : J.S.T. Mfg. SXA-01T-P0.6
h SW5-1, 5-2 on PCB. and one (1) wireless kit" or "two (2) wireless kits". ●Output 1 – 4 and input1/2 can be selected/set as required from following items.
r turning on the power, an Set one to "Master" and the other to "Slave". Factory default is set as shown below.
t the connected indoor Output
or button. Note:The setting "Remote control unit sensor enabled" is only selectable with the master remote
① RUN output ⑧ Fan ON output 3
control unit in the position where you want to check room temperature. ② Heating output ⑨ Defrost/oil return output
oor unit ③ Compressor ON output ⑩ Ventilation output
④ Inspection (error) output ⑪ Heater output
⑤ Cooling output ⑫ Free cleaning output
Slave 2 Slave 3
⑥ Fan ON output 1 ⑬ Indoor overload error output
Indoor Unit
ON ON ⑦ Fan ON output 2
OFF ON
Remote control line
Input
Double twin type (no polarity) ① RUN/STOP ⑤ Setting temp. shift
② RUN permit prohibition ⑥ Compulsory thermostat OFF
③ Emergency stop ⑦ Temporary stop
Remote Remote ④ Cooling/Heating ⑧ Silent mode
h Earth
Indoor Unit Slave 3 control control Factory default setting
“Master” “Slave”
CnT-2 Output 1 RUN output CnT-5 Output 4 Inspection (error) output
CnT-3 Output 2 Heating output CnT-6 Input 1 RUN/STOP
CnT-4 Output 3 Compressor ON output CnTA Input 2 RUN/STOP
●For the setting method, refer to the technical data.
- 75 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
⑤ Operation and setting from remote control ⑤ Operation and

A : Refer to the instruction manual for RC-EX series ○：Nearly same function setting and operations are possible. *1: Remote controls before RC-EX1A don't have this function.
B : Refer to the installation manual for RC-EX series △：Similar function setting and opperations are possible. *2: Remote controls before RC-EX3 don't have this function. Setting ＆ display item
C : Loading a utility software vie Internet
2 Administrator setti
Setting ＆ display item Description RC-EX3A RC-E5 [Administrator pas
1.Remote Control network
1 Control plural indoor units by a single remote control A remote control can control plural indoor units up to 16 (in one group of remote control network).
○
An address is set to each indoor unit.
2 Main/sub setting of remote controls A pair of remote controls (including option wireless remote control) can be connected within the remote control
B ○
network. Set one to “Main” and the other to “Sub”.
2.TOP scrren, Switch manipulation
1 Menu "Control","State", or "Details" can be selected. (3-8) A
2 Operation mode "Cooling","Heating","Fan","Dry" or "Auto" can be set. A ○
7.Service setting
3 Set temp. "Set temperature" can be set by 0.5˚C interval. A ○
1 Installer settings
4 Air flow direction "Air flow direction" [Individual flap control] can be set.
A △
Select Enable or Disable for the “3D AUTO” (in case of FDK). *1 [Service password
5 Fan speed "Fan speed" can be set. A ○
6 Timer setting "Timer operation" can be set. A ○
7 ON/OFF "On/Off operation of the system" can be done. A ○
8 F1 SW *1 The system operates and is controlled according to the function specified to the F1 switch. A
9 F2 SW *1 The system operates and is controlled according to the function specified to the F2 switch. A
10 Select the language *2 Select the language to display on the remote control.
A
・Select from English, German, French, Spanish, Italian, Dutch, Turkish, Portuguese, Russian,Polish, Japanese and Chinese.
3.Useful functions
1 Individual flap control The moving range (the positions of upper limit and lower limit) of the flap for individual flap can be set.
A △
Set also the left and right limit positions for FDK. *1
2 Anti draft setting *1・Details ..................You can set Enable or Disable for anti draft motion performed at each blow outlet in each operation mode.
A
When the panel with the anti-draft function is assembled. ・ON/OFF setting .....You can set ON/OFF (operation/stop) of anti draft function for the enabled blow outlet set in Details. *2
3 Timer settings Set On timer by hour The period of time to start operation after stopping can be set.
・The period of set time can be set within range of 1hour-12houres (1hr interval). A △
・The operation mode, set temp-and fan speed at starting operation can be set.
Set Off timer by hour The period of time to stop operation after starting can be set.
A △
・The period of set time can be set within range of 1hour-12houres (1hr interval).
Set On timer by clock The clock time to start operation can be set.
・The set clock time can be set by 5-minutes intervals. 2 R/C function settin
A △
・[Once (one time only)] or [Everyday] operation can be switched.
・The operation mode, set temp. and fan speed at starting operation can be set. [Service password
Set Off timer by clock The clock time to stop operation can be set.
・The set clock time can be set by 5-minute intervals. A △
・[Once (one time only)] or [Everyday] operation can be switched.
Confirmation of timer settings Status of timer settings can be seen. A
4 Favorite setting *1 Set the operation mode, setting temperature, air flow capacity and air flow direction for the choice setting operations.
A
[Administrator password] Set them for the Favorite set 1 and the Favorite set 2 respectively.
5 Weekly timer On timer and Off timer on weekly basis can be set.
・8-operation patterns per day can be set at a maximum.
・The setting clock time can be set by 5-minute intervals. A △
・Holiday setting is available.
・The operation mode, set temp. and fan speed at starting operation can be set.
6 Home leave mode When leaving home for a long period like a vaction leave, the unit can be operated to maintain the room temperature not to be
hotter in summer or not to be colder in winter.
A
[Administrator password] ・The judgment to switch the operation mode (Cooring ⇔ Heating) is done by the both factors of the set temp. and outdoor air temp.
・The set temp. and fan speed can be set.
7 External Ventilation On/Off operation of the external ventilator can be done. 3 IU settings
When the ventilator is combined. It is necessary to set from [Menu] ⇒ [Service setting] ⇒ [R/C function settings] ⇒ [Ventilation setting]. A ○
・If the “Independent” is selected for the ventilation setting, the ventilator can be operated or stopped. [Service password
8 Select the language Select the language to display on the remote control.
A
・Select from English, German, French, Spanish, Italian, Dutch, Turkish, Portuguese, Russian,Polish, Japanese and Chinese. *1
9 Silent mode control *2 The period of time to operate the unit by prioritizing the quietness can be set.
A
・Start and end can be set for the silent mode
4.Energy-saving setting Administrator password
1 Sleep timer To prevent the timer from keeping ON, set hours to stop operation automatically with this timer.
・The selectable range of setting time is from 30 to 240 minutes. (10-minute intervals) A △
・When setting is "Enable", this timer will activate whenever the ON timer is set.
2 Peak-cut timer Power consumption can be reduced by restructing the maximum capacity.
Set the [Start time], the [End time] and the capacity limit % (Peak-cut %).
・4-operation patterns per day can be set at maximum.
A
・The setting time can be changed by 5-minute intervals.
・The selectable range of capacity limit ％ (Peak-cut ％ ) is from 0% to 40-80% (20％ interval)
・Holiday setting is available.
3 Automatic temp set back After the elapse of the set time period, the current set temp. will be set back to the [Set back time.]
・The setting can be done in cooling and heating mode respectively.
A △
・Selectable range of the set time is from 20 min. to 120 min. (10 min. interval).
・Set the [Set back temp.] by 1˚C interval.
4 Motion sensor control *1 When the motion sensor is used, it is necessary to set Enable or Disable for the “Power control” and the “Auto-off”.
A
When the panel with the motion sensor is assembled.
5.Filter
1 Filter sign reset Filter sign reset The filter sign can be reset. A
Setting next cleaning date The next cleaning date can be set. A 4 Service & Maintena
6.User setting
[Service password
1 Internal settings Clock setting The current date and time can be set or revised.
A △
・If a power failure continues no longer than 80 hours, the clock continues to tick by the built-in power source.
Date and time display [Display] or [Hide] the date and/or time can be set, and [12H] or [24H] display can be set. A
Summer time When select [Enable], the +1hour adjustment of current time can be set. When select [Disable], the [Summer time] adjustment can be reset. A
Contrast The contrast of LCD can be adjusted higher or lower. A
Backlight Switching on/off a light can be set and period of the lighting time can be set within the range of 5sec-90 sec (5sec interval). A
Control sound It can set with or without [Control sound (beep sound)] at touch panel. A
Operation lamp luminance *1 This is used to adjust the luminance of operation lamp. A
2 Administrator settings Permission/Prohibition setting ・Permission/Prohibition setting of operation can be set. [On/Off]
[Change set temp] [Change operation mode] [Change flap direction] [Change fan speed] [High power operation]
[Administrator password] [Energy-saving operation] [Timer] A △
Request for administrator can be set.
[Individual flap control] [Weekly timer] [Select the language] [Anti draft setting]　*1 8.Contact company
Outdoor unit silent mode timer The period of time to operate the outdoor unit by prioritizing the quiteness can be set. 9.Inspection
・The [Start time] and the [End time] for operating outdoor unit in silent mode can be set. A △ Confirmation of Ins
・The period of the operation time can be set once aday by 5-minute interals. 10.PC connection
Setting temp. range The upper/lower limit of temp. setting range can be set. USB connection
A △
・The limitation of indoor temp. setting range can be set for each operation mode in cooling and heating. ◆ Listed items may not
- 76 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
⑤ Operation and setting from remote control (continued)

have this function.
ave this function. Setting ＆ display item Description RC-EX3A RC-E5
2 Administrator settings Temp increment setting The temp increment setting can be changed by 0.5˚C or 1.0˚C. A
Set temp display Ways of displaying setting temperatures can be selected. A
RC-EX3A RC-E5 [Administrator password] R/C display setting Register [Room name] [Name of I/U]
Display [Indoor temp display] or not.
A △
Display [Error code display] or not.
○ Display [Heating stand-by display] [Defrost operation display] [Auto cooling/heating display] [Display temp of R/C, Room, Outdoor] or not
Change administrator password The administrator password can be changed. (Default setting is "0000") A
B ○ The administrator password can be reset. B
F1/F2 function setting *1 Functions can be set for F1 and F2. Selectable functions: [Anti draft ON/OFF]　*2
A [High power operation], [Energy-saving operation], [Silent mode cont.], [Home leave mode], [Favorite set 1], A
[Favorite set 2] and [Filter sign reset].
A ○
7.Service setting
A ○
1 Installer settings Installation date The [Installation date] can be registed.
A △ ・When registering the [Instaration date], the [Next service date] is displayed automatically. B
[Service password] (For changing the [Next service date], please refer the item of [Service ＆ Maintenance])
A ○
Company information The [Company information] can be registed and can be displayed on the R/C.
A ○ ・The [Company] can be registered within 26 characters. B
A ○ ・The [Phone No.] can be registed within 13 digits.
A Test run On/Off operation of the test run can be done.
A Cooling test run The [Cooling test run] can be done at 5˚C of set temp. for 30 minutes. B ○
A Drain pump test run Only drain pump can be operated.
Staric pressure adjustment In case of combination with only the ducted indoor unit which has a function of static pressure adjustment, the static pressure is adjustable.
B
・It can be set for each indoor unit individually.
A △ Change auto-address The set address of each indoor unit decided by auto-address setting method can be changed to any other address. (For
B △
multiple KX units only)
. Address setting of Main indoor unit address can be set.
A
main IU ・Only the Main indoor unit can change operation mode and the Sub indoor units dominated by the Main indoor shall follow. B △
・The Main indoor unit can domain 10 indoor units at a maximum.
A △ IU back-up function When a pair of indoor units (2 groups) is connected to one unit of remote control, it can be set Enable or Disable for the
B
[IU rotation], [IU capacity back-up] and [IU fault back-up]
A △ Motion sensor setting *1 Set Enable or Disable for the infrared sensor detectors of indoor units connected to the remote control.
When the panel with the motion If Disable is selected, it cannot be control the motion sensor control for the energy-saving setting. B
sensor is assembled.
A △ 2 R/C function setting Main/Sub R/C The R/C setting of [Main/Sub] can be changed. B ○
Return air temp When two or more indoor units are connected to one unit of remote control, suction sensors, which are used for the
[Service password] judgement by thermostat, can be selected. B
・It can be selected from [Individual], [Master IU] and [Average temp].
A △ R/C sensor It can be set the mode to switch to the remote control sensor. It can be selected from cooling and heating. B △
R/C sensor adjustment The offset value of [R/C sensor] sensing temp. can be set respectively in heating and cooling. B △
A Operation mode Enable or Disable can be set for each operation mode. B △
A ºC / ºF Set the unit for setting temperatures.
B
・°C or °F can be selected.
Fan speed Fan speeds can be selected. B ○
External input When two or more indoor units are connected to one unit of remote control, the range to apply CNT inputs can be set. B ○
A △
Upper/lower flap control [Stop at fixed position] or [Stop at any position] can be selected for the upper and lower louvers. B ○
Left/right flap control *1 [Fixed position stop] or [Stop at any position] can be selected for the right and left louvers. B
e Ventilation setting Combination control for ventilator can be set. B ○
Auto-restart The operation control method after recovery of power failure happened during operation can be set. B ○
A Auto temp setting [Enable] or [Disable] of [Auto temp setting] can be selected. B
p.
Auto fan speed [Enable] or [Disable] of [Auto fan speed] can be selected. B
3 IU settings Fan speed setting The fan speed for indoor units can be set. B ○
A ○ Filter sign The setting of filter sign display timer can be done from following patterns. B ○
[Service password] External input 1 The connect of control by external input 1 can be changed. B ○
External input 1 signal The type of external input 1 signal can be changed. B ○
A
External input 2 The connect of control by external input 2 can be changed. B
External input 2 signal The type of external input 2 signal can be changed. B
A
Heating thermo-OFF temp adjustment The judgement temp. of heating themo-off can be adjusted within the range from 0 to +3˚C (1˚C interval) B △
Return temperature adjustment The sensing temp. of return air temp. sensor built in the indoor unit can be adjusted within the range of ±2˚C. B △
Fan control in cooling thermo-OFF Fan control, when the cooling thermostat is turned OFF, can be changed. B ○
A △ Fan control in heating thermo-OFF Fan control, when the heating thermostat is turned OFF, can be changed. B ○
Anti-frost temp Judgment temperature for the anti-frost control during cooling can be changed. B ○
Anti-frost control When the anti-frost control of indoor unit in cooling is activated, the fan speed can be changed. B ○
Drain pump operation In any operation mode in addition to cooling and dry mode, the setting of drain pump operation can be done. B ○
A Keep fan operating after cooling is stopped The time period residual fan operation after stopping or thermo-off in cooling mode can be set. B ○
Keep fan operating after heating is stopped The time period residual fan operation after stopping or thermo-off in heating mode can be set. B ○
Intermittent fan operation in heating The fan operation rule following the residual fan operation after stopping or themo-off in heating mode can be set. B ○
Fan circulator operation In case that the fan is operated as the circulator, the fan control rule can be set. B
Control pressure adjust When only the OA processing units are operated, control pressure value can be changed. B
A △ Auto operation mode The [Auto rule selection] for switching the operation mode automatically can be selected from 3 patterns. B
Thermo. rule setting When selecting [Outdoor air temp. control], the judgment temp can be offset by outdoor temp.. B
Auto fan speed control Auto switching range for the auto fan speed control can be set. B
A IU overload alarm If the difference between the setting temperature and the suction temperature becomes larger than the temperature difference set for
B
the overload alarm, at 30 minutes after the start of operation, the overload alarm signal is transmitted from the external output (CNT-5).
External output setting *1 Functions assigned to the external outputs 1 to 4 can be changed. B
A
A 4 Service & Maintenance IU address Max 16 indoor units can be connected to one remote control, and all address No. of the connected indoor units can be displayed.
・The indoor unit conforming to the address No. can be identified by selecting the address No. and tapping [Check] to operate the B ○
[Service password] indoor fan.
A △ Next service date The [Next service date] can be registered.
AB ○
・The [Next service date] and [Company information] is displayed on the message screen.
A Operation data The [Operation data] for indoor unit and outdoor unit can be displayed. B ○
t. A Error display
A Error history The error history can be displayed.
A Display anomaly data The operation data just before the latest error stop can be displayed. B △
A Erase anomaly data Anomaly operation data can be erased.
A Reset periodical check The timer for the periodical check can be reset.
Saving IU settings The I/U settings memorized in the indoor PCB connected to the remote control can be saved in the memory of the remote control. B
Special settings [Erase IU address] [CPU reset] [Restore of default setting] [Touch panel calibration] B △
A △
Indoor unit capacity display *1 Address No. and capacities of indoor units connected to the remote control are displayed. B
8.Contact company Shows registered [Contact company] and [Contact phone].
9.Inspection
A △ Confirmation of Inspection This is displayed when any error occurs. A △
10.PC connection
USB connection Weekly timer setting and etc., can be set from PC. C
A △
◆ Listed items may not function depending on the specifications of indoor and outdoor units which are combined.
- 77 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
10.3 Installation of wired remote control (Option parts)

(1) Model RC-EX3A
　）Safety precautions
1
●Please read this manual carefully before starting installation work to install the unit properly.
Every one of the followings is important information to be observed strictly.
Failure to follow these instructions properly may result in serious
WARNING consequences such as death, severe injury, etc.
Failure to follow these instructions properly may cause injury or property
CAUTION damage.
It could have serious consequences depending on the circumstances.
●The following pictograms are used in the text.
Never do. Always follow the instructions given.
●Keep this manual at a safe place where you can consult with whenever necessary. Show this
manual to installers when moving or repairing the unit. When the ownership of the unit is
transferred, this manual should be given to a new owner.
WARNING
Consult your dealer or a professional contractor to install the unit.
Installation work should be performed properly according to this

installation manual.
r break-down.
Be sure to use accessories and specified parts for installation work.
cks.
Install the unit properly to a place with sufficient strength to hold the
weight.
If the place is not strong enough, the unit may drop and cause injury.
Be sure to have the electrical wiring work done by qualified electrical
installer, and use exclusive circuit.
Shut OFF the main power source before starting electrical work.
Otherwise, it could result in electric shocks, break-down or malfunction.
Do not modify the unit.
Be sure to turn OFF the power circuit breaker before repairing/

inspecting the unit.
Repairing/inspecting the unit with the power circuit breaker turned ON could cause
electric shocks or injury.
- 78 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
　
WARNING
Do not install the unit in appropriate environment or where
inflammable gas could generate, flow in, accumulate or leak.
If the unit is used at places where air contains dense oil mist, steam, organic solvent vapor,
corrosive gas (ammonium, sulfuric compound, acid, etc) or where acidic or alkaline
solution, special spray, etc. are used, it could cause electric shocks, break-down, smoke or
Do not install the unit where water vapor is generated excessively or

condensation occurs.
Do not use the unit in a place where it gets wet, such as laundry
room.
Do not operate the unit with wet hands.

It could cause electric shocks.
Do not wash the unit with water.
Use the specified cables for wiring, and connect them securely with
care to protect electronic parts from external forces.
etc.
Seal the inlet hole for remote control cable with putty.
break-down.
If dew or water enters the unit, it may cause screen display anomalies.
When installing the unit at a hospital, telecommunication facility, etc.,
take measures to suppress electric noises.
It could cause malfunction or break-down due to hazardous effects on the inverter,
private power generator, high frequency medical equipment, radio communication
equipment, etc.
communication
equipment could disrupt medical activities, video broadcasting or cause noise
interference.
Do not leave the remote control with its upper case removed.
break-down.
- 79 -
PJZ012A171_EN.indd 3 2018/05/09 14:37:05

'19 • PAC-DB-333
　
CAUTION
Do not install the remote control at following places.
(1) It could cause break-down or deformation of remote control.
・Where it is exposed to direct sunlight
・Where the ambient temperature becomes 0 ° C or below, or 40 °C or above
・
・
(2) Moisture may be attached to internal parts of the remote control, resulting in a
display failure.
・Place with high humidity where condensation occurs on the remote control
・Where the remote control gets wet
(3) Accurate room temperature may not be detected using the temperature sensor of the
remote control.
・Where the average room temperature cannot be detected
・Place near the equipment to generate heat
・Place affected by outside air in opening/closing the door
・Place exposed to direct sunlight or wind from air-conditioner
・Where the difference between wall and room temperature is large
To connect to a personal computer via USB, use the dedicated
software.
Do not connect other USB devices and the remote control at the
same time.
It could cause malfunction or break-down of the remote control/personal computer.
- 80 -
PJZ012A171_EN.indd 4 2018/05/09 14:37:06

'19 • PAC-DB-333
　）Accessories & Prepare on site

2
Following parts are provided.
Accessories R/C main unit, wood screw (ø3.5 x 16) 2 pcs, Quick reference
Following parts are arranged at site. Prepare them according to the respective installation procedures.
Item name Q’ty Remark When the cable length is longer than 100 m,
Switch box the max size for wires used in the R/C case
1 is 0.5 mm2 . Connect them to wires of larger
For 1 piece or 2 pieces (JIS C 8340 or equivalent)
Thin wall steel pipe for electric These are not required when installing size near the outside of R/C. When wires are
appliance directly on a wall. As required directly on a wall. connected, take measures to prevent water,
(JIS C 8305 or equivalent) etc. from entering inside.
Lock nut, bushing (JIS C 8330 or equivalent) As required ≦ 200 m 0.5 mm2 x 2 cores
Lacing (JIS C 8425 or equivalent) As required Necessary to run R/C cable on the wall.
≦ 300m 0.75 mm2 x 2 cores
Putty Suitably For sealing gaps
≦ 400m 1.25 mm2 x 2 cores
Molly anchor As required
R/C cable (0.3 mm2 x 2 pcs) As required See right table when longer than 100 m ≦ 600m 2.0 mm2 x 2 cores
　3）Installation place
Installation space
For the installation method, “embedding wiring” or “exposing wiring”
配線 30mm
30mm
can be selected. Wiring
For the wiring direction, “Backward”, “Upper center” or “Upper left”
can be selected. 30mm
30mm 30mm
30mm
Determine the installation place in consideration of the installation
method and wiring direction.
R/C temperature sensor

Secure minimum spaces for disassembling the case.
120mm
120mm
Upper left and upper right sides

……30mm or more
Bottom side…120mm or more
If using L-shaped screwdriver, 50mm or more is
available.
- 81 -
PJZ012A171_EN.indd 5 2018/05/09 14:37:06

'19 • PAC-DB-333
　
4）Installation procedure
Perform installation and wiring work for the remote control according to the PCB side (Viewed from rear)
following procedure.
Dimensions (Viewed from front)
18.3
18.3
83.5
120
83.5
Fixing固定穴
120
holes
センサー
Sensor USBUSB
port 端子 block
Terminal
37
37 23
23 23
23 19
19
120
120
To disassemble the R/C case into the upper and lower pieces after assembling
them once
ess at the lower part of
R/C and twist it lightly to remove. It is recommended that the tip of the screwdriver
Conduit
電線管
be wrapped with tape to avoid damaging the case. 壁
Wall
Take care to protect the removed upper case from moisture or dust. Locknut
ロックナット
スイッチ
Switch
In case of embedding wiring ボックス
box
(When the wiring is retrieved “Backward”)
① Embed the switch box and the R/C wires beforehand. ブッシング
Bushing
Seal the inlet hole for the R/C wiring with putty. 50 パテでシール
Seal with putty
すること
8
200
R/C
リモコcable
ン配線
② se at 2 places on the switch box.

上side
Upper 上上上side
Upper
下ケース配線穴
Switch box for Switch box for
1 pcs 2 pcs
ねじ取付部のね
Cutじ取付部の
out the thin
wall
薄肉部分を薄肉部分をpart at the
screw mounting
下ケース
Bottom case 下ケース下ケース下ケース
Bottom case ナイフ等で、ナイフ等で、
section with a
切りとって knife
切りと orって
the like
からねじをからねじを
before tightening
しめてくだしめてくだ
the screw.
さい。さい。
下side
Down 下下下side
Down
配線取出口
Wire outlet 配線取出口配線取出口配線取出口
Wire outlet
- 82 -
PJZ012A171_EN.indd 6 2018/05/09 14:37:07

ブッシング
50 パテでシール
すること
8 '19 • PAC-DB-333
　 200
リモコン配線
③ Connect wires from X and Y terminals of R/C to X and Y terminals of indoor unit. R/C
wires (X, Y) have no polarity. Fix wires such that the wires will run around the terminal
screws on the top case of R/C.
下ケース配線穴
Wiring hole on
④ Install the upper case with care not to pinch wires of R/C. bottom case
Cautions for wire connection
Use wires of no larger than 0.5 mm2 for wiring running
through the remote control case. Take care not to pinch
the sheath.
T
If the wire is connected using an electric driver, it may
cause failure or deformation.
In case of exposing wiring
(When the wiring is taken out from the “upper center” or
“upper left” of R/C)
① Cut out the thin wall sections on the cases for the size of wire.
When taking the wiring out from the upper center, open a hole上面中央の場合
before separating the upper and bottom cases. This will reduce risk of
damaging the PCB and facilitate subsequent work.
When taking the wiring out from the upper left, take care not to damage the PCB and not to leave any chips of cut thin wall inside.
Upper center Upper left

上面左の場合
上面中央の場合下ケース case
Bottom
Upper
上ケース case
上面左の場合
下ケース
上ケース
②
screws.
③ In case of the upper center, pass the wiring behind the
bottom case. (Hatched section) 120mm 190 mm
④ Connect wires from X and Y terminals of R/C to X and Y 左側の場合
120 mm (for retrieving
190mm
wire from upper
(for retrieving wire 中央の場合
terminals of indoor unit. R/C wires (X, Y) have no polarity. from upper left) center)
Fix wires such that the wires will run around the terminal
screws on the top case of R/C.
8
⑤ Install the top case with care not to pinch wires of R/C.
⑥ Seal the area cut in ① with putty.
- 83 -
PJZ012A171_EN.indd 7 2018/05/09 14:37:07

'19 • PAC-DB-333
　 Main/Sub setting when more than one remote control are used
5）
○: operable ×: not operable
Up to two units of R/C can be used R/C operations Main Sub R/C operations Main Sub
Run/Stop, Change set temp., Service Installation Installation date ○ ×
at the maximum for 1 indoor unit or 1 ○ ○ setting settings Company information ○ ○
group. speed operations Test run ○ ×
One is main R/C and the other is sub High power operation, Energy-saving operation ○ ○ Static pressure adjustment ○ ×
Silent mode control ○ × Change auto-address ○ ×
R/C. ○ ×
Useful ○ × Address setting of main IU
Operating range is different depending functions Anti draft setting ○ × IU back-up function ○ ×
on the main or sub R/C. Timer ○ ○ Motion sensor setting ○ ×
R/C function Main/Sub of R/C ○ ○
Favorite setting ○ ○ settings Return air temp. ○ ×
Weekly timer ○ × R/C sensor ○ ×
室内ユニット
Indoor unit Home leave mode ○ × R/C sensor adjustment ○ ×
External ventilation ○ ○ Operation mode ○ ×
ＸＹ R/C cable （無極性）
リモコン線 Select the language ○ ○ ºC / ºF ○ ×
(No polarity)
Silent mode control ○ × Fan speed ○ ×
Energy-saving setting ○ × External input ○ ×
ＸＹＸＹ
○ ×
リモコン
R/C リモコン
R/C Filter Filter sign reset ○ ○
○ ×
「親」
“Main” 「子」
“Sub” User setting Initial settings ○ ○
Ventilation setting ○ ×
Administrator Permission/ ○
settings Prohibition setting × Auto-restart ○ ×
Auto temp. setting ○ ×
Outdoor unit silent
mode timer ○ × Auto fan speed ○ ×
Setting temp. range ○ × IU settings ○ ×
Service & IU address ○ ○
Temp increment ○ Maintenance Next service date
setting × ○ ×
Operation data ○ ×
Set temp. display ○ ○
Error Error history ○ ○
R/C display setting ○ ○ display Display/erase
Change administrator ○ ×
○ ○ anomaly data
password Reset periodical check ○ ○
F1/F2 function setting ○ ○ Saving IU settings ○ ×
Special Erase IU address ○ ×
settings CPU reset ○ ○
Restore of default setting ○ ×
Touch panel calibration ○ ○
Indoor unit capacity display ○ ×
Advice: Connection to personal computer

It can be set from a personal computer via the USB port (mini-B).
Connect after removing the cover for USB port of upper case.
Replace the cover after use.
Special software is necessary for the connection.
For details, view the web site.
USB端子
USB port
カバー
Cover
Advice: Initializing of password

Administrator password (for daily setting items) and Input password
service password (for installation, test run and maintenance) are used. Input the administrator password.
○ The administrator password at factory default is “0000”. This setting can be changed (Refer to Delete
User's Manual). Set
If the administrator password is forgotten, it can be initialized by holding down the [F1] and [F2] Input 4 digit number & tap [Set]
Back
input screen.
○Service password is “9999”, which cannot be changed.
When the administrator password is input, the service password is also accepted.
[F1] [F2] switch
Advice
When connecting two or more FDT/FDTC to one R/C, unify the panel type either to a panel with anti draft function or a standard panel.
- 84 -
PJZ012A171_EN.indd 8 2018/05/09 14:37:08

'19 • PAC-DB-333
PJA012D730 B
(2) Model RC-E5
Installation manual for wired remote controller Connect the remote control cord to t
terminal block.
Connect the terminal of remote cont
Read together with indoor unit's installation manual. with the terminal of indoor unit (X,Y)
WARNING (X and Y are no polarity)
Wiring route is as shown in the right
Fasten the wiring to the terminal securely and hold the cable securely so as not to apply unexpected stress on the
depending on the pulling out directio
terminal.
Loose connection or hold will cause abnormal heat generation or fire.
Make sure the power source is turned off when electric wiring work. The wiring inside the remote control
Otherwise, electric shock, malfunction and improper running may occur. The sheath should be peeled off ins
The peeling-off length of each wire i
CAUTION Pulling out from upper left Pulling o
Do not install the remote control at the following places in order to avoid malfunction. X wiring : 215mm X
(1) Places exposed to direct sunlight (4) Hot surface or cold surface enough to generate condensation Y wiring : 195mm Y
(2) Places near heat devices (5) Places exposed to oil mist or steam directly
(3) High humidity places (6) Uneven surface Install the upper case as before so a
the screws.
In case of exposing cord, fix the cord
Do not leave the remote control without the upper case.
In case the upper cace needs to be detached, protect the remote control with a packaging box or bag in Installation and wiring of remote con
order to keep it away from water and dust.
Wiring of remote control should use
Maximum prolongation of remote co
Accessories Remote control, wood screw (ø3.5×16) 2 pieces
If the prolongation is over 100m, cha
Prepare on site Remote control cord (2 cores) the insulated thickness in 1mm or more. But, wiring in the remote control cas
[In case of embedding cord] Erectrical box, M4 screw (2 pieces) of the case according to wire connec
[In case of exposing cord] Cord clamp (if needed) connecting section. Be careful abou
100 - 200m.........................0.5mm2
Installation procedure Under 300m .......................0.75mm2
Open the cover of remote control, and remove the screw under the Under 400m .......................1.25mm2
buttons without fail. Under 500m .......................2.0mm2
Master/ slave setting when more tha

Remove the upper case of remote control. Screw
Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into the dented part of the upper part A maximum of two remote controls can b
of the remote control, and wrench slightly.
[In case of embedding cord] Indoor units

Embed the erectrical box and remote control cord beforehand.
Remote control cord
Control cord
Erectrical box
(Prepare on site)
Remote control Remote control
SW1 "Master" SW1 "Slave"
Prepare two M4 screws (recommended length is 12-16mm) on site, and install the lower case to erectrical box.
Choose either of the following two positions in fixing it with screws.
Upper part Upper part Set SW1 to "Slave" for the slave remo
Tighten the screws after
Note: The setting "Remote control senso
cutting off the thin part of control in the position where you w
Lower case Lower case screw mounting part. The air conditioner operation follow
master/ slave setting of it.
Wiring oulet Lower part Lower part The indication when power source is s
Wiring oulet
When power source is turned on, the follo
communication between the remote cont
Connect the remote control cord to the terminal block. Master remote control : "
Connect the terminal of remote control (X,Y) with the terminal of M4 screw 2 (Prepare on site)
Slave remote control : "
indoor unit (X,Y). (X and Y are no polarity) The thin part
Upper At the same time, a mark or a number wi
Install the upper case as before so as not to catch up the remote control cord, This is the software's administration num
and tighten with the screws. Lower case
The
exam
[In case of exposing cord] appe
Lower
You can pull out the remote control cord from left upper part or center upper part. Upper When remote control cannot communicat
Cut off the upper thin part of remote control lower case with a nipper or knife, appear.
and grind burrs with a file etc. Check wiring of the indoor unit and the ou
Lower case
Install the lower case to the flat wall with attached two wooden screws.
Lower
- 85 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
d remote controller Connect the remote control cord to the Sheath Sheath
Upper Upper The range of temperature setting
terminal block.
Connect the terminal of remote control (X,Y) Upper case Upper case When shipped, the range of set temperature d
Board Board
with the terminal of indoor unit (X,Y). Heating : 16~30˚C (55~86˚F)
(X and Y are no polarity) Except heating (cooling, fan, dry, autom
Wiring route is as shown in the right diagram
o as not to apply unexpected stress on the Upper limit and lower limit of set
depending on the pulling out direction. Lower Wiring Wiring Lower
Upper limit setting: valid during heating op
In case of pulling out from In case of pulling out from
upper left upper center Lower limit setting: valid except heating (au
The wiring inside the remote control case should be within 0.3mm2 (recommended) to 0.5mm2. 79˚F).
. The sheath should be peeled off inside the remote control case. When you set upper and lower limit by this
The peeling-off length of each wire is as below.
1. When TEMP RANGE SET, remote co
Pulling out from upper left Pulling out from upper center If upper limit value is set
oid malfunction. X wiring : 215mm X wiring : 170mm The peeling-off length During heating, you cannot set the valu
d surface enough to generate condensation Y wiring : 195mm Y wiring : 190mm of sheath
oil mist or steam directly If lower limit value is set
Install the upper case as before so as not to catch up the remote control cord, and tighten with During operation mode except heating,
the screws.
In case of exposing cord, fix the cord on the wall with cord clamp so as not to slack. 2. When TEMP RANGE SET, remote c
If upper limit value is set
ol with a packaging box or bag in Installation and wiring of remote control During heating, even if the value excee
Wiring of remote control should use 0.3mm 2 2 cores wires or cables. (on-site configuration) But, the indication is the same as the te
Maximum prolongation of remote control wiring is 600 m. If lower limit value is set
2 pieces
If the prolongation is over 100m, change to the size below. During except heating, even if the value
d thickness in 1mm or more. But, wiring in the remote control case should be under 0.5mm 2 . Change the wire size outside
al box, M4 screw (2 pieces) But, the indication is the same as the te
of the case according to wire connecting. Waterproof treatment is necessary at the wire
mp (if needed) connecting section. Be careful about contact failure. How to set upper and lower limit
100 - 200m.........................0.5mm2 2 cores 1. Stop the air-conditioner, and press
Under 300m .......................0.75mm2 2 cores seconds .
r the Under 400m .......................1.25mm2 2 cores The indication changes to "FUNCTION
Under 500m .......................2.0mm2 2 cores 2. Press button once, and change to
3. Press (SET) button, and enter
Master/ slave setting when more than one remote controls are used 4. Select "UPPER LIMIT " or "LOWE
Screw
r part A maximum of two remote controls can be connected to one indoor unit (or one group of indoor units.) 5. Press (SET) button to fix.
6. When "UPPER LIMIT " is selected
Switch Setting Contents
Indication: " SET UP" "
Indoor units M Master remote control Select the upper limit value with te
SW1
S Slave remote control (blinking)
Remote control cord (no polarity) Press (SET) button to fix. In
Control cord
Upper After the fixed upper limit value dis
Erectrical box
(Prepare on site) Master 7. When "LOWER LIMIT " is selected
Remote control Remote control
SW1 "Master" SW1 "Slave" Slave Board Indication: " SET UP" "
Select the lower limit value with tem
site, and install the lower case to erectrical box. Lower
(blinking)
ews.
part Set SW1 to "Slave" for the slave remote control. It was factory set to "Master" for shipment. Press (SET) button to fix. In
Tighten the screws after
Note: The setting "Remote control sensor enabled" is only selectable with the master remote After the fixed lower limit value dis
cutting off the thin part of control in the position where you want to check room temperature. 8. Press ON/OFF button to finish.
ase screw mounting part. The air-conditioner operation follows the last operation of the remote control regardless of the
master/ slave setting of it.
wer part The indication when power source is supplied

When power source is turned on, the following is displayed on the remote control until the
communication between the remote control and indoor unit settled.
Master remote control : " " It is possible to finish by pressing
of M4 screw 2 (Prepare on site)
Slave remote control : " " ON/OFF button on the way, but
The thin part
Upper At the same time, a mark or a number will be displayed for two seconds first. unfinished change of setting is
This is the software's administration number of the remote control, not an error cord. unavailable.
ote control cord,
Lower case
During setting, if you press
The left mark is only an (RESET) button, you return to the
example. Other marks may previous screen.
appear.
Lower
r center upper part. Upper When remote control cannot communicate with the indoor unit for half an hour, the below indication will
nipper or knife, appear.
Check wiring of the indoor unit and the outdoor unit etc.
Lower case
screws.
Lower
- 86 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
PJA012D730
Sheath Sheath
Upper The range of temperature setting
Upper case Upper case When shipped, the range of set temperature differs depending on the operation mode as below.
Board
Heating : 16-30˚C (55-86˚F)
Except heating (cooling, fan, dry, automatic) : 18-30˚C (62-86˚F)
Upper limit and lower limit of set temperature can be changed with remote control.
Lower
Wiring Wiring Upper limit setting: valid during heating operation. Possible to set in the range of 20 to 30˚C (68 to 86˚F).
ut from In case of pulling out from
upper center Lower limit setting: valid except heating (automatic, cooling, fan, dry) Possible to set in the range of 18 to 26˚C (62 to
.3mm2 (recommended) to 0.5mm2. 79˚F).
ase. When you set upper and lower limit by this function, control as below.
1. When TEMP RANGE SET, remote control function of function setting mode is "INDN CHANGE" (factory setting),
The peeling-off length During heating, you cannot set the value exceeding the upper limit.
of sheath
If lower limit value is set
te controller cord, and tighten with During operation mode except heating, you cannot set the value below the lower limit.
mp so as not to slack. 2. When TEMP RANGE SET, remote control function of function setting mode is "NO INDN CHANGE"
During heating, even if the value exceeding the upper limit is set, upper limit value will be sent to the indoor unit.
or cables. (on-site configuration) But, the indication is the same as the temperature set.
If lower limit value is set
During except heating, even if the value lower than the lower limit is set, lower limit value will be sent to the indoor unit.
m2 . Change the wire size outside But, the indication is the same as the temperature set.
t is necessary at the wire
How to set upper and lower limit value
1. Stop the air-conditioner, and press (SET) and (MODE) button at the same time for over three
seconds .
The indication changes to "FUNCTION SET ".
2. Press button once, and change to the "TEMP RANGE " indication.
3. Press (SET) button, and enter the temperature range setting mode.
re used 4. Select "UPPER LIMIT " or "LOWER LIMIT " by using button.
or unit (or one group of indoor units.) 5. Press (SET) button to fix.
6. When "UPPER LIMIT " is selected (valid during heating)
Contents
Indication: " SET UP" "UPPER 30˚C "
er remote controller Select the upper limit value with temperature setting button . Indication example: "UPPER 26˚C "
e remote controller (blinking)
Press (SET) button to fix. Indication example: "UPPER 26˚C" (Displayed for two seconds)
Upper After the fixed upper limit value displayed for two seconds, the indication will return to "UPPER LIMIT ".
7. When "LOWER LIMIT " is selected (valid during cooling, dry, fan, automatic)
Board Indication: " SET UP" "LOWER 18˚C "
Lower
Select the lower limit value with temperature setting button . Indication example: "LOWER 24˚C "
(blinking)
ory set to "Master" for shipment. Press (SET) button to fix. Indication for example: "LOWER 24˚C" (Displayed for two seconds)
ectable with the master remote After the fixed lower limit value displayed for two seconds, the indication will return to "LOWER LIMIT ".
erature. 8. Press ON/OFF button to finish.
remote controller regardless of the
emote controller until the

d.
It is possible to finish by pressing
ON/OFF button on the way, but
nds first. unfinished change of setting is
, not an error cord. unavailable.
During setting, if you press
(RESET) button, you return to the
previous screen.
half an hour, the below indication will

Previous button
- 87 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
The functional setting

The initial function setting for typical using is performed automatically by the indoor unit connected, when remote Note 1: The initial setting marked “ ” is decided by connected indoor and outdoor unit, and is automatically defined as following table.
control and indoor unit are connected. Function No. Item Default Model
As long as they are used in a typical manner, there will be no need to change the initial settings.
How to set function
Remote control "Auto-RUN" mode selectable indoor unit.
If you would like to change the initial setting marked “ ”, set your desired setting as for the selected item. function02 1. Stop air-conditioner and press (SET)
Indoor unit without "Auto-RUN" mode
The procedure of functional setting is shown as the following diagram. buttons at the same time for over three secon
Remote control Indoor unit with two or three step of air flow setting
"FUNCTION SET " will be displayed.
function06 Indoor unit with only one of air flow setting
[Flow of function setting]
Remote control Indoor unit with automatically swing louver
Start : Stop air-conditioner and press “ ” (SET) and Record and keep the function07 Indoor unit without automatically swing louver
“ ” (MODE) buttons at the same time for over three seconds. setting Remote control Indoor unit with three step of air flow setting
Finalize : Press “ ” (SET) button. function13 Indoor unit with two step of air flow setting 2. Press (SET) button.
Reset : Press “ ” (RESET) button.
3. Make sure which do you want to set, " FUN
Select : Press button. Indoor unit with only one of air flow setting
Consult the technical data etc. for each control details (remote control function) or "I/U FUNCTION
End : Press ON/OFF button.
Remote control Heat pump unit unit function).
It is possible to finish above setting on the way, function15 Exclusive cooling unit
and unfinished change of setting is unavailable. 4. Press or button.
Stop air-conditioner and press Note 3: As for plural indoor unit, set indoor functions to each master and slave indoor unit.
“ ” : Initial settings (SET) + (MODE) buttons Selecct " FUNCTION " (remote control func
“ ” : Automatic criterion But only master indoor unit is received the setting change of indoor unit function “05 EXTERNAL INPUT” and “06 PERMISSION / FUNCTION " (indoor unit function).
at the same time for over three seconds.
PROHIBISHION”.
Indoor unit No. are indicated only when Note2: Fan setting of "HIGH SPEED"
Indoor unit air flow setting 5. Press (SET) button.
(Remote control function) (Indoor unit function) plural indoor units are connected. Fan tap
Function - - - - - - -
Function 02 setting
FAN STANDARD UH - Hi - Me - Lo Hi - Me - Lo Hi - Lo Hi - Me 6. On the occasion of remote control function
01 setting
SPEED
Validate setting of ESP:External Static Pressure SET HIGH "DATA LOADING" (Indication with blinking)
UH - UH - Hi - Me UH - Hi - Me UH - Me UH - Hi
Invalidate setting of ESP SPEED1, 2
02 03 Initial function setting of some indoor unit is "HIGH SPEED". Display is changed to "01 ".
Automatical operation is impossible The filter sign is indicated after running for 180 hours.
03 The filter sign is indicated after running for 600 hours. Press or button.
To set other indoor unit, press The filter sign is indicated after running for 1000 hours. "No. and function"are indicated by turns on th
Temperature setting button is not working AIR CON No. button, which The filter sign is indicated after running for 1000 hours, then the indoor unit will be stopped by
control function table, then you can select fro
04 allows you to go back to the indoor compulsion after 24 hours.
04 (For example)
unit selection screen If you change the indoor function "04 ",
Mode button is not working (for example: I/U 000 ). you must change the remote control function "14 " accordingly.
Function No.
05 You can select the louver stop position in the four.
The louver can stop at any position. Function
On/Off button is not working 05
06 Press (SET) button.
Fan speed button is not working 06 The current setting of selected function is ind
07 (for example) "AUTO RUN ON" If "02 AU
Permission/prohibition control of operation will be valid. selected
Louver button is not working 07
08
With the VRF series, it is used to stop all indoor units connected with the same outdoor unit immediately.
Setting
Timer button is not working When stop signal is inputed from remote on-off terminal "CNT-6", all indoor units are stopped immediately.
09
Remote thermistor is not working.
Remote thermistor is working.
Press or button.
To be reset for producing +3.0˚C increase in temperature during heating.
Remote thermistor is working, and to be set for producing +3.0˚C increase in temperature. To be reset for producing +2.0˚C increase in temperature during heating.
Select the setting.
Remote thermistor is working, and to be set for producing +2.0˚C increase in temperature. 08 To be reset for producing +1.0˚C increase in temperature during heating.
Remote thermistor is working, and to be set for producing +1.0˚C increase in temperature.
Remote thermistor is working, and to be set for producing -1.0˚C increase in temperature.
Remote thermistor is working, and to be set for producing -2.0˚C increase in temperature. To be reset producing +2.0˚C increase in return air temperature of indoor unit.
Remote thermistor is working, and to be set for producing -3.0˚C increase in temperature. To be reset producing +1.5˚C increase in return air temperature of indoor unit.
10 09 To be reset producing +1.0˚C increase in return air temperature of indoor unit.
To be reset producing -1.0˚C increase in return air temperature of indoor unit.

11 To be reset producing -1.5˚C increase in return air temperature of indoor unit.
To be reset producing -2.0˚C increase in return air temperature of indoor unit. Press (SET)
In case of Single split series, by connecting ventilation device to CNT of the 10 "SET COMPLETE" will be indicated, and the
indoor printed circuit board (in case of VRF series, by connecting it to CND of the When heating thermostat is OFF, fan speed is low speed.
completed.
indoor printed circuit board), the operation of ventilation device is linked with the When heating thermostat is OFF, fan speed is set speed.
operation of indoor unit. Then after "No. and function" indication return
In case of Single split series, by connecting ventilation device to CNT of the indoor printed When heating thermostat is OFF, fan speed is operated intermittently. same procedure if you want to set continuous
circuit board (in case of VRF series, by connecting it to CND of the indoor printed circuit When heating thermostat is OFF, the fan is stopped. finish, go to 7.
board), you can operate /stop the ventilation device independently by (VENT) button. When the remote thermistor is working, "FAN OFF" is set automatically.
12 Do not set "FAN OFF" when the indoor unit's thermistor is working.
If you change the range of set temperature, the indication of set temperature
will vary following the control. 11 Change of indoor heat exchanger temperature to start frost prevention control.
If you change the range of set temperature, the indication of set temperature
will not vary following the control, and keep the set temperature.
13
Air flow of fan becomes the three speed of - - or - - - . 12 Working only with the Single split series.
Air flow of fan becomes the two speed of - . To control frost prevention, the indoor fan tap is raised. 7. Press ON/OFF button.
Air flow of fan becomes the two speed of - . Setting is finished.
Air flow of fan is fixed at one speed. 13
Drain pump is run during cooling and dry.
14 If you change the remote control function "14 ", Drain pump is run during cooling, dry and heating.
you must change the indoor function "04 " accordingly. Drain pump is run during cooling, dry, heating and fan.
You can select the louver stop position in the four. Drain pump is run during cooling, dry and fan.
The louver can stop at any position. 14
15 After cooling is stopped is OFF, the fan does not perform extra operation.
After cooling is stopped is OFF, the fan perform extra operation for half an hour.
After cooling is stopped is OFF, the fan perform extra operation for an hour.
16 After cooling is stopped is OFF, the fan perform extra operation for six hours.
It is possible to finish by pressin
If you input signal into CnT of the indoor printed circuit board from external, the 15 unavailable.
indoor unit will be operated independently according to the input from external. After heating is stopped or heating thermostat is OFF, the fan does not perform extra operation.
If you input into CNT of the indoor printed circuit board from external, all units which After heating is stopped or heating thermostat is OFF,the fan perform extra operation for half an hour. During setting, if you press
connect to the same remote control are operated according to the input from external. After heating is stopped or heating thermostat is OFF,the fan perform extra operation for two hours. Setting is memorized in the con
17 After heating is stopped or heating thermostat is OFF, the fan perform extra operation for six hours.
16
In normal working indication, indoor unit temperature is indicated instead of air flow.
(Only the master remote control can be indicated.) During heating is stopped or heating thermostat is OFF, the fan perform intermittent operation for five minutes How to check the current setting
18 with low fan speed after twenty minutes' OFF.
When you select from "No. and funcion" and
During heating is stopped or heating thermostat is OFF, the fan perform intermittent operation for five minutes
Heating preparation indication should not be indicated. with low fan speed after five minutes' OFF. setting.
17 (But, if you select "ALL UNIT ", the setting
19
Temperature indication is by degree C. Connected “OA Processing” type indoor unit, and is automatically defined.
Temperature indication is by degree F.
ON/OFF button
(finished)
- 88 -
PJA012D730
'19 • PAC-DB-333
PJA012D730
atically defined as following table.
unit, and is automatically defined as following table.
Operation message
How to set function
How to set function Operation message
Function description: ,
oor unit. indoor unit.
ode selectable Function description: , Function No.
1. Stop
1. Stop air-conditioner
air-conditioner and press and press(SET) (SET)
(MODE) (MODE)
setting description: Function No.
setting description:
mode
hout "Auto-RUN" mode
buttons at theat
same
h two or three step of air flow setting buttons thetime for over
same three
time seconds,
for over and the seconds,
three and the
of air flow setting "FUNCTION SET " will be displayed.
h only one of air flow setting "FUNCTION SET " will be displayed.
hwautomatically
setting swing louver Fixing button
hout automatically swing louver
ng louver
h three step of air flow setting Fixing button
h two steplouver
swing of air flow setting 2. Press (SET) button.
7 Finishing button
ow setting 3. Make sure which do you want to set, " FUNCTION "
h only one of air flow setting
w setting Press
2. (remote (SET)
control function) button.
or "I/U FUNCTION " (indoor
t unit function). 7 Finishing button
4.3. Press
Make sure which
button. do you want to set, " FUNCTION "
ng unit 2 Starting button
or
w setting
oor unit. (remote control function) or "I/U FUNCTION 1" (indoor
Selecct " FUNCTION " (remote control function) or "I/U
nction “05 EXTERNAL INPUT” and “06 PERMISSION / FUNCTION " (indoor unit function).
unit function).
4. Press or button. 6 Indoor unit selection button Previous screen button 2 Starting button
EED" Selecct " (SET)
FUNCTION " (remote control function) or "I/U
NAL INPUT” and
Indoor unit “06 PERMISSION
air flow setting / 5. Press button. 1
- - - - - - - FUNCTION " (indoor unit function).
- Hi - Me - Lo Hi - Me - Lo Hi - Lo Hi - Me 6. On the occasion of remote control function selection On the occasion of indoor unit function selection
6 Indoor unit selection button Previous screen button
H - UH - Hi - Me UH - Hi - Me UH - Me UH - Hi "DATA LOADING" (Indication with blinking) "DATA LOADING" (Blinking for 2 to 23 seconds to read the data)
door unit is "HIGH SPEED". Display is changed to "01 ". Indication is changed to "02 FAN SPEED SET".
r unit
ning air hours.
for 180 flow setting 5. Press (SET) button. Go to .
- 600 hours.
ning for - - - Press or button.
ning for 1000 hours. "No. and function"are indicated by turns on the remote [Note]
ning for 1000 hours, then the indoor unit will be stopped by
Hi - Me - Lo Hi - Lo Hi - Me control function table, then you can select from them. (1) If plural indoor units are connected to a remote control,
6. On the occasion of remote control function
(For example)
selection On the occasion
the indication is "I/U 000" (blinking)
of indoor
The lowest number of
unit function selection
04 ",
the indoor unit connected is indicated.
ol function "14
UH - Hi -
tion in the four.Me
" accordingly.
UH - Me UH - Hi "DATA LOADING" (Indication
Function No. with blinking) "DATA LOADING" (Blinking for 2 to 23 seconds to read the data)
. Function
EED". Display is changed to "01 ". Indication is changed to "02 FAN SPEED SET".
Press (SET) button.
The current setting of selected function is indicated.(2) Press or button. Go to .
(for Press
example) "AUTOorRUN ON"button. Select the number of the indoor unit you are to set
If "02 AUTO RUN SET" is
peration will be valid. selected If you select "ALL UNIT ",[Note]
you can set the same setting with
"No. and function"are indicated by turns on the remote all unites.
hen the indoor unit will be stopped by
control function table, then you can select from them.
(3) Press (SET) button.
(1) If plural indoor units are connected to a remote control,
top all indoor units connected with the same outdoor unit immediately.
emote on-off terminal "CNT-6", all indoor units are stopped immediately. (For example) Setting
the indication is "I/U 000" (blinking) The lowest number of
Press or button. the indoor unit connected is indicated.
" accordingly. Press or button. "No. and function" are indicated by turns on the indoor unit function
ncrease in temperature during heating. Function No.
ncrease in temperature during heating.
Select the setting. table, then you can select from them.
ncrease in temperature during heating. Function (For example)
Function No.
ase in return air temperature of indoor unit. Press (SET) button. Function
ase in return air temperature of indoor unit.
ase in return air temperature of indoor unit. The current setting of selected function is indicated. (2) Press or button.
Press (SET) button.
ase in return air temperature of indoor unit.
(for example) "AUTO RUN ON" If "02 AUTO RUN is of selected functionSelect
SET"setting
The current the number of the indoor unit you are to set
is indicated.
ase in return air temperature of indoor unit. selected (For example) "STANDARD" If "02IfFAN
youSPEED
select "ALL
SET" is UNIT ", you can set the same setting with
ase in return air temperature of indoor unit. Press (SET) selected.
"SET COMPLETE" will be indicated, and the setting will be all unites.
an speed is low speed.
completed. (3)
an speed is set speed.
nnected with the same outdoor unit immediately. Then after "No. and function" indication returns, Set asSetting
the Press
Setting (SET) button.
"CNT-6", all indoor
an speed is operated units are stopped immediately.
intermittently. same procedure if you want to set continuously ,and if to
he fan is stopped. finish, go to 7. Press or button.
king, "FAN OFF" is set automatically. Press or button.
Select the setting.
door unit's thermistor is working. Press or button. "No. and function" are indicated by turns on the indoor unit function
e during heating.
eemperature to start frost prevention control.
during heating.
Select the setting. Press (SET) button. table, then you can select from them.
"SET COMPLETE" will be indicated, and the setting will be
e during heating. completed.
(For example)
Then after "No. and function" indication returns, set as the same
eries.
procedure if you want to set continuously , and if to finish, go to 7. Function No.
oor fan tap is raised. 7. Press ON/OFF button.
erature of indoor unit. Setting is finished. Function
erature of indoor unit.
nd dry.
erature of indoor unit.
ry and heating.
ry, heating and fan. Press (SET) button.
When plural indoor units are connected to a remote control,
ry and fan.
erature of indoor unit. The current setting of selected
press the AIR CON No. button, which allows you to go back to
function is indicated.
erature
e fan doesofnotindoor unit.operation.
perform extra (For
the indoor unit selection screen. example)
(example "I/U 000"STANDARD"
") If "02 FAN SPEED SET" is
e fan perform
erature extra operation
of indoor unit. for half an hour. Press (SET) selected.
e fan perform extra operation for an hour.
e fan perform extra operation for six hours. "SET ItCOMPLETE" will be indicated, and the setting will be
is possible to finish by pressing ON/OFF button on the way, but unfinished change of setting is
d.
.thermostat is OFF, the fan does not perform extra operation.
completed.
unavailable.
thermostat is OFF,the fan perform extra operation for half an hour. Then During setting,
after "No. andif you press
function" (RESET)returns,
indication button, you return
Set as tothe
the previous screen. Setting
thermostat is OFF,the fan perform extra operation for two hours.
ntermittently.
thermostat is OFF, the fan perform extra operation for six hours. same Setting is memorized in the control and it is saved independently of power failure.
procedure if you want to set continuously ,and if to
finish, go to 7. Press or button.
tgautomatically.
thermostat is OFF, the fan perform intermittent operation for five minutes How to check the current setting
s working.
nutes' OFF. Select the setting.
When you select from "No. and funcion" and press set button by the previous operation, the "Setting" displayed first is the current
g thermostat is OFF, the fan perform intermittent operation for five minutes
es' OFF. setting.
ost prevention control. (But, if you select "ALL UNIT ", the setting of the lowest number indoor unit is displayed.) Press (SET) button.
ndoor unit, and is automatically defined. "SET COMPLETE" will be indicated, and the setting will be
completed.
Then after "No. and function" indication returns, set as the same
procedure if you want to set continuously , and if to finish, go to 7.
7. Press ON/OFF button.
Setting is finished. - 89 -
When plural indoor units are connected to a remote control,

press the AIR CON No. button, which allows you to go back to
extra operation. the indoor unit selection screen. (example "I/U 000 ")
PSC012D137
PSC012D137
201907 Notabilia as a unit designed for R
Inverter driven split PAC ● Do not use any refrigerant other than R32. R3
R407C).
90, 100VNP A cylinder containing R32 has a lightblue indic
INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR OUTDOOR UNIT Designed for R32 refrigerant ● A unit designed for R32 has adopted a differen
unitprevent
to to prevent
the charging
the charging
of a wrong
of a wrong
refrigerant
refrige
• This installation manual deals with outdoor units and general installation specifications only. For indoor units, refer to the respective installation manuals supplied with the units. The processed dimension of the flared part of
• When install the unit, be sure to check whether the selection of installation place, power supply
source specifications,
specifications, usage
usage limitation
limitation (piping
(piping length,
length, height
height differences
differences between
between indoor
indoor and
and outdoor
outdoor units,
units, power
power strength against pressure.
supply
source voltage
voltage and
and etc.)
etc.) and
and installation
installation spaces.
spaces. Accordingly, you are required to arrange dedic
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ● All indoor units must be models designed excl
if connected into the system, will impair prope
• Read the “SAFETY PRECAUTIONS” carefully first of all and strictly follow it during the installation work in order • Keep the installation manual together with owner’s manual at a place where any user can read at any time.
to protect yourself. Moreover if necessary, ask to hand them to a new user.
• The precautionary items mentioned below are distinguished into two levels, WARNING and CAUTION . • For installing qualified personnel, take precautions in respect to themselves by using suitable protective
WARNING : Wrong installation would cause serious consequences such as injuries or death. clothing, groves, etc., and then perform the installation works. 1. HAULAGE AND INST
CAUTION : Wrong installation might cause serious consequences depending on circumstances. • Please pay attention not to fall down the tools, etc. when installing the unit at the high position.
Both mentions the important items to protect your health and safety so strictly follow them by any means. • If unusual noise can be heard during operation, consult the dealer. When a unit is hoisted wit
• Be sure to confirm no anomaly on the equipment by commissioning after completed installation and explain the • The meanings of “Marks” used here are shown as follows: CAUTION center position. If not pro
operating methods as well as the maintenance methods of this equipment to the user according to the owner’s
manual. Never do it under any circumstances. Always do it according to the instruction. 1) Delivery
● Deliver the unit as close as possible to t
the packaging.
WARNING ● When you have to unpack the unit for a
• Installation must be carried out by the qualified installer. • Do not open the service valves for liquid line and gas line until completed • Only use prescribed optionoptionalparts.
parts. The
Theinstallation
installationmust
mustbebecarried
carriedout
out installation point, hoist the unit with nylon
you may not damage the unit.
Models FDC90VNP-W, 100VNP-W
If you install the system by yourself, it may cause serious trouble such as water leaks, refrigerant piping work, air tightness test and evacuation. by the qualified installer.
electric shocks, fire and personal injury, as a result of a system malfunction. Do not If the compressor is operated in state of opening service valves before completed If you install the system by yourself, it can cause serious trouble such as water
10.4 Installation of outdoor unit
carry out the installation and maintenance work except by the qualified installer. connection of refrigerant piping work, you may incur frost bite or injury from an leaks, electric shocks, fire.
2) Portage
• Install the system in full accordance with the installation manual. abrupt refrigerant outflow and air can be sucked into refrigerant circuit, which can • Be sure to wear protective goggles and gloves while at work. ● The right hand side of the unit as viewed
Incorrect installation may cause bursts, personal injury, water leaks, electric cause burst or personal injury due to anomalously high pressure in the refrigerant. • Earth leakage breaker must be installed. A person carrying the right hand side mu
shocks and fire. • The electrical installation must be carried out by the qualified electrician If the earth leakage breaker is not installed, it can cause electric shocks. the left hand side must hold with his right
• Be sure to use only for household and residence. in accordance with “the norm for electrical work” and “national wiring • After completed installation, check that no refrigerant leaks from the of the unit and with his left hand the corn
regulation”, and the system must be connected to the dedicated circuit.
If this appliance is installed in inferior environment such as machine shop and etc., system.
Power supply
source with insufficient capacity and incorrect function done by improper 3) Selection of installation l
it can cause malfunction. If refrigerant leaks into the room and comes into contact with an oven or other hot
work can cause electric shocks and fire.
• When installing in small rooms, take prevention measures not to surface, poisonous gas is produced. Be sure to select a suitable installation pla
• Be sure to shut off the power before starting electrical work.
exceed the density limit of refrigerant in the event of leakage, referred Failure to shut off the power can cause electric shocks, unit failure or incorrect • Hang up the unit at the specified points with ropes which can support the 〇 A place where it is horizontal, stable a
by the formula (accordance with ISO5149). function of equipment. weight in lifting for portage. And to avoid jolting out of alignment, be sure of the unit.
- 90 -
If the density of refrigerant exceeds the limit, please consult the dealer and install the • Be sure to use the cables conformed to safety standard and cable to hang up the unit at 4-point support. 〇 A place where it can be free from poss
ventilation system, otherwise lack of oxygen can occur, which can cause serious accident. ampacity for power distribution work. An improper manner of portage such as 3-point support can cause death or 〇 A place where the unit is not exposed t
• Use the original accessories and the specified components for Unconformable cables can cause electric leak, anomalous heat production or fire. serious personal injury due to falling of the unit. 〇 A place where it can be free from dang
installation. • Consult the dealer or an expert regarding removal of the unit. 〇 A place where drain water can be disp
• This appliance must be connected to main power supply source by means of a
〇 A place where the unit will not be affec
If parts other than those prescribed by us are used, It may cause water leaks, circuit breaker or switch (fuse:20A) with a contact separation of at least 3mm. Incorrect installation can cause water leaks, electric shocks or fire. 〇 A place where snow will not accumulat
electric shocks, fire and personal injury. • Arrange the wiring in the control box so that it cannot be pushed up • Do not perform brazing work in the airtight room. 〇 A place where the unit can be kept aw
• Install the unit in a location with good support. further into the box. Install the service panel correctly. It can cause lack of oxygen. radio or TV interference.
Unsuitable installation locations can cause the unit to fall and cause material Incorrect installation may result in overheating and fire. • This unit is designed specifically for R32. 〇 A place where good air circulation can
damage and personal injury. • Use the prescribed cables for electrical connection, tighten the cables Using any other refrigerant can cause unit failure and personal injury. and service of the unit safely.
• Ensure the unit is stable when installed, so that it can withstand securely in terminal block and relieve the cables correctly to prevent 〇 A place where the unit will not be affect
earthquakes and strong winds. overloading the terminal blocks. other equipment.
Unsuitable installation locations can cause the unit to fall and cause material Loose connections or cable mountings can cause anomalous heat production or fire. 〇 A place where chemical substances like
• Be sure to fix up the service panels. harm the unit, will not be generated and
damage and personal injury.
Incorrect fixing can cause electric shocks or fire due to intrusion of dust or water. 〇 If a operation is conducted when the o
• Ventilate the working area well in the event of refrigerant leakage during at a place where it is not influenced by
• Be sure to switch off the power supply source in the event of installation,
installation. 〇 A place where strong wind will not blo
inspection or servicing.
If the refrigerant comes into contact with naked flames, poisonous gas is produced. If the power source
supply is not shut off, there is a risk of electric shocks, unit failure or Do not install the unit in places which ex
• Use the prescribed pipes, flare nuts and tools for R32. personal injury due to the unexpected start of fan. melting agent), exposed to ammonia sub
Using existing parts (for R22 or R407C) can cause the unit failure and serious • Stop the compressor before removing the pipe after shutting the
accidents due to burst of the refrigerant circuit. service valve on pump down work. 4) Caution about selection of
• Tighten the flare nut by torque wrench with specified method. If the pipe is removed when the compressor is in operation with the service valve (1) If the unit is installed in the area where
If the flare nut were tightened with excess torque, this may cause burst and open, air would be mixed in the refrigeration circuit and it could cause explosion The bottom plate of unit and intake, out
refrigerant leakage after a long period. and injuries due to abnormal high pressure in the cooling cycle.
1 Install the unit on the base so
• Ensure that no air enters in the refrigerant circuit when the unit is • Do not bundling, winding or processing for the power cord. Or, do not • Do not perform any change of protective device itself or its setup condition. that the bottom is higher than
installed and removed. deforming the power plug due to tread it. The forced operation by short-circuiting protective device of pressure switch and snow cover surface, and
If air enters in the refrigerant circuit, the pressure in the refrigerant circuit This may cause fire or heating. temperature controller
control or or
thethe
useuse
of of
nonnon
specified
specified
component
componentcancan
cause
cause
firefire
or or
burst.
burst. draining water is secured.
becomes too high, which can cause burst and personal injury. • Do not run the unit with removed panels or protections. • Do not perform any repairs or modifications by yourself. Consult the dealer
• Do not processing, splice the power cord, or share a socket with other power plugs. Touching rotating equipments, hot surfaces or high voltage parts can cause if the unit requires repair.
This may cause fire or electric shock due to defecting contact, defecting insulation personal injury due to entrapment, burn or electric shocks. If you repair or modify the unit, it can cause water leaks, electric shocks or fire.
and over-current etc.
CAUTION
• Carry out the electrical work for ground lead with care.
Do not connect the ground lead to the gas line, water line, lightning conductor or telephone line’s ground lead. Incorrect grounding can cause unit faults such as electric shocks due to short-circuiting.
'19 • PAC-DB-333
• Use the circuit breaker for all pole correct capacity. Circuit breaker • Take care when carrying the unit by hand. • Be sure to perform air tightness test by pressurizing with nitrogen gas Since drain water generated by defrost
should be the one that disconnect all poles under over current. If the unit weights more than 20kg, it must be carried by two or more persons. Do after completed refrigerant piping work. ● Don’t execute drain piping work by usi
Using the incorrect circuit breaker, it can cause the unit malfunction and fire. not carry by the plastic straps, always use the carry handle when carrying the unit If the density of refrigerant exceeds the limit in the event of refrigerant leakage in [Refer to DRAIN
Drain piping
PIPING
work.]
WORK.]
• Install isolator or disconnect switch on the power supply source wiring in by hand. Use gloves to minimize the risk of cuts by the aluminum fins. the small room, lack of oxygen can occur, which can cause serious accidents. ● Attached heater on a base plate on site
accordance with the local codes and regulations. • Dispose of any packing materials correctly. In case that the product has a correcti
The isolator should be locked in OFF state in accordance with EN60204-1. Any remaining packing materials can cause personal injury. To avoid danger of threatment against freezing but be sur
• After maintenance, all wiring, wiring ties and the like, should be returned suffocation, be sure to keep the plastic wrapper away from children and to
to their original state and wiring route, and the necessary clearance from dispose after tear it up.
all metal parts should be secured. • Be sure to insulate the refrigerant pipes so as not to condense the
• Secure a space for installation, inspection and maintenance specified in ambient air moisture on them. 2. REFRIGERANT PIPIN
the manual. Insufficient insulation can cause condensation, which can lead to moisture
Insufficient space can result in accident such as personal injury due to falling damage on the ceiling, floor, furniture and any other valuables.
1) Restrictions on unit insta
• Use the prescribed pipes, flare nuts and tools for R32. personal injury due to the unexpected start of fan. melting agent), exposed to ammonia sub
Using existing parts (for R22 or R407C) can cause the unit failure and serious • Stop the compressor before removing the pipe after shutting the
accidents due to burst of the refrigerant circuit. service valve on pump down work. 4) Caution about selection of
• Tighten the flare nut by torque wrench with specified method. If the pipe is removed when the compressor is in operation with the service valve (1) If the unit is installed in the area where
If the flare nut were tightened with excess torque, this may cause burst and open, air would be mixed in the refrigeration circuit and it could cause explosion The bottom plate of unit and intake, out
refrigerant leakage after a long period. and injuries due to abnormal high pressure in the cooling cycle.
1 Install the unit on the base so
• Ensure that no air enters in the refrigerant circuit when the unit is • Do not bundling, winding or processing for the power cord. Or, do not • Do not perform any change of protective device itself or its setup condition. that the bottom is higher than
installed and removed. deforming the power plug due to tread it. The forced operation by short-circuiting protective device of pressure switch and snow cover surface, and
If air enters in the refrigerant circuit, the pressure in the refrigerant circuit This may cause fire or heating. temperature controller
control or or
thethe
useuse
of of
nonnon
specified
specified
component
componentcancan
cause
cause
firefire
or or
burst.
becomes too high, which can cause burst and personal injury. • Do not run the unit with removed panels or protections. • Do not perform any repairs or modifications by yourself. Consult the dealer
• Do not processing, splice the power cord, or share a socket with other power plugs. Touching rotating equipments, hot surfaces or high voltage parts can cause if the unit requires repair.
This may cause fire or electric shock due to defecting contact, defecting insulation personal injury due to entrapment, burn or electric shocks. If you repair or modify the unit, it can cause water leaks, electric shocks or fire.
and over-current etc.
CAUTION
• Carry out the electrical work for ground lead with care.
Do not connect the ground lead to the gas line, water line, lightning conductor or telephone line’s ground lead. Incorrect grounding can cause unit faults such as electric shocks due to short-circuiting.
• Use the circuit breaker for all pole correct capacity. Circuit breaker • Take care when carrying the unit by hand. • Be sure to perform air tightness test by pressurizing with nitrogen gas Since drain water generated by defrost
should be the one that disconnect all poles under over current. If the unit weights more than 20kg, it must be carried by two or more persons. Do after completed refrigerant piping work. ● Don’t execute drain piping work by usi
Using the incorrect circuit breaker, it can cause the unit malfunction and fire. not carry by the plastic straps, always use the carry handle when carrying the unit If the density of refrigerant exceeds the limit in the event of refrigerant leakage in [Refer to DRAIN
Drain piping
PIPING
work.]
WORK.]
• Install isolator or disconnect switch on the power supply source wiring in by hand. Use gloves to minimize the risk of cuts by the aluminum fins. the small room, lack of oxygen can occur, which can cause serious accidents. ● Attached heater on a base plate on site
accordance with the local codes and regulations. • Dispose of any packing materials correctly. In case that the product has a correcti
The isolator should be locked in OFF state in accordance with EN60204-1. Any remaining packing materials can cause personal injury. To avoid danger of threatment against freezing but be sur
• After maintenance, all wiring, wiring ties and the like, should be returned suffocation, be sure to keep the plastic wrapper away from children and to
to their original state and wiring route, and the necessary clearance from dispose after tear it up.
all metal parts should be secured. • Be sure to insulate the refrigerant pipes so as not to condense the
• Secure a space for installation, inspection and maintenance specified in ambient air moisture on them. 2. REFRIGERANT PIPIN
the manual. Insufficient insulation can cause condensation, which can lead to moisture
Insufficient space can result in accident such as personal injury due to falling damage on the ceiling, floor, furniture and any other valuables.
from the installation place.
1) Restrictions on unit insta
● Check the following points in light of th
• Earth leakage breaker must be installed • Do not install the outdoor unit in the locations listed below. • Do not install the outdoor unit in a location where insects and small ● Observe the following restrictions on unit i
If the earth leakage breaker is not installed, it can cause fire or electric shocks. • Locations where discharged hot air or operating sound of the outdoor unit can animals can inhabit.
Restrictions
• Do not install the unit in the locations listed below. bother neighborhood. Insects and small animals can enter the electric parts and cause damage or fire.
• Locations where outlet air of the outdoor unit blows directly to an animal or Instruct the user to keep the surroundings clean. Indoor unit FDT, FDE, F
• Locations where carbon fiber, metal powder or any powder is floating.
plants. The outlet air can affect adversely to the plant etc. • Do not use the base frame for outdoor unit which is corroded or damaged Elevation difference between When the o
• Locations where any substances that can affect the unit such as sulphide gas, indoor and outdoor units When the o
• Locations where vibration can be amplified and transmitted due to insufficient due to long periods of operation.
chloride gas, acid and alkaline can occur.
strength of structure. Using an old and damage base frame can cause the unit falling down and cause ● The use restrictions a
• Vehicles and ships. • Locations where vibration and operation sound generated by the outdoor unit personal injury. CAUTION Where an existing pip
• Locations where cosmetic or special sprays are often used. can affect seriously (on the wall or at the place near bed room). • Do not use any materials other than a fuse with the correct rating in the For more information,
• Locations with direct exposure of oil mist and steam such as kitchen and • Locations where an equipment affected by high harmonics is placed (TV set or location where fuses are to be used.
machine plant. radio receiver is placed within 5m). Connecting the circuit with copper wire or other metal thread can cause unit 2) Determination of pipe siz
• Locations where any machines which generate high frequency harmonics are • Locations where drainage cannot run off safely. failure and fire.
● Determine refrigerant pipe size pursuant
used. It can affect surrounding environment and cause a claim. • Do not touch any buttons with wet hands.
• Do not install the unit near the location where leakage of combustible It can cause electric shocks. 　　indoor unit specifications.
• Locations with salty atmospheres such as coastlines.
gases can occur. • Do not touch any refrigerant pipes with your hands when the system is in
• Locations with heavy snow (If installed, be sure to provide base frame and snow
If leaked gases accumulate around the unit, it can cause fire. operation.
hood mentioned in the manual). Outdoor unit connected
• Do not install the unit where corrosive gas (such as sulfurous acid gas etc.) During operation the refrigerant pipes become extremely hot or extremely cold
• Locations where the unit is exposed to chimney smoke. or combustible gas (such as thinner and petroleum gases) can accumulate depending the operating condition, and it can cause burn injury or frost injury.
• Locations at high altitude (more than 1000m high). or collect, or where volatile combustible substances are handled. • Do not touch the suction or aluminum fin on the outdoor unit. Refrigerant piping (branch pipeL)
- 91 -
• Locations with ammonic atmospheres. (e.g. organic fertilizer) Corrosive gas can cause corrosion of heat exchanger, breakage of plastic parts This may cause injury.
Indoor unit connected
• Locations with calcium chloride (e.g. snow melting agent). and etc. And combustible gas can cause fire. • Do not put anything on the outdoor unit and operating unit.
• Locations where heat radiation from other heat source can affect the unit. • Do not install nor use the system close to the equipment that generates This may cause damage the objects or injury due to falling to the object.
• Locations without good air circulation. electromagnetic fields or high frequency harmonics. • Do not use the unit for special purposes such as storing foods, cooling
• Locations with any obstacles which can prevent inlet and outlet air of the unit. Equipment such as inverters, standby generators, medical high frequency precision instruments and preservation of animals, plants or art.
equipments and telecommunication equipments can affect the system, and cause • Do not clean up the unit with water.
• Locations where short circuit of air can occur (in case of multiple units
malfunctions and breakdowns. The system can also affect medical equipment and • Do not step onto the outdoor unit.
installation).
telecommunication equipment, and obstruct its function or cause jamming. • When the outdoor unit is installed on a roof or a high place, provide
• Locations where strong air blows against the air outlet of outdoor unit. • Secure a space for installation, inspection and maintenance specified in permanent ladders and handrails along the access route and fences
• Locations where something located above the unit could fall. the manual. handrails around the outdoor unit. 3) Refrigerant pipe wall thic
It can cause remarkable decrease in performance, corrosion and damage of Insufficient space can result in accident such as personal injury due to falling from ● Select refrigerant pipes of the table sho
components, malfunction and fire. the installation place. ● Select
NOTE pipes having a wall
PSC012D137
PSC012D137
201907 Notabilia as a unit designed for R32 Check before installation work
Dedicated R32 tools
Inverter driven split PAC ● Do not use any refrigerant other than R32. R32 will rise to pressure about 1.6 times higher than that of a conventional refrigerant (R22 or • Model name and power source
a） Gauge manifold
R407C). • Refrigerant piping length
90, 100VNP b） Charge hose • Piping, wiring and miscellaneous small parts
A cylinder containing R32 has a lightblue indication mark on the top.
● A unit designed for R32 has adopted a different size indoor unit service
operation
valve
valve
charge
charge
port
port
andand
a different
a different
size
size
check
check
joint
joint
provided
provided
in in
thethe
unit c） Electronic scale for refrigerant charging • Indoor unit installation manual
Designed for R32 refrigerant d） Torque wrench
unitprevent
to to prevent
the charging
the charging
of a wrong
of a wrong
refrigerant
refrigerant
by mistake.
by mistake. Accessories for outdoor unit Q’ty
manuals supplied with the units. The processed dimension of the flared part of a refrigerant pipe and a flare nut's parallel side measurement have also been altered to raise e） Flare tool
eight
eight differences
differences between
between indoor
indoor and
and outdoor
outdoor units,
units, power
power strength against pressure. f） Protrusion control copper pipe gauge 1
① Grommet (Heat pump type only) 2
Accordingly, you are required to arrange dedicated R32 tools listed in the table on the next page before installing or servicing this unit. g） Vacuum pump adapter 2
② Drain elbow (Heat pump type only) 1
● All indoor units must be models designed exclusively for R32. Check connectable indoor unit models in a catalog, etc. (A wrong in door unit, h） Gas leak detector 3
③ Reducer set ø9.52 ø6.35 1
if connected into the system, will impair proper system operation)
wner’s manual at a place where any user can read at any time.
a new user.
utions in respect to themselves by using suitable protective
installation works. 1. HAULAGE AND INSTALLATION (Take particular care in carrying in or moving the unit, and always perform such an operation with two or more persons.)
ls, etc. when installing the unit at the high position.
ion, consult the dealer. When a unit is hoisted with slings for haulage, take into consideration the offset of its gravity
wn as follows: CAUTION center position. If not properly balanced, the unit can be thrown off-balance and fall.
'19 • PAC-DB-333
1) Delivery (2) If the unit can be affected by strong wind, following measures are required.
s. Always do it according to the instruction.
Strong wind can cause damage of fan (fan motor), or can cause performance degradation, or can trigger
● Deliver the unit as close as possible to the installation site before removing it from Pad anomalous stop of the unit due to rising of high pressure.
the packaging.
● When you have to unpack the unit for a compelling reason before you haul it to the
installation point, hoist the unit with nylon slings or ropes and protection pads so that 1.Install the outlet air blow side of the 2.Install the outlet air blow side of 3.The unit should be installed on
use prescribed option
optionalparts.
parts. The
Theinstallation
installationmust
mustbebecarried
carriedout
out
you may not damage the unit. unit to face a wall of building, or the unit in a position perpendicular the stable and level foundation.
he qualified installer.
provide a fence or a windbreak screen. to the direction of wind. If the foundation is not level,
u install the system by yourself, it can cause serious trouble such as water the down the unit with wires.
s, electric shocks, fire.
2) Portage
Heavy
● The Wind direction
ure to wear protective goggles and gloves while at work. right hand side of the unit as viewed from the front (diffuser side) is heavier.
h leakage breaker must be installed. A person carrying the right hand side must take heed of this fact. A person carrying
earth leakage breaker is not installed, it can cause electric shocks. the left hand side must hold with his right hand the handle provided on the front panel
PSC012D137
PSC012D137
201907 Notabilia as a unit designed for R32 Check before installation work
Dedicated R32 tools
Inverter driven split PAC ● Do not use any refrigerant other than R32. R32 will rise to pressure about 1.6 times higher than that of a conventional refrigerant (R22 or • Model name and power source
a） Gauge manifold
R407C). • Refrigerant piping length
90, 100VNP b） Charge hose • Piping, wiring and miscellaneous small parts
A cylinder containing R32 has a lightblue indication mark on the top.
● A unit designed for R32 has adopted a different size indoor unit service
operation
valve
valve
charge
charge
port
port
andand
a different
a different
size
size
check
check
joint
joint
provided
provided
in in
thethe
unit c） Electronic scale for refrigerant charging • Indoor unit installation manual
Designed for R32 refrigerant d） Torque wrench
unitprevent
to to prevent
the charging
the charging
of a wrong
of a wrong
refrigerant
refrigerant
by mistake.
by mistake. Accessories for outdoor unit Q’ty
anuals supplied with the units. The processed dimension of the flared part of a refrigerant pipe and a flare nut's parallel side measurement have also been altered to raise e） Flare tool
ight
ght differences
differences between
between indoor
indoor and
and outdoor
outdoor units,
units, power
power strength against pressure. f） Protrusion control copper pipe gauge 1
① Grommet (Heat pump type only) 2
Accordingly, you are required to arrange dedicated R32 tools listed in the table on the next page before installing or servicing this unit. g） Vacuum pump adapter 2
② Drain elbow (Heat pump type only) 1
● All indoor units must be models designed exclusively for R32. Check connectable indoor unit models in a catalog, etc. (A wrong in door unit, h） Gas leak detector 3
③ Reducer set ø9.52 ø6.35 1
if connected into the system, will impair proper system operation)
ner’s manual at a place where any user can read at any time.
new user.
ions in respect to themselves by using suitable protective
stallation works. 1. HAULAGE AND INSTALLATION (Take particular care in carrying in or moving the unit, and always perform such an operation with two or more persons.)
, etc. when installing the unit at the high position.
n, consult the dealer. When a unit is hoisted with slings for haulage, take into consideration the offset of its gravity
n as follows: CAUTION center position. If not properly balanced, the unit can be thrown off-balance and fall.
1) Delivery (2) If the unit can be affected by strong wind, following measures are required.
. Always do it according to the instruction.
Strong wind can cause damage of fan (fan motor), or can cause performance degradation, or can trigger
● Deliver the unit as close as possible to the installation site before removing it from Pad anomalous stop of the unit due to rising of high pressure.
the packaging.
● When you have to unpack the unit for a compelling reason before you haul it to the
installation point, hoist the unit with nylon slings or ropes and protection pads so that 1.Install the outlet air blow side of the 2.Install the outlet air blow side of 3.The unit should be installed on
se prescribed option
optionalparts.
parts.TheTheinstallation
installationmust
mustbebecarried
carriedout
out
you may not damage the unit. unit to face a wall of building, or the unit in a position perpendicular the stable and level foundation.
qualified installer.
provide a fence or a windbreak screen. to the direction of wind. If the foundation is not level,
nstall the system by yourself, it can cause serious trouble such as water the down the unit with wires.
electric shocks, fire.
2) Portage
Heavy
● The Wind direction
e to wear protective goggles and gloves while at work. right hand side of the unit as viewed from the front (diffuser side) is heavier.
leakage breaker must be installed. A person carrying the right hand side must take heed of this fact. A person carrying
arth leakage breaker is not installed, it can cause electric shocks. the left hand side must hold with his right hand the handle provided on the front panel
ompleted installation, check that no refrigerant leaks from the of the unit and with his left hand the corner column section.
. Wind direction
3) Selection of installation location for the outdoor unit Over 500 mm
erant leaks into the room and comes into contact with an oven or other hot
, poisonous gas is produced. Be sure to select a suitable installation place in consideration of following conditions.
up the unit at the specified points with ropes which can support the 〇 A place where it is horizontal, stable and can endure the unit weight and will not allow vibration transmittance
5) Installation space
t in lifting for portage. And to avoid jolting out of alignment, be sure of the unit. ● Walls surrounding the unit in the four sides are not acceptable.
g up the unit at 4-point support. 〇 A place where it can be free from possibility of bothering neighbors due to noise or exhaust air from the unit. ● There must be a 1-meter or larger space in the above.
roper manner of portage such as 3-point support can cause death or 〇 A place where the unit is not exposed to oil splashes. ● When more than one unit are installed side by side, provide a 250mm or wider interval between them as a service
personal injury due to falling of the unit. 〇 A place where it can be free from danger of flammable gas leakage. space. In order to facilitate servicing of controls,
controllers,
please
please
provide
provide
a sufficient
a sufficient
space
space
between
between units
units
so so
that
that
their
their
top
lt the dealer or an expert regarding removal of the unit. 〇 A place where drain water can be disposed without any trouble. top plates
plates can can
be removed
be removed
easily.
easily.
〇 A place where the unit will not be affected by heat radiation from other heat source. ● Where a danger of short-circuiting exists, install guide louvers.
ct installation can cause water leaks, electric shocks or fire. 〇 A place where snow will not accumulate.
t perform brazing work in the airtight room. ● When more than one unit are installed, provide sufficient intake space consciously so that short-circuiting may not occur.
〇 A place where the unit can be kept away 5m or more from TV set and/or radio receiver in order to avoid any
ause lack of oxygen. ● Where piling snow can bury the outdoor unit, provide proper snow guards.
radio or TV interference.
nit is designed specifically for R32. 〇 A place where good air circulation can be secured, and enoug hservice space can be secured for maintenance The height of a wall is 1200mm or less.
ny other refrigerant can cause unit failure and personal injury. and service of the unit safely.
〇 A place where the unit will not be affected by electromagnetic waves and/or high-harmonic waves generated by (mm)
other equipment. Intake L3
Example installation I II III L2 service
〇 A place where chemical substances like sulfuric gas, chloric gas, acid and alkali (includingammonia), which can Size ( space )
harm the unit, will not be generated and not remain. L1 Open Open 500 L4
〇 If a operation is conducted when the outdoor air temperature is -5˚C lower, the outdoor unit should be installed Intake
L2 300 250 Open
at a place where it is not influenced by natural wind. L3 100 150 100 Outlet
〇 A place where strong wind will not blow against the outlet air blow of the unit. L1
- 92 -
L4 250 250 250
Do not install the unit in places which exposed to sea breeze (e.g. coastal area) or calcium chloride (e.g. snow
melting agent), exposed to ammonia substance (e.g. organic fertilizer).
6) Installation
4) Caution about selection of installation location ① Anchor bol tfixed position ② Notabilia for installation
(1) If the unit is installed in the area where the snow will accumulate, following measures are required. 60
19
15 Intake
The bottom plate of unit and intake, outlet may be blocked by snow. Fasten with bolts
(M10-12)
1 Install the unit on the base so 2 Provide a snow hood to 3 Install the unit under eaves
perform any change of protective device itself or its setup condition. that the bottom is higher than the outdoor unit on site. or provide the roof on site. 340
380
418
ced operation by short-circuiting protective device of pressure switch and snow cover surface, and
ature controller
control or or
thethe
useuse
of of
nonnon
specified
specified
component
componentcancan
cause
cause
firefire
or or
burst.
perform any repairs or modifications by yourself. Consult the dealer
Outlet Use a long block to
nit requires repair. extend the width. Use a thicker block to anchor deeper.
19
epair or modify the unit, it can cause water leaks, electric shocks or fire. 150 580 150
880 87.9
● In installing the unit, fix the unit’s legs with bolts specified on the above.
● The protrusion of an anchor bolt on the front side must be kept within 15 mm.
● Securely install the unit so that it does not fall over during earthquakes or strong winds, etc.
to short-circuiting. ● Refer to the above illustrations for information regarding concrete foundations.
● Install the unit in a level area. (With a gradient of 5 mm or less.)
e to perform air tightness test by pressurizing with nitrogen gas Since drain water generated by defrost control may freeze, following measures are required. Improper installation can result in a compressor failure, broken piping within the unit and abnormal noise generation.
ompleted refrigerant piping work. ● Don’t execute drain piping work by using a drain elbow and drain grommets (accessories).
ensity of refrigerant exceeds the limit in the event of refrigerant leakage in [Refer to DRAIN
Drain piping
PIPING
work.]
WORK.] 7) To run the unit for a cooling operation,
all room, lack of oxygen can occur, which can cause serious accidents. ● Attached heater on a base plate on site, if there is possibility to freeze drain water. when the outdoor temperature is –5°C or lower.
In case that the product has a corrective drainage system, the drainage paths should have suitable
● When the outdoor air temperature is –5°C or lower, provide a snow hood to the outdoor unit on site.
threatment against freezing but be sure not to melt the material of drainage paths with heat.
So that strong wind will not blow against the outdoor heat exchanger directly.
2. REFRIGERANT PIPING WORK

1) Restrictions on unit installation and use
● Check the following points in light of the indoor unit specifications and the installation site.
● Observe the following restrictions on unit installation and use. Improper installation can result in a compressor failure or performance degradation.
'19 • PAC-DB-333
t install the outdoor unit in a location where insects and small

Indoor unit
ls can inhabit.
Restrictions Dimensional restrictions Marks appearing in the drawing on the right
and small animals can enter the electric parts and cause damage or fire.
t the user to keep the surroundings clean. Indoor unit FDT, FDE, FDU, FDUM, SRK Main pipe length 30m or less L
t use the base frame for outdoor unit which is corroded or damaged Elevation difference between When the outdoor unit is positioned higher 20m or less H
indoor and outdoor units H
long periods of operation. When the outdoor unit is positioned lower 20m or less H
n old and damage base frame can cause the unit falling down and cause ● The use restrictions appearing in the table above are applicable to the standard pipe size combinations shown in the table below.
al injury. CAUTION Where an existing pipe system is utilized, different one-way pipe length restrictions should apply depending on its pipe size.
t use any materials other than a fuse with the correct rating in the L
For more information, please see “ 5. UTILIZATION OF EXISTING PIPING.”
Outdoor unit
n where fuses are to be used.
cting the circuit with copper wire or other metal thread can cause unit 2) Determination of pipe size When pipe is brazing.
and fire.
● Determine refrigerant pipe size pursuant to the following guidelines based on the
● In installing the unit, fix the unit’s legs with bolts specified on the above.
● The protrusion of an anchor bolt on the front side must be kept within 15 mm.
● Securely install the unit so that it does not fall over during earthquakes or strong winds, etc.
to short-circuiting. ● Refer to the above illustrations for information regarding concrete foundations.
● Install the unit in a level area. (With a gradient of 5 mm or less.)
e to perform air tightness test by pressurizing with nitrogen gas Since drain water generated by defrost control may freeze, following measures are required. Improper installation can result in a compressor failure, broken piping within the unit and abnormal noise generation.
ompleted refrigerant piping work. ● Don’t execute drain piping work by using a drain elbow and drain grommets (accessories).
ensity of refrigerant exceeds the limit in the event of refrigerant leakage in [Refer to DRAIN
Drain piping
PIPING
work.]
WORK.] 7) To run the unit for a cooling operation,
all room, lack of oxygen can occur, which can cause serious accidents. ● Attached heater on a base plate on site, if there is possibility to freeze drain water. when the outdoor temperature is –5°C or lower.
In case that the product has a corrective drainage system, the drainage paths should have suitable
● When the outdoor air temperature is –5°C or lower, provide a snow hood to the outdoor unit on site.
threatment against freezing but be sure not to melt the material of drainage paths with heat.
So that strong wind will not blow against the outdoor heat exchanger directly.
2. REFRIGERANT PIPING WORK

1) Restrictions on unit installation and use
● Check the following points in light of the indoor unit specifications and the installation site.
t install the outdoor unit in a location where insects and small ● Observe the following restrictions on unit installation and use. Improper installation can result in a compressor failure or performance degradation.
Indoor unit
ls can inhabit.
Restrictions Dimensional restrictions Marks appearing in the drawing on the right
and small animals can enter the electric parts and cause damage or fire.
t the user to keep the surroundings clean. Indoor unit FDT, FDE, FDU, FDUM, SRK Main pipe length 30m or less L
t use the base frame for outdoor unit which is corroded or damaged Elevation difference between When the outdoor unit is positioned higher 20m or less H
indoor and outdoor units H
long periods of operation. When the outdoor unit is positioned lower 20m or less H
n old and damage base frame can cause the unit falling down and cause ● The use restrictions appearing in the table above are applicable to the standard pipe size combinations shown in the table below.
al injury. CAUTION Where an existing pipe system is utilized, different one-way pipe length restrictions should apply depending on its pipe size.
t use any materials other than a fuse with the correct rating in the L
For more information, please see “ 5. UTILIZATION OF EXISTING PIPING.”
Outdoor unit
n where fuses are to be used.
cting the circuit with copper wire or other metal thread can cause unit 2) Determination of pipe size When pipe is brazing.
and fire.
● Determinerefrigerant pipe size pursuant to the following guidelines based on the
t touch any buttons with wet hands. About brazing
ause electric shocks. 　　indoor unit specifications.
t touch any refrigerant pipes with your hands when the system is in Gas pipe Liquid pipe Brazing must be performed under a nitrogen gas flow.
tion. ø15.88 ø6.35 Without nitrogen gas, a large quantity of foreign matters (oxidized film) are created,
operation the refrigerant pipes become extremely hot or extremely cold Outdoor unit connected
Flare Flare causing a critical failure from capillary tube or expansion valve clogging.
ing the operating condition, and it can cause burn injury or frost injury. If the refrigerant is existing in the pipe at brazing, poisonous gas is produced.
t touch the suction or aluminum fin on the outdoor unit. Refrigerant piping (branch pipeL) ø15.88 ø6.35
ay cause injury. Primary side Secondary side
Plug the end of the pipe with tape, or other
Indoor unit connected ø15.88 ø9.52 material, and fill the pipe with nitrogen gas. Station valve
t put anything on the outdoor unit and operating unit. 0.5MPa
ay cause damage the objects or injury due to falling to the object. Hand
Taping ＜N2＞
t use the unit for special purposes such as storing foods, cooling
ion instruments and preservation of animals, plants or art. Nitrogen
Nitrogen
Relief valve
t clean up the unit with water. Only use nitrogen gas (N2) Brazing gas
t step onto the outdoor unit.
the outdoor unit is installed on a roof or a high place, provide
nent ladders and handrails along the access route and fences
ails around the outdoor unit. 3) Refrigerant pipe wall thickness and material Pipe diameter [mm] ø6.35 ø15.88
● Select refrigerant pipes of the table shown on the right wall thickness and material as specified for each pipe size. Minimum pipe wall thickness [mm] 0.8 1.0
NOTE ● Select pipes having a wall thickness larger than the specified minimum pipe thickness. Pipe material* O-type pipe O-type pipe
- 93 -
*Phosphorus deoxidized seamless copper pipe ICS 23.040.15, ICS 77.150.30
[Usage of reducer set]
4) On-site piping work Reducer [L=115mm](ø9.52-ø6.35)
Liquid side joint (ø9.52) Flare nut
Take care so that installed pipes may not touch components within a unit. ø6.35 pipe
4. ELECTRICAL WIRING
IMPORTANT If touching with an internal component, it will generate abnormal sounds and/or vibrations.
● Regarding the change in the size of liquid pipe; Indoor unit Electrical installation work must be performed by
Outdoor unit
Use the reducer at indoor unit side. Reducer set is available in the outdoor unit as accessory. Electrical installation work must be executed acc
●
Do not use any supply cord lighter than one
How to remove the side cover Please remove the screw of a side cover and remove to the front. ø15.88 pipe · braided cord (code designation 60245 IEC
· ordinary tough rubber sheathed cord (cod
● Carry out the on site piping work with the operation
service valve
valve
fully
fully
closed.
closed. Gas side joint (ø15.88) · flat twin tinsel cord (code designation 602
● Give sufficient protection to a pipe end Reducer set (, ) is included in the outdoor unit as accessory
(compressed and blazed, or with an adhesive tape) so Use polychloroprene sheathed flexible cord (
that water or foreign matters may not enter the piping. ●
Ground the unit. Do not connect the grounding wir
● Bend a pipe to a radius as large as practical.(R100~R150)
practical.(R100-R150) Do not bend a pipe repeatedly to correct A
Side cover If impropery grounded, an electric shock or
its form. Flared pipe end : A (mm) ●
A grounding wire must be connected before
● Flare connection is used between the unit and refrigerant pipe. Flare a pipe after engaging a Copper ●
pipe outer Ａ 0
The installation of an impulse withstanding t
flare nut onto it. Flare dimensions for R32 are different from those for conventional R22 and R407C. ー0． 4
Although we recommend the use of flaring tools designed specifically for R32, conventional diameter acccident such as an electric shock or a fire.
●
flaring tools can also be used by adjusting the measurement of protrusion B with a protrusion ø6.35 9．
1 Do not turn on the power until the electrical
●
control gauge. ø15.88 19.7 Do not use a condensive capacitor for power
● The pipe should be anchored every 1.5m or less to isolate the vibration. an abnormal overheat accident)
●
B
Copper pipe protrusion for flaring : B (mm) For power source

supply cables, use conduits.
●
Copper In the case of a rigid (clutch) type Do not lay electronic control cables (remote c
pipe outer in the malfunctioning or a failure of the unit
diameter With an R32 tool With a conventional tool ●
Fasten cables so that may not touch the pipi
CAUTION Do not apply force beyond proper fastening torque in tightening the flare nut. ø6.35 ●
0～0.5
0-0.5 1.0～1.5
1.0-1.5 When cables are connected, make sure that
Fix both liquid and gas operation valves at the valve main bodies as illustrated on the right, ø15.88
terminal connection and then attach the cov
and then fasten them, applying appropriate fastening torque. penetrates into the box.)
●
The screw of the side cover
Always use a three-core cable for an indoor-
Service valve
Operation valvesize
size(mm)
(mm) T is tightened securely.
ø6.35 14-18
14～18
ø9.52 34-42
34～42
ø12.7 49-61
49～61
Use a torque wrench. Po
ø15.88 68-82
68～82
'19 • PAC-DB-333
Ca
5) Air tightness test Do not hold the valve cap area with a spanner.
○I
① Although outdoor and indoor units themselves have been tested for air tightness at the factory, check the connecting pipes after the installation work for air tightness from the Gas side
operation
service valve’s
valve’s
check
check
joint
joint
equipped
equipped
onon
thethe
outdoor
outdoor
unit
unit
side.
side.While
Whileconducting
conducting
a test,
a test,
keep
keep
thethe
service
operation
valvevalve
shut shut
all thealltime.
the time. Outdoor unit operation
service valve
valve Indoor unit ○
a) Raise the pressure to 0.5 MPa, and then stop. Leave it for five minutes to see if the pressure drops. Check joint
b) Then raise the pressure to 1.5 MPa, and stop. Leave it for five more minutes to see if the pressure drops.
c) Then raise the pressure to the specified level (4.15 MPa), and record the ambient temperature and the pressure. rize
ssu
d) If no pressure drop is observed with an installation pressurized to the specified level and left for about one day, it is acceptable. When the ambient Temperature fall 1℃, the pressure Pre Ca
Close
also fall approximately 0.01 MPa. The pressure, if changed, should be compensated for.
e) If a pressure drop is observed in checking e) and a) – d), a leak exists somewhere. Find a leak by applying bubble test liquid to welded parts and flare joints and repair it. After ○I
repair, conduct an air-tightness test again.
② In conducting an air-tightness test, use nitrogen gas and pressurize the system with nitrogen gas from the gas side. Do not use a medium other than nitrogen gas under any circumstances. Gr
Compound pressure gauge
●
Copper In the case of a rigid (clutch) type Do not lay electronic control cables (remote c
pipe outer in the malfunctioning or a failure of the unit
Fasten cables so that may not touch the pipi
CAUTION Do not apply force beyond proper fastening torque in tightening the flare nut. ø6.35 ●
0～0.5
0-0.5 1.0～1.5
1.0-1.5 When cables are connected, make sure that
Fix both liquid and gas operation valves at the valve main bodies as illustrated on the right, ø15.88
terminal connection and then attach the cov
and then fasten them, applying appropriate fastening torque. penetrates into the box.)
●
The screw of the side cover
Always use a three-core cable for an indoor-
Service valve
Operation valvesize
size(mm)
(mm) T is tightened securely.
ø6.35 14-18
14～18
ø9.52 34-42
34～42
ø12.7 49-61
49～61
Use a torque wrench. Po
ø15.88 68-82
68～82
Ca
5) Air tightness test Do not hold the valve cap area with a spanner.
○I
① Although outdoor and indoor units themselves have been tested for air tightness at the factory, check the connecting pipes after the installation work for air tightness from the Gas side
operation
service valve’s
valve’s
check
check
joint
joint
equipped
equipped
onon
thethe
outdoor
outdoor
unit
unit
side.
side.While
Whileconducting
conducting
a test,
a test,
keep
keep
thethe
service
operation
valvevalve
shut shut
all thealltime.
the time. Outdoor unit operation
service valve
valve Indoor unit ○
a) Raise the pressure to 0.5 MPa, and then stop. Leave it for five minutes to see if the pressure drops. Check joint
b) Then raise the pressure to 1.5 MPa, and stop. Leave it for five more minutes to see if the pressure drops.
c) Then raise the pressure to the specified level (4.15 MPa), and record the ambient temperature and the pressure. rize
ssu
d) If no pressure drop is observed with an installation pressurized to the specified level and left for about one day, it is acceptable. When the ambient Temperature fall 1℃, the pressure Pre Ca
Close
also fall approximately 0.01 MPa. The pressure, if changed, should be compensated for.
e) If a pressure drop is observed in checking e) and a) – d), a leak exists somewhere. Find a leak by applying bubble test liquid to welded parts and flare joints and repair it. After ○I
repair, conduct an air-tightness test again.
② In conducting an air-tightness test, use nitrogen gas and pressurize the system with nitrogen gas from the gas side. Do not use a medium other than nitrogen gas under any circumstances. Gr
Compound pressure gauge
6) Evacuation Operation
Service Valve
Valve Pressure gauge ○
＜Work flow＞ Airtighteness test completed Cap Gauge Manifold
Operation
Service Valve
Valve
(two-way valve) -101kPa (Designed specifically for R32)
Vacuuming begins (-755mmHg)
Handle Hi.
When the system has remaining moisture Run the vacuum pump for at least one hour after the vacuum Handle Lo
Charge hose
inside or a leaky point, the vacuum gauge gauge shows -101kPa or lower. (-755mmHg or lower) Operation
Service Valve
Valve (Designed specifically for R32)
indicator will rise. (three-way valve)
Vacuuming completed Vacuum pump adapter
Check the system for a leaky point and (Anti-reverse flow type)
then draw air to create a vacuum again. Confirm that the vacuum gauge indicator does not rise even if Operation
Service Valve
the system is left for one hour or more. Cap
5. UTILIZATION OF EXI
Vacuum pump
Vacuum gauge check
Check joint Charge hose
Fill refrigerant (Designed specifically for R32) Check whether an existing pipe system
Pay attention to the following points in addition to the above for the R32 and compatible machines. Securely tighten the operation
service valve
valve
capcap
andand
thethe
check
check
joint
joint
blind
blind
nutnut
after
after
adjustment.
adjustment.
○To prevent a different oil from entering, assign dedicated tools, etc. to each refrigerant type. Under no circumstances must a Operation
Service valve
valvesize
size Operation valve cap Check joint blind nut START
gauge manifold and a charge hose in particular be shared with other refrigerant types (R22, R407C, etc.). (mm) tightening torque (N·m) tightening torque (N·m)
Are an outdoor unit and an indoor unit connected to the
○Use a counterflow prevention adapter to prevent vacuum pump oil from entering the refrigerant system. ø6.35 (1/4") 20～30
20-30
existing pipe system to reuse?
10～12
10-12
ø15.88 (5/8") 30～40
30-40 YES
7) Additional refrigerant charge
Are the existing units our products?
(1) Calculate a required refrigerant charge volume from the following table. (2) Charging refrigerant
YES
Additional charge volume (kg) per meter of Refrigerant volume charged for Installation’s pipe length (m) covered ●Since R32 refrigerant must be charged in the liquid phase, you should charge it, keeping the container
Indoor unit
refrigerant piping (liquid pipe ø6.35) shipment at the factory (kg) without additional refrigerant charge cylinder upside down or using a refrigerant cylinder equipped with a siphon tube.
●When you find it difficult to charge a required amount, fully open the outdoor unit valves on both liquid
FDT, FDE Does the existing pipe system to reuse satisfy all of the followi
0.020 1.7 15 and gas sides and charge refrigerant from the gas (suction) side service port, while running the unit in the (1) The pipe length is 30m or less.
FDU, FDUM, SRK
cooling mode. In doing so, care must be taken so that refrigerant may be discharged from the cylinder in (2) The pipe size conforms to the table of pipe size restrictions
●This unit contains factory charged refrigerant covering 15m of refrigerant piping and additional refrigerant charge on the the liquid phase all the time. When the cylinder valve is throttled down or a dedicated conversion tool to (3) The elevation difference between the indoor and outdoor u
conforms to the following restrictions.
- 94 -
installation site is not required for an installation with up to 15m refrigerant piping. change liquid-phase refrigerant into mist is used to protect the compressor, however, adjust charge Where the outdoor unit is above: 15m or less
When refrigerant piping exceeds 15m, additionally charge an amount calculated from the pipe length and the above table conditions so that refrigerant will gasify upon entering the unit. Where the outdoor unit is below: 15m or less
for the portion in excess of 15m. ●In charging refrigerant, always charge a calculated volume by using a scale to measure the charge volume. YES
●If an existing pipe system is used, a required refrigerant charge volume will vary depending on the liquid pipe size. ●When refrigerant is charged with the unit being run, complete a charge operation within 30 minutes.
For further information, please see “5. UTILIZATION OF EXISTING PIPING.” Is the unit to install in the existing pipe system a
Running the unit with an insufficient quantity of refrigerant for a long time can cause a compressor failure. twin-triple-double-twin model?
●For an installation measuring 15m or shorter in pipe length, please charge the refrigerant volume charged for shipment at the
factory, when you recharge refrigerant after servicing etc. NOTE Put down the refrigerant volume calculated from the pipe length onto the caution label attached on NO
Formula to calculate the volume of additional refrigerant required the back side of the service panel.
Is the existing pipe system to reuse free of corrosion, flaws or den
Additional charge volume (kg) = { Main length (m) – Factory charged volume} x 0.020 (kg/m) NO
Is the existing pipe system to reuse free of gas leaks?

*When an additional charge volume calculation result is negative, (Check whether refrigerant charge was required frequently fo
Band (accessory) Pipe cover (accessory) the system before)
it is not necessary to charge refrigerant additionally.
NO
Are there any branch pipes with no indoor unit connected?

8) Heating and condensation prevention
NO
(1) Dress refrigerant pipes (both gas and liquid pipes) for heat insulation and prevention of dew condensation.
· Improper heat insulation/anti-dew dressing can result in a water leak or dripping causing damage to household effects, etc. Are heat insulation materials of the existing pipe system to
reuse free of peel-offs or deterioration?
(2) Use a heat insulating material that can withstand 120℃ or a higher temperature. Poor heat insulating capacity can cause heat insulation problems or cable Wires for connecting indoor (Heat insulation is necessary for both gas and liquid pipes)
deterioration. Exterior tape
and outdoor units NO
· All gas pipes must be securely heat insulated in order to prevent damage from dripping water that comes from the condensation formed on them during a cooling operation
or personal injury from burns because their surface can reach quite a high temperature due to discharged gas flowing inside during a heating operation. Gas piping
Liquid piping Aren’t there any loose pipe supports?
· Wrap indoor units’ flare joints with heat insulating parts (pipe cover) for heat insulation (both gas and liquid pipes).
No loose pipe supports So
· Give heat insulation to both gas and liquid side pipes. Bundle a heat insulating material and a pipe tightly together so that no gaps may be left between them and wrap them Insulation
together with a connecting cable by a dressing tape.
· Both gas and liquid pipes need to be dressed with 20 mm or thicker heat insulation materials above the ceiling where relative humidity exceeds 70%.
The existing pipe system is reusable.
3. DRAIN PIPING WORK

● Execute drain piping by using a drain elbow and drain
grommets supplied separately as accessories, where
water drained from the outdoor unit is a problem. INSTALLATION TEST
CAUTION
'19 • PAC-DB-333
● Water may drip where there is a larger amount of drain ● When condensed water needs to be Check the following points again after comple
water. Seal around the drain elbow and drain grommets led to a drain, etc., install the unit on Explain to the customer how to use the unit
Do not put a grommet a flat base or concrete blocks.
with putty or adequate caulking material. on this hole.
This is a supplementary (prepared on site)
● Condensed water may flow out from vicinity of operation
service After installation
drain hole to discharge Then, please secure space for the
valve or connected pipes.
drain water, when a large drain elbow and the drain hose.
Power cables and connecting wires ar
●
quantity of it is gathered.
Where you are likely to have several days of sub-zero Clearance The power source
supply voltage is correct a
temperatures in a row, do not use a drain elbow and Grommet
drain grommets. (There is a risk of drain water The drain hose is fixed securely.
freezing inside and blocking the drain.)
Drain elbow Grommet Drain hose Operation
Service valve
valve
is is
fully
fully
open.
open.
(To be procured on the installer's part)
No gas leaks from the joints of the se
op
8) Heating and condensation prevention
NO
(1) Dress refrigerant pipes (both gas and liquid pipes) for heat insulation and prevention of dew condensation.
· Improper heat insulation/anti-dew dressing can result in a water leak or dripping causing damage to household effects, etc. Are heat insulation materials of the existing pipe system to
reuse free of peel-offs or deterioration?
(2) Use a heat insulating material that can withstand 120℃ or a higher temperature. Poor heat insulating capacity can cause heat insulation problems or cable Wires for connecting indoor (Heat insulation is necessary for both gas and liquid pipes)
deterioration. Exterior tape
and outdoor units NO
· All gas pipes must be securely heat insulated in order to prevent damage from dripping water that comes from the condensation formed on them during a cooling operation
or personal injury from burns because their surface can reach quite a high temperature due to discharged gas flowing inside during a heating operation. Gas piping
Liquid piping Aren’t there any loose pipe supports?
· Wrap indoor units’ flare joints with heat insulating parts (pipe cover) for heat insulation (both gas and liquid pipes).
No loose pipe supports So
· Give heat insulation to both gas and liquid side pipes. Bundle a heat insulating material and a pipe tightly together so that no gaps may be left between them and wrap them Insulation
together with a connecting cable by a dressing tape.
· Both gas and liquid pipes need to be dressed with 20 mm or thicker heat insulation materials above the ceiling where relative humidity exceeds 70%.
The existing pipe system is reusable.
3. DRAIN PIPING WORK

● Execute drain piping by using a drain elbow and drain
grommets supplied separately as accessories, where
water drained from the outdoor unit is a problem. INSTALLATION TEST
CAUTION
● Water may drip where there is a larger amount of drain ● When condensed water needs to be Check the following points again after comple
water. Seal around the drain elbow and drain grommets led to a drain, etc., install the unit on Explain to the customer how to use the unit
Do not put a grommet a flat base or concrete blocks.
with putty or adequate caulking material. on this hole.
This is a supplementary (prepared on site)
● Condensed water may flow out from vicinity of operation
service After installation
drain hole to discharge Then, please secure space for the
valve or connected pipes.
drain water, when a large drain elbow and the drain hose.
Power cables and connecting wires ar
●
quantity of it is gathered.
Where you are likely to have several days of sub-zero Clearance The power source
supply voltage is correct a
temperatures in a row, do not use a drain elbow and Grommet
drain grommets. (There is a risk of drain water The drain hose is fixed securely.
freezing inside and blocking the drain.)
Drain elbow Grommet Drain hose Operation
Service valve
valve
is is
fully
fully
open.
open.
(To be procured on the installer's part)
No gas leaks from the joints of the se
op
Reducer [L=115mm](ø9.52-ø6.35)
Flare nut PSC012D137
4. ELECTRICAL WIRING WORK 　For details of electrical cabling, refer to the indoor unit installation manual.
ø6.35 pipe
Electrical installation work must be performed by an electrical installation service provider qualified by a power provider of the country.
Outdoor unit
Electrical installation work must be executed according to the technical standards and other regulations applicable to electrical installations in the country.
●
Do not use any supply cord lighter than one specified in parentheses for each type below. CAUTION
ø15.88 pipe · braided cord (code designation 60245 IEC 51),
· ordinary tough rubber sheathed cord (code designation 60245 IEC 53) In case of faulty wiring connection, the indoor unit stops,
· flat twin tinsel cord (code designation 60227 IEC 41); and then the run lamp turns on and the timer lamp blinks.
included in the outdoor unit as accessory
Use polychloroprene sheathed flexible cord (code designation 60245 IEC57) for supply cords of parts of appliances for outdoor use.
●
Ground the unit. Do not connect the grounding wire to a gas pipe, water pipe, lightning rod or telephone grounding wire.
If impropery grounded, an electric shock or malfunction may result. Use cables for interconnection wiring to avoid loosening of the wires.
Flared pipe end : A (mm) ●
A grounding wire must be connected before connecting the power cable. Provide a grounding wire longer than the power cable. CENELEC code for cables Required field cables.
Copper ●
pipe outer Ａ 0
The installation of an impulse withstanding type earth leakage breaker is necessary. A failure to install an earth leakage breaker can result in an H05RNR4G1.5 (Example) or 245IEC57
diameter ー0． 4 acccident such as an electric shock or a fire. H Harmonized cable type
●
ø6.35 9．
1 Do not turn on the power until the electrical work is completeted . 05 300/500 volts
●
- 95 -
ø15.88 19.7 Do not use a condensive capacitor for power factor improvement under any circumstances. (It dose not improve power factor, while it can cause R Natural-and/or synth. rubber wire insulation
an abnormal overheat accident)
●
N Polychloroprene rubber conductors insulation
B
Copper pipe protrusion for flaring : B (mm) For power source
supply cables, use conduits.
●
R Stranded core
Copper In the case of a rigid (clutch) type Do not lay electronic control cables (remote control and signaling wires) and other cables together outside the unit. Laying them together can result
pipe outer 4or5 Number of conductors
in the malfunctioning or a failure of the unit due to electric noises.
G One conductor of the cable is the earth conductor
Fasten cables so that may not touch the piping, etc.
ø6.35 ●
(yellow/green)
0～0.5
0-0.5 1.0～1.5
1.0-1.5 When cables are connected, make sure that all electrical components within the electrical component box are free of loose connector coupling or
ø15.88 1.5 Section of copper wire (mm2)
terminal connection and then attach the cover securely. (Improper cover attachment can result in malfunctioning or a failure of the unit, if water
penetrates into the box.)
●
Always use a three-core cable for an indoor-outdoor connecting cable. Never use a shield cable. Main fuse specification
Specification Part No.
Power cable, indoor-outdoor connecting wires 250V 20A SSA564A136A
● Always perform grounding system installation work with the power cord unplugged.
● Connect a pair bearing a common terminal number with an indoor-outdoor connecting wire.
Earth leakage breaker
Use a torque wrench. supply terminal block
Power source (Harmonic resistant type) ● In cabling, fasten cables securely with cable clamps so that no external force may work on terminal connections.
● Grounding terminals are provided in the control box.
Cable clamp Switchgear or circuit

Circuit breaker
breaker Always use an earth leakage circuit breaker designed for inverter circuits to
area with a spanner. CAUTION prevent a faulty operation.
○It holds cables in place and protect the terminal N L
ess from the Gas side connection from external force. Outdoor unit Circuit breaker
Switchgear or circuit Breaker Interconnecting and
Outdoor unit operation
service valve
valve Indoor unit ○This clamp is for the cable in the outside 1 2/N 3 Power souce
Phase Earth leakage breaker Over current protector grounding wires
Check joint diameter 9-15mm.
9~15mm. Switch breaker (minimum) (minimum)
rated capacity
Please adjust it when not suitable. 1 2/N 3
rize Indoor unit
ssu 20A,30mA,
the pressure Pre Cable clamp X Y Single-phase 2.5 mm 2 1.5mm×4
30A 20A
0.1sec or less
Close
pair it. After ○It holds cables in place and protect the terminal X Y
connection from external force. Remote control
●The specifications shown in the above table are for units without heaters. For units with heaters, refer to
rcumstances. Grounding terminal the installation instructions or the construction instructions of the indoor unit.
Compound pressure gauge ●Switchgear or circuit
Circuit breaker capacity which is calculated from MAX. over current should be chosen along the
Operation
Service Valve
Valve Pressure gauge ○Please be sure to carry out D-type (type III) regulations in each country.
Cap Gauge Manifold grounding work. ●The cable specifications are based on the assumption that a metal or plastic conduit is used with no more than
-101kPa (Designed specifically for R32) three cables contained in a conduit and a voltage drop is 2%. For an installation falling outside of these
(-755mmHg) conditions, please follow the internal cabling regulations. Adapt it to the regulation in effect in each country.
Handle Hi.
Handle Lo
Charge hose
Operation
Service Valve
(three-way valve)
'19 • PAC-DB-333
Vacuum pump adapter

(Anti-reverse flow type)
Operation
Service Valve
Cap
Vacuum pump
5. UTILIZATION OF EXISTING PIPING
ck joint Charge hose
(Designed specifically for R32) Check whether an existing pipe system is reusable or not by using the following flow chart. <Table of pipe size restrictions>
nalve
valve
capcap
andand
thethe
check
check
joint
joint
blind
blind
nutnut
after
after
adjustment.
adjustment. ◎:Standard pipe size ○:Usable △:Restricted to shorter pipe length limits
Operation valve cap Check joint blind nut START Additional charge volume per meter of pipe 0.025kg/m 0.06kg/m
tightening torque (N·m) tightening torque (N·m) Liquid pipe ø6.35 ø9.52 ø9.52
Indoor unit Pipe size
Are an outdoor unit and an indoor unit connected to the NO Gas pipe ø15.88 ø12.7 ø15.88
20～30
20-30
10～12
10-12 Usability ◎ △ △
30～40
30-40 YES FDT, FDE 30 12 12
Maximum one-way pipe length
Please adjust it when not suitable. 1 2/N 3
rize Indoor unit
ssu 20A,30mA,
the pressure Pre Cable clamp X Y Single-phase 2.5 mm 2 1.5mm×4
30A 20A
0.1sec or less
Close
pair it. After ○It holds cables in place and protect the terminal X Y
connection from external force. Remote control
●The specifications shown in the above table are for units without heaters. For units with heaters, refer to
rcumstances. Grounding terminal the installation instructions or the construction instructions of the indoor unit.
Compound pressure gauge ●Switchgear or circuit
Circuit breaker capacity which is calculated from MAX. over current should be chosen along the
Operation
Service Valve
Valve Pressure gauge ○Please be sure to carry out D-type (type III) regulations in each country.
Cap Gauge Manifold grounding work. ●The cable specifications are based on the assumption that a metal or plastic conduit is used with no more than
-101kPa (Designed specifically for R32) three cables contained in a conduit and a voltage drop is 2%. For an installation falling outside of these
(-755mmHg) conditions, please follow the internal cabling regulations. Adapt it to the regulation in effect in each country.
Handle Hi.
Handle Lo
Charge hose
Service Valve
Operation Valve (Designed specifically for R32)
(three-way valve)
Vacuum pump adapter
(Anti-reverse flow type)
Operation
Service Valve
Cap
Vacuum pump
5. UTILIZATION OF EXISTING PIPING
ck joint Charge hose
(Designed specifically for R32) Check whether an existing pipe system is reusable or not by using the following flow chart. <Table of pipe size restrictions>
nalve
valve
capcap
andand
thethe
check
check
joint
joint
blind
blind
nutnut
after
after
adjustment.
adjustment. ◎:Standard pipe size ○:Usable △:Restricted to shorter pipe length limits
Operation valve cap Check joint blind nut START Additional charge volume per meter of pipe 0.025kg/m 0.06kg/m
tightening torque (N·m) tightening torque (N·m) Liquid pipe ø6.35 ø9.52 ø9.52
Indoor unit Pipe size
Are an outdoor unit and an indoor unit connected to the NO Gas pipe ø15.88 ø12.7 ø15.88
20～30
20-30
10～12
10-12 Usability ◎ △ △
30～40
30-40 YES FDT, FDE 30 12 12
Maximum one-way pipe length
Which of the following refrigeration oils
FDU, FDUM, SRK
NO Can‘t Length covered without additional charge 15 6 6
Are the existing units our products? does the existing unit use? NO Please make an
Use
Suniso, MS, Barrel Freeze, HAB, Freol, inquiry for
YES YES reusability. ● Pleaseconsult with our distributor in the area, if you need to recover refrigerant and charge it again.
ed in the liquid phase, you should charge it, keeping the container ether oil, ester oil
● Any combinations of pipe sizes not listed in the table are not usable.
igerant cylinder equipped with a siphon tube. Can Use
required amount, fully open the outdoor unit valves on both liquid
Does the existing pipe system to reuse satisfy all of the following?
t from the gas (suction) side service port, while running the unit in the (1) The pipe length is 30m or less. Formula to calculate additional charge volume
st be taken so that refrigerant may be discharged from the cylinder in (2) The pipe size conforms to the table of pipe size restrictions.
the cylinder valve is throttled down or a dedicated conversion tool to (3) The elevation difference between the indoor and outdoor units NO Additional charge volume (kg) = {Main pipe length (m) – Length covered without additional charge shown in the table (m)} ×
conforms to the following restrictions. Additional charge volume per meter of pipe shown in the table (kg/m)
mist is used to protect the compressor, however, adjust charge Where the outdoor unit is above: 15m or less
Where the outdoor unit is below: 15m or less ※Check with the flow chart developed for a case where
sify upon entering the unit. an existing pipe system is reused for a
ge a calculated volume by using a scale to measure the charge volume. YES ※ If you obtain a negative figure as a result of calculation, no additional refrigerant needs to be charged.
twin-triple-double-twin model published as a
unit being run, complete a charge operation within 30 minutes. technical data sheet. Example) When FDT is installed in a 10m long existing pipe system (liquid ø9.52, gas ø12.7),
Is the unit to install in the existing pipe system a YES Change is impossible.
t quantity of refrigerant for a long time can cause a compressor failure. Change the branching pipe to a specified type. the quantity of refrigerant to charge additionally should be (10m-6m) x 0.06kg/m = 0.24 kg.
twin-triple-double-twin model?
NO Change
lume calculated from the pipe length onto the caution label attached on
panel. YES Repair is impossible. WARNING <Where the existing unit can be run for a cooling operation.>
Is the existing pipe system to reuse free of corrosion, flaws or dents? Repair the damaged parts.
Repair
Carry out the following steps with the excising unit (in the order of (1), (2), (3) and (4))
NO
Air tightness is (1) Run the unit for 30 minutes for a cooling operation.
Is the existing pipe system to reuse free of gas leaks? impossible.
(Check whether refrigerant charge was required frequently for Check the pipe system for air tightness on the site. (2) Stop the indoor fan and run the unit for 3 minutes for a cooling operation (returning liquid)
Band (accessory) Pipe cover (accessory) the system before) (3) Close the liquid side operation valve of the outdoor unit and pump down (refrigerant recovery)
Air tightness is OK
NO Remove is (4) Blow with nitrogen gas. ※ If discolored refrigeration oil or any foreign matters is discharged
impossible by the blow, wash the pipe system or install a new pipe system.
Are there any branch pipes with no indoor unit connected? Remove those branches.
● For the flare nut, do not use the old one, but use the one supplied with the outdoor unit.
NO Remove
Process a flare to the dimensions specified for R32.
Are heat insulation materials of the existing pipe system to Repair is impossible. <Where the existing unit cannot be run for a cooling operation.>
reuse free of peel-offs or deterioration? Repair the damaged parts.
Wires for connecting indoor (Heat insulation is necessary for both gas and liquid pipes) Wash the pipe system or install a new pipe system.
Exterior tape Repair
and outdoor units NO ● If you choose to wash the pipe system, please contact our distributor in the area.
ration
- 96 -
Gas piping
Liquid piping Aren’t there any loose pipe supports? Repair the damaged parts.
No loose pipe supports Some loose pipe supports Repair

them Insulation
The existing pipe system is not reusable.

The existing pipe system is reusable. Install a new pipe system.
INSTALLATION TEST CHECK POINTS

● When condensed water needs to be Check the following points again after completion of the installation, and before turning on the power. Conduct a test run again and ensure that the unit operates properly.
led to a drain, etc., install the unit on Explain to the customer how to use the unit and how to take care of the unit following the instruction manual.
a flat base or concrete blocks.
(prepared on site)
Then, please secure space for the
After installation
drain elbow and the drain hose. The pipe joints for indoor and outdoor pipes have been insulated.
Power cables and connecting wires are securely fixed to the terminal block.
Clearance The power source
supply voltage is correct as the rating. The reverse flow check cap is attached.
The drain hose is fixed securely. The cover of the pipe cover (A) faces downward to prevent rain from entering.
Operation
Service valve
valve
is is
fully
fully
open.
open. Gaps are properly sealed between the pipe covers (A) (B) and the wall surface / pipes.
No gas leaks from the joints of the service
operation
valve
valve
andand
joint.
joint. The screw of the side cover is tightened securely.
'19 • PAC-DB-333
'19 • PAC-DB-333
10.5 Safety precautions in handling air-conditioners with flammable refrigerants
PSA012B839A B
R32 REFRIGERANT USED 6. Repair to

• Do not apply
capacitance
There is information included in the user’s manual and/or that this will
is leaked, together with an external ignition source, there is a current perm
installation manual.
possibility of ignition. • Intrinsically s
can be work
A service personnel should be handing this equipment with
The user’s manual should be read carefully. • The test app
reference to the installation manual.
•
the manufac
• This safety precaution sheet is for R32 refrigerant. If you want to know the type of refrigerant in the unit, check the label attached to the outdoor unit. • Other parts
• The precautionary items mentioned below are distinguished into two levels, WARNING and CAUTION . in the atmos
WARNING : Wrong installation would cause serious consequences such as injuries or death.
7. Cabling
• Check that c
WARNING corrosion, ex
• Strict compliance of the domestic laws must be • The appliance shall be stored in a room without • Do not pierce or burn.
observed when disposing the appliance. continuously operating ignition sources (for example: • Be aware that refrigerants may not contain an of aging or c
• Do not use means to accelerate the defrosting odour. compressors
process or to clean, other than those recommended operating electric heater.
by the manufacturer.
8.
• Under no cir
CAUTION ignition be u
refrigerant le
4.5 4.9 Checks to electrical devices
1. General • A halide torc
• If any hot work is to be conducted on the • Repair and maintenance to electrical components
• That the installation of pipe-work shall be kept to a refrigeration equipment or any associated parts, shall include initial safety checks and component
minimum. inspection procedures.
• That pipe-work shall be protected from physical available to hand. Have a dry powder or CO2 • If a fault exists that could compromise safety, then 9. Leak dete
damage. extinguisher adjacent to the charging area. no electrical supply shall be connected to the circuit • Electronic le
• That compliance with national gas regulations shall until it is satisfactorily dealt with.
4.6 No ignition sources
be observed. • If the fault cannot be corrected immediately but it
• No person carrying out work in relation to a refrigerants,
• That mechanical connections shall be accessible is necessary to continue operation, an adequate
refrigeration system which involves exposing any may need re
for maintenance purposes. temporary solution shall be used.
pipe work shall use any sources of ignition in such a be calibrated
• Keep any required ventilation openings clear of • This shall be reported to the owner of the • Ensure that
obstruction. equipment so all parties are advised.
• All possible ignition sources, including cigarette ignition and
• Servicing shall be performed only as recommended • Initial safety checks shall include: • Leak detecti
by the manufacturer. – that capacitors are discharged: this shall be done
the site of installation, repairing, removing and percentage
disposal, during which refrigerant can possibly be in a safe manner to avoid possibility of sparking; be calibrated
2. Unventilated areas – that no live electrical components and wiring are
released to the surrounding space. appropriate
• The appliance shall be stored in a well-ventilated • Prior to work taking place, the area around the exposed while charging, recovering or purging
area where the room size corresponds to the room equipment is to be surveyed to make sure that the system; •
– that there is continuity of earth bonding. refrigerants
• “No Smoking” signs shall be displayed. chlorine sha
3. 5. Repairs to sealed components react with th
4.7 Ventilated area
• • During repairs to sealed components, all electrical pipe-work.
• Ensure that the area is in the open or that it is
supplies shall be disconnected from the equipment •
adequately ventilated before breaking into the
being worked upon prior to any removal of sealed removed/ext
system or conducting any hot work.
4. Information on servicing covers, etc. • If a leakage
• A degree of ventilation shall continue during the
• If it is absolutely necessary to have an electrical brazing, all o
period that the work is carried out.
4.1 Checks to the area • The ventilation should safely disperse any released supply to equipment during servicing, then a
• Prior to beginning work on systems containing permanently operating form of leak detection shall valves) in a
refrigerant and preferably expel it externally into the
be located at the most critical point to warn of a leak.
atmosphere.
necessary to ensure that the risk of ignition is •
4.8 Checks to the refrigeration equipment potentially hazardous situation.
minimised. oxygen free
• Where electrical components are being changed, • Particular attention shall be paid to the following to
• For repair to the refrigerating system, 4.3 to 4.7 through the
ensure that by working on electrical components,
shall be completed prior to conducting work on the brazing proc
the casing is not altered in such a way that the level
system.
• At all times the manufacturer’s maintenance and
4.2 Work procedure This shall include damage to cables, excessive 10. Removal
service guidelines shall be followed.
• Work shall be undertaken under a controlled • If in doubt consult the manufacturer’s technical number of connections, terminals not made to • When break
department for assistance. repairs – or
gas or vapour being present while the work is being • The following checks shall be applied to procedures
performed. • Ensure that the apparatus is mounted securely. refrigerants
4.3 General work area – the charge size is in accordance with the room • Ensure that seals or sealing materials have not
• size within which the refrigerant containing parts degraded to the point that they no longer serve the • The followin
local area shall be instructed on the nature of work are installed; – remove re
being carried out. – the ventilation machinery and outlets are atmospheres. – purge the
• W operating adequately and are not obstructed; • Replacement parts shall be in accordance with the – evacuate;
• – if an indirect refrigerating circuit is being used, manufacturer – purge aga
• Ensure that the conditions within the area have the secondary circuit shall be checked for the – open the c
presence of refrigerant; NOTE • The refrigera
– marking to the equipment continues to be visible correct reco
4.4 Checking for presence of refrigerant
and legible. Markings and signs that are illegible of some types of leak detection equipment. •
• The area shall be checked with an appropriate
shall be corrected; Intrinsically safe components do not have to be
refrigerant detector prior to and during work, to
– refrigeration pipe or components are installed in isolated prior to working on them. the unit safe
ensure the technician is aware of potentially toxic or
a position where they are unlikely to be exposed This process
to any substance which may corrode refrigerant times.
• Ensure that the leak detection equipment being
containing components, unless the components • Compressed
used is suitable for use with all applicable
are constructed of materials which are inherently purging refri
refrigerants, i.e.
non-sparking, adequately sealed or intrinsically resistant to being corroded or are suitably
safe. protected against being so corroded.
- 97 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
B839A B CAUTION
•
6. Repair to intrinsically safe components 13. Labelling
• Do not apply any permanent inductive or • Equipment shall be labelled stating that it has been
capacitance loads to the circuit without ensuring the working pressure is achieved, then venting to de-commissioned and emptied of refrigerant. The
al and/or that this will not exceed the permissible voltage and label shall be dated and signed.
current permitted for the equipment in use. This process shall be repeated until no refrigerant •
• Intrinsically safe components are the only types that is within the system. ensure that there are labels on the equipment
can be worked on while live in the presence of a •
ment with shall be vented down to atmospheric pressure to refrigerant.
• The test apparatus shall be at the correct rating. enable work to take place.
• This operation is absolutely vital if brazing 14. Recovery
the manufacturer. operations on the pipe-work are to take place.
• Other parts may result in the ignition of refrigerant • Ensure that the outlet for the vacuum pump is not • When removing refrigerant from a system, either for
in the atmosphere from a leak. close to any ignition sources and that ventilation is servicing or decommissioning, it is recommended
available. good practice that all refrigerants are removed
safely.
7. Cabling
• When transferring refrigerant into cylinders, ensure
• Check that cabling will not be subject to wear, 11. Charging procedures that only appropriate refrigerant recovery cylinders
corrosion, excessive pressure, vibration, sharp • In addition to conventional charging procedures, the are employed.
following requirements shall be followed. • Ensure that the correct number of cylinders for
holding the total system charge are available.
ntain an of aging or continual vibration from sources such as does not occur when using charging equipment. • All cylinders to be used are designated for
compressors or fans. Hoses or lines shall be as short as possible to the recovered refrigerant and labelled for that
minimise the amount of refrigerant contained in refrigerant (i.e. special cylinders for the recovery of
8. them. refrigerant).
– Cylinders shall be kept upright. • Cylinders shall be complete with pressure relief
• Under no circumstances shall potential sources of – Ensure that the refrigeration system is earthed
ignition be used in the searching for or detection of prior to charging the system with refrigerant. working order.
refrigerant leaks. – Label the system when charging is complete (if • Empty recovery cylinders are evacuated and, if
• A halide torch (or any other detector using a naked not already). possible, cooled before recovery occurs.
omponents
omponent • The recovery equipment shall be in good working
refrigeration system. order with a set of instructions concerning the
safety, then 9. Leak detection methods • Prior to recharging the system, it shall be pressure- equipment that is at hand and shall be suitable
to the circuit tested with the appropriate purging gas. for the recovery of all appropriate refrigerants
• Electronic leak detectors may be used to detect
• The system shall be leak-tested on completion of
ately but it charging but prior to commissioning. • In addition, a set of calibrated weighing scales shall
refrigerants, the sensitivity may not be adequate, or
adequate • A follow up leak test shall be carried out prior to be available and in good working order.
may need re-calibration. (Detection equipment shall
leaving the site. • Hoses shall be complete with leak-free disconnect
be calibrated in a refrigerant-free area.)
he couplings and in good condition.
• Ensure that the detector is not a potential source of
12. Decommissioning • Before using the recovery machine, check that it
ignition and is suitable for the refrigerant used.
is in satisfactory working order, has been properly
• Leak detection equipment shall be set at a • Before carrying out this procedure, it is essential
hall be done maintained and that any associated electrical
percentage of the LFL of the refrigerant and shall that the technician is completely familiar with the
of sparking; components are sealed to prevent ignition in the
be calibrated to the refrigerant employed, and the equipment and all its detail.
d wiring are event of a refrigerant release.
appropriate percentage of gas (25 % maximum) is • It is recommended good practice that all
or purging Consult manufacturer if in doubt.
refrigerants are recovered safely. • The recovered refrigerant shall be returned to the
• • Prior to the task being carried out, an oil and
ng. refrigerant supplier in the correct recovery cylinder,
refrigerants but the use of detergents containing refrigerant sample shall be taken in case analysis is and the relevant Waste Transfer Note arranged.
chlorine shall be avoided as the chlorine may required prior to re-use of reclaimed refrigerant. Do not mix refrigerants in recovery units and
react with the refrigerant and corrode the copper • It is essential that electrical power is available especially not in cylinders.
all electrical pipe-work. before the task is commenced. • If compressors or compressor oils are to be
e equipment • a) Become familiar with the equipment and its removed, ensure that they have been evacuated to
al of sealed removed/extinguished. operation.
• If a leakage of refrigerant is found which requires b) Isolate system electrically. refrigerant does not remain within the lubricant.
electrical brazing, all of the refrigerant shall be recovered c) Before attempting the procedure ensure that: • The evacuation process shall be carried out prior to
hen a – mechanical handling equipment is available, if returning the compressor to the suppliers.
ection shall valves) in a part of the system remote from the required, for handling refrigerant cylinders; • Only electric heating to the compressor body shall
warn of a leak. – all personal protective equipment is available and be employed to accelerate this process.
• being used correctly; • When oil is drained from a system, it shall be
oxygen free nitrogen (OFN) shall then be purged – the recovery process is supervised at all times by
following to carried out safely.
through the system both before and during the a competent person;
mponents,
brazing process. – recovery equipment and cylinders conform to the
that the level 15. Other safety precautions
appropriate standards.
xcessive 10. Removal and evacuation d) Pump down refrigerant system, if possible. • A brazed, welded, or mechanical connection shall
made to e) If a vacuum is not possible, make a manifold so be made before opening the valves to permit
• When breaking into the refrigerant circuit to make
repairs – or for any other purpose – conventional that refrigerant can be removed from various parts
of the system. parts.
procedures shall be used. However
securely. f) Make sure that cylinder is situated on the scales • Flammable refrigerant used, refrigerant tubing
refrigerants it is important that best practice is
have not before recovery takes place. protected or enclosed to avoid mechanical damage
er serve the g) Start the recovery machine and operate in (IEC/EN 60335-2-40/A1).
• The following procedure shall be adhered to:
accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. • Tubing protected to extent that it will not be handled
– remove refrigerant;
h) or used for carrying during moving of product (IEC/
– purge the circuit with inert gas;
nce with the volume liquid charge). EN 60335-2-40/A1).
– evacuate;
i) Do not exceed the maximum working pressure of • Flammable refrigerant used, low temperature solder
– purge again with inert gas;
the cylinder, even temporarily. alloys, such as lead/tin alloys, not acceptable for
– open the circuit by cutting or brazing.
j) pipe connections (IEC/EN 60335-2-40/A1).
• The refrigerant charge shall be recovered into the
and the process completed, make sure that the •
correct recovery cylinders.
nt. cylinders and the equipment are removed from site procured.
•
e to be promptly and all isolation valves on the equipment
the unit safe.
This process may need to be repeated several k) Recovered refrigerant shall not be charged into
times. another refrigeration system unless it has been
• Compressed air or oxygen shall not be used for cleaned and checked.
purging refrigerant systems.
- 98 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
Selection of installation location for the indoor unit
● Minimum installation area for indoor unit
CAUTION
The indoor unit shall be installed in a room with minimum installation area or more according to the refrigerant charge amount (factory refrigerant charge +additional
refrigerant charge).
For factory refrigerant charge, refer to the outdoor unit label model name or installation sheet.
For additional refrigerant charge, refer to the outdoor unit installation sheet.
Ceiling mounted type FDT,FDE,FDU,FDUM series

Wall mounted type SRK series
Refrigerant
1.30 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 4.25 4.50 4.75
charge amount [kg]
Ceiling mounted
1.1 1.4 2.0 2.6 3.2 4.0 4.8 5.7 6.7 7.8 9.0 10.2 11.5 12.9 14.4
minimum type
installation area [m2] Wall mounted
1.6 2.1 2.9 3.8 4.8 6.0 7.2 8.6 10.1 11.7 13.4 15.3 17.2 19.3 21.5
type
Refrigerant
5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.5 8.0 8.5 9.0 9.5 10.0 10.5 11.0 11.5 12.0
charge amount [kg]
Ceiling mounted
16 19 23 27 31 36 41 46 52 58 64 70 77 84 92
minimum type
installation area [m2] Wall mounted
24 29 34 40 47 54 61 69 77 86 95 105 115 126 137
type
140
120
Minimum installation area [m2]
100 e
yp
te dt
un
ll mo
80 Wa
60 e
typ
un ted
mo
40 iling
Ce
20
Refrigerant charge amount [kg]
The minimum floor area [m2] is determined based on the installation height of 1.8m for wall mounted type and 2.2m for ceiling mounted type.
● Ceiling opening area
CAUTION
In case of installing the indoor unit in an enclosed ceiling space, ensure there is a sufficient ventilation opening around the unit.
In the event of refrigerant leakage, this countermeasure would prevent an increased concentration of refrigerant.
- 99 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
11. OPTION PARTS

11.1 Wireless kit
5.1 WIRELESS KIT (RCN-T-5AW-E2)
(1) FDT series (RCN-T-5AW-E2)
Notes:
● Do not w
Following function of FDT indoor unit series are not able to be set with this wireless remote control
(RCN-T-5AW-E2).
● Use the
1. Individual flap control system PJF012D035 B electronic
Safety precautions ● When in

●Please read this manual carefully before starting installation work to install the unit properly. measures
It could ca
Every one of the followings is important information to be observed strictly. power gen
WARNING Failure to follow these instructions properly may result in serious consequences The influe
such as death, severe injury, etc. could disru
CAUTION Failure to follow these instructions properly may cause injury or property damage.
● Do not le

● Do not ins
●Keep this manual at a safe place where you can consult with whenever necessary. Show this manual to installers when It could ca
moving or repairing the unit. When the ownership of the unit is transferred, this manual should be given to a new owner. (1) Places
(2) Places
(3) High h
WARNING (4) Hot su
● Consult your dealer or a professional contractor to install the unit. genera
(5) Places
(6) Uneve
● Installation work should be performed properly according to this installation manual. (7) Places a
● Be sure to use accessories and parts for installation work. ① Accessories

Please make sure tha
● Install the unit properly to a place with strength to hold the weight.
If the place is not strong enough, the unit may drop and cause injury. 1 Rece
● Be sure to have the electrical wiring work done by electrical installer, and use exclusive circuit. 2 Parts
● Shut OFF the main power source before starting electrical work. 3 Instal

● Do not modify the unit.
● Be sure to turn OFF the power circuit breaker before repairing/inspecting the unit.
Repairing/inspecting the unit with the power circuit breaker turned ON could cause electric shocks or injury.
● Do not install the unit in appropriate environment or where gas could

② Preparation
generate, in, accumulate or leak. Setting on site
If the unit is used at places where air contains dense oil mist, steam, organic solvent vapor, corrosive gas (ammonium,
sulfuric compound, acid, etc) or where acidic or alkaline solution, special spray, etc. are used, it could cause electric PCB on the receiver has
rioration of its performance or corrosion. Default setting is shown
● Do not install the unit where water vapor is generated excessively or condensation occurs. Preven
SW1 during
SW2 Rec
● Do not use the unit in a place where it gets wet, such as laundry room. sla
SW3
● Do not operate the unit with wet hands. SW4 Au

② Preparation before installation (continued) ③ How to insta

To change setting Master/Slave setting when using
- 100 - plural remote controls
Installation of the
1. Remove the cover by unscrewing two screws from the back of receiver.
2. Change the setting by the switch on PCB. ①
Cover Up to two receiver or
Screws wired remote control can ② Put the wiring of th
be installed in one indoor
③ Put the wiring on t
unit group.
Switch shown below.
'19 • PAC-DB-333
WARNING
● Do not wash the unit with water.
● Use the cables for wiring, and connect them securely with care to protect
F012D035 B electronic parts from external forces.
● When installing the unit at a hospital, telecommunication facility, etc., take

properly. measures to suppress electric noises.
It could cause malfunction or break-down due to hazardous effects on the inverter, private
power generator, high frequency medical equipment, radio communication equipment, etc.
nsequences The influences transmitted from the remote control to medical or communication equipment
could disrupt medical activities, video broadcasting or cause noise interference.
erty damage.
● Do not leave the remote control with its PCB case removed.
ns given. CAUTION
● Do not install the wireless kit at the following places in order to avoid malfunction.
to installers when It could cause break-down or deformation of remote control.
to a new owner. (1) Places exposed to direct sunlight (8) Places where the receiver is influenced by
(2) Places near heat devices the fluorescent lamp (especially inverter
(3) High humidity places type) or sunlight
(4) Hot surface or cold surface enough to (9) Places where the receiver is affected by infrared
generate condensation rays of any other communication devices
(5) Places exposed to oil mist or steam directly (10) Places where some object may obstruct the
(6) Uneven surface communication with the remote control
ation manual. (7) Places affected by the direct air flow of the AC unit
① Accessories
Please make sure that you have all of the following accessories.
weight.
1 Receiver 1 1 Wireless remote control(RCN-E2) 1
exclusive circuit. 2 Parts set (A) 1 2 Remote control holder 1
3 Installation manual 1 3 Screw for holder 2
4 AAA dry cell battery (LR03) 2
5 User’s manual 1
ing the unit.

shocks or injury.
gas could
② Preparation before installation
Setting on site
ve gas (ammonium,
ould cause electric PCB on the receiver has the following switches to set the function.
osion. Default setting is shown with mark.
nsation occurs. Prevents interference

SW1 during plural setting ON : Normal OFF : Customized
Receiver master/
SW2
slave setting ON : Master OFF : Slave
SW3 Buzzer ON : Valid OFF : Invalid
SW4 Auto restart ON : Valid OFF : Invalid
1 2
③ How to install the receiver(continued)

g when using
Installation of the receiver
controls
eceiver or ① .
te control can - 101
② Put the wiring of the receiver through the opening. -
d in one indoor
③ Put the wiring on the notch on the control box so as not to be pinched by the control box and lid as
shown below.
receiver or
te control are ④ Connect the wiring to the terminal block provided in the control box. (No polarity)
necessary to ⑤ Attach the receiver to the panel according to the panel installation manual.
itch on the
SW2 R
● Do not use the unit in a place where it gets wet, such as laundry room.
SW3
● Do not operate the unit with wet hands. SW4

1
'19 • PAC-DB-333
② Preparation before installation (continued) ③ How to ins

To change setting Master/Slave setting when using
Installation of t
1. Remove the cover by unscrewing two screws from the back of receiver. plural remote controls
2. Change the setting by the switch on PCB. ①
Cover Up to two receiver or
Screws wired remote control can ② Put the wiring of
be installed in one indoor
③ Put the wiring on
unit group.
Switch shown below.
Default settings When two receiver or
wired remote control are ④ Connect the wiri
used, it is necessary to ⑤ Attach the receiv
Receiver
backside change switch on the
PCB to set it as slave. ⑥ Fix the wiring wi
Cover
backside ⑦ Reattach the co
3. When SW1 is turned to OFF position, change the wireless remote control setting.
For the method of changing the setting, refer to Setting to avoid mixed communication of
④ Wireless remote control .
*The receivable area of the signal refer to ⑤ Receiver .
③ How to install the receiver

The receiver can be installed by replacing with a corner panel on the applicable decorative panel.
Preparation before installation
① Attach the decorative panel onto the air-conditioner according to the installation manual for the panel.
② Remove the air return grille.
③ Remove a corner panel located on the refrigerant pipes side.
④ Remove three screws and detach the cover (indicated as shadowed area) from the control box of the
air- conditioner.
- 102 -
m. SW2 slave setting ON : Master OFF : Slave
SW3 Buzzer ON : Valid OFF : Invalid
SW4 Auto restart ON : Valid OFF : Invalid
1 2
'19 • PAC-DB-333

ng when using
Installation of the receiver
e controls
receiver or ① .
mote control can ② Put the wiring of the receiver through the opening.
ed in one indoor
③ Put the wiring on the notch on the control box so as not to be pinched by the control box and lid as
p.
shown below.
o receiver or
mote control are ④ Connect the wiring to the terminal block provided in the control box. (No polarity)
necessary to ⑤ Attach the receiver to the panel according to the panel installation manual.
witch on the
et it as slave. ⑥ Fix the wiring with the clamp so that the wiring do not contact the edge of control box’s metal sheet.
⑦ Reattach the control box lid with 3 screws removed.
n of
l for the panel.
trol box of the
Terminal block in the indoor

unit control box
3 4
- 103 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
④ Wireless remote control ④ Wireless r

2. Setting details
Installation tips for the remote control holder The following fu
Fix the remote control holder using the screws supplied with
this product. Button Number in
* Precautions for installing the holder 00
Holder for FAN SPEED 01
● Adjust the position so that it is upright. Wood screw
remote control 02
● Ensure that the screw heads are not protruding.
00
● Do not attach the holder on plaster wall 01
MODE
02
03
00
01
How to insert batteries FILTER 02
Ensure the correct
1. Detach the back lid. polarity when 03
2. Insert the batteries. (two AAA batteries) inserting. 04
3. Reattach the back lid. 00
U/P
01
00
SILENT
01
00
01
Setting to avoid mixed communication HI POWER
02
1. Detach the back lid, and remove the batteries. 03
2. Cut off the switching wire in the battery compartment using nippers. 00
3. Insert the batteries, and attach the back lid. ON TIMER
01
02
03
Cutting
00
01
OFF TIMER
02
Changing the remote control setting 03
How to change the Auto Run setting 00
NIGHT
The Auto Run mode is not available on the building air-conditioning and gas heat 01
SETBACK
pump series (excluding the cooling/heating free multi system). 02
When using the remote control to operate those models, set the remote control to * Refer to service manua
disable the Auto Run mode.
To disable the Auto Run mode, press the ACL switch while holding down the MODE
button, or insert batteries while holding down the MODE button.
* Note: Once the batteries are removed, the setting is reset to the factory default.
When the bat teries are removed, repeat the steps described above.
Auto Run setting
Indoor function settings
1. How to set indoor functions
① Press the ON/OFF button to stop the unit.
② Press the desired one of the buttons shown item 2. while holding down the 1
FUNCTION SETTING switch.
③ Use the selection buttons, ▲ and ▼, to change the setting.
④ Press the SET button.
The buzzer on the remote control signal receiver beeps twice, and the LED 4
3
⑤ Receiver ⑤ Receiver (
1 Control plural indoor units with one remote control Restrictions on the thickness and length of wire 2. Correlation betw
(Maximun total extension 600m.) and reachable a
Up to 16 indoor units can be connected. The drawing in
1. Connect the XY terminal with 2 cores wire. As for the Standard Within 0.3 mm² × 100m between the re
size, refer to the following note. - 104 - Within 0.5 mm² × 200m illuminance at
2. For Packaged air-conditioner series, set the indoor Within 0.75mm² × 300m control is oper
unit address with SW2 on the indoor unit PCB from Within 1.25mm² × 400m condition of c
[0] to [F] so as not to duplicate. Within 2.0 mm² × 600m the illuminance
narrowed down
'19 • PAC-DB-333
④ Wireless remote control (continued)

2. Setting details
The following functions can be set.
Button Number indicator Function setting

00 Fun speed setting : Standard
Holder for FAN SPEED 01 Fun speed setting : Setting 1 *
remote control 02 Fun speed setting : Setting 2 *
00 Room heating temperature adjustment : Disable
01 Room heating temperature adjustment : +1°C
MODE
00 Filter sign display : OFF
01 Filter sign display : 180 hours
FILTER 02 Filter sign display : 600 hours
04 Filter sign display : Operation stop after 1000 hours have elapsed
00 Anti draft setting : Disable
U/P
01 Anti draft setting : Enable
00 Infrared sensor setting (Motion sensor setting) : Disable
SILENT
01 Infrared sensor setting (Motion sensor setting) : Enable
00 Infrared sensor control (Motion sensor control) : Disable
01 Infrared sensor control (Motion sensor control) : Power control only
HI POWER
02 Infrared sensor control (Motion sensor control) : Auto OFF only
03 Infrared sensor control (Motion sensor control) : Power control and Auto OFF
00 Cooling fan residual-period running : Disable
01 Cooling fan residual-period running : 0.5 hours
ON TIMER
02 Cooling fan residual-period running : 2 hours
00 Heating fan residual-period running : Disable
01 Heating fan residual-period running : 0.5 hours
OFF TIMER
02 Heating fan residual-period running : 2 hours
00 Remote control signal receiver LED : Brightness High
NIGHT
01 Remote control signal receiver LED : Brightness Low
SETBACK
02 Remote control signal receiver LED : OFF
* Refer to service manual.
uto Run setting
5 6
⑤ Receiver (continued)
nd length of wire 2. Correlation between illuminance at the receiver The receivable area of the
.) and reachable area of the signal in a plain view. signal when the illuminance
The drawing in the right shows the correlation at the receiver is 300lux
m² × 100m between the reachable area of the signal and
m² × 200m illuminance at the receiver when the remote - 105 -
m² × 300m control is operated at 1.0m high under the
m² × 400m condition of ceiling height of 2.4m. When
m² × 600m the illuminance becomes double, the area is
narrowed down to two thirds.
5
'19 • PAC-DB-333
⑤ Receiver ⑤ Receiver (
1 Control plural indoor units with one remote control Restrictions on the thickness and length of wire 2. Correlation betw
(Maximun total extension 600m.) and reachable a
Up to 16 indoor units can be connected. The drawing in
1. Connect the XY terminal with 2 cores wire. As for the Standard Within 0.3 mm² × 100m between the re
size, refer to the following note. Within 0.5 mm² × 200m illuminance at
2. For Packaged air-conditioner series, set the indoor Within 0.75mm² × 300m control is ope
unit address with SW2 on the indoor unit PCB from Within 1.25mm² × 400m condition of c
[0] to [F] so as not to duplicate. Within 2.0 mm² × 600m the illuminance
narrowed down
For the shop series

For VRF series, set the indoor unit address with SW1, SW2 and SW5-2 on the indoor unit PCB from [000]
to [127] so as not to duplicate.
Terminal block
3. Installation tips
Minimum distan
Indoor unit (1) Indoor unit (2) Indoor unit (16)
Address (0) Address (1) Address ( F ) of 300lux of illum
Receiver
Backup switch
A Backup switch is
when the operation
For the building air- conditioning and gas heat pump series control lost, or con
to operate as temp
Set the indoor unit and outdoor unit numbers by manually specifying the addresses. directly when oper
Use the rotary switches SW1 and SW2 provided on the indoor unit PCB (printed circuit board) to set the 1. The air-cond
indoor unit numbers so that they are not duplicated. the condition
point, High fa
Master/Slave setting when using plural remote control position.
Up to two receivers can be installed in one indoor unit group. 2. The air-cond
the switch is
Indoor unit
Remote control line Switch Setting Function
(No polarity)
ON Master
SW2
OFF Slave Cooling test ru
Receiver Receiver ●
SW2[Master] SW2[Slave] ● Transmit a cool
on the receiver
Wireless remote control's operable area ● If the backup sw
● If you cannot op
1. Standard reachable area of the signal
inspection guid
[condition] Illuminance at the receiver: 300lux
How to read th
Ceiling surface On the receiver of
1. An indication
1.4m
2. An indication
2.4m
Reachable area of the signal wireless rem

3. An indication
1m
4. When there a
4m 3m 2m 1m 0 1m 2m 3m 4m 5. When there a
6. Error records
while the bac
- 106 -
5 6
'19 • PAC-DB-333
and length of wire 2. Correlation between illuminance at the receiver The receivable area of the
m.) and reachable area of the signal in a plain view. signal when the illuminance
The drawing in the right shows the correlation at the receiver is 300lux
mm² × 100m between the reachable area of the signal and
mm² × 200m illuminance at the receiver when the remote
mm² × 300m control is operated at 1.0m high under the
mm² × 400m condition of ceiling height of 2.4m. When
mm² × 600m the illuminance becomes double, the area is
narrowed down to two thirds.
it PCB from [000] The receivable area of the

signal when the illuminance at
the receiver is 600lux
3. Installation tips when several receivers are installed close

Minimum distance between the indoor units which can avoid cross communication is 5m under the condition
of 300lux of illuminance at the receiver.
Backup switch
backup switch
A Backup switch is provided on the receiver. Even
when the operation from the wireless remote
control lost, or control failure), still it possible

to operate as temporary means. Press the switch
directly when operating it.
oard) to set the 1. The air-conditioner starts the operation with
the condition of Auto mode, 23°C of set
point, High fan speed and horizontal louver
position.
2. The air-conditioner stops the operation when
the switch is pressed when in operation.
unction
Master
Slave Cooling test run operation
●
● Transmit a cooling operation command with the wireless remote control unit, while the backup switch
on the receiver is depressed.
● If the backup switch on the receiver is pressed during a test run, it will end the test run.
● If you cannot operate the unit properly during a test run, please check wiring by consulting with
inspection guides.
How to read the 2-digit display
On the receiver of a wireless kit, a two-digit (7-segment) display is provided.
1. An indication will be displayed for one hour after power on.
2. An indication will be displayed for 3.5 seconds after transmitting a “STOP” command from the
wireless remote control or the operation of the backup switch to stop the unit.
3. An indication appearing in (1) or (2) above will go off as soon as the unit starts operation.
4. When there are no error records to indicate, addresses of all the connected units are displayed.
5. When there are some error records remaining, the error records are displayed.
6. Error records can be cleared by transmitting a "STOP" command from the wireless remote control,
while the backup button is pressed.
7 PJF012D035 8
- 107 -
PJZ012D112 A
'19 • PAC-DB-333
● Do
It co
(2) FDU, FDUM series (RCN-KIT4-E2) PJZ012D112 A ● Use
●ele
Do
Imp
It c
Safety precautions ●●Wh
Us
ele
me
●Please read this manual carefully before starting installation work to install the unit properly.
ItImp
c
Safety isprecautions
Every one of the followings important information to be observed strictly. pow
● Wh
WARNING Failure to follow these instructions properly may result in serious consequences
●Please read this manual carefully before starting installation work to install the unit properly. The
me
such as death, severe injury,
Every one etc.
of the followings is important information to be observed strictly. cou
It c
pow
CAUTION FailureWARNINGto follow these instructions
Failure properly
to follow these mayproperly
instructions causemayinjury or inproperty
result damage.
serious consequences The
● Do
It could have serioussuch
consequences depending
as death, severe injury, etc.on the circumstances. cou
If de
●The following pictograms CAUTION
are usedFailure
in thetotext.
follow these instructions properly may cause injury or property damage.
● Do
It could have serious consequences depending on the circumstances. If d
Never do. Always follow the instructions given. ● Do
●Keep this manual at a safe place where you can consult with whenever necessary. Show this manual to installers when ●ItDo
co
●KeepWhen
moving or repairing the unit. this manual at a safe place
the ownership where
of the unityouis can consult withthis
transferred, whenever
manualnecessary.
should beShow this manual
given to installers
to a new owner. when It c
(1)
moving or repairing the unit. When the ownership of the unit is transferred, this manual should be given to a new owner. (1)
(2)
(2)
(3)
WARNINGWARNING (3)
(4)
(4)
● Consult your dealer or a professional
● Consult your dealer or acontractor
professionalto install the
contractor unit. the unit.
to install
(5)
Improper installation Improper
made oninstallation
your own made
mayoncause
your own may cause
electric electric
shocks, fireshocks, fire or dropping
or dropping of the unit.
of the unit. (5)
(6)
(6)
● Installation work should be performed properly according to this installation manual. (7)
● Installation work should be performed properly according to this installation manual.
Improper installation work may result in electric shocks, fire or break-down. (7)
Improper installation work may result in electric shocks, fire or break-down.
● Be sure to use accessories and specified parts for installation work. ① Acces
● Be sure to use accessories and specified
Use of unspecified parts
parts may result forfire
in drop, installation work.
or electric shocks. ①Please
Accesmake
Use of unspecified ●parts may
Install theresult in drop,tofire
unit properly or electric
a place shocks. strength to hold the weight.
with sufficient
Please make s
● Install the unit properly to a place with sufficient strength to hold the weight.
● Be sure
If the place is not strong to have the
enough, theelectrical
unit may wiring workand
drop donecause
by qualified electrical installer, and use exclusive circuit.
injury.
Power source with insufficient and improper work can cause electric shock and fire.
● Be sure to have the electrical
● Shut OFF wiring
the work
maindone bysource
power qualified electrical
before installer,
starting and use
electrical exclusive circuit.
work.
Power source with insufficient
Otherwise, itand improper
could work can
result in electric cause
shocks, electricorshock
break-down and fire.
malfunction.
● Shut OFF the main power
● Do source
not modify the before
unit. starting electrical work.
It could
Otherwise, it could result in cause electric
electric shocks,
shocks, fire, or break-down.
break-down or malfunction.
● Be sure to turn OFF the power circuit breaker before repairing/inspecting the unit.
● Do not modify the Repairing/inspecting
unit. the unit with the power circuit breaker turned ON could cause electric shocks or injury.
It could cause electric shocks, fire, or break-down.
● Do not install the unit in appropriate environment or where inflammable gas could
● Be sure to turn OFF the power
generate, circuit
flow in, breaker
accumulate before repairing/inspecting the unit.
or leak.
Repairing/inspecting theIf the
unitunitwith theatpower
is used circuitairbreaker
places where turned
contains dense ONsteam,
oil mist, couldorganic
causesolvent
electric shocks
vapor, corrosiveorgas
injury.
(ammonium,
sulfuric compound, acid, etc) or where acidic or alkaline solution, special spray, etc. are used, it could cause electric
● Do not install the shocks,
unit in appropriate
break-down, environment
smoke or fire or deterioration
as a result of significant where inflammable
of its performance orgas could
corrosion.
generate, flow in,● accumulate or leak. ② Prepa
Do not install the unit where water vapor is generated excessively or condensation occurs.
If the unit is used at places wherecause
It could air contains dense
electric oil mist,
shocks, steam,
fire, or organic solvent vapor, corrosive gas (ammonium,
break-down. Setting on s
● Do not use the unit in a place where it gets wet, such as laundry room.
shocks, break-down, smoke or fire as a electric
result ofshocks,
significant PCB on the rece
fire,deterioration of its performance or corrosion.
It could cause or break-down.
② Prepar
following switche
Default setting is
● Do not install the unit
● Dowhere waterthe
not operate vapor is generated
unit with excessively or condensation occurs.
wet hands.
mark.
It could cause electricIt could cause
shocks, electric
fire, shocks.
or break-down. Setting on si
● Do not use the unit in a place where it gets wet, such as laundry room. 1 PCB on the rece
It could cause electric shocks, fire, or break-down. following switche
Default setting is
● Do not operate the unit with wet hands.
mark.
② Preparation before installation (continued) ③ How to
To change setting Master/Slave setting when 1using ⑤ Take out th
1. Remove one screws located on the under of the receiver and plural remote controls ⑥ Fit the upp
detach the board.
2. Change the setting by the switch on PCB. Up to two receiver or wired remote (B) Installat
control can be installed in one
indoor unit group. Use this m
② Preparation before installation (continued) When two receiver or wired remote
control are used, it is necessary
③ How to
Switch to change switch on the PCB to set
To change setting Default Master/Slave
settings
it assetting
slave. when using ⑤ Take out th
plural remote controls
1. Remove one screws located on the under of the receiver and
For the method of changing the setting, refer to Setting to avoid mixed
⑥ Fit the uppe
detach the board. communication of ④ Wireless remote control .
- 108
*The receivable area of the signal refer to-⑤ Receiver . control can be installed in one
③ How to install the receiver When two receiver or wired remote
The following two methods can be used to install the receiver
Switch onto a ceiling
to change switchoron
a wall.
the PCB to set
Default settings
Select a method according to the installation position.
it as slave.
3. When SW1 is turned to OFF position, change
<Installation the wireless(A)
position> remote control
Direct setting. onto the ceiling with wood screws.
installation
'19 • PAC-DB-333
2D112 A WARNING
● Do not wash the unit with water.
It could cause electric shocks, fire, or break-down.
● Use the specified cables for wiring, and connect them securely with care to protect
electronic parts from external forces.
Improper connections or fixing could cause heat generation, fire, etc.
● When installing the unit at a hospital, telecommunication facility, etc., take
perly. measures to suppress electric noises.
equences The influences transmitted from the remote control to medical or communication equipment
ty damage.
● Do not leave the remote control with its PCB case removed.
If dew, water, insect, etc. enters through the hole, it could cause electric shocks, fire or break-down.
given. CAUTION
● Do not install the wireless kit at the following places in order to avoid malfunction.
stallers when It could cause break-down or deformation of remote control.
a new owner. (1) Places exposed to direct sunlight (8) Places where the receiver is influenced by
(4) Hot surface or cold surface enough to (9) Places where the receiver is affected by infrared
generate condensation rays of any other communication devices
of the unit. (5) Places exposed to oil mist or steam directly (10) Places where some object may obstruct the
n manual. (7) Places affected by the direct air flow of the AC unit
① Accessories
ght.
1 Wireless remote control (RCN-E2) 1
1 Recei ver 1
2 Remote control holder 1
usive circuit. 2 Wiring (3m) 1 3 Screw for holder 2
3 Pa rts set (A) 1
5 User‘s manual 1
4 Pa rts set (B) 1
1 Screw for receiver 2
5 Pa rts set (C) 1 2 Fixing band 1
the unit. 3 Clamp 5

6 Installation manual 1
ocks or injury. 4 Screw for clamp 5
gas could 1 Receiver installation bracket 1

2 Screw for the bracket 2
as (ammonium, 3 2
cause electric
n.
ion occurs.
Setting on site SW1
Prevents interference
during plural setting ON : Normal OFF : Customized
Receiver master/
PCB on the receiver has the SW2
following switches to set the function. SW3
Default setting is shown with
mark. SW4 Auto restart ON : Valid OFF : Invalid
1 2

when using - 109 -
⑤ Take out the connector to the backside from the hole of the lower case putting through the wiring at ①.
ntrols ⑥ Fit the upper case and the lower case, and tighten the screws.
ed remote (B) Installation with enclosed bracket
n one
Use this method when installaing onto a gypsum board (7 to 18mm), etc.
● Do not use the unit in a place where it gets wet, such as laundry room. PCB on the recei
It could cause electric shocks, fire, or break-down. following switche
Default setting is
● Do not operate the unit with wet hands.
mark.
1
'19 • PAC-DB-333
② Preparation before installation (continued) ③ How to

To change setting Master/Slave setting when using ⑤ Take out the
1. Remove one screws located on the under of the receiver and plural remote controls ⑥ Fit the uppe
detach the board.
control can be installed in one
When two receiver or wired remote
Switch Default settings
to change switch on the PCB to set
it as slave.
For the method of changing the setting, refer to Setting to avoid mixed
communication of ④ Wireless remote control .
*The receivable area of the signal refer to ⑤ Receiver .

The following two methods can be used to install the receiver onto a ceiling or a wall.
Select a method according to the installation position.
<Installation position> (A) Direct installation onto the ceiling with wood screws.
(B) Installation with accessory's bracket
(1) Drilling of the ceiling (ceiling opening) (A) Direct installation onto the ceiling 88mm(H)×101mm(W)
Drill the receiver installation holes with with wood screws.
the dimensions shown right at the ceiling
position where wires can be connected. (B) Installation with enclosed bracket 108mm(H)×108mm(W)
① Catch the tw
(2) Wiring connection of receiver with the scr
protrusion p
Indoor unit terminal on the lowe
block
② Insert the e
screws to fix
③ Pass the wi
④ Fit the lowe
Wiring Caution shown abov
Do not connect the wiring to the power source of the ⑤ Follow step
Reciever terminal block. If it is connected, printed board will be
(No polarity)
damaged.
(3) Installation of the receiver
Remove the screw on the side of the receiver and sprit it into the upper case and lower case.
Install the receiver with one of the two installation methods (A) to (C) shown below.
(A) Direct installation onto the ceiling with screws Wall
opening Lower case
Use this installation method when the ceiling is Hole Installation hole Opening
△
wooden, and there is no problem for strength in

installing directly with wood screws. Wiring Hole
① Put through the wiring from the back side to the hole Lower case
of the lower case. Installation
② Fit the lower case into the ceiling opening. Make hole
sure that the clearance between the convex part of
the back of the lower case and the ceiling opening
must be as equal as possible on both sides. Wiring
③ Using the two installation holes shown right, fix the
lower case onto the ceiling with the enclosed wood
screws. (The other four holes are not used.) Upper
④ Connect the wiring with the wiring from the upper Lower case
case by the connector. Connector case Hole
- 110 -
Receiver master/
PCB on the receiver has the SW2
following switches to set the function. SW3
Default setting is shown with
mark. SW4 Auto restart ON : Valid OFF : Invalid
1 2
'19 • PAC-DB-333

when using ⑤ Take out the connector to the backside from the hole of the lower case putting through the wiring at ①.
ntrols ⑥ Fit the upper case and the lower case, and tighten the screws.
ed remote (B) Installation with enclosed bracket
n one
Use this method when installaing onto a gypsum board (7 to 18mm), etc.
red remote
cessary [Top]
PCB to set Protrusion
(right side of center)
Bracket
Hole
(ø10)
Hole (ø10)
[Bottom]
Bracket
Protrusion (The center of right and left)
Protrusion
(right side of center)
Lower case
Hole [Upper] Installation hole
Wiring Hole
Lower case
(H)×101mm(W)
Installation hole
[Lower]
Bracket Protrusion (left side of center)
(H)×108mm(W)
① Catch the two protrusion of the enclosed bracket onto the fitting as shown above, and temporarily fix
with the screws. (The bracket has an Upper/Lower and front/back orientation. Confirm the Upper/Lower
protrusion positions and the positional relation of the ø10 holes on the bracket and the installation hole
on the lower case with the above drawing.)
② Insert the end of the installation fitting into the back of the ceiling from the opening, and tighten the
screws to fix the bracket onto the ceiling.
③ Pass the wiring from the rear side through the hole on the lower case.
④ Fit the lower case onto the bracket, and fix the lower case to the bracket using the two installation holes
shown above. (The other four holes are not used.)
ource of the ⑤ Follow step ① to ⑥ for (A) to complete the installation.
board will be
e Opening
Hole
Lower case
Installation
hole
Upper
case
Hole
3 4
- 111 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
③ How to install the receiver (continued) ④ Wirele

(C) Exposed installation Changing th
Use the following procedure when installing the case with the wiring exposed. How to change
The Auto Run
Cord clamp pump series (e
Wiring When using th
e
Band (enclosed) remote control
or
Fix with band
m
To disable the
or
button, or inse
m
Lower case Hole
m
* Note: Once t
00
Hole W hen t
.1
ox
pr
Upper case Indoor func
Ap
Lower case 1. How to set
① Press th
① Cut off the thin section on the side of the upper case with a pair of nippers or a knife, and remove the ② Press th
burrs with a file, etc. (The wiring is passed through this section.) FUNCTI
② Pass the enclosed band through the wiring outlet hole on the lower case. ③ Use the
③ Use on of the light detection adaptor installation methods (A) or (B) explained in section 3, and fix the ④ Press th
The buz
lower case onto the wall. Do not pass the wiring through the hole on the lower case. the LED
④ Fix the wiring using the band while leaving the wiring length from the band fixing section to the end of 2. Setting deta
the wiring connector at 100mm or more. The followin
⑤ Connect the wiring with the wiring protruding front the upper case using a connector.
⑥ Pass the connected connector and the excess wiring through the hole on the lower case. Button Numb
⑦ Fit the upper case onto the lower case, and tighten the screws.
FAN SPEED
⑧ Adequately fix the wiring with the enclesed cord clamp.
④ Wireless remote control MODE
Installation tips for the remote control holder

Fix the remote control holder using the screws supplied
with this product. FILTER
* Precautions for installing the holder

Wood screw Holder for
● Adjust the position so that it is upright. remote control
● Ensure that the screw heads are not protruding. U/P
● Do not attach the holder on plaster wall.
SILENT
How to insert batteries Ensure the correct HI POWER

polarity when
1. Detach the back lid. inserting.
2. Insert the batteries. (two AAA batteries)
3. Reattach the back lid.
⑤ Receiv
Setting to avoid mixed communication 1 Control plur
1. Detach the back lid, and remove the batteries. Up to 16 indoo
2. Cut off the switching wire in the battery compartment using nippers. 1. Connect the
3. Insert the batteries, and attach the back lid. size, refer to
Cutting 2. For Packag
unit addres
[0] to [F] so
⑤ Receiver (continued) ⑤ Receiv

- 112 -
For the shop series
Terminal block
'19 • PAC-DB-333
④ Wireless remote control (continued)

Changing the wireless remote control setting
How to change the Auto Run setting
The Auto Run mode is not available on the building air-conditioner and gas heat
pump series (excluding the cooling/heating free multi system).
When using the wireless remote control to operate those models, set the wireless
remote control to disable the Auto Run mode.
Auto Run setting
move the ② Press the desired one of the buttons shown below while holding down the ①
nd fix the ④ Press the SET button.
The buzzer on the wireless remote control signal receiver beeps twice, and ④
the LED lamp flashes four times at two-second intervals. ③
he end of 2. Setting details
②
Button Number indicator Function setting Button Number indicator Function setting
00 Fun speed setting : Standard 00 Cooling fan residual-period running : Disable
FAN SPEED 01 Fun speed setting : Setting 1 * 01 Cooling fan residual-period running : 0.5 hours
ON TIMER
02 Fun speed setting : Setting 2 * 02 Cooling fan residual-period running : 2 hours
00 Room heating temperature adjustment : Disable 03 Cooling fan residual-period running : 6 hours
01 Room heating temperature adjustment : +1°C 00 Heating fan residual-period running : Disable
MODE
02 Room heating temperature adjustment : +2°C 01 Heating fan residual-period running : 0.5 hours
OFF TIMER
03 Room heating temperature adjustment : +3°C 02 Heating fan residual-period running : 2 hours
00 Filter sign display : OFF 03 Heating fan residual-period running : 6 hours
01 Filter sign display : 180 hours 00 Remote control signal receiver LED : Brightness High
NIGHT
02 Filter sign display : 600 hours 01 Remote control signal receiver LED : Brightness Low
FILTER SETBACK
03 Filter sign display : 1000 hours 02 Remote control signal receiver LED : OFF
Filter sign display : * Refer to service manual.
for 04
control Operation stop after 1000 hours have elapsed
00 Anti draft setting : Disable
U/P
01 Anti draft setting : Enable
SILENT
Infrared sensor control (Motion sensor control) :
01
Power control only
HI POWER Infrared sensor control (Motion sensor control) :
02
Auto OFF only
Infrared sensor control (Motion sensor control) :
03
Power control and Auto OFF
⑤ Receiver
1 Control plural indoor units with one remote control Restrictions on the thickness and length of wire
Up to 16 indoor units can be connected. (Maximun total extension 600m.)
1. Connect the XY terminal with 2 cores wire. As for the Standard Within 0.3 mm² × 100m
size, refer to the following note. Within 0.5 mm² × 200m
2. For Packaged air-conditioner series, set the indoor Within 0.75mm² × 300m
unit address with SW2 on the indoor unit PCB from Within 1.25mm² × 400m
[0] to [F] so as not to duplicate. Within 2.0 mm² × 600m
5 6
- 113 -
The receivable area of the signal when
from [000] the illuminance at the receiver is 300lux.

3. Insert the batteries, and attach the back lid. size, refer to
Cutting 2. For Packag
unit addres
[0] to [F] so
5
'19 • PAC-DB-333
⑤ Receiver (continued) ⑤ Receiv

For the shop series
Terminal block

Address (0) Address (1) Address ( F )
KIT

When insta
[Condition] I
For the building air- conditioner and gas heat pump series
Set the indoor unit and outdoor unit numbers by manually specifying the addresses.
Use the rotary switches SW1 and SW2 provided on the indoor unit PCB (printed circuit board) to set the
indoor unit numbers so that they are not duplicated.
Master/Slave setting when using plural remote control

Floor
Up to two receivers can be installed in one indoor unit group.
Indoor uni t
Switch Setting Function Backup sw
Remote control line
(No polarity ) ON Master A backup switc
SW2 When operatio
OFF Slave (due to flat batt
emergency me
Receiver Receiver 1. If pressed
SW2[Master] SW2[Slave] conditione
cooling on
When installed on ceiling setting: 23
2. If pressed
1. Standard reachable area of the signa conditione
[Condition] Illuminance at the receiver : 300lux (when no lighting is installed within 1m of the receiver
in an ordinary office.)l
Receiver
Orientation of receiver Ceiling surface Cooling tes

● After safety
Receivable area ● Transmit a c
of the signal on the rece
● If the backu
● If you canno
Floor inspection g
Orientation of receiv er Ceiling surface How to read
Receivable area A 6-digit indica
of the signal
1. An indicat
2. An indicat
control un
Floor 3. An indicat
4. When the
2. Correlation between illuminance at the receiver and reachable area of the signal in a plain view. 5. When the
[Condition] Correlation between the reachable area of the signal and illuminance at the receiver when the 6. Error reco
wireless remote control is operated at 1m high under the condition of ceiling height of 2.4m. while the
When the illuminance becomes double, the area is narrowed down to two third.
- 114 -
size, refer to the following note. Within 0.5 mm² × 200m
2. For Packaged air-conditioner series, set the indoor Within 0.75mm² × 300m
unit address with SW2 on the indoor unit PCB from Within 1.25mm² × 400m
[0] to [F] so as not to duplicate. Within 2.0 mm² × 600m
5 6
'19 • PAC-DB-333
from [000] the illuminance at the receiver is 300lux.

the illuminance at the receiver is 600lux.
When installed on wall

[Condition] Illuminance at the receiver : 800lux.
Receiver
o set the
5m
or
les
30° °
or les 30r less
s
Wireless s o
Floor remote control
5m or less 60° or less
Backup switch
A backup switch is provided on the receiver section of the panel surface. Backup switch
When operation from the wireless remote control unit is not possible
(due to flat batteries, a mislaid unit, a unit failure), you can use it as an
emergency means. You should operate this switch manually.
1. If pressed while the air-conditioner is in a halt, it will cause the air-
conditioner to start operation in the automatic mode (in the case of
cooling only, in the cooling mode). Wind speed: Hi fan, Temperature
setting: 23°C, Louver: horizontal
2. If pressed while the air-conditioner is in operation, it will stop the air-
conditioner.
e receiver
Cooling test run operation

● After safety confirmation, turn on the power.
● Transmit a cooling operation command with the wireless remote control unit, while the backup switch
● If the backup switch on the receiver is pressed during a test run, it will end the test run.
● If you cannot operate the unit properly during a test run, please check wiring by consulting with
inspection guides.
How to read the 6-digit display

A 6-digit indicator (7-segment indicator) is provided on the receiver section.
1. An indication will be displayed for one hour after power on.
2. An indication appears for 3.5 seconds when a “Stop” command is sent from the wireless remote
control unit while the air-conditioner is not running.
3. An indication appearing in (1) or (2) above will go off as soon as the unit starts operation.
4. When there are no error records to indicate, addresses are displayed for all of the connected units.
ew. 5. When there are some error records remaining, the error records are displayed.
er when the 6. Error records can be cleared by transmitting a “Stop” command from the wireless remote control unit,
t of 2.4m. while the backup switch is depressed.
7 PJZ012D112 8
- 115 -
RCN-E-E3 PFA012D635
PFA012D635
WIRELESS REMOTE '19 • PAC-DB-333
201801
201701
CONTROLLER&RECEIVER Do
It co
(3) FDEINSTALLATION
series (RCN-E-E3) MANUAL PFA012D635 Use
elec
Imp
Safety precautions Wh
Please read this manual carefully before starting installation work to install the unit properly. mea
Every one of the followings is important information to be observed strictly. It co
pow
WARNING Failure to follow these instructions properly may result in serious consequences The
such as death, severe injury, etc. cou
CAUTION Failure to follow these instructions properly may cause injury or property damage. Do
If de
The following pictograms are used in the text.

D
Keep this manual at a safe place where you can consult with whenever necessary. Show this manual to installers when It co
moving or repairing the unit. When the ownership of the unit is transferred, this manual should be given to a new owner. (1) P
(2) P
(3) H
WARNING (4) H
Consult your dealer or a professional contractor to install the unit. g
Improper installation made on your own may cause electric shocks, fire or dropping of the unit. (5) P
(6) U
Installation work should be performed properly according to this installation manual. (7) P
Improper installation work may result in electric shocks, fire or break-down.
Be sure to use accessories and specified parts for installation work. ① Access
Use of unspecified parts may result in drop, fire or electric shocks.
Please make s
Install the unit properly to a place with sufficient strength to hold the weight.
Be sure to have the electrical wiring work done by qualified electrical installer, and use exclusive circuit.
Power source with insufficient and improper work can cause electric shock and fire.
Shut OFF the main power source before starting electrical work.
Do not modify the unit.
It could cause electric shocks, fire, or break-down. ② Prepara
Be sure to turn OFF the power circuit breaker before repairing/inspecting the unit. Setting on sit
Repairing/inspecting the unit with the power circuit breaker turned ON could cause electric shocks or injury.
PCB on the receiv
Do not install the unit in appropriate environment or where inflammable gas could Default setting is
generate, flow in, accumulate or leak.
If the unit is used at places where air contains dense oil mist, steam, organic solvent vapor, corrosive gas (ammonium, SW1 Preven
shocks, break-down, smoke or fire as a result of significant deterioration of its performance or corrosion. SW2 Receive
Do not install the unit where water vapor is generated excessively or condensation occurs. SW3 Buzzer
It could cause electric shocks, fire, or break-down.
Do not use the unit in a place where it gets wet, such as laundry room. SW4 Auto re
② Preparation before installation (continued) ④ How to

To change setting Master/Slave Connect the at
and connect to
1. Remove four screws located on the back of the receiver and setting when
This installati
detach the board. using plural terminal bloc
2. Change the setting by the switch on PCB. remote controls
- 116 - Up to two receiver
ON
or wired remote
OFF control can be
1 2 3 4 installed in one
Switch
Default settings indoor unit group.
When two receiver
'19 • PAC-DB-333
012D635
012D635 WARNING
201801
201701
Do not wash the unit with water.
Use the specified cables for wiring, and connect them securely with care to protect
electronic parts from external forces.
Improper connections or fixing could cause heat generation, fire, etc.
When installing the unit at a hospital, telecommunication facility, etc., take
operly. measures to suppress electric noises.
quences The influences transmitted from the remote control to medical or communication equipment
ty damage. Do not leave the remote control with its PCB case removed.
If dew, water, insect, etc. enters through the hole, it could cause electric shocks, fire or break-down.
given. CAUTION
D install the wireless kit at the following places in order to avoid malfunction.
nstallers when It could cause break-down or deformation of remote control.
a new owner. (1) Places exposed to direct sunlight (8) Places where the receiver is influenced by
(4) Hot surface or cold surface enough to (9) Places where the receiver is affected by
generate infrared condensation rays of any other communication devices
g of the unit. (5) Places exposed to oil mist or steam directly (10) Places where some object may obstruct the
n manual. (7) Places affected by the direct air flow of the AC unit
① Accessories
ght.
① Receiver 1 1 Wireless remote control (RCN-E2) 1
2 Remote control holder 1
usive circuit. ② Parts set 1
3 Screw for holder 2
. ③ Installation manual 1
④ Wiring 1 5 User’s manual 1

the unit. Setting on site
ocks or injury.
PCB on the receiver has the following switches to set the function.
gas could Default setting is shown with mark.
as (ammonium, SW1 Prevents interference during plural setting
ON : Normal
cause electric OFF : Customized
on. SW2 Receiver master/slave setting
ON : Master
OFF : Slave
ion occurs. SW3 Buzzer
ON : Valid
OFF : Invalid
ON : Valid
SW4 Auto restart
OFF : Invalid
④ How to connect the wiring for control box

er/Slave Connect the attached wiring to the signal terminalblock -
117primary side XY (for grill side) in the control box,
and connect to the CNL connector (3P white) from the receiver .
ng when
This installation is unnecessary for indoor unit that have wiring is already connected from the signal
g plural terminal block to the receiver.
e controls
wo receiver
Wiring from receiver
Do not use the unit in a place where it gets wet, such as laundry room.
'19 • PAC-DB-333
② Preparation before installation (continued) ④ How to

To change setting Master/Slave Connect the at
and connect to
1. Remove four screws located on the back of the receiver and setting when
This installatio
detach the board. using plural terminal bloc
2. Change the setting by the switch on PCB. remote controls
Up to two receiver
ON
or wired remote
OFF control can be
1 2 3 4 installed in one
Switch
Default settings indoor unit group.
When two receiver
or wired remote
control are used, it
Receiver backside is necessary to
change switch on
the PCB to set it as
slave.
For the method of changing the setting, refer to Setting to avoid mixed communication of
　Wireless remote control .
⑤
*The receivable area of the signal refer to ⑥ Receiver .

The receiver can be installed by replacing with a cover of the panel.
CAUTION: When installing the receiver after unit has been fixed, injury
due to falling may result because of working at high place.
① Remove the cover
Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into the dented part (2 places),
and wrench slightly so as not to damage panel surface.
② Connect the wiring
Connect wiring of the receiver to the wiring ed pa
rt
in the back. Dent
ATTENTION: D remove the clamp fixed the wiring.

Connect
Place the connectors

under the panel
③ Installation of the receiver

Check direction of the receiver, and fix to the panel.
CAUTION: Connect the connectors before installing the receiver.
In case of connecting after the receiver had been installed,
it will be necessary to remove the panel.
- 118 -
OFF : Invalid
'19 • PAC-DB-333
④ How to connect the wiring for control box

er/Slave Connect the attached wiring to the signal terminal block primary side XY (for grill side) in the control box,
and connect to the CNL connector (3P white) from the receiver .
ng when
This installation is unnecessary for indoor unit that have wiring is already connected from the signal
g plural terminal block to the receiver.
e controls
o receiver
remote Wiring from receiver
can be
in one
nit group.
wo receiver
remote
are used, it
sary to
3
switch on
to set it as Signal terminal block
2
1
f
X : White
C L (3P, Whire) Y : Black Attached wiring
rt
ed pa
Dent
- 119 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
⑤ Wireless remote control ⑤ Wireles

Installation tips for the remote control holder 2. Setting deta
The followin
Fix the remote control holder using the screws supplied
with this product. Button Numb
* Precautions for installing the holder Wood screw Holder for
Adjust the position so that it is upright. remote control FAN SPEED
Ensure that the screw heads are not protruding.
D attach the holder on plaster wall
MODE
How to insert batteries Ensure the correct

polarity when FILTER
1. Detach the back lid. inserting.
2. Insert the batteries. (two AAA batteries)
3. Reattach the back lid. U/P
(Up/Down)
SILENT
Setting to avoid mixed communication

HI POWER
1. Detach the back lid, and remove the batteries.
2. Cut off the switching wire in the battery compartment using nippers.
3. Insert the batteries, and attach the back lid. Cutting
ON TIMER
Changing the remote control setting OFF TIMER
How to change the Auto Run setting

The Auto Run mode is not available on the building air conditioning and gas heat
NIGHT
pump series (excluding the cooling/heating free multi system). SETBACK
When using the remote control to operate those models, set the remote control to
disable the Auto Run mode. * Refer to service ma
Auto Run setting
② Press the desired one of the buttons shown item 2. while holding down the ①
③ Use the selection buttons, and , to change the setting.
④ Press the SET button.
The buzzer on the remote control signal receiver beeps twice, and the LED
④
lamp flashes four times at two-second intervals. ③
⑥ Receiver ⑥ Receiv
- 120 -
1 Control plural indoor units with one remote control Restrictions on the thickness and length of wire Wireless rem
1. Standard si
Connect the XY terminal with 2 core wire. As for the Standard Within 0.3 mm² × 100m
[Condition]
size, refer to the following note. Within 0.5 mm² × 200m Illuminance
For Packaged air-conditioner series, set the indoor Within 0.75mm² × 300m (When no lig
'19 • PAC-DB-333
⑤ Wireless remote control (continued)

2. Setting details
Button Number indicator Function setting

00 Fun speed setting : Standard
for
e control FAN SPEED 01 Fun speed setting : Setting 1 *
02 Fun speed setting : Setting 2 *
00 Room heating temperature adjustment : Disable
MODE
00 Filter sign display : OFF
FILTER 02 Filter sign display : 600 hours
04 Filter sign display : Operation stop after 1000 hours have elapsed
U/P 00 Anti draft setting : Disable
(Up/Down) 01 Anti draft setting : Enable
SILENT
HI POWER
02 Infrared sensor control (Motion sensor control) : Auto OFF only
03 Infrared sensor control (Motion sensor control) : Power control + Auto OFF
00 Cooling fan residual-period running : Disable
01 Cooling fan residual-period running : 0.5 hours
ON TIMER
00 Heating fan residual-period running : Disable
01 Heating fan residual-period running : 0.5 hours
OFF TIMER
00 Remote control signal receiver LED : Brightness High
NIGHT
01 Remote control signal receiver LED : Brightness Low
SETBACK
02 Remote control signal receiver LED : OFF
* Refer to service manual.
n setting
⑥ Receiver (continued)
gth of wire Wireless remote control's operable area- 121 -
1. Standard signal receiving range 2. Points for attention in connecting a plural
00m
[Condition] number of indoor units
00m Illuminance at the receiver area: 300
360 lux. [Condition]
00m (When no lighting fixture is located within 1m 300 lux.
Illuminance at the receiver area: 360
'19 • PAC-DB-333
⑥ Receiver ⑥ Receiv
1 Control plural indoor units with one remote control Restrictions on the thickness and length of wire Wireless rem
1. Standard si
Connect the XY terminal with 2 core wire. As for the Standard Within 0.3 mm² × 100m
[Condition]
size, refer to the following note. Within 0.5 mm² × 200m Illuminance
For Packaged air-conditioner series, set the indoor Within 0.75mm² × 300m (When no lig
unit address with SW2 on the indoor unit PCB from Within 1.25mm² × 400m of indoor un
to [F] so as not to duplicate. Within 2.0 mm² × 600m
For the shop series
1m
For VRF series, set the indoor unit address with SW1, SW2 and SW5-2 on the indoor unit PCB from [000] Wireless
to [127] so as not to duplicate. control
Terminalblock Within
X Y

Address (0) KIT Address (1) Address ( F )
Backup swi
For the building air-conditioning and gas heat pump series A backup switch
Set the indoor unit and outdoor unit numbers by manually specifying the addresses. section of the p
Use the rotary switches SW1 and SW2 provided on the indoor unit PCB (printed circuit board) to set the When operation
indoor unit numbers so that they are not duplicated. unit is not possi
unit, a unit failur
Master/Slave setting when using plural remote control means. You sho
Up to two receivers can be installed in one indoor unit group. If pressed w
will cause t
in the autom
Indoor unit only, in the
Remote control line Switch Setting Function Wind spee
(No polarity) Louver: ho
ON Master If pressed
SW2
OFF Slave Cooling test
Receiver Receiver After safety
SW2[Master] SW2[Slave] Transmit a c
on the receiv
If the backup
If you canno
inspection g
How to read
A two-digit indi
An indicat
An indicat
control un
An indicat
When ther
When ther
Error reco
unit, while
- 122 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
⑥ Receiver (continued)
gth of wire Wireless remote control's operable area
1. Standard signal receiving range 2. Points for attention in connecting a plural
100m
[Condition] number of indoor units
200m Illuminance at the receiver area: 300
360 lux. [Condition]
300m (When no lighting fixture is located within 1m 300 lux.
Illuminance at the receiver area: 360
400m of indoor unit in an ordinary office)
600m Ceiling surface
2.4m
1m
5m
from [000] Wireless remote
control unit (Top view)
Floor surface
Within 5m 5m 5m
(Top view)
5m Receivable range Receivable range
Receivable range
60° 60°
60°
Backup switch
A backup switch is provided on the receiver
section of the panel surface.
to set the When operation from the wireless remote control
unit is not possible (due to flat batteries, a mislaid TIMER
unit, a unit failure), you can use it as an emergency CHECK RUN Backup switch
means. You should operate this switch manually.
If pressed while the air conditioner is in a halt, it
will cause the air conditioner to start operation
in the automatic mode (in the case of cooling
only, in the cooling mode).
Wind speed: Hi fan, Temperature setting: 23°C,
Louver: horizontal.
If pressed while the air conditioner is in operation, it will stop the air conditioner.
Cooling test run operation
After safety confirmation, turn on the power.
Transmit a cooling operation command with the wireless remote control unit, while the backup switch
If the backup switch on the receiver is pressed during a test run, it will end the test run.
If you cannot operate the unit properly during a test run, please check wiring by consulting with
inspection guides.
How to read the two-digit display
A two-digit indicator (7-segment indicator) is provided on the receiver section.
An indication will be displayed for one hour after power on.
An indication appears for 3.5 seconds when a Stop command is sent from the wireless remote
control unit while the air conditioner is not running.
An indication appearing in (1) or (2) above will go off as soon as the unit starts operation.
When there are no error records to indicate, addresses are displayed for all of the connected units.
When there are some error records remaining, the error records are displayed.
Error records can be cleared by transmitting a “Stop” command from the wireless remote control
unit, while the backup switch is depressed.
- 123 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
11.2 Motion sensor kit

(1) FDT series (LB-T-5W-E)
PJF012D036
PJF012D036
B B
WARNING
● Connect the wiring to the PCB in the control box on the indoor unit and hold the wiring
securely so as not to apply unexpected stress on the PCB.
● Make sure the power source is turned off when electric wiring work.
CAUTION
● Do not install the motion sensor kit at the following places in order to aboid malfunction.
(1) Places exposed to direct sunlight (7) Places where the motion sensor is
(2) Places near heat devices influenced by the fluorescent lamp or
(3) High humidity places sunlight
(4) Hot surface or cold surface enough to (8) Places where the motion sensor is affected
generate condensation by infrared rays of any other
(5) Places exposed to oil mist or steam directly communication devices
(6) Places affected by the direct air flow of the (9) Places where some object may obstruct
Indoor unit the motion sensor
● Do not leave the motion sensor without the cover.

　 In case the cover needs to be detached, protect the motion sensor with a packaging or bag.
In order to keep it away from water and dust.
Attention
Instruct the customer how to operate it correctly referring to the instruction manual.
For the installation method of the air-conditioner itself, refer to the installation manual enclosed in the
package.
Accessories
Please make sure that you have the motion sensor.
Motion sensor
- 124 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
Installing the motion sensor

It is possible to install the motion sensor by replacing with a corner lid on the panel.
Aim of the detectable scope

Indoor unit
h
800mm
Hight of the ceiling 2.7 3.5 4.0
Detectable scope① about 4.5 about 6.4 about 7.6
Detectable scope② about 6.4 about 8.3 about 9.5
Preparation before installation

1 Install the panel onto the indoor unit according to the installation manual for the panel.
2 Remove the inlet grille.
3 Remove the corner lid (A) located on the panel.
4 Loosen 2 screws for the control lid. (It is unnecessury to remove the screws.)
5 Slide the control lid, and open and remove it.
(A)
- 125 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
Installation of the motion sensor

① Loosen the bolts which fix the panel, and make a gap between the panel and the indoor unit.
② Pass the wiring of the motion sensor through the opening of the panel.
③ Hang the wiring on the hook which is on the panel's inside.
④ Pass the wiring through the opening of the control box.
⑤ Connect the connecter to CNL(3P,Black) on PWB in the contorl box.
⑥ Tighten the bolts which fix the panel.
⑦ Install the motion sensor on the panel.
⑧ Fix the motion sensor by the screw.
⑨ Reinstall the control lid, and tighten 2 screws.
- 126 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
Setting the motion sensor

The motion sensor will not function if it is only installed.
Set the function of the motion sensor by the wired or wireless remote control.
Refer to the manual instruction of each remote control for the setting procedure.
Wired:RC-EX1A, RC-E5, RCH-E3
Wireless: RCN-E1R
- 127 -
PJZ012D122
'19 • PAC-DB-333
201802
PJZ012D122 A
(2) FDU, FDUM series (LB-KIT)
Option (A)
WARNING
● Connect the wiring to the PCB in the control box on the indoor unit and hold the wiring ▶
strength to ins
securely so as not to apply unexpected stress on the PCB. screws.
● Make sure the power source is turned off when electric wiring work. ① Prepare a re
in advance.
Otherwise, electric shock, malfunction and improper running may occur. ② Remove the
and slide the
③ Pull the wirin
CAUTION
● Do not install the motion sensor kit at the following places in order to avoid malfunction. U
(1) Places exposed to direct sunlight (8) Places where the motion sensor is affected
(2) Places near heat devices by infrared rays of any other communication
(3) High humidity places devices
(4) Hot surface or cold surface enough to (9) Places where some object may obstruct the
generate condensation motion sensor Sc
(5) Places exposed to oil mist or steam directly (10) Place that the motion sensor have a shock
(6) Places affected by the direct air flow of (11) Place with the strong radio wave or Static
the Indoor unit electricity ④ Pass the rel
(7) Places where the motion sensor is (12) Place that motion sensor lens become lower case.
influenced by the fluorescent lamp or tainted or have damaged. Dusty place ⑤
sunlight (13) Place where it runs in parallel with strong tighten it in 2
voltage lines such as power source wiring (4 locations)

In case the cover needs to be detached, protect the motion sensor with a packaging or bag.
Attention
Relay wir
• This manual describes how to install the motion sensor kit.
• Instruct the customer how to operate it correctly referring to the instruction manual.
• For the installation method of the air-conditioner itself, refer to the installation manual enclosed in the
package.
⑥ Using a crim
Accessories wiring of mo
Please make sure that all components are in the package.
Motion sensor Wiring <1> Wiring <2> 2 screws Manual

In case of CnL connector In case of CnL connector
on the indoor unit PCB is not on the indoor unit
(FDT/FDK/FDTC) PCB ⑦ Place the co
ceiling space
⑧ Seal the wiri
with putty.
ø Please prepare a relay wiring for connecting the motion sensor and indoor unit on site. (0.2 mm2 or ⑨ Taking care
thicker, triplex (red, white and black) cable for communication, with the maximum length of 8 m.) slip the uppe
and tighten t
Option (B)
▶
• The recommended height is lower than 4000mm for motion sensor. When the installation height is higher, screws.
motion detection accuracy might be reduced.
- 128 -
• Sensor will detect the object with a different temperature from the surrounding. ① Remove the
(The same a
• Motion sensor is more sensitive to motions in the direction of mark. ② Pull the wirin
• Sensor may not detect small children or infants with little motion.
Lowe
• Although motion sensor can be installed on a wall, it is recommended to install it on the ceiling plane.
• If the sensor is installed on the wall, the sensing distance in the front direction is about 5m, covering the
In case of CnL connector In case of CnL connector
on the indoor unit PCB is not on the indoor unit
(FDT/FDK/FDTC) PCB ⑦ Place the co
ceiling spac
⑧ Seal the wir
with putty.
ø Please prepare a relay wiring for connecting the motion sensor and indoor unit on site. (0.2 mm2 or ⑨ Taking care
'19 • PAC-DB-333 slip the uppe
thicker, triplex (red, white and black) cable for communication, with the maximum length of 8 m.)
and tighten
Option (B)
▶
• The recommended height is lower than 4000mm for motion sensor. When the installation height is higher, screws.
• Sensor will detect the object with a different temperature from the surrounding. ① Remove the
(The same a
• Motion sensor is more sensitive to motions in the direction of mark. ② Pull the wirin
Lowe
• Although motion sensor can be installed on a wall, it is recommended to install it on the ceiling plane.
• If the sensor is installed on the wall, the sensing distance in the front direction is about 5m, covering the
angle of about 100 degrees.
Side of screws for fixing the case ③

in 2 location
attached scr
The detectable area ④ Using a crim
the relay wir
sensor.
Ceiling plane (The same a
⑤ Taking care
into the lowe
(The same a
⑥ Seal the cut
h
Option (C)
Floor face
① Set up the s
Height of the ceiling h (m) 2.7 3.5 4.0 relay wiring
0.8
advance.
φA Detectable area φ A (m) 4.5 6.4 7.6 Seal the rela
Detectable area φ B (m) 6.4 8.3 9.5 putty.
φB

20.5 4.5
There are the following 3 methods to install the motion sensor 15
on the ceiling plane or wall surface (hereinafter called “ceiling φ
22.5 2.5
plane”). Select the method according to the installation

position.
<How to install>
(A) Direct installation by screws to the ceiling plane with
the wiring in the ceiling space.
(B) Direct installation by screws to the ceiling plane with
the wiring in the room.
(C) Installation with switch box (prepare at the site)
Positional relation for pulling out relay wiring
hole and installing holes.
- 129 -
012D122
201802
'19 • PAC-DB-333
Option (A)
▶
Ceiling plane
strength to install the motion sensor directly with
screws.
① Prepare a relay wiring on site and lay out the wiring

in advance.
② Remove the screw at the side of the motion sensor Relay wiring φ15 hole
and slide the upper case in the direction of the arrow. (prepare on site) (for passing
③ Pull the wiring of the motion sensor as below. through the wiring)
Lower case
Upper case
ted
tion
the
Screw
ock
ic
④ Pass the relay wiring through the hole on the
lower case.
⑤
g tighten it in 2 locations of the installing holes
ng (4 locations) with the attached screws.
Ceiling plane
Relay wiring
Lower case Installing hole
Installing hole
n the
Screws
⑥ Using a crimping terminal, etc., connect the same color to the relay wiring (prepare on site) and the
wiring of motion sensor.
White White
Red Connect Red
wirings with the
Black same colors Black
Manual Relay wiring Wiring from the
motion sensor Sensor board
⑦ Place the connecting part inside of the Relay wiring Caution:

ceiling space. Connecting part In order to prevent
⑧ Seal the wiring hole on the lower case tracking, be sure to
with putty. perform construction
m2 or ⑨ Taking care not to pinch the wirings, so as not to clog up
slip the upper case into the lower case, the connecting part
and tighten the screws. with dust, etc.
Option (B)
▶
ght is higher, screws.
① Remove the screw at the side of the motion sensor and slide the upper case in the direction of the arrow.
(The same as ② of Option (A))
② Pull the wiring of the motion sensor toward the side. Cut off the thinner part of the upper case.
Lower case - 130 - Thinner part
ng plane.
overing the
motion sensor Sensor board
⑦ Place the connecting part inside of the Relay wiring Caution:

ceiling space. Connecting part In order to prevent
⑧ Seal the wiring hole on the lower case tracking, be sure to
with putty. perform construction
m2 or ⑨ Taking care not to pinch the wirings, so as not to
'19clog up
• PAC-DB-333
slip the upper case into the lower case, the connecting part
and tighten the screws. with dust, etc.
Option (B)
▶
ght is higher, screws.
① Remove the screw at the side of the motion sensor and slide the upper case in the direction of the arrow.
② Pull the wiring of the motion sensor toward the side. Cut off the thinner part of the upper case.
Lower case Thinner part
ng plane.
overing the
Upper case
③
in 2 locations of the installing holes (4 locations) with the
attached screws. (The same as ⑤ of Option (A))
④ Using a crimping terminal, etc., connect the same color to
the relay wiring (prepare on site) and the wiring of motion
sensor.
(The same as ⑥ of Option (A))
⑤ Taking care not to pinch the wirings, slip the upper case
into the lower case, and tighten the screws.
(The same as ⑨ of Option (A))
⑥ Seal the cut part at Step ② with putty.
Option (C) φ15 hole (ceiling hole)

for passing through the wiring
① Set up the switch box and
5 4.0 relay wiring (prepare on site) in
advance.
4 7.6 Seal the relay wiring inlet with φ15 hole
3 9.5 putty. (ceiling hole)
for passing
through the wiring
15 Switch box Switch box

22.5 2.5
Positional relation for the switch box and installing holes

Relay wiring
(prepare on site) Conduit pipe
(prepare on site)
Lock nut Wall
(prepare on site)
Switch box
(prepare
Switch box
(prepare on site) on site) Bushing
(prepare on site)
Seal with putty
elay wiring
- 131 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
② Remove the screw at the side of the motion sensor

and slide the upper case in the direction of the arrow. Lower case
③ Pull the wiring of the motion sensor. Thank you very

(The same as ③ of Option (A)) kit by Mitsubish
along with the in
④ Pass the relay wiring through the hole on the lower
case from switch box.
Installing hole
⑤ Fix the lower case to switch box using the installing
hole (1 place).
Switch box installing hole
Fix to the
switch box
● Iffora ass
ch
Lower case
Installing hole
should
A halt o
Switch box
Install to the
ceiling plane
sensor
Installing hole
⑥ Connect the same color to the relay wiring (prepare • The sen
on site) and the wiring of motion sensor. • Installatio
(The same as ⑥ of Option (A))
may cau
⑦ Place the connecting part between switch box and • Due to c
the hole of the lower case through passed the wiring
at step ④ .
This product us
Please set the c
⑧ Taking care not to pinch the wirings, slip the upper Indoor unit con
case into the lower case, and tighten the screws.
(The same as ⑨ of Option (A))
① Power cont
② Auto-off
①+②
All disabled
(default setting
If the sensor is
Wiring connection in the control box of indoor unit
Refer to the ne
CAUTION: Attached wirings to the motion sensor vary depending on the model of the indoor unit.
20:20 (Tue)
Make sure your model before installing.
Heating Set temp
<In case of the CnL connector is on the indoor unit PCB (FDT/FDK/FDTC)>
① Connect the same color to the relay wiring (prepare on site) and the attached wiring <1>.
Timer
② Remove the control box cover from the indoor unit.

③ Connect CnL connector (3P, black) to the PCB.
Power control ON
F1: High power F2: Ene
CnL connector
White White (3P, black)
Connect 16:32 (Mon)
Red wirings with the Red
Black same colors Black Cooling Set temp
Relay wiring Attached wiring to Timer

(prepare on site) motion sensor <1>
In auto-off mode
F1: High power F2: En
<Incase of the CnL connector is not on the indoor unit PCB>

③ Connect CnG connector (4P, blue) to the PCB.
④ Connect CnV2 connector (4P, black) to the PCB.
- 132 -
CnG connector
(4P, blue)
Control s
White
Red Connect
wirings with the
White
Red ● Refer to the
Black same colors Black TOP scree
Relay wiring Attached wiring to
③ Connect CnL connector (3P, black) to the PCB.
Power control ON
F1: High power F2: Ene
CnL connector
White White (3P, black)
Connect 16:32 (Mon)
Red wirings with the Red
Black same colors Black Cooling Set temp
Relay wiring Attached wiring to '19 • PAC-DB-333 Timer

(prepare on site) motion sensor <1>
In auto-off mode
F1: High power F2: En
<Incase of the CnL connector is not on the indoor unit PCB>

CnG connector
(4P, blue)
Control s
White
Red Connect
wirings with the
White
Red ● Refer to the
Black same colors Black TOP scree
Relay wiring Attached wiring to
(prepare on site) motion sensor <2> CnV2 connector
(4P, black)
16:14 (Mon)
Cooling
<For FDT> <For FDTC> Timer
CnL connector
(3P, black) Now stopping.
F1: High power
● Refer to the
■ Infrared sen
Presence of
■ When the R
Infrared sensor control
Power control Disabl
Auto-off Disabl
<For FDK> <For the other indoor units> 1

Se
Select the item.
CnG connector
(4P, blue)
CnL connector
(3P, black) Control s
CnV2 connector
● Refer to the i
(4P, black) Indoor func
1. How to set
① Press th
② Press th
FUNCTI
③ Use the
④ Press th
The buz
lamp flas
Setting the motion sensor 2. Setting deta
The motion sensor will not function if it is only installed. Button

Refer to the manual instruction of each remote control for the setting procedure. SILENT
Note: It is not possible to set by the following remote control models or older. HI POWER
Wireless: RCN-E1R
- 133 -
PFA012D633
201802
'19 • PAC-DB-333
(3) FDE series (LB-E) PFA012D633 A
WARNING Installin
● Connect the wiring to the PCB in the control box on the indoor unit and hold the wiring Motion sensor c
securely so as not to apply unexpected stress on the PCB. CAUTION: Ins
Loose connection or hold will cause abnormal heat generation or fire. Wh
● Make sure the power source is turned off when electric wiring work. ① Remove th
be
CAUTION
● Do not install the motion sensor kit at the following places in order to avoid malfunction. ② Insert a too
(1) Places exposed to direct sunlight (8) Places where the motion sensor is affected paintwork o
(2) Places near heat devices by infrared rays of any other communication ③ Connect th
(3) High humidity places devices connector:
(4) Hot surface or cold surface enough to (9) Places where some object may obstruct the
generate condensation motion sensor correct dire
(5) Places exposed to oil mist or steam directly (10) Place that the motion sensor have a shock CAUTION: Do n
(6) Places affected by the direct air flow of the (11) Place with the strong radio wave or static
Indoor unit electricity
(7) Places where the motion sensor is (12) Place that motion sensor lens become
influenced by the fluorescent lamp or tainted or have damaged. Dusty place
sunlight
In case the cover needs to be detached, protect the motion sensor with a packaging or bag.
Attention
• This manual describes how to install the motion sensor kit.
• Instruct the customer how to operate it correctly referring to the instruction manual. ④ Install the m
• For the installation method of the air-conditioner itself, refer to the installation manual enclosed in the Place the c
package. motion sen
CAUTION: Con
In c
Accessories pan
Please make sure that all components are in the package.

Motion sensor (ø) Manual Wiring c
① Connect th
Attached wiring to the motion sensor kit and black,
② Fix the wirin
③ Connect Cn
④ Connect Cn
ø Wiring from the motion sensor and the attached wiring to the
motion sensor kit have been connected when shipped from the
factory.
Remove the connector at the position of mark and connect it
to the attached wiring to the indoor unit before use.
2 Installing the motion sensor

Installing the motion -
sensor
134 -
• It is possible to install the motion sensor by replacing the indoor unit.
• The recommended height is lower than 4000 mm for motion sensor. When the installation height is higher,
ø Wiring from the motion sensor and the attached wiring to the
motion sensor kit have been connected when shipped from the
factory.
Remove the connector at the position of mark and connect it
to the attached wiring to the indoor unit before use.
'19 • PAC-DB-333
2 Installing the motion sensor

• It is possible to install the motion sensor by replacing the indoor unit.
• The recommended height is lower than 4000 mm for motion sensor. When the installation height is higher,
• Sensor will detect the object with a different temperature from the surrounding.
• Use the separate motion sensor so that person's activity can be detected when the detectable area differs
from the person's activity area.
Setti
• Use the separate motion sensor when using both wireless remote control and motion sensor together.
The motion sen
Motion sensor Set the function

Refer to the ma
Note: It is not p
Wired:RC
Wireless
The detectable area
Ceiling plane
Wall
surface
h
Floor
face
0.8
A
φA
B
φB
Height of the ceiling h (m) 2.7 3.5 4.0

Detectable area A (m) 2.9 3.9 4.5
Detectable area φ A (m) 4.5 6.4 7.6
Detectable area B (m) 3.9 4.8 5.4
Detectable area φ B (m) 6.4 8.3 9.5
- 135 -
12D633
201802
'19 • PAC-DB-333
Installing the motion sensor (before installing the unit)

Motion sensor can be installed by replacing with a cover of the panel.
CAUTION: Install the motion sensor before installing the unit.
When installing the motion sensor after unit has been fixed, injury due to falling may result
because of working at high place.
① Remove the connector that connects the motion sensor and the wiring.
② Insert a tool into the dented part (2 places) of the panel cover, and wrench slightly not to damage the
ted paintwork of the panel to remove the cover.
tion ③ Connect the wiring from the panel’s hole (attached to the indoor unit, color of the wiring: white, red and black,
connector: 3P, white) to the wiring from the motion sensor. Make sure to install the motion sensor in the
the
correct direction.
ck CAUTION: Do not remove the clamp fixed the wiring.
c
.
Connect the wiring
Dented part
④ Install the motion sensor

n the Place the connector under the panel and install it to the panel with careful attention to the direction of the
motion sensor.
CAUTION: Connect the connectors before installing the motion sensor.
In case of connecting after the motion sensor has been installed, it will be necessary to remove the
panel.
l Wiring connection in the control box

① Connect the wiring from the motion sensor (attached to the indoor unit, color of the wiring: white, red
and black, connector: 3P, white) to the attached wiring to the motion sensor kit.
② Fix the wiring with clips (6 places).
Connect the wiring Attached wiring to the

(3P, white) indoor unit
CnG connector CnV2 connector Clips Connector (3P, white) Clip

(4P, blue) (4P, black)
- 136 -
Clip Control box Attached wiring to the Wiring from the

t is higher,
motion sensor kit motion sensor
④ Install the motion sensor
n the Place the connector under the panel and install it to the panel with careful attention to the direction of the
motion sensor.
CAUTION: Connect the connectors before installing the motion sensor.
'19 • PAC-DB-333
In case of connecting after the motion sensor has been installed, it will be necessary to remove the
panel.
l Wiring connection in the control box

① Connect the wiring from the motion sensor (attached to the indoor unit, color of the wiring: white, red
and black, connector: 3P, white) to the attached wiring to the motion sensor kit.
② Fix the wiring with clips (6 places).
Connect the wiring Attached wiring to the

(3P, white) indoor unit
CnG connector CnV2 connector Clips Connector (3P, white) Clip

(4P, blue) (4P, black)
Clip Control box Attached wiring to the Wiring from the

t is higher,
motion sensor kit motion sensor
area differs Setting the motion sensor

ogether.
The motion sensor will not function if it is only installed.
Refer to the manual instruction of each remote control for the setting procedure.
Wireless: RCN-E1R
- 137 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
(4) User’s manual PJZ012D164
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Control s

WARNING ● Refer to the
TOP scree
● for
If a child, person with disease or other persons needed
assist uses this product, people around the person 16:14 (Mon)
Cooling
A halt of the air-conditioner due to abnormal situation or motion Timer
sensor’s control may cause a feeling of sickness or accident.

Now stopping.
F1: High power
ATTENTION
• The sensor may not detect a person near the border of detection range.
• Installation near an object with a different temperature from the surrounding
may cause a false detection of human.
●■ Refer to the
Infrared sen
Presence of
• Due to correction of temperature setting, some people may feel chilly. ■ When the R
This product uses infrared sensor to detect person’s activity level to support control of air-conditioner. Power control Disab
Please set the control you like from the remote control. Auto-off Disab
Indoor unit control Detective situation Description of control Display of eco touch 1
remote control
Se
Lower the indoor temperature Select the item.
Activity level is large setting for comfort. Power control ON
① Power control
Raise the indoor temperature Power control ON
Activity level is small setting for energy-saving.
② Auto-off
No one is detected for 1 hour Stop operation and stand by In auto-off mode Control s
No one is detected for 12 hours Stop operation -
①+② Any combination of the above Any of the above Any of the above ● Refer to the
All disabled - Standard control - Indoor funct
(default setting)
1. How to set i
If the sensor is disconnected or defective, the control will be set as if it no detects (or less) activity level. ① Press th
Refer to the next section for setting method. ② Press th
FUNCTI
Menu • When power control is enabled ③ Use the
④ Press th
20:20 (Tue)
Direction
The amount of human motion is detected by a motion sensor to adjust the Set
Heating Set temp temp. The buz
Timer
During power control, “Power control ON” will be displayed on the message
display.
Power control ON 2. Setting deta
F1: High power F2: Energy-saving
• When auto-off is enabled Button

16:32 (Mon)
Menu
The unit will enter the “Operation wait” state when an hour has elapsed since
Cooling Set temp
Direction the last time a human presence was detected and will be in “Complete stop” SILENT
state after another 12 hours.
Timer “Operation wait”...The unit stops but will resume operation when human presence
is detected. When the unit is in “Complete stop”, “In auto-off
In auto-off mode mode” will be displayed on the message display.
F1: High power F2: Energy-saving HI POWER
“Complete stop”...When auto-off is enabled, the unit stops. The unit will not
resume operation even when human presence is detected.
The message “In auto-off mode” will disappear from the message
display, and the operation lamp will turn off.
- 138 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
Control setting (from eco touch remote control)

● Refer to the installation manual for eco touch remote control to activate the infrared sensor (motion sensor).
TOP screen Menu Service setting Installation settings Service password
② Installation settings menu #2 ⑰ Infrared (motion) sensor setting

Menu
16:14 (Mon) Installation settings
Cooling Set temp
Direction
Address setting of main IU 13 Infrared sensor setting
on Timer
IU back-up function 14 Disable
. Infrared sensor setting 17 Enable

Now stopping.
F1: High power F2: Energy-saving
Previous Back
on range. Select the item. Select the item.

Back
rrounding
●■ Refer to the installation manual for eco touch remote control to set control mode.
Infrared sensor (motion sensor) control (for IUs with motion sensors)
Presence of humans and the amount of motion are detected by a motion sensor to perform various controls.
l chilly. ■ When the R/C is set as the sub R/C, the infrared sensor (motion sensor) control cannot be set.
Tap the Menu button on the TOP screen and select
Energy-saving setting Infrared sensor control or Motion sensor control .
oner. Power control Disable Enable
Auto-off Disable Enable The Infrared sensor control screen and contents of the current settings are displayed.
co touch 1 ① Enable/disable power control.
ontrol 2 ② Enable/disable auto-off.
Select the item.
Set Back ③ After you set each item, tap the Set button.
ON The display returns to the Energy-saving setting menu screen.
3
ON
de Control setting (from wireless remote control)

ove ● Refer to the installation manual for wireless remote control to enable motion sensor in Indoor function settings .
ity level. ① Press the ON/OFF button to stop the unit.
② ①
② Press the desired one of the buttons shown item 2. while holding down the
FUNCTION SETTING switch. ②
ust the Set ④ Press the SET button. ③ ④
The buzzer on the remote control signal receiver beeps twice, and the LED
message ②
2. Setting details
Number
Button Function setting
indicator
sed since
ete stop” 00 Infrared sensor setting (Motion sensor setting) : Disable
SILENT
n presence
auto-off 00 Infrared sensor control (Motion sensor control) : Disable
HI POWER
ll not 02 Infrared sensor control (Motion sensor control) : Auto OFF only
tected.
03 Infrared sensor control (Motion sensor control) : Power control and Auto OFF
the message
- 139 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
11.3 Simple wired remote control (RCH-E3)

Notes:
Following functions of FDU indoor unit series are not able to be set with this simple wired remote control (RCH-E3).
　1. 4-fan speed setting (P-Hi/Hi/Me/Lo) 3-fan speed setting (Hi/Me/Lo)
Names and functions of sections Remote contr

Remote control sensor
83.5
33.5
Operation/Inspection lamp ON/OFF button
During operation: Green Button to start/stop the air‐conditioner
failure: Red
Wiring outlet
(In case of embedding wiring)
12×7 slot hole
MODE button
Note: Install
Use to select the mode.
FAN SPEED button
Button to set the fan speed
In case of exp
TEMP button
Use to raise the setting temperature. 0.3mm2×2 cores
AIR CON No. button

TEMP button
LCD
Use to lower the setting temperature. Indicates the No. of air‐conditioner
which is connected.
Operation mode display Indoor unit No. display VRF series outdoor unit No. display
: Cooling
: Dry
: Fan operation
: Heating
: Auto mode Fan speed display
Central control display Wiring specific

Displayed when controlling the Ventilation display (1) Wiring of remot
unit with the central control. (2) Maximum prolo
This is lit during the ventilation If the prolonga
operation. But, the wiring
Change the wi
necessary at t
connecting sec
Control disable display Setting TEMP display
The lamp is lit for 3 seconds Error code display 1
when a disabled button is U
pressed. U
U
Installation of remote control

Do not install the remote control at the following places in order to avoid malfunction.
(1) Places exposed to direct sunlight (4) Hot surface or cold surface enough to generate condensation
(2) Places near heat devices (5) Places exposed to oil mist or steam directly
(3) High humidity places (6) Uneven surface
PJZ000Z272
- 140 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
MITSUBISHI HEAVY INDUSTRIES,LTD.
AIR-CONDITIONING & REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS HEADQUARTERS
Remote control installation dimensions In case of embedding wiring

or
Wall surface
67
Wiring
83.5
117
16
33.5
conditioner
Wiring outlet Electrical box

(In case of embedding wiring) （Prepare on site）
12×7 slot hole Installation hole
9×4.5 slot hole （2 places）
Note: Installation screw for remote control 15

M4 screw (2 pieces)
n
In case of exposing wiring The remote control wiring can be extracted from the upper center.
After the thin part in the upper side of the remote control upper
case is scraped with a nipper or knife, remove burr with a file.
0.3mm2×2 cores Thin part
Upper case
on
LCD
tioner
Sheath
120
play Upper case
XY
X, Y Terminal block
70 wiring
Attach M3 screw
display with washer The peeling length of each wiring is as follows:
X wiring : 160mm
Y wiring : 150mm Sheath
Peeling length
Wiring specifications
display (1) Wiring of remote control should use 0.3mm2 × 2 cores wires or cables. (on-site configuration)
(2) Maximum prolongation of remote control wiring is 600m.
he ventilation If the prolongation is over 100m, change to the size below.
But, the wiring in the remote control case should be 0.3mm2 (recommended) to 0.5mm2. Unit:mm
Change the wire size outside of the case according to wire connecting. Waterproof treatment is
necessary at the wire
connecting section. Be careful about contact failure.
P display Length Wiring thickness
display 100 to 200m 0.5mm2×2 cores Adapted to RoHS directive
- 141 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
In case of exposing cord 3. Master/ slave setting w

Simple Remote Control Installation Manual PJZ012D069 A ⑴ Make certain to remove a screw on the bottom surface of the ⑴ Up to two remote control
remote control.
Read together with indoor unit's installation manual. indoor uni
㻌
WARNING ⑴
䠴䕿
䕿䠵㻌
● Fasten the wiring to the terminal securely and hold the cable securely so as not to apply Screw
unexpected stress on the terminal. ⑵ Remove the upper case of the remote control. 䕿䠴䕿䠵㻌
Loose connection or hold will cause abnormal heat generation or fire. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver to a concave portion of Remote control “Master”
㻌
● Make sure the power source is turned off when electric wiring work. the bottom surface of the remote control and slightly SW1-1 “OFF”
Otherwise, electric shock, malfunction and improper running may occur. twist it, and the case is removed. ⑵ Set the 㻌switch SW1-1 of the
Upper case (Note) • The remote control the
CAUTION • Install the master rem
⑵ • The air-conditioner op
● Do not install the remote control at the following places in order to avoid malfunction.
(1) Places exposed to direct sunlight (4) Hot surface or cold surface enough to generate condensation master / slave setting
(2) Places near heat devices (5) Places exposed to oil mist or steam directly ⑶ The remote control cord can be extracted from the
(3) High humidity places (6) Uneven surface upper center.
● Do not leave the remote control without the upper case. After the thin part in the upper side of the remote
Thin part
In case the upper cace needs to be detached, protect the remote control with a packaging box control upper case is scraped with a nipper or knife,
or bag in order to keep it away from water and dust. remove burr with a file.
⑶ 4. The indication when po

Accessories Remote control, wood screw (ȭ3.5×16) 2 pieces
⑴ At the time of turning the
Prepare on site Remote control cord (2 cores) (Refer to [2. Installation and wiring of remote control]) becomes as shown below
[In case of embedding cord] Electrical box, M4 screw (2 pieces) The number displayed on
[In case of exposing cord] Cord clamp (if needed) ⑷ The lower case of the remote control is mounted to
and this is not an error co
a flat wall with two accessory wood screws.
1. Installation procedure
Lower case
In case of embedding cord
⑴ Make certain to remove the screw on the bottom Wall
surface ⑵ Then, “88.0 °C” blinks on
surface of the remote control. control and the indoor un
⑸ Connect the remote control cord to the terminal block. ⑷ ⑶ In the case of connecting
Connect the terminals (X and Y) of the remote control and certain to set the master
⑴ If the slave remote contro
Screw the terminals (X and Y) of the indoor unit. (No polarity of X and
Y) established.
⑵ Remove the upper case of the remote control. ⑷ If a state where the comm
The wiring route is as shown in the right.
Insert a flat-blade screwdriver to a concave portion of the bottom control and the indoor un
surface of the remote control and slightly twist it, and the case is about for 30 minutes, “E”
removed. the indoor unit and the o
㼄㼅 the remote control.
Upper case
⑸
5. Confirmation method f
⑵ 2 2 Return air temperature can be
The wiring in the remote control case should be 0.3 mm (recommended) to 0.5 mm at
maximum. ⑴ Press AIR CON No. but
⑶ Pre-bury the electrical box and remote control cord. Further, peel off the sheath. “88” blinks on the tempe
(“88” blinks for approxim
The peeling length of each wiring is as follows:
↓
Remote control cord X wiring : 160mm Sheath Then, the return air temp
Electrical box Peeling length (Example) return air temp
Y wiring : 150mm
Prepare on site (Note) For the return air t
⑶ ⑹ Mount the upper case for restoring to its former state so as not to unit is displayed; h
crimp the remote control cord, and secure with the removed screw. detected temperat
⑷ Prepare two M4 screws (recommended length: 12 – 16mm), and install the lower case to the electrical box. ⑵ Press ON/OFF but
Do not use a screw whose screw head is larger than the height of the wall around the screw hole. ⑺ In the case of exposing installation, secure the remote control cord to the wall surface with a End.
cord clamp so as not to loosen the remote control cord. [In the case that the remote th
remote control ]
⑴ Press AIR CON No. but
Lower case 2. Installation and wiring of remote control indoor unit No. indicator:
(Among the connected in
⑴ Wiring of remote control should use 0.3mm × 2 cores wires or cables. (on-site configuration)
2
⑷ number is displayed.)
⑵ Maximum prolongation of remote control wiring is 600 m.
Wiring outlet ⑵ Press TEMP△ or TE
If the prolongation is over 100m, change to the size below.
Two M4 screws (head: ø8 or less) (prepare on site) Select the indoor unit No.
But, the wiring in the remote control case should be 0.3mm 2 (recommended) to 0.5mm2.
⑶ Press MODE button.
Change the wire size outside of the case according to wire connecting. Waterproof treatment is Dectder the indoor unit N
⑸ Connect the remote control cord to the terminal block. necessary at the wire (Example) indoor unit No.
Connect the terminals (X and Y) of the remote control and the terminals (X and Y) of the indoor connecting section. Be careful about contact failure. “88” blinks on the temper
unit. (No polarity of X and Y) 100 - 200m･････････････････0.5mm2 × 2 cores data is read) Then, the retu
Under 300m･････････････････0.75mm2 × 2 cores to the indoor unit selection
⑹ Mount the upper case for restoring to its former state so as not to crimp the remote control cord, Under 400m･････････････････1.25mm2 × 2 cores ⑷ Press ON/OFF but
and secure with the removed screw. Under 600m･････････････････2.0mm2 × 2 cores End.
6. Function setting 7. How to set functions by button operation

Each function of the remote control and the indoor unit is automatically set to the initial setting, which is the standard use, on the occasion of connecting the remote control with the indoor unit. In the case of the standard ⑴ Stop air-conditioner, and simultaneously press AIR CON No. and M
use, the setting change is unnecessary. However, if you whould like to change the initial setting “ ○ ”, change the setting for only the item of the function number. Record the setting contents and stored them. at the same time for over three seconds.
The function number “01” blinks in the upper right.
⑴ Function setting item by switch on PCB SW1
ON
Switch No. Setting Setting detail Initial setting Switch No. Setting Setting detail Initial setting Function number
OFF
ON Slave remote control ON “TEMP” button prohibited 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
SW1-1 SW1-5
OFF Master remote control ○ OFF “TEMP” button enabled ○
ON Remote control thermistor enabled ON “FAN SPEED” button prohibited ※ Note 1
SW1-2 SW1-6
OFF Remote control thermistor disabled ○ OFF “FAN SPEED” button enabled ※ Note 1
ON “MODE” button prohibited ON Auto restart function enabled • As for the slave remote control, function setting is impossible other
SW1-3 SW1-7
OFF “MODE” button enabled ○ OFF Auto restart function disabled ○ than SW1-1. ⑵ Press TEMP△ or TEMP▽ button.
SW1-4
ON “ON/OFF” button prohibited
SW1-8, 9, 0
ON
Not used • In the indoor unit with only one fan speed, “FAN SPEED” button cannot Select the function number.
OFF “ON/OFF” button enabled ○ OFF be enabled.
⑵ Function setting item by button operation

- 142 - ⑶ Press MODE button.
Decide the function number.
Classification Function No. Function Setting No. Setting Initial setting Remarks
01 Fan speed: three steps ※ Note 1 The fan speed is three steps, - - . ⑷ [In the case of selecting the remote control function (01-06)]
02 Fan speed: two steps (Hi-Lo) ※ Note 1 The fan speed is two steps, - . ① The current setting number of the selected function number blinks
01 Indoor unit fan speed
03 Fan speed: two steps (Hi-Me) The fan speed is two steps, - . (Example)
04 Fan: one step ※ Note 1 The fan speed is fixed to one step. Function number: “01” (lighting)
01 Remote control thermistor: no offset ○
Setting number: “01” (blinking)
02 Remote control thermistor: +3.0 °C At the time of cooling, in the case of remote control thermistor enabled, offset temperature at +3.0°C.
Remote control 03 Remote control thermistor: +2.0 °C At the time of cooling, in the case of remote control thermistor enabled, offset temperature at +2.0°C.
'19 • PAC-DB-333
3. Master/ slave setting when more than one remote control are used
surface of the ⑴ Up to two remote controls can be connected to one unit (or one group) of indoor unit.
Switch Setting Function detail
indoor unit㻌㻌 ON Slave remote control
SW1-1
㻌 OFF Master remote control
䠴䕿
䕿䠵㻌
⑴ Remote control line (No polarity)
Screw
䕿䠴䕿䠵㻌䕿䠴䕿䠵㻌
rtion of Remote control “Master”
㻌 Remote control “Slave”
㻌
lightly SW1-1 “OFF” 㻌 SW1-1 “ON”
⑵ Set the 㻌switch SW1-1 of the slave remote control is “Slave” (ON). The factory default is set as “Master” (OFF).
Upper case (Note) • The remote control thermistor enabled setting can be set only to the master remote control.
• Install the master remote control at the position to detect room temperature.
⑵ • The air-conditioner operation follows the last operation of the remote control in case of the
master / slave setting.
SW1
the ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
ote SW1-1:ON (Slave remote control)
Thin part SW1-1:OFF(Master remote control)
knife,
⑶ 4. The indication when power source is supplied

⑴ At the time of turning the power source on, after the light is on for the first 2 seconds, the display
becomes as shown below.
The number displayed on the upper side of LCD in the remote control is the software number,
ed to
and this is not an error code.
Software number
(The number in the left is one
Lower case example. Another number
may be shown.)
Wall
surface ⑵ Then, “88.0 °C” blinks on the remote control until the communication between the remote
control and the indoor unit is established.
block. ⑷ ⑶ In the case of connecting one remote control with one unit (or one group) of indoor unit, make
control and certain to set the master remote control (factory default).
polarity of X and If the slave remote control is set, a communication cannot be
established.
⑷ If a state where the communication between the remote
control and the indoor unit cannot be established continues
about for 30 minutes, “E” is displayed. Confirm the wiring of
the indoor unit and the outdoor unit and master/slave setting of
㼄㼅 the remote control.
⑸
5. Confirmation method for return air temperature
2
0.3 mm (recommended) to 0.5 mm at2 Return air temperature can be confirmed by the remote control operation.
⑴ Press AIR CON No. button for over 5 seconds.
“88” blinks on the temperature setting indicator.
(“88” blinks for approximately 2 seconds while data is read.)
:
↓
Sheath Then, the return air temperature is displayed.
Peeling length (Example) return air temperature: “27 °C” (blinking)
(Note) For the return air temperature, in the normal case, the return air temperature of the indoor
mer state so as not to unit is displayed; however, in the case that the remote control thermistor is effective,
h the removed screw. detected temperature by the remote control thermistor is displayed.
⑵ Press ON/OFF button.
remote control cord to the wall surface with a End.
trol cord. [In the case that the remote thermistor is ineffective and plural indoor units are connected to one
remote control ]
⑴ Press AIR CON No. button for over 5 seconds.
indoor unit No. indicator: “U 000” (blinking)
(Among the connected indoor units, the lowest
cores wires or cables. (on-site configuration)
number is displayed.)
s 600 m.
⑵ Press TEMP△ or TEMP▽ button.
ize below.
Select the indoor unit No.
be 0.3mm 2 (recommended) to 0.5mm2.
ng to wire connecting. Waterproof treatment is Dectder the indoor unit No.
(Example) indoor unit No. indicator: “U 000”
ure. “88” blinks on the temperature setting indicator. (blinking for approximately 2 to 10 seconds while
cores data is read) Then, the return air temperature is displayed. When AIR CON No. is pressed, return
cores to the indoor unit selection display (example, “U 000”).
cores ⑷ Press ON/OFF button.
cores End.
7. How to set functions by button operation

dard ⑴ Stop air-conditioner, and simultaneously press AIR CON No. and MODE buttons - 143 -
at the same time for over three seconds.
Function number
End button
⑷ ⑵ Maximum prolongation of remote control wiring is 600 m.
Wiring outlet
Two M4 screws (head: ø8 or less) (prepare on site)
If the prolongation is over 100m, change to the size below.
But, the wiring in the remote control case should be 0.3mm 2 (recommended) to 0.5mm2.
Change the wire size outside of the case according to wire connecting. Waterproof treatment is
⑸ Connect the remote control cord to the terminal block. necessary at the wire
Connect the terminals (X and Y) of the remote control and the terminals (X and Y) of the indoor connecting section. Be careful about contact failure.
unit. (No polarity of X and Y) 100 - 200m･････････････････0.5mm2 × 2 cores
Under 300m･････････････････0.75mm2 × 2 cores
⑹ Mount the upper case for restoring to its former state so as not to crimp the remote control cord, Under 400m･････････････････1.25mm2 × 2 cores
and secure with the removed screw. Under 600m･････････････････2.0mm2 × '19 2 cores• PAC-DB-333
6. Function setting 7. How to set functions by bu

Each function of the remote control and the indoor unit is automatically set to the initial setting, which is the standard use, on the occasion of connecting the remote control with the indoor unit. In the case of the standard ⑴ Stop air-conditioner, and simultaneo
use, the setting change is unnecessary. However, if you whould like to change the initial setting “ ○ ”, change the setting for only the item of the function number. Record the setting contents and stored them. at the same time for over three secon
The function number “01” blinks in the
⑴ Function setting item by switch on PCB SW1
ON
Switch No. Setting Setting detail Initial setting Switch No. Setting Setting detail Initial setting OFF
ON Slave remote control ON “TEMP” button prohibited 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
SW1-1 SW1-5
OFF Master remote control ○ OFF “TEMP” button enabled ○
ON Remote control thermistor enabled ON “FAN SPEED” button prohibited ※ Note 1
SW1-2 SW1-6
OFF Remote control thermistor disabled ○ OFF “FAN SPEED” button enabled ※ Note 1
ON “MODE” button prohibited ON Auto restart function enabled • As for the slave remote control, function setting is impossible other
SW1-3 SW1-7
OFF “MODE” button enabled ○ OFF Auto restart function disabled ○ than SW1-1. ⑵ Press TEMP△ or TEMP▽ butto
SW1-4
ON “ON/OFF” button prohibited
SW1-8, 9, 0
ON
Not used • In the indoor unit with only one fan speed, “FAN SPEED” button cannot Select the function number.
OFF “ON/OFF” button enabled ○ OFF be enabled.
⑵ Function setting item by button operation Decide the function number.
Classification Function No. Function Setting No. Setting Initial setting Remarks
01 Fan speed: three steps ※ Note 1 The fan speed is three steps, - - . ⑷ [In the case of selecting the remote c
02 Fan speed: two steps (Hi-Lo) ※ Note 1 The fan speed is two steps, - . ① The current setting number of the se
01 Indoor unit fan speed
03 Fan speed: two steps (Hi-Me) The fan speed is two steps, - . (Example)
04 Fan: one step ※ Note 1 The fan speed is fixed to one step. Function number: “01” (lighting)
01 Remote control thermistor: no offset ○
Setting number: “01” (blinking)
02 Remote control thermistor: +3.0 °C At the time of cooling, in the case of remote control thermistor enabled, offset temperature at +3.0°C.
Remote control 03 Remote control thermistor: +2.0 °C At the time of cooling, in the case of remote control thermistor enabled, offset temperature at +2.0°C.
03 thermistor at the time 04 Remote control thermistor: +1.0 °C At the time of cooling, in the case of remote control thermistor enabled, offset temperature at +1.0°C.
of cooling 05 Remote control thermistor: -1.0 °C At the time of cooling, in the case of remote control thermistor enabled, offset temperature at -1.0°C.
06 Remote control thermistor: -2.0 °C At the time of cooling, in the case of remote control thermistor enabled, offset temperature at -2.0°C.
Remote 07 Remote control thermistor: -3.0 °C At the time of cooling, in the case of remote control thermistor enabled, offsett temperature at -3.0°C.
control 01 Remote control thermistor: no offset ○
function 02 Remote control thermistor: +3.0 °C At the time of heating, in the case of remote control thermistor enabled, offset temperature at +3.0°C. ② Press TEMP△ or TEMP▽ b
Remote control 03 Remote control thermistor: +2.0 °C At the time of heating, in the case of remote control thermistor enabled, offset temperature at +2.0°C. Select the setting number.
04 thermistor at the time 04 Remote control thermistor: +1.0 °C At the time of heating, in the case of remote control thermistor enabled, offset temperature at +1.0°C. ③ Press MODE button.
of heating 05 Remote control thermistor: -1.0 °C At the time of heating, in the case of remote control thermistor enabled, offset temperature at -1.0°C. The setting is completed.
06 Remote control thermistor: -2.0 °C At the time of heating, in the case of remote control thermistor enabled, offset temperature at -2.0°C. Light is on for approximately 3 to 20
07 Remote control thermistor: -3.0 °C At the time of heating, in the case of remote control thermistor enabled, offset temperature at -3.0°C. decided function No. and setting No
01 No ventilator connection ○
(Example)
05 Ventilation setting In case of Single split series, by connecting ventilation device to CNT of the indoor printed circuit board (in case of VRF series, by
02 Ventilator links air-conditioner
connecting it to CND of the indoor printed circuit board), the operation of ventilation device is linked with the operation of indoor unit. Function number: “01” (lighting for
“Auto” operation 01 “Auto” operation enabled ※ Note 1 Setting number: “01” (lighting for 3
06
setting 02 “Auto” operation disabled ※ Note 1 “Auto” operation disabled
Operation permission/ 01 Disabled ○
07
prohibition 02 Enabled Operation permission/prohibition control is enabled.
01 Level input ○
08 External input
02 Pulse input
01 Standard Note2
09 Fan speed setting 02 High speed 1 Note2
Then, the screen goes back to the fu
03 High speed 2 Note2
indication ⑴ , if the setting is seque
01 No remaining operation ○ After cooling stopped, no fan remaining operation
Fan remaining with the same procedures. If the se
02 0.5 hours After cooling stopped, fan remaining operation for 0.5 hours
10 operation at the time
03 1 hour After cooling stopped, fan remaining operation for 1 hour
of cooling
04 6 hours After cooling stopped, fan remaining operation for 6 hours
01 No remaining operation ○ After heating stopped or after heating thermostat OFF, no fan remaining operation
Fan remaining 02 0.5 hours After heating stopped or after heating thermostat OFF, fan remaining operation for 0.5 hours
11 operation at the time
03 2 hours After heating stopped or after heating thermostat OFF, fan remaining operation for 2 hours
of heating
Indoor unit 04 6 hours After heating stopped or after heating thermostat OFF, fan remaining operation for 6 hours
01 No offset ○
function Setting temperature 02 Setting temperature offset + 3.0 °C The setting temperature at the time of heating is offset by +3.0 °C.
12 offset at the time of
03 Setting temperature offset + 2.0 °C The setting temperature at the time of heating is offset by +2.0 °C.
heating
04 Setting temperature offset + 1.0 °C The setting temperature at the time of heating is offset by +1.0 °C.
01 Low fan speed ※ Note 1 At the time of heating thermostat OFF, operate with low fan speed.
02 Setting fan speed At the time of heating thermostat OFF, operate with the setting fan speed.
13 Heating fan controller 03 Intermittent operation ※ Note 1 At the time of heatingr thermostat OFF, intermittently operate.
04 Fan off At the time of heating thermostat OFF, a fan will be stopped.
When the remote control thermistor is enabled, automatically set to “Fan off”. Do not set at the time of the indoor unit thermistor.
01 No offset ○
02 Return air temperature offset +2.0 °C Offset the return air temperature of the indoor unit by +2.0 °C.
03 Return air temperature offset +1.5 °C Offset the return air temperature of the indoor unit by +1.5 °C.
Return air temperature
14 04 Return air temperature offset +1.0 °C Offset the return air temperature of the indoor unit by +1.0 °C.
offset
05 Return air temperature offset -1.0 °C Offset the return air temperature of the indoor unit by -1.0 °C.
Note 1: The symbol “ ※ ” in the initial setting varies depending upon the indoor unit and the outdoor unit to be connected, and this is Note 2: Fan speed of “High speed” setting
automatically determined as follows: Indoor unit fan speed setting
Fan speed setting
Swith No. - - - -
Function Setting Product model
Function No. Standard Hi − Mid − Lo Hi − Lo Hi − Mid
“FAN SPEED” button prohibited Product model whose indoor fan speed is only one step High speed 1・2 UHi − Hi − Mid UHi − Mid UHi − Hi ⑸ Press ON/OFF button.
“FAN SPEED”
SW1-6
button “FAN SPEED” button enabled
Product model whose indoor fan speed is two steps or three
Initial setting of some indoor unit is “High speed”.
The setting is completed.
steps
Fan speed: three steps Product model whose indoor unit fan speed is three steps Note 3: As for plural indoor unit, set indoor functions to each master and slave indoor unit.
Indoor unit fan Fan speed: two steps (Hi-Lo) Product model whose indoor unit fan speed is two steps ・Even if ON/OFF button is press
Remote control function 01 But only master indoor unit is received the setting change of indoor unit function “07 Operation permission/
speed Fan speed: two steps (Hi-Me) ・The setting contents are stored in the
Fan: one step Product model whose indoor unit fan speed is only one step prohibition” and “08 External input”.
“Auto” operation “Auto” operation enabled Product model where “Auto” mode is selectable
Remote control function 06
setting “Auto” operation disabled Product model without “Auto” mode
[Confirmation method for current setting]
Heating fan Low fan speed Product model except FDUS According to the operation, the “setting
Indoor unit function 13
control Intermittent operation FDUS (However, in the case of selecting “U A
3-='LQGG
- 144 -
Select the indoor unit No.
ontrol case should be 0.3mm 2 (recommended) to 0.5mm2.
f the case according to wire connecting. Waterproof treatment is Dectder the indoor unit No.
(Example) indoor unit No. indicator: “U 000”
about contact failure. “88” blinks on the temperature setting indicator. (blinking for approximately 2 to 10 seconds while
････0.5mm × 2 cores
2
data is read) Then, the return air temperature is displayed. When AIR CON No. is pressed, return
････0.75mm × 2 cores
2
to the indoor unit selection display (example, “U 000”).
････1.25mm × 2 cores
2
⑷ Press ON/OFF button.
････2.0mm × 2 cores '19 • PAC-DB-333
2
End.
7. How to set functions by button operation

In the case of the standard ⑴ Stop air-conditioner, and simultaneously press AIR CON No. and MODE buttons
and stored them. at the same time for over three seconds.
Function number
4 5 6 7 8 9 0
End button
remote control, function setting is impossible other

⑵ Press TEMP△ or TEMP▽ button. Decide button
t with only one fan speed, “FAN SPEED” button cannot Select the function number.
Select button
⑶ Press MODE button. Start button

Decide the function number.
⑷ [In the case of selecting the remote control function (01-06)] [In the case of selecting the indoor unit function (07-14)]
① The current setting number of the selected function number blinks ① “88” blinks on the temperature setting indicators.
(Example) (blinking for approximately 2 to 10 seconds while data are read)
Function number: “01” (lighting) ↓
Setting number: “01” (blinking) After that, the current setting number of the selected function number blinks.
mperature at +3.0°C.
(Example)
Function number Function number: “07” (lighting)
mperature at -1.0°C. Setting number: “01” (blinking)
mperature at -2.0°C.
Setting number Function number
mperature at -3.0°C.
mperature at +3.0°C. ② Press TEMP△ or TEMP▽ button.

Setting number
mperature at +2.0°C. Select the setting number.
mperature at +1.0°C. ③ Press MODE button. Proceed to ② .
mperature at -1.0°C. The setting is completed. [Note]
mperature at -2.0°C. Light is on for approximately 3 to 20 seconds while data of the a. In the case of connecting one remote control to plural indoor units, the display
mperature at -3.0°C. decided function No. and setting No. is transmitted. will be as follows:
(Example) Indoor unit No. display: “U 000” (blinking)
ndoor printed circuit board (in case of VRF series, by
n device is linked with the operation of indoor unit. Function number: “01” (lighting for 3 to 20 seconds) (Display the lowest number among the connected indoor units.)
Setting number: “01” (lighting for 3 to 20 seconds)
Indoor unit No. Function number
Function number
Setting number
Then, the screen goes back to the function number blinking b. Press TEMP△ or TEMP▽ button.
indication ⑴ , if the setting is sequentially conducted, continue Select the indoor unit No. to be set.
with the same procedures. If the setting is finished, proceed to ⑸ . If “U ALL” is selected, the same setting can be set to all units.
c. Press MODE button.
Decide the indoor unit No.
“88” blinks on the temperature setting indicators. (blinking for 2 to 10 seconds while data
is read)
0.5 hours
2 hours
When AIR CON No. button is pressed, go back to the indoor unit selection display (for
example, “U 000” blinking).
6 hours
② Press TEMP△ or TEMP▽ button.

Select the setting number
③ Press MODE button.

The setting is completed.
Light is on for approximately 3 to 20 seconds while data of the decided function No. and
setting No. is transmitted.
not set at the time of the indoor unit thermistor. (Example)
Indoor unit No.: “U 000” (lighting for 3 to 20 seconds)
Function number: “07” (lighting for 3 to 20 seconds)
Setting number: “01” (lighting for 3 to 20 seconds)
Indoor unit No.

(In the case of Function number
connecting
plural indoor
units)
Setting number
n speed setting
- -
− Lo Hi − Mid Then, the screen goes back to the function number blinking indication ⑴ , if the setting
− Mid UHi − Hi ⑸ Press ON/OFF button. is sequentially conducted, continue with the same procedures. If the setting is finished,
The setting is completed. proceed to ⑸ .
er and slave indoor unit.

・Even if ON/OFF button is pressed during setting, the setting is ended. However, any details where the setting has not been completed will be ineffective.
of indoor unit function “07 Operation permission/
・The setting contents are stored in the control, and even if the power failure occur, this will not be lost.
[Confirmation method for current setting]

According to the operation, the “setting number” displayed first after selecting “function number” and pressing MODE button is the currently set content.
(However, in the case of selecting “U ALL” (all units), the setting number of the lowest number among the indoor units is displayed.)
- 145 -

PJZ012D076
PJZ012D076
PJZ012D076
PJZ012D076
PJZ012D076
Installation
Installation
Installation
Installation
Installation PPoints
oints
Points
Points
Points and
and
and Operating
Operating
and
and Operating
Operating
Operating '19 • PAC-DB-333
Instructions
Instructions
Instructions
Instructions
11.4 Filter kit (FDUM series)
for
Instructionsfor
for
for the
forthe
the
the Filter
Filter
the Kit
Kit
Filter
Filter
Filter Kit
Kit
Kit
PJZ012D076A A
This
This
This manual
This
This manual
manual
manual
manual
manual contains
contains
contains
contains
contains
contains installation
installation
installation
installation
installation points
installationpoints
points
points and
points
points
andand
and operating
and
and operating
operating
operating instructions
operating
operating instructions
instructions
instructions forfor
instructions
instructionsfor
for the
forthe
for
the
the thefilter
the
filter
filter kitkit
filter
filter
filter
kit
kit manufactured byby
manufactured
kitmanufactured
manufactured
manufactured
manufactured by
by MHI.
by
by
MHI.
MHI.MHI.
MHI.
MHI.
Carry
Carry
Carry out
Carryout
out the
out
the thework
thework
work following
work following
following the
following
the theinstructions
theinstructions
instructions
Carry out the work following the instructions below. below.
instructions below.
below.
below.
This
This
This
This manual
This manual
manual
manual
manual also
also
also contains
also
also contains
contains
contains
contains information
information
information
information
information on
onon
on the
onthe
the
the usage
the usage
usage
usage
usage after
after installation,
after
after
after installation,
installation,
installation,
installation,
so
so keep
so
soso keep
keep
keep this
keep
this
this manual
this
this manual
manual
manual
manual properly
properly
properly
properly with
properly with
with
with USER
with USER
USER
USER
USER SMANUAL
SS MANUAL
SMANUAL
MANUAL
SMANUAL provided
provided
provided
provided with
provided with
with
with the
with
the
thethe indoor
the indoor
indoor
indoor
indoor unit.
unit.
unit.
unit.
unit.
!! !! ! !CAUTION
CCAUTION
AUTION
CAUTION
CAUTION
CAUTION
! ・After
・After
・After
After
・After
・After unpacking,
unpacking,
unpacking,
unpacking,
unpacking, carry
carrycarryout
carry
outoutthis
out
this work
this
this
workworkonon
work
on the
onthe
the ground.
the ground.
ground.
ground.
! ・Do
・DoDo
・Do・Do
・Do not
notnot
not carry
not carry
carry
carry out
carry
out
outout the
out
the the work
the
workworkduring
work during
during operation,
during operation,
operation,
operation, oror
or there
there isisaisais
orthere
there adanger
adanger
dangerdanger
danger ofof
of
of being
ofbeing
being
being entangled
being entangled
entangled
entangled
entangled ininthe
in the
ininthe
the the
rotating
rotating
rotating
parts and
rotating
rotating parts
rotating parts
parts
getting
parts
parts and
and and getting
and getting
injured.
getting injured.
getting injured.
injured.
injured.
! ・Clean
・Clean
・Clean
Clean
・Clean
・Clean the
thethe
the air
the
air filter
air
airair filter
filter
filter regularly.
filter regularly.
regularly.
regularly.
・Be
・Be ・Be
・Be
! ・Be sure
sure
sure toto
sure entrust
toto
Be sure to entrust entrust
entrust
entrust qualified
qualified
qualified serviceman
qualified serviceman
serviceman
serviceman tototo
performance
toperformance
performance
performance onon
on the
onthe
the
the airair
the
air
air filter.
airfilter.
filter.
filter.filter.
! ・Be
・BeBe
・Be・Be
・Be sure toto
sure
sure
sure
sure totocut
tocut
cut
cut offoff
cut
off the
offthe
the power
the power
power
power and
and andstop
andstop
stop the
stop
the theunit
theunit
unit before
unit before
before
before performing
performing
performing
performing
performing maintenance.
maintenance.
maintenance.
maintenance.
maintenance.
1.1.
1. Table
1.1.Table
1.Table
Table
Table of
of
Table
of filter
filter
ofof
filter
filter kit
offilter
kit parts
kitkit
filter parts
parts No.
kitpartsNo.
parts
No. and
and
No.
No.
and corresponding
corresponding
and
and object
corresponding
corresponding
corresponding objectmodels
models
object
object
object modelsmodels
models
models
Small
SmallSmall
Small model
modelmodel
model Medium
Medium
Medium
Medium model
model
model
model
model Large
Large
Large
Large
Large model
model
model
model
model
Single
Single
Single
Single type
Single
type
type type
type 5050
50
40, 50
50 60,
60, 60,
717171
60,
71 100
100
100
100
100 140
- 140
- 140
---140
140
Multi
Multi
Multi
Multi type
Multi
type
type type
type 2222
22 --22
56- 56
- 56
56 71,
71, 71,
909090
71,
90 112
112
112
112
112 160
- 160
- 160
---160
160
Filter
Filter Kit
Filter
Filter
Filter Kit
Kit KitKit UM-FL1EF
UM-FL1EF
UM-FL1EF UM-FL2EF
UM-FL1EF UM-FL2EFUM-FL2EF UM-FL3EF
UM-FL2EF UM-FL3EF
UM-FL3EF
UM-FL3EF
UM-FL3EF
2.2.
2. PParts
2.2. arts
Parts
2. list
list
list
Parts
Parts
Parts list of filter
ofof
of
list
list
of filter
filter kit
offilter
filter kitkitkit
filter
kit
Filter
Filter
Filter
Filter Rail Rail
Rail
Rail
Rail Insulation
Insulation
Insulation
Insulation
Insulation
11pc1pc
1pc
pc.
1pc 22pc2pc
2pc
2pc
pcs.
2pc 22pc
2pc2pc
2pc
pcs.
2pc
Bracket
Bracket
Bracket
Bracket
Bracket Parts
Parts
Parts
Parts set
Parts
set (screw)
set
set
set (screw)
(screw)
(screw)
(screw)
small
small
small
small and
and
small
and
small medium-sized
medium-sized
and
and medium-sized large
medium-sized
medium-sized
and medium large
large model
model
large
large :::7pcs.
model
model
model 77pcs.
7pcs.
: 7pcs.
:pcs.
7pcs.
model
model
model
model
model : 5pcs.
: :5pcs.
55pcs.
: 5pcs.
:pcs.
5pcs.
1pc
11pc1pc
1pc
pc.
1pc 11pc
1pc1pc
1pc
pc.
1pc
- 146 -
6
'19 • PAC-DB-333
3. Installation
Installation Points
(1) Stick the insulation on both inner sides of the duct, leaving no space up and down.
BOTTOM (Unit inside) Insulation
Sticking standard position

for insulation
Duct
(Unit outside)
TOP
Duct Insulation
Insulation
(*) After unpacking, bottom side of the unit is located at the upper side.
(2) Install the rail on both inner sides of the duct with the screw.
Screw
Rail
(3) Install the air filter on the rails.

②
③
Air filter
Installation procesure
(4) Install the bracket on the rail with the screw.
Screw
(**) When the unit is installed,

bottom side of the unit is
located at the lower side.
Bracket
- 147 - PJZ012D076
'19 • PAC-DB-333
11.5 Interface kit (SC-BIKN2-E)

※ When RC-EX3A is connected, please use SC-BIKN2-E by all means.
RKZ012A099
Accessories included in package Safety precautions Before use, please read these Safety precautions thoroughly
before installation.
Be sure to check all the accessories included in package. ●All the cautionary items mentioned below are important safety related items to be taken
No. Part name Quantity into consideration, so be sure to observe them at all times.
① Indoor unit's connection cable (cable length: 1.8m) 1 Incorrect installation could lead to serious consequences such as death, major
Warning
② Wood screws (for mounting the interface: ø4x 25) 2 injury or envirommental destruction.
③ Tapping screws (for the cable clump and the interface mounting bracket) 3 ●Symbols used in these precautions
④ Interface mounting bracket 1
⑤ Cable clamp (for the indoor unit's connection cable) 1 Always go along these instruction.
⑥ CnT terminal connection cable (total cable length: 0.5m) 1 ●After completed installation, carry out trial operation to confirm no anomaly, and ask the
user to keep this installation manual in a good place for future reference.
Warnings
●Installation must be carried out by a qualified installer.
If you install it by yourself, it may cause an electric shock, fire and personal injury , as a result of a system malfunction.
●Install it in full accordance with the installation manual.
Incorrect installation may cause an electric shock, fire and personal injury.
●Electrical work must be carried out by a qualified electrician in accordance with the technical standard for electrical equipment, the
indoor wiring standard and this installation manual.
Incorrect installation may cause an electric shock, fire and personal injury.
●Use the specific cables for wiring. And connect all the cables to terminals or connectors securely and clamp them with cable clamps in
order for external forces not to be transmitted to the terminals directly.
Incomplete connection may cause malfunction, and lead to heat generation and fire.
●Use the original accessories and specified components for installation.
If the parts other than those prescribed by us are used, it may cause an electric shock, fire and sersonal injury.
Connecting the indoor unit's connection cable to the interface Wiring inlet
(top or back)
③ Fix the cable with the
①Remove the upper case of the interface. cable clamp
• Remove 2 screws from the interface casing before removal of upper casing.
②Connect the indoor unit's
②Connect the indoor unit's connection cable to the interface. connection cable
• Connect the connector of the indoor unit connection cable to the
connector on the interface’s circuit board.
③Fix the indoor unit's connection cable with the cable clamp.
• Cable can be brought in from the top or from the back.
• Cut out the punch-outs for the connection cables running into the casing with cutter.
④Connect the indoor unit's connection cable to the indoor control PCB.
• Connect the indoor unit's connection cable to the indoor control PCB securely. ①Remove
• Clamp the connection cable to the indoor control box securely with the cable clamp the upper
provided as an accessory. case
• Regarding the cable connection to the indoor unit, refer to the installation manual for
indoor unit.
Name of each part of the interface
Clamp for clamping indoor ROM terminal

unit's connection cable
Interface board DIP switch (SW2) : [Factory setting : all ON]
Terminal for indoor unit's DIP switch (SW3) : [Factory setting : all OFF]
connection cable
Terminal block for wired
Rotary switch (SW1) for address setting
remote control*
CnT terminal
Terminal block for Superlink E board (SC-ADNA-E)*
Clamp for clamping the connection Clamp for clamping the connection cable for
cable for wired remote control* Superlink E board (SC-ADNA-E)*
*Either the connection cables of Superlink E board (SC-ADNA-E) or of wired remote control is connectable.
Switch Setting Function Switch Setting Function
ON** CnT level input ON** External input (CnT input)
SW2-1 SW2-3
OFF CnT pulse input OFF Operation permission/prohibition (CnT input)
ON** Wired remote control : Enable ON** Annual cooling : Enable***
SW2-2 SW2-4
OFF Wired remote control : Disable OFF Annual cooling : Disable***
** Factory setting *** Indoor fan control at low outdoor air temperature in cooling
- 148 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
Installation of the interface
・Install the interface within the range of the connection cable length
(approximately 1.3m) from the indoor unit.
・Be sure not to extend the connection cable on site. If the connection Wiring inlet
cable is extended, malfunction may occur.
・Fix the interface on the wall, pillar or the like.
Don’t install the interface and wired remote control at the

following places.
○Places exposed to direct sunlight
○Places near heating devices
○High humidity places
○Surfaces where are enough hot or cold to generate condensation
○Places exposed to oil mist or steam directly
○Uneven surface Cut out the punch-outs
for the connection cables
running into the casing
Wiring inlet
Mounting the interface directly on a wall with cutter
①Mount the lower casing of the interface on a flat surface with wood
screws provided as standard accessory.
②Mount the upper casing.
②Mount the
upper casing
① Mount it on a wall or a pillar
with 2 of wood screws
Recessing the interface in the wall

Connection cable
①Recess the electrical box (procured locally) and
connection cables in the wall.
②Mount the lower casing of the interface to the
electrical box with M4 screws (procured locally).
③Mount the upper casing.
①Recess the electrical ②Mount it to the electrical box

box and connection cables with 2 of M4 screws
Electrical box (procured locally)
(procured locally) ③Mount the upper casing
Mounting the interface with the mounting bracket
①Mount the upper casing.

②Mount the mounting bracket to the interface with tapping
③Mount the mounting bracket on wall or the like with wood
②Mount the mounting ③Mount the bracket on

bracket on the interface a wall or a pillar with
with 2 of tapping screws 2 of wood screws
Installation check items

□ Are the connection cables connected securely to the terminal blocks and connectors?
□ Are the thickness and length of the connection cables conformed with the standard?
- 149 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
Functions of CnT connector

It is available to operate the air-conditioner and to monitor the operation status with the external control unit (remote display)
by sending the input/output signal through CnT connector on the indoor control PCB.
Note (1) 0.3mm2×2m 0.75mm2×0.2m

Do not use the length over 2 meter
①Connect a external remote control unit (procured locally) Butt splice
to CnT terminal. (Application coverage

0.75-1.25mm2)
Red White
②In case of the pulse input, switch OFF the DIP switch +12 1 1
Black XR1 Black
Common
2 2 XR1 Output 1
SW2-1 on the interface PCB. CNT
3 3
Yellow
XR2
XR2 Yellow
Output 2
(Blue 6P) Blue XR3 Blue
③When setting operation permission/prohibition mode, 4 4
Brown
XR3
XR4 Brown
Output 3
5 5 XR4 Output 4
switch OFF the DIP switch SW2-3 on the interface PCB. 6 6
Orange
XR5
Orange
Input
XR5 Orange power
Remote start / stop button or timer point

Interface PCB (Printed Circuit Board) Remote start/stop kit (procured locally)
●XR1-4 are for the DC 12V relay

Input/ Output signal
Output Function
Relay ON/OFF
Content ●XR5 is a DC 12/24V or AC 220-240V relay
Output 1 Operation output XR1 ON During air-conditioner operation ●CnT connector (local) maker, model
Output 2 Heating output XR2 ON During heating operation
Output 3 Compressor operation output XR3 ON During compressor running Connector Molex 5264-06
Output 4 Malfunction output XR4 ON During anomalous stop Terminals Molex 5263T
SW2-1 SW2-3
Input/ Air- Operation by
Function Input signal DIP switch
Output Setting Setting Content conditioner remote control (SW2-3)
Level/Pulse XR5
OFF→ON ON
ON* External input
ON→OFF OFF Allowed
ON* Level input Level
OFF→ON Operation permission OFF
OFF
Input External ON→OFF Operation prohibition OFF Not allowed
control
input OFF→ON DIP switch
ON* Pulse OFF→ON External input (SW2-1)
OFF Pulse input ON→OFF Allowed
OFF→ON Operation permission ON
OFF Level
ON→OFF Operation prohibition OFF Not allowed
* Factory setting
In case of the remote control (RC-EX3 or later model), the external outputs (1 – 4) and the external input can be changed
using the function setting of remote control. For the setting method, refer to the installation manual.
Also refer to the technical manual to know how it is adapted to the function setting for the external outputs and input, at
the indoor unit side.
Connection of Superlink E board
Regarding the connection of Superlink E board, refer to the installation manual of Superlink E board.
For electrical work, power source for all of units in the Superlink system
must be turned OFF.
①Switch ON the DIP switch SW2-2 (Factory setting: ON) on the interface PCB. DIP switch
Caution:Wireless remote control attached to the indoor unit can be used in parallel, after (SW2-2)
connecting the wired remote control. However, some of functions other than
the basic functions such as RUN/STOP, temperature setting, etc. may not work
properly and may have a mismatch between the display and the actual behavior.
②Wiring connection between the interface and the Superlink E board. Names of recommended signal wires
No.
Interface side Superlink E board 1 Shielded wire
2 Vinyl cabtyre round cord
Terminal 3 Vinyl cabtyre round cable
block for Y Y Terminal
block for 4 Vinyl insulated wire vinyl sheathed cable for control
Superlink E
board X X iterface
Within 200 m 0.5 mm2 × 2 cores
③Clamp the connection cables with cable clamps.
- 150 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
Connection of wired remote control

Regarding the connection of wired remote control, refer to the installation manual of wired remote control.
①Switch ON the DIP switch SW2-2 (Factory setting : ON) on the interface PCB.
Caution:Wireless remote control attached to the indoor unit can be used in parallel, after connecting the wired remote control. However, DIP switch
(SW2-2)
some of functions other than the basic functions such as RUN/STOP, temperature setting, etc. may not work properly and may have
a mismatch between the display and the actual behavior.
②Wiring connection between the interface and the wired remote control.
Installation and wiring of wired remote control
A Install the wired remote control with reference to the attached installation manual of wired remote control.
B 0.3mm2 x 2 cores cable should be used for the wiring of wired remote control.
C Maximum length of wiring is 600m.
If the length of wiring exceeds 100m, change the size of cable as mentioned below.
100m-200m: 0.5mm2 x 2 cores, 300m or less: 0.75mm2 x 2 cores, 400m or less: 1.25mm2 x 2 cores, 600m or less: 2.0mm2 x 2 cores
However, cable size connecting to the terminal of wired remote control should not exceed 0.5mm2. Accordingly if the size of connection
cable exceeds 0.5mm2, be sure to downsize it to 0.5mm2 at the nearest section of the wired remote control and waterproof treatment should
be done at the connecting section in order to avoid contact failure.
D Don't use the multi-core cable to avoid malfunction.
E Keep the wiring of wired remote control away from grounding (Don't touch it to any metal frame of building, etc.).
F Connect the connection cables to the terminal blocks of the wired remote control and the interface securely (No polarity).
③Clamp the connection cables with cable clamps.
Control of multiple units by a single wired remote control
Multiple units (up to 16) can be controlled by a single wired remote control.
In this case, all units connected with a single wired remote control will operate Rotary
switch
under the same mode and same setting temperature.
①Connect all the interface with 2 cores cables of wired remote control line.
②Set the address of indoor unit for remote control communication from
Interface kit(1) Interface kit(2) Interface kit(16)
"0" to "F" with the rotary switch SW1 on the interface PCB. Adress"0" Adress"1" Adress"F"
③After turning the power ON, the address of indoor unit can be displayed by
pressing AIR CON No. button on the wired remote control.
Remote control line (No polarity)
Make sure all indoor units connected are displayed in order by pressing Remote control
or button. Switch setting contents
Master/Slave setting wired when 2 of wired remote control are used Wired remote M Master
remote control
control: SW1 S Slave
Maximum two wired remote control can be connected to one indoor unit Interface kit remote control
Remote control line

(or one group of indoor units) (No polarity)
①Set the DIP switch SW1 on the wired remote control to "Slave" for the slave
remote control. (Factory setting : Master) Remote
control
Remote
control
○ Caution : Remote control sensor of the slave remote control is invalid. "Master" "Slave"
●When using the wireless remote control in parallel with the wired remote control;
Since temperature setting range of wired remote control is different from that of wireless remote control, please adjust the setting range
of wired remote control to be the same setting range of wireless remote control by following procedure. (The set temperature may not be
displayed correctly on the wireless remote control, unless change of temperature setting range is done.)
Changing procedure of temperature setting range is as follows.
How to set upper and lower limit of temperature setting range

1. Stop the air-conditioner, and press (SET) and (MODE) button at the same time for
3 seconds or more.
The indication changes to"FUNCTION SET "
2. Press button once, and change to the "TEMP RANGE " indication. 6-②
3. Press (SET) button, and enter the temperature range setting mode. 7-② TEMP RANGE
4. Confirm that the "Upper limit " is shown on the display.
TEMP ON/OFF
5. Press (SET)button to fix. 8

6. ①Indication: " SET UP" "UPPER 28℃ " 3•5•6-③
7-③
②Select the upper limit value 30℃ with temperature setting button ."UPPER30℃ " TIEMR SET FAN SPEED MODE
(blinking) GRILL
AIR CON NO. CHECK

RESET
TEST
LOUVER VENTI 1
③Press (SET) button to fix. "UPPER 30℃" (Displayed for two seconds)
After the fixed upper limit value displayed for two seconds, the indication will returm
to"UPPER LIMIT ". 2 Previous button
7. Press button once, "LOWER LIMIT " is selected, press (SET) button to fix.
①Indication: " SET UP" "LOWER 20℃ "
• It
is possible to quit in the middle by
②Select the lower limit value 18℃ with temperature setting button ."LOWER18℃ "
(blinking) pressing ON/OFF button, but the
③Press (SET) button to fix. "LOWER 18℃" (Displayed for two seconds) change of setting is incompleted.
After the fixed lower limit value displayed for two seconds, the indication will returm • Duringsetting, if pressing
to"LOWER LIMIT " (RESET) button, it returns to the
8. Press ON/OFF button to finish. previous screen.
Temperature setting range
Mode Temperature setting range
Cooling, Heating, Dry, Auto 18-30℃
- 151 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
11.6 Superlink E board (SC-ADNA-E) l

l K K
l
l
central control A SL4N-AE/BE to control

er
l l
- 152 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
DIP
l l
- 153 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
12. TECHNICAL INFORMATION
(1) Ceiling cassette - 4 way type (FDT)
Model FDT90VNPWVH
Information to identify the model(s) to which the information relates to: If function includes heating: Indicate the heating season the
Indoor unit model name FDT100VH information relates to. Indicated values should relate to one
Outdoor unit model name FDC90VNP-W heating season at a time. Include at least the heating season 'Average'.
Function(indicate if present) Average(mandatory) Yes

cooling Yes Warmer(if designated) No
heating Yes Colder(if designated) No
Item symbol value unit Item symbol value class

Design load Seasonal efficiency and energy efficiency class
cooling Pdesignc 9.00 kW cooling SEER 7.10 A++
heating / Average Pdesignh 6.00 kW heating / Average SCOP/A 4.56 A+
heating / Warmer Pdesignh - kW heating / Warmer SCOP/W - -
heating / Colder Pdesignh - kW heating / Colder SCOP/C - -
unit
Declared capacity at outdoor temperature Tdesignh Back up heating capacity at outdoor temperature Tdesignh
heating / Average (-10 ) Pdh 6.00 kW heating / Average (-10 ) elbu 0 kW
heating / Warmer (2 ) Pdh - kW heating / Warmer (2 ) elbu - kW
heating / Colder (-22 ) Pdh - kW heating / Colder (-22 ) elbu - kW
Declared capacity for cooling, at indoor temperature 27(19) and Declared energy efficiency ratio, at indoor temperature 27(19) and
outdoor temperature Tj outdoor temperature Tj
Tj=35 Pdc 9.00 kW Tj=35 EERd 3.63 -
Tj=30 Pdc 6.60 kW Tj=30 EERd 5.49 -
Tj=25 Pdc 4.25 kW Tj=25 EERd 7.71 -
Tj=20 Pdc 2.40 kW Tj=20 EERd 14.72 -
Declared capacity for heating / Average season, at indoor Declared coefficient of performance / Average season, at indoor
temperature 20 and outdoor temperature Tj temperature 20 and outdoor temperature Tj
Tj=-7 Pdh 5.31 kW Tj=-7 COPd 3.32 -
Tj=2 Pdh 3.23 kW Tj=2 COPd 4.32 -
Tj=7 Pdh 2.08 kW Tj=7 COPd 5.79 -
Tj=12 Pdh 1.75 kW Tj=12 COPd 7.09 -
Tj=bivalent temperature Pdh 6.00 kW Tj=bivalent temperature COPd 3.05 -
Tj=operating limit Pdh 5.35 kW Tj=operating limit COPd 2.74 -
Declared capacity for heating / Warmer season, at indoor Declared coefficient of performance / Warmer season, at indoor
Tj=2 Pdh - kW Tj=2 COPd - -
Tj=bivalent temperature Pdh - kW Tj=bivalent temperature COPd - -
Tj=operating limit Pdh - kW Tj=operating limit COPd - -
Declared capacity for heating / Colder season, at indoor Declared coefficient of performance / Colder season, at indoor
Tj=-7 Pdh - kW Tj=-7 COPd - -
Bivalent temperature Operating limit temperature

heating / Average Tbiv -10 heating / Average Tol -15
heating / Warmer Tbiv - heating / Warmer Tol -
heating / Colder Tbiv - heating / Colder Tol -
Cycling interval capacity Cycling interval efficiency

for cooling Pcycc - kW for cooling EERcyc - -
for heating Pcych - kW for heating COPcyc - -
Degradation coefficient Degradation coefficient

cooling Cdc 0.25 - heating Cdh 0.25 -
Electric power input in power modes other than 'active mode' Annual electricity consumption
off mode Poff 7 W cooling Qce 444 kWh/a
standby mode Psb 7 W heating / Average Qhe 1842 kWh/a
thermostat-off mode Pto(cooling) 20 W heating / Warmer Qhe - kWh/a
Pto(heating) 26 W heating / colder Qhe - kWh/a
crankcase heater mode Pck 0 W
Capacity control(indicate one of three options) Other items

Sound power level(indoor) Lwa 62 dB(A)
Sound power level(outdoor) Lwa 67 dB(A)
fixed No Global warming potential GWP 675 kgCO2eq.
staged No Rated air flow(indoor) - 2,220 m3/h
variable Yes Rated air flow(outdoor) - 3,540 m3/h
Contact details for obtaining Name and address of the manufacturer or of its authorised representative.
more information Mitsubishi Heavy Industries Air-Conditioning Europe, Ltd.
5 The Square, Stockley Park, Uxbridge, Middlesex, UB11 1ET,
United Kingdom
PJF000Z589 H
- 154 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
Model FDT100VNPWVH
Indoor unit model name FDT100VH information relates to. Indicated values should relate to one


unit
Tj=35 Pdc 10.00 kW Tj=35 EERd 3.52 -
Tj=30 Pdc 7.37 kW Tj=30 EERd 5.19 -
Tj=25 Pdc 4.74 kW Tj=25 EERd 7.93 -
Tj=20 Pdc 2.40 kW Tj=20 EERd 14.72 -
Tj=-7 Pdh 5.66 kW Tj=-7 COPd 3.25 -
Tj=2 Pdh 3.45 kW Tj=2 COPd 4.34 -
Tj=7 Pdh 2.22 kW Tj=7 COPd 5.66 -
Tj=12 Pdh 1.75 kW Tj=12 COPd 7.09 -




United Kingdom
PJF000Z589 H
- 155 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
(2) Duct connected - High static pressure type (FDU)

Model FDU90VNPWVH
Indoor unit model name FDU100VH information relates to. Indicated values should relate to one


unit
Tj=35 Pdc 9.00 kW Tj=35 EERd 3.44 -
Tj=30 Pdc 6.60 kW Tj=30 EERd 5.04 -
Tj=25 Pdc 4.25 kW Tj=25 EERd 7.59 -
Tj=20 Pdc 2.30 kW Tj=20 EERd 14.20 -
Tj=-7 Pdh 5.31 kW Tj=-7 COPd 3.16 -
Tj=2 Pdh 3.23 kW Tj=2 COPd 4.09 -
Tj=7 Pdh 2.08 kW Tj=7 COPd 5.25 -
Tj=12 Pdh 1.75 kW Tj=12 COPd 5.93 -




United Kingdom
PJG000Z625 H
- 156 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
Model FDU100VNPWVH
Indoor unit model name FDU100VH information relates to. Indicated values should relate to one


unit
Tj=35 Pdc 10.00 kW Tj=35 EERd 3.25 -
Tj=30 Pdc 7.37 kW Tj=30 EERd 4.33 -
Tj=25 Pdc 4.74 kW Tj=25 EERd 6.68 -
Tj=20 Pdc 2.30 kW Tj=20 EERd 14.20 -
Tj=-7 Pdh 5.66 kW Tj=-7 COPd 3.12 -
Tj=2 Pdh 3.45 kW Tj=2 COPd 3.97 -
Tj=7 Pdh 2.22 kW Tj=7 COPd 5.13 -
Tj=12 Pdh 1.75 kW Tj=12 COPd 5.93 -




United Kingdom
PJG000Z625 H
- 157 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
(3) Duct connected - Low / Middle static pressure type (FDUM)

Model FDUM90VNPWVH
Indoor unit model name FDUM100VH information relates to. Indicated values should relate to one


unit
Tj=35 Pdc 9.00 kW Tj=35 EERd 3.44 -
Tj=30 Pdc 6.60 kW Tj=30 EERd 5.04 -
Tj=25 Pdc 4.25 kW Tj=25 EERd 7.59 -
Tj=20 Pdc 2.30 kW Tj=20 EERd 14.20 -
Tj=-7 Pdh 5.31 kW Tj=-7 COPd 3.16 -
Tj=2 Pdh 3.23 kW Tj=2 COPd 4.09 -
Tj=7 Pdh 2.08 kW Tj=7 COPd 5.25 -
Tj=12 Pdh 1.75 kW Tj=12 COPd 5.93 -




United Kingdom
PJG000Z491 J
- 158 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
Model FDUM100VNPWVH
Indoor unit model name FDUM100VH information relates to. Indicated values should relate to one


unit
Tj=35 Pdc 10.00 kW Tj=35 EERd 3.25 -
Tj=30 Pdc 7.37 kW Tj=30 EERd 4.33 -
Tj=25 Pdc 4.74 kW Tj=25 EERd 6.68 -
Tj=20 Pdc 2.30 kW Tj=20 EERd 14.20 -
Tj=-7 Pdh 5.66 kW Tj=-7 COPd 3.12 -
Tj=2 Pdh 3.45 kW Tj=2 COPd 3.97 -
Tj=7 Pdh 2.22 kW Tj=7 COPd 5.13 -
Tj=12 Pdh 1.75 kW Tj=12 COPd 5.93 -




United Kingdom
PJG000Z491 J
- 159 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333

Model FDE90VNPWVH
Indoor unit model name FDE100VH information relates to. Indicated values should relate to one


unit
Tj=35 Pdc 9.00 kW Tj=35 EERd 3.78 -
Tj=30 Pdc 6.63 kW Tj=30 EERd 5.78 -
Tj=25 Pdc 4.27 kW Tj=25 EERd 6.67 -
Tj=20 Pdc 2.20 kW Tj=20 EERd 14.47 -
Tj=-7 Pdh 5.13 kW Tj=-7 COPd 3.16 -
Tj=2 Pdh 3.13 kW Tj=2 COPd 3.19 -
Tj=7 Pdh 2.01 kW Tj=7 COPd 6.09 -
Tj=12 Pdh 1.44 kW Tj=12 COPd 6.13 -




United Kingdom
PFA004Z088 H
- 160 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333
Model FDE100VNPWVH
Indoor unit model name FDE100VH information relates to. Indicated values should relate to one


unit
Tj=35 Pdc 10.00 kW Tj=35 EERd 3.33 -
Tj=30 Pdc 7.37 kW Tj=30 EERd 5.55 -
Tj=25 Pdc 4.76 kW Tj=25 EERd 6.53 -
Tj=20 Pdc 2.20 kW Tj=20 EERd 14.47 -
Tj=-7 Pdh 5.24 kW Tj=-7 COPd 3.01 -
Tj=2 Pdh 3.18 kW Tj=2 COPd 4.01 -
Tj=7 Pdh 2.12 kW Tj=7 COPd 5.58 -
Tj=12 Pdh 1.44 kW Tj=12 COPd 6.13 -




United Kingdom
PFA004Z088 H
- 161 -
'19 • PAC-DB-333

Model SRK100VNPWZR
Indoor unit model name SRK100ZR-W information relates to. Indicated values should relate to one


unit
Tj=35 Pdc 9.60 kW Tj=35 EERd 3.10 -
Tj=30 Pdc 7.00 kW Tj=30 EERd 4.35 -
Tj=25 Pdc 4.50 kW Tj=25 EERd 6.77 -
Tj=20 Pdc 2.19 kW Tj=20 EERd 12.17 -
Tj=-7 Pdh 5.30 kW Tj=-7 COPd 3.00 -
Tj=2 Pdh 3.20 kW Tj=2 COPd 4.03 -
Tj=7 Pdh 2.00 kW Tj=7 COPd 5.00 -
Tj=12 Pdh 1.46 kW Tj=12 COPd 6.21 -




5 The Square, Stockley Park, Uxbridge, Middlesex,UB11 1ET, United kingdom
PCA001Z857 G
- 162 -
INVERTER
STANDARDWALL MOUNTED
INVERTER TYPE
PACKAGED AIR-CONDITIONERS
RESIDENTIAL AIR-CONDITIONERS
MITSUBISHI HEAVY INDUSTRIES

Air-Conditioning THERMAL
& Refrigeration Systems SYSTEMS, LTD.
2-3, Marunouchi 3-chome, Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo, 100-8332, Japan
16-5, Konan 2-chome, Minato-ku, Tokyo, 108-8215 Japan
http://www.mhi-mth.co.jp/en/
http://www.mhi.co.jp
Because of our policy of continuous improvement, we reserve the right to make changes in all specifications without notice.
Because of our policy of continuous improvement, we reserve the right to make changes in all specifications without notice.
C Copyright MITSUBISHI HEAVY INDUSTRIES THERMAL SYSTEMS, LTD.
© Copyright MITSUBISHI HEAVY INDUSTRIES, LTD.

FDT 90 VNPWVH

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

FDT 90 VNPWVH

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual No.

STANDARD INVERTER PACKAGED

WALL MOUNTED TYPE

■ How to read the model name

(2) Duct connected - High static pressure type (FDU)

(3) Duct connected - Low / Middle static pressure type (FDUM)

(4) Ceiling suspended type (FDE)

(5) Wall mounted type (SRK)

Suspension bolts pitch：P2

Drain hose piece H1,2 245 5-φ4 5-φ4

(b) Duct connected-High static pressure type(FDU)

C1 Drain piping VP25（O.D.32）

Return air duct for ducting

1404 （Suspension bolts pitch）

100―200 Fan unit

Notes（a）There must not be obstacle to draw

(c) Duct connected-Low / Middle static pressure type (FDUM)

A Gas piping ȭ15.88(5㸭8")(Flare)

Hole for wiring

Drain hose piece E Suspension bolts (M10)

Air outlet opening

Return air duct 450×450

1404㸦Suspension bolts pitch㸧

Space for installation and service

100̿200 Fan unit

Notes a) There must not be obstacle to draw

(d) Ceiling suspended type (FDE)

Wireless remote control

Notes（1）The model name label is attached

on the underside of the indoor unit.

C Pipe／cable draw-out hole

(3) Remote control (Option parts)

Dimensions (Viewed from front) Installation space

● Do not install the remote control at following places.

Adapted RoHS directive

Model RC-E5 Wiring outlet

In case of pulling out In case of pulling out

Upper cace Upper cace

Lower Wiring Lower Wiring

Embedded mounting Remote control installation dimensions

Wall surface 120

1䠅 Installation screw for remote control

Length Wiring thickness

(b) Wireless remote control

SRK series only Unit::mm

Remote operation input AM1-4 Draft prevention function motor

LM1-4 Louver motor

TB2 YE LED・2 Indication lamp（Green-Normal operation）

BK YE Thi-R2 LED・3 Indication lamp（Red-Inspection）

BL 4 XR3 （Compressor ON）

Power source line 1 2 1 5 WH 5 BK

Meaning of marks CNV2 RD

DS CNM M SM1 CNU

20S TH1 TH2 TH3 EEV

Sound power level (dB)

Souud pressure level (dB)

Souud pressure level (dB)

60 N60 60 60 N60 60 Supply duct

63 125 250 500 1000 2000

Mike (at center & below unit)

63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 N60 N60

(Standard 2×10-5 Pa)

Sound pressure level (dB)

　　　on the underside of the indoor unit.